Home

User manual

1. ai TE e le ay ll men E BE BRF RAE ED i Number Module Module number Register 0 1 JX3 BN ETH 1 Refer to JX3 BN ETH manual 2 JX3 A04 2 10002zzzz 1000002zz 3 JX3 DIO16 3 ff 10003zzzz 1000003zz 4 JX3 PS1 5 JX3 DIO16 10 10010zzzz 1000010zz Jetter AG 237 10 Programming 10 3 Jetter Ethernet system bus Introduction The Jetter Ethernet system bus has been designed for data exchange between the following devices via standard Ethernet Programming device Controllers Bus node Communication modules Data interchange The Jetter Ethernet system bus makes a difference between the cyclic and acyclic data interchange between communication participants Both kinds of data interchange can be executed simultaneously within a network Cyclic Architecture Publish subscribe Nodes Controllers bus nodes and communication modules Access Automatically by OS Access time Fast deterministic Data Registers inputs outputs Configuration Hardware Manager in JetSym Reach Subnet Architecture Client server Client PC and controllers Server PC controllers bus nodes and communication modules Data E g registers inputs outputs S
2. GNN 002 240 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming 10 3 1 Acyclic data interchange Introduction Properties This chapter covers acyclic data interchange on the Jetter Ethernet system bus Acyclic data interchange on the Jetter Ethernet system bus can be characterized as follows Architecture Client server Data interchange is initiated by the client The server gives a response to the request made by the client Usage of unicast frames Network access is made once Client JetSym Programming and debugging of application programs JetViewSoft Setting up a visualization application Controllers Data interchange out of the application program NetCopy NetBit network register Server PC E g for database applications Controllers bus nodes and communication modules E g variable or debugging server Data PC Registers inputs outputs STX variables application program Controllers bus nodes and communication modules Registers STX variables Access time t depends on the data transfer time and on the server s processing time Configuration Network registers Easy configuration in the application program Else both client and server are complete
3. SR Green osema O eres oer LED u Amea Programmable depending on tne appleaton 2 terrae depending on tne appleaton u ater Prrammbe depending on tne appleaton wua ater Prorat depending on tne appleaton In normal operating condition the OS LEDs of the controller JC 350 indicate the following Application program is running No error No access to SD card Jetter AG 55 4 Mechanical and electrical installation States of the OS LEDs The table below shows the possible states of the OS LEDs R E D1 und D2 State Desertion Either the controller does not boot up or it does not execute the application program H a Application program is being executed me E O OFF Reset fatal error or checking the network consistency 7 5 Normal operating condition 7 Automatic IP configuration or AutoCopy function is completed or first part of startup delay is carried out i Reset or second part of startup delay is carried out or fatal error has occurred Oy File autocopy ini on SD card is being executed Boot loader is not running Boot loader Automatic IP configuration Reset or fatal error ew Boot loader is being executed a Error refer to error register 56 Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installa
4. 1 X14 ne 3 NE 4 We i LU T Jetter AG 59 4 Mechanical and electrical installation 4 4 Controls and SD memory card Control element of The JC 350 is equipped with the following controls JC 350 Mode selector S11 with the following positions RUN STOP and LOAD SD card The JC 350 is equipped with a slot for SD memory cards The SD card slot is an optional feature of the controller JC 340 Contents Topic Page Function description of mode selector S11 ccccceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeenees 61 SD Card Slot XG Tooc adria a a a a A 63 60 Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation Function description of mode selector S11 Mode selector S11 ee ES A 11 RUN Loap es TOP X14 RUN The controller launches the application program STOP The controller does not launch the application program LOAD The controller executes the file autocopy ini which is located on the SD card Functions of the mode The JC 350 checks the position of selector S11 in the following way selector sep OO Description O 4 Power supply of the controller
5. IGOOGORERo Soooooou im OE FAE S S IN A Fb Soeeooooooo 7 RE e gna a 2 S222 22 S23 222231 BE IBS F B I BBI HE BE EF BH B BE f a i a a I i a a a T a F a H mll E ra E va B l E all S al E H l I l A E l l i 4 ql ql H a i a a bl a L L L L L L L Number Part Description 1 End clamp for the DIN rail For securing JX3 modules on the DIN rail 2 JC 3xx Controller and power supply for the first eight JX3 peripheral modules 3 JX3 peripheral modules Eight JX3 peripheral modules 4 JX3 PS1 Power supply module for the next eight JX3 peripheral modules 5 JX3 peripheral modules Eight JX3 peripheral modules 6 Power supply lines DC 24 V Logic voltage supply for all modules of and 0 V the JX3 station 94 Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation Limitations of the modules data exchange rates Introduction Evaluation of input and output factors There are two options for connecting remote peripheral modules via JX3 BN CAN using the JX2 system bus protocol or via JX3 BN ETH using the Ethernet system bus protocol JX3
6. Technical specifications ee FAT Inserting the SD card The way of inserting the SD card correctly is the same as in common digital cameras If the SD card has been inserted correctly the status LED SD lights up for 300 ms Jetter AG 63 4 Mechanical and electrical installation Removing the SD card Make sure the SD card is not accessed while you are removing it First close all files which are stored to the SD card Remove the SD card the same way as you do it with digital cameras After removing the SD card the status LED SD lights up twice for 100 ms each time 64 Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation 4 5 Installing replacing and removing the module Introduction This chapter covers mounting replacing and removing of controllers belonging to the JetControl 300 series Contents Topic Page Installing the JC 350 on a DIN rail eee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeenaees 66 Replacing the controller JC 350 0 eee eeeeeeee cence ee eeneeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 67 Removing the JC 350 from the DIN rail eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeenaeeeeeenas 69 Jetter AG 65 4 Mechanical and electrical installation Installing the JC 350 on a DIN rail Installing To install the controller on a rail to DIN EN 50022 proceed as follows Place the contr
7. Jetter AG 67 4 Mechanical and electrical installation Installing the controller To install the JC 350 on the backplane module proceed as follows Action Slide the controller onto the backplane module until the latches snap into place Installation of the controller to the backplane module is now completed Related topics Installing the JC 350 on a DIN rail see page 66 Removing the JC 350 from the DIN rail see page 69 68 Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation Removing the JC 350 from the DIN rail Removing To remove the JC 350 from a rail to DIN EN 50022 proceed as follows pa Remove power from the JX3 station Slide the controller to the left By doing so the backplane module is disconnected from the JX3 peripheral modules Pull down the right DIN rail latch using a flat bladed screwdriver Swing the controller forward Remove the controller from the DIN rail Related topics Installing the JC 350 on a DIN rail see page 66 Replacing the controller see page 67 Jetter AG 69 4 Mechanical and electrical installation 4 6 IP configuration Introduction Required skills of the network configurator Contents 70 This chapter describes the IP configuration for the controller JC 350 The following parameters can be set I
8. Le JX3 AO4 2 10002zzzz 1000002zz i el JX3 BN ETH Refer to JX3 BN ETH manual 100102zzzz 10010102zz 100103zzzz 10010103zz Refer to JX3 BN ETH manual 2 100202zzzz 10020102zz 236 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Registers and I O numbers of JX3 nodules from the JX3 BN ETH perspective Application example Explicit data transfer using NetCopy Module numbers in a To determine module numbers in a JX3 station proceed as follows JX3 station Count the JX3 I O modules left to right starting with 1 Leave out the power supply module JX3 PS1 Register numbers for From the perspective of the Ethernet bus node the register number consists JX3 modules of the following elements Pitofeo tx x zlzlez Element Description Value range XX Number of the module within the JX3 station 02 17 ZZZz Module register number 0000 9999 I O numbers for From the perspective of the Ethernet bus node the I O number consists of the JX3 modules following elements p o o tofolx x z Element Description Value range XX Number of the module within the JX3 station 02 17 zz Module specific I O number 1 16 Example of a JX3 station at a JX3 BN ETH
9. i 3V3 i 3 4 33 kQ J X11 3 RDB 4 K X11 1 RDA Ri R r lt 4 q 33 kQ 3V 2 nr 33 KQ med X11 5 SDB 4 5 i i lt i X11 7 SDA 4 gt T yi T 33 kQ Part Function in the case Function in the case of RS 422 of RS 485 Receiver Receives data Unused Twisted line of the serial interface Terminating resistor Connect a terminating resistor to both serial lines in the following cases a Receiver transmitter Transmits data Receives and transmits data Long lines High baud rates Select a terminating resistor which corresponds to the impedance of the line used Jetter AG 499 10 Programming Technical specifications Numberofping e Eiecrioalisolaton Ne Interface standards RS 232 RS 422 RS 485 2 Cables for port X11 For connecting devices to port X11 you can order the following cables temno item Deseription 60867209 KAY_0576 0050 JetControl to modem with 9 pin Sub D length 0 5 m 60868359 Cable assy 196 2 5M JetControl to PC with 9 pin Sub D length 2 5 m 60860013 Cable assy 196 5M JetControl to PC with 9 pin Sub D length 5 m 60868956 Cable assy 196 8M JetControl to PC with 9 pin Sub D length 8 m 60860011 Cable assy 192 2 5M JetControl to HMI with 15 pin Sub D length 2 5 m 60860012 Cable assy 193 5M JetControl to HMI with 15 pin Sub D length 5 m 60872142 Cable assy 192 10M JetControl to HMI with 15 pi
10. h Jeter oo 90900 sa zones oor WEEE om one Pale oD mO mO F o E il asi BS ka Ow fot o ry Orno p tc oF 8 ni O amO PEA wits 20008 200006 M 80002 80002 j m S0000 000a ADOD Co z kod ga om CC Fd E a lol Sa IP rai 00000000 org P O o 8 8 P rst 8 8 E aw O r 00000000 Toos m ca 20 20099996 20006596 no 20098 H Jec leoeesess Joroossss goere Bus terminating resistor All JX2 modules are equipped with an internal bus terminating resistor When the original cable set by Jetter AG is used bus termination is activated automatically Topology The JX2 system bus topology is a line topology At the end of the line is always a JC 350 106 Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation Power supply of JX2 I O modules JX2 I 0 modules For the following JX2 I O modules an external power supply is required Digital modules JX2 ID8 JX2 OD8 JX2 SIM8 Analog modules JX2 IA4 JX2 OA2 JX2 OA4 Other modules JX2 CNT1 JX2 SER1 JX2 PRN1 The JX2 1016 does not require an external power supply
11. o N o N w ys ya o o N o o o a Establish an FTP connection to the JC 350 Log in as user with administrator or system rights Default login information User admin Password admin User system Password system 3 Open meters OOO 4 Copy mete contains he tolder System O 5 Gear FTP omneo O 6 Remesa O 80 Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation Setting the IP address via configuration file and DIP switch Introduction Configuration file Setting the IP address DIP switch settings You can set the IP address of the JC 350 via the configuration file config ini and the DIP switch sliders To this end set the three upper bytes of the IP address in theconfig ini file and the lower byte using the DIP switch sliders Set the upper three bytes of the IP address of the JC 350 in the configuration file config ini file IP Address aaa bbb ccc 1 Semen escrtom See reyes OOO BE Secondo of Padeess O Dummy entry must have got value one The following DIP switch settings cause the JC 350 to read out the IP address from the file config ini and the DIP switches
12. rem HAA AA BRRR EEE E ENNE NE FIRAR SA o ia e a a a y E E ON y li A im AEA AAA il U P t2tate sfelr s LON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF aaabbbiccc t OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF aaabbbccc2 ON on oFF oFF oFF OFF OFF OFF aaabbbeces l F on on on on on on ON asa top ccr 254 ON on on on on on ON ON fromconfgini Jetter AG 81 4 Mechanical and electrical installation Transferring the configuration file 82 Establish an FTP connection to the JC 350 Step EA Log in as user with administrator or system rights Default login information User admin Password admin User system Password system Em E EE i Open the folder System Copy the file config ini into the folder System Clear the FTP connection Reboot the JC 350 Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation Setting the IP address via registers to be non volatile Introduction Registers Overview Setting the configuration values to be non volatile The IP interface is initialized by the settings in the configuration memory during the boot process The following non volatile settings can also be changed via register P address of the controller Subnet mask IP address of default gateway IP address of DNS server Host name and suffix type Port
13. Power supply of One power supply module JX2 PS1 can directly supply up to five JX2 1 O modules using JX2 PS1 modules ra x i 1 7 Jotter Jeter totter Jeter le 2 Fel g g JX2 system bus cable connecting to the controller JX2 PS1 Power supply module A maximum of five JX2 I O modules equipped with various interfaces JX2 system bus cable leading to additional modules Jetter AG 107 4 Mechanical and electrical installation Power supply of One input output module JX2 1016 supplies up to three JX2 I O modules modules using JX2 1016 S002 ONA Taw wae 1 000 Jettor Jettor Z D aae pir a 00000000 Qu Or Os Q1 9 O Os S S f S 8 seccecce oTe a Pita et I ad 20 20009999 DDOVEgE Sanne pine 20 20009999 20009999 JX2 system bus cable connecting to the controller I 2 JX2 1016 Input output module JX2 1 0 A maximum of three JX2 I O modules equipped with various interfaces OUT JX2 system bus cable leading to additional modules 108 Je
14. JX3 BN CAN JX3 PS1 module name JX3 Al4 Analog Input Module JX3 A04 Analog Output Module JX3 A04 Current Analog Output Module in Current Mode _ JX3 CNT Counter Module JX3 DI16 Digital Input Module JX3 DIO16 Digital Input Output Module JX3 DMS2 Strain Gage Module JX3 D016 Digital Output Module JX3 MIX1 Multi Purpose Expansion Module JX3 MIX2 Multi Purpose Expansion Module JX3 THI2 RTD Pt100 Pt1000 Temperature Measurement JX3 THI2 TC Thermocouple Temperature Measurement o The following fields marked red convey the following meaning Number of modules The maximum number of 8 JX3 modules connected to JC 3xx JX3 BN xxx or JX3 PS1 has been exceeded Integrate the JX3 PS1 in your JX3 station JC 3xx JX3 BN ETH The power consumption of the JX3 modules which are directly connected to a JC 3xx or a JX3 BN ETH is too high Insert a JX3 PS1 into your JX3 station JX3 BN CAN The power consumption of the JX3 modules which are directly connected to a JX3 BN CAN is too high Insert a JX3 PS1 into your JX3 station JX3 PS1 The power consumption of the JX3 modules which are directly connected to a power supply module JX3 PS1 is too high Insert a JX3 PS1 into your JX3 station Jetter AG provide the JX3 system bus configurator on their homepage http www jetter de You can find the JX3 system bus configurator for download at ndustrial automation support downloads 08_ miscellane
15. Each non intelligent JX2 I O module connected to the system bus reduces the maximum line length by 1 0 m Each connected intelligent JX2 l O slave module reduces the maximum line length by 1 0 m Each JetMove reduces the maximum line length by 1 0 m Each connected IP67 I O module reduces the maximum line length by 1 0m The baud rate setting depends on the number of modules connected to the JX2 system bus JX2 I 0 modules JX SIO 1 000 500 250 125 JX2 slave modules CANopen kBaud kBaud kBaud kBaud JetMove modules px xe xe x px x x px of Jetter AG 105 4 Mechanical and electrical installation JX2 system bus topology Remote arrangement The JX2 system bus lets you connect one or several remote modules to a JC 350 The overall distance from the controller may add up to 200 meters pil m l F S 7 al BB E BE EBB E p MAB EBEE
16. 458 Register description Versions of JX3 system bus drivers 459 450 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Module array and module codes of connected modules Module array Registers Overview Reading the module array A unique module code is assigned to each module that is connected to the JX3 system bus The controller JC 3xx and the bus node JX3 BN xxx enter all modules detected during initialization into the module array Modules are entered into the module array in the following order As connected JX3 PS1 modules are not entered into the module array R 100002015 Index to module array R 100002016 Module array R 100002015 0 Number of modules R 100002015 1 Module code of the first module etc The module array is accessed indirectly Enter the number of the module in the module array into R 100002015 Index to Module Array Read out the module code from R 100002016 Module Array Jetter AG 451 10 Programming Module codes of JX3 modules Module codes Dummy modules Module code Module code O meae erin O JX3 THI2 RTD EI 2 inputs for resistance thermometers with galvanic isolation JX3 THI2 TC EI 2 inputs for thermocouples with galvanic isolation O Mowe O Deserpton O 452 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Dummy modules on the JX3 system bus Dummy modules Registers Overview Allowed dummy modules Configuring dummy modules R 10000
17. Instead of autocopy ini you can name the file arbitrarily In this case it is prerequisite that the configuration file config ini contains the entry config ini This entry defines the directory and file name of the command file To start the AutoCopy function proceed as follows See oe Sot wiene comoterot 2 rsen the SD card compkislyino e SD sot OOO 3 sette mode socio LOAD poston a Swen be contolror O Wait for the red LED D1 to be lit and for the green LED R and the yellow LED SD to flash slowly by approximately 1 Hz gt Result The controller executes the AutoCopy function Wait for the red LED D1 and for the green LED R to flash slowly by approximately 1 Hz gt Result The AutoCopy function is set Jetter AG 571 11 Automatic copying of controller data Executing AutoCopy commands Introduction Restrictions Executing AutoCopy commands LEDs of the JC 350 in AutoCopy mode During the boot process in AutoCopy mode the controller executes the commands contained in the command file In AutoCopy mode the following restrictions of controller functions apply The controller does not execute the application program Communication with the controller is not possible After terminating the AutoCopy function restart of the controller is required The OS of the controller processes the AutoCopy function in the following steps The controller opens the command file of the SD card t
18. the function is terminated and a negative value is returned The function parameter for the local file may contain the path to this file e g Data TestFiles LocalTestFile txt Ifthe file system of the remote network node supports this the function parameter for the file located on the FTP server can also contain the path to this file Otherwise the directory must be set beforehand using the command FtpDirChange The file system of a JC 350 supports both options Reading a file see page 183 186 Jetter AG JC 350 Deleting a file Introduction Function declaration Function parameters Return value Operating principle Jetter AG FTP client This function lets you remove a file from the file system of a remote network node Function FtpFileRemove FtpConnection Handle Const Ref ServerFile String Int Description of the function parameters Parameter O O vae Remarks FtpConnection Handle Value returned by the function FtpConnect ServerFile File name Name of the file to be removed If the returned value is negative an error has occurred If the returned value is 0 the file could not be removed from the file system of the remote network node Return value 0 No error 1 Invalid handle 2 Communication error there is for example no response from FTP server 3 Error message from FTP server for example file does not exist In the following cases the t
19. COMMAND 2 Command FileCopy Source SD Index htm Destination Homepage index htm COMMAND 3 Command FtpConnect ServerAddr 192 168 123 45 UserName admin Password admin The names of the sections consist of the COMMAND _ string followed by a value The value is between one and the value of the CommandCount entry from section OPTIONS The AutoCopy function processes the commands in order of their section names Starting with the command under section COMMAND 1 Ending with the command under the section with the value of entry CommandCount from section OPTIONS Each command section may only contain one command Thus you have to create an individual section for each command When an error occurs while a command is being processed the controller makes a corresponding entry in the log file For each command the user can set whether the controller is to enter the error into the log file as Error or as Warning Make this setting by the optional parameter ErrorAsWarning ErrorAsWarning Entry into the log file Parameter does not exist Error Jetter AG 577 11 Automatic copying of controller data File names m The function parameter for the local file may contain the path to this file e g Data TestFiles LocalTestFile txt f the file system supports this the function parameter for the file located on the FTP server can also contain the path to this file If this feature is
20. Module register properties Values 0 2 147 483 647 in seconds Value after reset 20 Port number of the FTP server The value in this register shows the IP port number of the FTP server Module register properties Values 0 65 535 Value after reset 21 Index in the connection table The index of the connection table is entered into this register If a connection has been established for a given index the connection handle can be seen in module register MR 005 and connection data in module registers MR 006 through MR 009 Jetter AG 199 8 FTP client MR 005 MR 006 MR 007 MR 008 Module register properties Values 0 MR 000 1 Value after reset 1 Connection handle This register is for entering the connection handle If a connection has been established for a given index the connection handle can be seen in module register MR 004 and connection data in module registers MR 006 through MR 009 Module register properties Values 0 2 147 483 647 IP address of the FTP server The value in this register shows the IP address of the FTP server Module register properties Access Read Takes effect if MR 004 gt 0 Port number of the FTP server The value in this register shows the port number of the FTP server Module register properties Access Read Takes effect if MR 004 gt 0 IP address of FTP client The value in this register shows the IP address of the FTP client
21. Subscriber The subscriber receives one or several publications and assigns them to the corresponding subscriptions The subscriber validates the received data Data Registers Inputs Outputs Access time Very short as the network nodes access the locally stored interchanged data Configuration In the JetSym Hardware Manager Restricted to own subnet m Cyclic deterministic interchange of process data Cyclic deterministic interchange of status information details The JetSym Hardware Manager generates the configurations for cyclic data interchange using the status information details and the process data of the connected peripheral modules For cyclic data interchange do not use any configuration registers or special registers Access to these registers can take longer or trigger further action which may lead to unwanted results Jetter AG 257 10 Programming Multicast in other networks Technical specifications Contents Topic Page PUDIISM SUDSCHIDO siosana aiia iaaa a aaa iaa inai 259 Publish subscribe Registers ueesseessssesrerrssesnnenrsnnaarennearannaaennnaanannaanenne 261 Network registers network inputs and outputs 0 ccceseeeeseeeeeeeeeteees 267 258 Jetter AG Please note that the Jetter Ethernet system bus operates with multicasts multipoint connections If you couple the Jetter Ethernet system bus with your local network you have to filter out unwanted multicasts by a
22. amp nbsp lt p gt lt p gt A real number looks as follows lt JC DTAG name R1001500 type REAL gt or this way lt JC DTAG name R1001500 type REAL factor 1 3 format gt amp nbsp lt p gt lt p gt The value of a flag is represented as follows lt JC DTAG name F10 gt or this way lt JC DTAG name F10 type STRING gt amp nbsp lt p gt lt p gt With inputs and outputs it is done the same way lt JC DTAG name T100000205 type BOOL gt or lt JC DTAG name 1I100000205 type STRING gt amp nbsp lt p gt lt p gt R201000 lt JC DTAG name R201000 type INT format 0 t HHHHEEHHE gt amp nbsp lt p gt lt p gt Regards nbsp lt p gt lt p gt Yours JetControl lt p gt lt body gt lt html gt Now store the HTML page to the file system of the controller Jetter AG 211 JC 350 Programming 10 Programming Purpose of this chapter This chapter is for supporting you when programming a JC 350 controller in the following fields of activity Determining the register numbers of connected modules Determining the I O numbers of connected modules Programming additional functions Data interchange via various system buses Data interchange via user programmable interfaces Prerequisites To be able to program the JC 350 the following prerequisites have to be fulfilled The controller is connected to a PC The JetSym programming
23. Adjust the file entries 4 Save the changed file to the device 5 Reboot the device Result The names are available now The names are now available and can be used when assigning locks and managing user accounts This configuration file is a text file containing one section In this section values can be set which are then used by the file system Each key is specified with its name in an individual line You can insert blank lines as required The following characters precede a comment line or The section is named KEYS Here names are assigned to keys locks in accordance with the following rule KEYxx Name xx Number of the key 01 31 Example KEYS KEYO1 Admin KEY02 System KEY03 KEY04 KEY05 service KEY31 Jetter AG JC 350 File system Names for Locks Keys For names the following definitions are true Amaximum of 15 alphanumeric characters Lock and key have the same name Jetter AG 163 6 File system 6 3 Reviewing the flash disk capacity used Introduction You can view the application scope of the internal flash disk Details on the allocation of the application scope are given in this chapter Contents Topic Page Flash disk Capacity USCC 0 eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeseetaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 165 164 Jetter AG JC 350 Flash disk capacity used README Example You can view the application data area of the inte
24. Jetter AG JC 350 Parameter name 2 Parameter value 2 Allowed values Illegal values In the event of an illegal value Example Command FileRemove Function Parameter name Parameter value Allowed values Illegal values In the event of an illegal value Example Command DaFileRead Function Parameter name Parameter value Allowed values Illegal values In the event of an illegal value Example Automatic copying of controller data Destination Complete name of the destination file All allowed file names The destination directory does exist Incorrect filename Non existent source file Non existent destination directory The controller does not copy the file It enters the error into the log file COMMAND 1 Command FileCopy Source SD OS JC 340_ 1 04 0 03 0s Destination System OS op system os COMMAND 2 Command FileCopy Source SD Manual pdf Destination subl Manual pdf Deleting a file Path Complete name of the file All allowed file names Incorrect filename The controller does not delete the file It enters the error into the log file COMMAND 5 Command FileRemove Path sub1 Manual pdf Transferring register values and flag states from a data file to the JC 350 DaFile Complete name of the data file All allowed file names for data files Incorrect filename Nonexistent data file The data are not transmitted to the JC 350
25. OPTIONS CommandCount 14 Example LogFile LogAppend 1 Elements of this section CommandCount In the given example Function Allowed values Illegal values In case of illegal value or missing entry LogFile In the given example Function Allowed values Illegal values In case of illegal value or missing entry LogAppend In the given example Function Allowed values Illegal values In case of illegal value or missing entry SD autocopy log The section consists of the following elements 14 Number of command sections that follow gt 0 lt 0 0 SD autocopy log Complete name of the log file All allowed file names Directory exists Incorrect filename Non existent directory The controller does not create a log file 1 Defines whether a new log file is to be created or whether it is to be appended to an existing one 0 Delete file which may exist and create a new one 1 Append file to an existing one If no file exists the controller creates a new log file lt 0 gt 1 The controller re creates the log file 576 Jetter AG JC 350 Command sections Introduction Example Section names Processing commands Troubleshooting Automatic copying of controller data In these sections you can specify commands which are then executed by the AutoCopy function COMMAND 1 Command DirCreate Path Homepage ErrorAsWarning 1
26. 128 Value after reset 24 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming 10 9 4 Displaying texts Introduction This chapter describes displaying texts on HMIs and how to parameterize the corresponding STX instructions STX instructions In order to display texts use the following STX instructions STX functions DisplayText DisplayText2 Contents Topic Page STX Instructions for displaying texts 0 0 0 eect eeeeeeeeeeteeeeeetteeeeeeneeeeee 360 Device MUMDENS viecicctiacees eeieericdiitcesetenedidedaladi ages desdethanage shad wiielalaceataeesiens 362 CURSOR POSITION gies 25 ecoes ieantenge teed ae arneeeh aa aa aaa aa iaai 364 Clearing the SChOGIN i e ces colacs cd iene saccoeaedcatagne qadcestecen doves cadcvanedentcveucen ENE 366 Jetter AG 359 10 Programming STX Instructions for displaying texts Function declaration Function parameters How to use this instruction How it works Function declaration Function parameters Function DisplayText Dev Int Pos Int Const Ref Text String Description Number of the device on which the text is to be output 1 Possible number of Cursor position starting from which characters on the screen the text is to be displayed Constant text or name of a string variable How to invoke the instruction to display a text DisplayText 0 1 Hello World DisplayText 0 25 StringVar The first STX instruction deletes the entire content of the sc
27. 128 Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation 4 9 Connecting displays and HMls Introduction This chapter covers the connection of alphanumeric displays and HMls to the JC 350 Contents Topic Page Overview of displays and HMIS 0 ececcceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteieeeee tenses tneeeeee 130 Connecting a display or HMI cececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeetneeeereneeeeees 131 Connecting several displays or HMIs Multi display mode 5 132 Multi display mode WITING sses srianan a 133 Interface cable JC DK XM 2 cccccccecececcne cece cece eececeaeeeeeeeeetecnaeaeeeeeeesenenaees 135 Interface cable KAY O386 XXXX ecccceccececeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeeeetennaees 137 Interface cable KAY_0533 0025 cccccceccesseeceesneeeeseseeeeeseeesesssineeeseaas 139 Jetter AG 129 4 Mechanical and electrical installation Overview of displays and HMIs List of displays and HMIis The following table lists the alphanumeric displays HMIs by Jetter AG which you can connect to the JC 350 Order Display Keys Interface cable reference LCD 16 4 lines of 5 function keys with JC DK Xm 20 characters LED each Can be expanded by a keyboard module NUM25 LCD 23 2 lines of Cursor left JC DK Xm 24 characters Cursor right each ENTER LCD 27 2 lines of 5 function keys JC DK Xm 24 characters Cursor keypad each ypa Clear ENTER LCD 34 2 lines of 5 function keys JC DK Xm 2
28. 4 Mechanical and electrical installation Changing the IP address of the controller Introduction Replacing the controller Configuration options Changing the IP address Related topics To be able to communicate with the controller JC 350 via Ethernet you must set an unambiguous IP address on the controller The IP address is stored to the backplane module When you install another controller of the JetControl 300 series to the backplane module the following configuration data are preserved IP address of the controller Subnet mask IP address of default gateway P address of DNS server Controller name Suffix type of the name IP port number for debugger P port number for JetIP Name for AutoCopy command file You can configure the IP address in the following ways Default IP address Configuration via file config ini Configuration via file config ini and DIP switch Configuration via the configuration registers Configuration during runtime via special registers Step Action 1 Remove power from the controller JC 350 2 Remove the controller enclosure from the backplane module o 3 Make the corresponding DIP switch settings o g 4 Reinstall the enclosure on the backplane module o gt Following restart the controller JC 350 can be reached at the new IP E address Replacing the controller see page 67 Default IP address 192 168 10 15 see page 79
29. 4044 2301 2308 2309 2316 2409 2416 Inputs outputs 20001 36000 Virtual I Os for RemoteScan 16 combined inputs 10000xx01 JX3 modules xx 02 17 JX3 Systembus 100000000 10000xx16 a i 20000xx01 JX2 modules xx 02 24 1X2 ystemb s 200000000 20000xx16 Netzwerk 1GNN910000 1nnn01xx01 JX3 modules via JX3 BN ETH 4060 101 108 109 116 Innnobate ee 193 4061 109 116 201 208 4062 201 208 209 216 32 combined inputs 4063 209 216 301 308 JX3 system bus 100000000 40645 1301308 309 316 JX2 system bus 200000000 20655 1309416 401 408 Network 1GNN910000 40565 14015408 eee 4000 101 108 109 116 201 208 209 216 pees a nt 4001 109 116 201 208 209 216 301 308 nie Se j s l P 4002 201 208 209 216 301 308 309 316 o sae ene j 4003 209 216 301 308 309 316 401 408 ai ney te a 4004 301 308 309 316 401 408 409 416 pare a ee 4005 309 316 401 408 409 416 501 508 7 7 4073 709 716 801 808 4006 401 408 409 416 501 508 509 516 4074 801 808 809 816 4007 409 416 501 508 509 516 601 608 4075 809 816 901 908 4008 501 508 509 516 601 608 609 616 oe cae een 4009 509 516 601 608 609 616 701 708 107 o Ba ae 4010 601 608 609 616 701 708 709 716 pit teat sage sane i076 4011 609 616 701 708 709 716 801 808 re Giese a oe 4012 701 708 709 716 801 808 809 816 aoao Aoi Toa 00 16 4013 709 716 801 808 809 816 901 908 py os iiie Koua 4014 801 808 809 816 901 908 909 916 pe
30. Element scription Dedicated name of the flash disk Point in time when the flash disk was formatted last Tracks Total number of tracks Track xx sectors 128 Assignment of sectors of a track Total sectors Overall statistical data of the sectors Total number of used bytes Total number of blocked bytes Total number of available bytes ee Total Total size of the flash disk States of the sectors The smallest administrative unit of the flash disk i e the sector may assume the following states State scription O The sector is occupied by data Blocked The sector is no longer occupied but can not yet be used due to administrative reasons The sector is not occupied and can be used Jetter AG 167 6 File system 6 4 Operating system update and application program Introduction An OS update for a controller an HMI or an I O module as well as access to the application program can be carried out via file system For a detailed description on this topic refer to the following chapter Operating system update see page 593 Application program see page 605 168 Jetter AG JC 350 File system 6 5 Formatting and checking Introduction This chapter covers the following topics Formatting the flash disk Formatting the SD card Checking the SD card The internal flash disk needs not be checked using a separate function since it provides maximum safety of its administrative structures b
31. JC 350 Programming Pat Function Status and control Query of filling levels and error states of buffers register setting of transmission parameters Receiving a character A character is received as described below The interface driver converts signals on the line into internal signal levels and forwards them to the receiver The receiver enters the character into the receive buffer if there is any place left Otherwise the character is discarded and buffer overflow is Sending a character Via transmit register the character is entered into the transmit buffer if there is any place left Otherwise the character is discarded Once the transmitter has sent a character it reads the next character from the transmit buffer The transmitter performs parallel serial conversion and sends this character to the interface driver using the set communication parameters The interface driver converts internal signal levels into the various interface standards Error detection When receiving characters the following errors are detected by the controller and displayed in the register Error state O Emor Desenpton et Framing error The format of the received The erroneous character s is are character does not match the stored in the receive buffer and set parameters error bit Framing error is set The error counter is incremented Parity error The parity bit of the received The erroneous character is stored cha
32. JC 350 Programming Registers Description Introduction When entering values into control registers MR 1 through MR 6 the entire interface is re initialized and the transmit and receive buffers are cleared MR 0 Error state This register displays errors which have been detected on receiving a character as bit coded value Meaning of the individual bits Bit 12 Buffer overflow 1 Although the receiving buffer is full one or more characters have been received Bit 13 Parity error 1 The parity bit of the received character is not correct Bit14 Framing error 1 The format of the received character does not match the set parameters Module register properties Type of access Read write clearing MR 1 Protocol This register lets you set the protocol which is supported by the OS of the controller That is this register is for defining how the interface is used Module register properties Values 1 System logger 2 User programmable Interface 3 PcomxX Value after reset 3 Jetter AG 507 10 Programming MR 2 MR 3 MR 4 MR 5 Baud rate This register lets you set the baud rate Module register properties Values 2 400 115 200 Value after reset 9 600 Number of data bits per character This register lets you set the number of data bits per character Module register properties Values 5 6 7 8 Value after reset 8 Stop bits This register lets you set the number of stop bits per chara
33. Via MR 250001 you transmit commands to all subscriptions Commands 102 Reboot all subscribers 105 Stop all subscribers 110 Acknowledge error The following registers let you select a subscription as follows The index is for selecting subscriptions e Ifthe subscription exists R 250x11 shows its ID e Ifthe subscription does not exist R 250x11 shows value 1 In this case enter the ID of the subscription into R 250x11 e lf the subscription exists the content of R 250x11 is kept e Ifthe subscription does not exist R 250x11 shows value 1 Reiser Name peserpton Index Index of the subscriptions 0 Selects the first subscription 1 Selects the next subscription 2 etc 50x11 ID The ID of the subscription is entered The following registers show the configuration of a subscription which you have selected via R 250x10 and R 250x11 Resistor Name Desoripton Status Bit 0 Publication received Bit 1 Timeout 0 Cyclic 1 Upon request Number of As configured variables eo 250125 Sequence ramer itera vsge O ases paasee moma O OOO Jetter AG 263 10 Programming Registers for error detection Registers for administration of all publications Publisher status Resistor Name serine O Number of received publications Amount of timeouts Amount of missing The subscriber of a publication computes the sequence difference between present and last received numbers seq
34. Weekday 0 Sunday Day Month Year Buffer access Milliseconds Seconds Minutes Hours Day of the week 0 Sunday Day Month Year Read write trigger Serial interface 103000 103001 103002 103003 103004 103005 103006 103010 103011 103012 103013 103014 103015 103016 103017 103018 103019 Ethernet Error state bit coded Bit 14 1 Framing error Bit 13 1 Parity error Bit 12 1 Overflow Protocol 1 System logger 2 Prim 3 pcomX Baud rate 1 200 115 200 Bits per character 5 8 Stop bits 1 2 Parity 0 None 1 Odd 2 Even 3 1 4 0 0 RS 232 1 RS 422 3 RS 485 2 Transmit buffer Transmit buffer filling level Receiving buffer without immediate clearing Receiving buffer with immediate clearing Receiving buffer filling level Receiving buffer 16 bit little endian Receiving buffer 16 bit big endian Receiving buffer 32 bit little endian Receiving buffer 32 bit big endian Error counter Ethernet 610 Jetter AG JC 350 Quick reference JC 3xx 104100 104156 104200 104201 104202 104203 104204 104205 104206 104250 104350 104500 104501 104502 104503 104504 104505 104506 104507 104508 104509 104531 104532 104533 104534 104800 104801 104802 104803 104804 104805 104806 104807 104808 104809 104810 104900 104901 104902 104903 104904 104905 104906 SD card 107000 107001 107002
35. gt Display 1 STRING Output 0 gt Display OFF Output 1 gt Display ON Example lt JW DTAG name 0100000308 gt Result The state of output 100000308 is inserted as 1 or 0 Jetter AG 475 10 Programming Access via pointer Access via pointer register is realized by inserting the capital letter P in front register of the variable name In each case the value of the variable is displayed whose number corresponds to the content of the register specified in the variable name Examples lt JW DTAG name PR1000300 gt Result The content of the register is displayed whose number is contained in register 1000300 lt JW DTAG name PF1000300 gt Result The state of the flag is displayed whose number is contained in register 1000300 lt JW DTAG name PI1000300 gt Result The state of the input is displayed whose number is contained in register 1000300 lt JW DTAG name P01000300 gt Result The state of the output is displayed whose number is contained in register 1000300 Access via pointer To specify the number of the variable to be displayed it is also possible to add register and offset a constant value or another register content to the pointer register value Examples lt JW DTAG name PR1000300 100 gt Result The content of the register is displayed whose number results from the addition of the content of register 1000300 and value 100 lt JW DTAG n
36. number of which is contained in the corresponding configuration register MR 2825 through MR 2828 370 Jetter AG JC 350 MR 2825 MR 2826 MR 2827 MR 2828 Programming Device number for HMI 1 in multi display mode Module register properties Values 1 4 Value after reset 1 Device number for HMI 2 in multi display mode Module register properties Values 1 4 Value after reset 2 Device number for HMI 3 in multi display mode Module register properties Values 1 4 Value after reset 3 Device number for HMI 4 in multi display mode Module register properties Values 1 4 Value after reset 4 Jetter AG 371 10 Programming Cursor position Introduction Restrictions Cursor position 0 MR 2814 This parameter is used to define the screen position where the first character of the text or variable is to appear There is no cursor position evaluation for devices 8 through 11 Cursor position 0 has a special meaning The controller evaluates this parameter in the following steps step iescription a The controller reads the content of MR 2814 MR 2814 is larger than 0 the value is used as cursor position MR 2814 equals 0 the message is displayed starting from the current cursor position Example MR 2814 0 DisplayText 0 1 Temp DisplayValue 0 0 Temperature Result The temperature is displayed directly after the colon starting fr
37. 0x325 0x326 0x327 0x328 0x329 0x32A 0x32B 0x32C 0x32D 0x32E 0x32F 0x330 0x331 0x332 0x333 0x334 0x335 0x336 0x337 0x338 0x339 0x33A 0x33B 0x33C 0x33D 0x33E 0x380 0x381 0x382 0x383 0x384 0x385 0x386 0x387 0x388 0x389 0x38A 0x38B 0x38C 0x38D 0x38E Ox38F 0x390 0x391 0x392 0x393 0x394 0x395 0x396 0x397 0x398 0x399 0x39A 0x39B 0x39C 0x39D 0x39E 0x39F 0x3A0 0x3A1 0x3A2 0x3A3 0x3A4 0x3A5 0x3A6 0x3A7 0x3A8 0x3A9 0x3AA Ox3AB 0x3AC 0x3AD Ox3AE Ox3AF 0x3B0 0x3B1 0x3B2 0x3B3 0x3B4 0x3B5 0x3B6 0x3B7 0x3B8 0x3B9 0x3BA 0x3BB Ox3BE Ox3BF 0x3E0 0x3E1 0x3E2 0x3E3 0x3E4 0x3E5 Ox3E6 0x3E7 Ox3E8 0x3E9 Ox3EA 0x3EB Ox3EC 0x3ED Ox3EE Ox3EF 0x3F0 0x3F1 0x3F2 0x3F3 0x3F4 Ox3F5 Ox3F6 Ox3F7 Ox3F8 Ox3F9 Ox3FA 0x3FB Ox3FC Ox3FD Ox3FE 542 Jetter AG JC 350 Modules on the JX2 system bus JX SIO and CANopen modules Festo CP FB modules LioN S modules Programming Earmarked CAN IDs 0x1C6 0x1C7 0x1C8 0x1C9 0x1CA 0x1CB 0x1CC 0x1CD 0x1CE 0x1CF 0x246 0x247 0x248 0x249 0x24A 0x24B 0x24C 0x24D Ox24E 0x24F 0x2C6 0x2C7 0x2C8 0x2C9 0x2CA 0x2CB 0x2CC 0x2CD Ox2CE 0x2CF 0x346 0x347 0x348 0x349 0x34A 0x34B 0x34C 0x34D 0x34E 0x34F 0x3C6 0x3C7 0x3C8 0x3C9 0x3CA 0x3CB Ox3CC Ox3CD Ox3CE Ox3CF 0x446 0x447 0x448 0x449 0x44A 0x44B 0x44C 0x44D 0x44E 0x44F 0x4C6 0x4C7 0x4C8 0x4C9 Ox4CA 0
38. 1901 1908 1909 1916 2001 2008 2009 2016 p 33012407 5506 3516 4037 1909 1916 2001 2008 2009 2016 2101 2108 e eae 2401 2408 4038 2001 2008 2009 2016 2101 2108 2109 2116 ae Shi Aloe PE 4039 2009 2016 2101 2108 2109 2116 2201 2208 7 7 4040 2101 2108 2109 2116 2201 2208 2209 2216 40414 2109 2116 2201 2208 2209 2216 2301 2308 8 combined inputs 4042 2201 2208 2209 2216 2301 2308 2309 2316 JX3 Systembus 100000000 4043 2209 2216 2301 2308 2309 2316 2401 2408 JX2 Systembus 200000000 618 Jetter AG JC 350 Quick reference JC 3xx Netzwerk 1GNN910000 4203 209 216 301 308 309 316 401 408 4120 101 108 4204 301 308 309 316 401 408 409 416 4121 109 116 4205 309 316 401 408 409 416 501 508 4122 201 208 4206 401 408 409 416 501 508 509 516 4123 209 216 4207 409 416 501 508 509 516 601 608 4124 301 308 4208 501 508 509 516 601 608 609 616 4125 309 316 4209 509 516 601 608 609 616 701 708 4126 401 408 4210 601 608 609 616 701 708 709 716 4127 409 416 4211 609 616 701 708 709 716 801 808 4128 501 508 4212 701 708 709 716 801 808 809 816 4129 509 516 4213 709 716 801 808 809 816 901 908 4130 601 608 4214 801 808 809 816 901 908 909 916 4131 609 616 4215 809 816 901 908 909 916 4001 1008 4132 701 708 4216 901 908 909 916 1001 1008 1009 1016 4133 709 716 4217 909 916 1001 1008 1009 1016 1101 1108 4134 801 808 4218 1001 1008 1009 1016 1104 1108 1109 1116
39. 2175 CPX Terminal virtual eoo BW 1621 8200 vector CANopen PT GFC Antriebssysteme GmbH EcoStep Jenaer Antriebstechnik GmbH Jetter AG JC 350 Module codes of JX2 slave modules Module codes Dummy modules Programming Module code modue Deseripion Module code modue Description Jetter AG 431 10 Programming JX2 system bus Baud rate Introduction Registers Overview Modules with automatic baud rate detection Baud rate Changing the Baud rate The user configures the baud rate of the JX2 system bus A reduced baud rate allows longer lines The value contained in the register for baud rate configuration is remanent Any changes become effective only after the controller JC 350 has been re booted R 200002029 Baud rate of JX2 system bus Most modules on the JX2 system bus will automatically detect the baud rate of the controller JC 350 The following modules feature automatic baud rate detection Auto Baud Rate JX2 I O modules JX2 slave modules JetMove 1xx 2xx und 6xx IP67 I O modules LioN S and LUX7 CSL The baud rate setting depends on the number of modules connected to the JX2 system bus JX2 1 0 modules JX SIO 1000 500 250 125 JX2 slave modules IP67 I O modules kBaud kBaud kBaud kBaud JetMove CANopen modules o o o ee ee ee eee es ee ee k skf k ee Jk To set the baud rate of the JX2 system bus proceed as follows Adjust the baud
40. Addressing with variable destination WINGOW ceceeeeeeeeeteeeeenteeeeeeaes 252 Register description Acyclic data interchange ccccceeseeeeesteeeeeenes 254 242 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Command group NetCopy Introduction Advantages of NetCopy Access via NetCopy Parameters of the NetCopy commands The NetCopy command is a versatile tool for data interchange between Jetter products via Ethernet The NetCopy command lets you copy the following data Register values Values of register blocks Variable values Values of variable blocks Advantages of NetCopy commands as compared with the use of network registers Within the command you can directly specify any valid IP address Within the command you can directly specify any valid IP port The entire register address range of a remote node can be directly addressed By means of one command a large register set or in case NetCopyList is applied a large number of registers can be copied The result of the copying process can be evaluated directly NetCopy functions with the following nodes Controllers Bus node Communication modules PC To access other nodes use the NetCopy command as follows fe then you wish to copy data from the use the following commands controller to another node NetCopyRegToReg NetCopyVarToReg NetCopyList you wish to copy data f
41. Enter the minimum time ms into MR 2 2 Enter value 1 into MR 1 If the set minimum value has not been exceeded yet the server rejects the new connection If the server is to terminate any of the existing connections proceed as follows 4 Enter value 2 into MR 1 Ea Enter value 1 into MR 2 Jetter AG 311 10 Programming Terminating all If the server is to terminate all existing connections which have exceeded the connections which minimum time of inactivity proceed as follows exceed the minimum time of inactivity Le Enter the minimum time ms into MR 2 Enter value 1 into MR 2 312 Jetter AG JC 350 Register Register numbers MR 0 MR 1 MR 2 Programming The register numbers to be used are calculated by adding and the controller dependent basic register number and the module register number Controller server Basic register number Register numbers JC 350 JetIP TCP 230000 230000 230002 JC 350 STX Debug 212000 212000 212002 Number of connections The number of currently established connections can be read from module register 0 Module register properties Values 0 4 JetIP TCP server 0 20 STX debug server Mode If the maximum number of connections is active and if the server is to establish a new connection module registers 1 and 2 determine the behavior Module register properties Values 0 2 Value after reset 1 Minimum inac
42. Files which are at the user s disposal System directories The system directories cannot be deleted System directories even survive formatting System System configuration System information SD Root directory of the SD memory card Inhalt Topic Page PrOPentles assesses eines cide aed e etl eis 152 User AO MIMIStFALON seccctesscrcidesiatannen sdeaewheedataeeagenceunedandes aaa cdeeataeieteeesaens 155 Reviewing the flash disk Capacity used 0 00 0 ececeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeenteeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 164 Operating system update and application program cceceeeereteees 168 Formatting and CHECKING sssrin a a A EEEa 169 Jetter AG 151 6 File system 6 1 Properties Introduction This chapter covers the properties of the file system The description distinguishes between the internal flash disk and the SD card General properties The following properties apply to the internal flash disk and the SD card 8 files max to be opened simultaneously Separate directory names by a slash not by a backslash When the controller creates a file the file contains date and time assigned by the controller Date time and file size are not available for all system files Contents Topic Page Flash disk Properties c ccccceceeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeseeecaeeeeeeeeesessnnaeeeeeeeeeees 153 SD card PhOP rmleS ives siadeeascclesien ated ceareaddiconshad cqaaaedcetenstedteataadaden navel cuadd
43. Jetter AG 299 10 Programming Register numbers Introduction Status information is displayed within the registers of a coherent register block The basic register number of this block is dependent on the controller Device Basic register number Register numbers JC 350 520000 520000 522999 Determining the register In this chapter only the last four figures of a register number are specified number e g MR 1499 Add to this module register number the basic register number of the corresponding device to determine the complete register number for example 521499 Register numbers Registers Overview MR 2000 MR 2399 SET and ACTUAL configurations 300 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Global status Register description Introduction The current I O size can be read from this register MR 0 State of the total In MR O the controller signals a summary of status messages in bit coded mode Meaning of the individual bits Bit 0 Function enable This bit corresponds to bit 2 of the system status register 202962 0 JetIPScan client OFF 1 JetIPScan client ON Bit 1 Collective error message 1 Reg 13 contains value 0 Module register properties Type of access Read Value after reset Bit 0 Depends on release status Bit 1 0 MR 10 State of execution Corresponds to the feedback value State Module register properties Values 0 The function is not active Function terminated 1 Waiting f
44. Jetter AG 583 11 Automatic copying of controller data Command FtpDirRemove ServerDir Data MyTestData 584 Jetter AG JC 350 Automatic copying of controller data Example of a command file Task Solution Sample configuration The JetControl 340 controls an already existing plant via various JX3 modules In this plant you want to enhance the functions To this end the following modifications are required Operating system update for the controller Operating system update for an analog output module New application program New values for some of the registers You copy the required files to an SD card and create a command file for the AutoCopy function Then you send this SD card along with a short instruction sheet to the plant operator Once the update is completed the operator is to return the SD card This example is based on the following configuration 3 4 oa JC 340 Controller JX3 A04 Analog output module I O module number 2 JX3 DI16 Digital input module JX3 DIO16 Digital output module Jetter AG 585 11 Automatic copying of controller data SD card contents The following illustration shows the directory structure and the files on the
45. MIB counter ARP Transmitted requests Received requests Transmitted responses Received responses Dynamic entries Static entries Obsolete entries Executing an ARP request GNN IP Transmitted packets Transmitted bytes Received packets Received bytes Invalid packets Discarded received packets Checksum error at reception Discarded transmitted packets Transmitted fragments Received fragments Current IP address rw Current subnet mask rw Current default gateway rw IP address of DNS server rw TCP Transmitted packets Transmitted bytes Received packets Received bytes Invalid packets Discarded received packets Checksum error Connections Disconnections Discarded connections Repeated transmitted packets UDP Transmitted packets Transmitted bytes Received packets Received bytes Invalid packets Discarded received packets Checksum error Bit 0 1 Card installed Bit 1 1 Card is ready 1 Card is write protected only valid if R 107000 3 Size in MBytes Flash disk 107500 107501 107510 107511 107512 107513 107520 107521 107522 107523 Status Command 30 Read statistics Sector statistics Total Used Blocked Unassigned Byte statistics Total Used Blocked Unassigned CPU backplane module 108002 108003 108004 108005 108006 108007 108008 108010 108011 108012 All LEDs on off bit coded Bit 0 LED R Bit 1 LED E Bit 2 LED D
46. Minimum requirements The motor controller SFC LACI can be connected to the JX2 system bus of the following controllers by Jetter AG JC 340 JC 350 V 1 10 0 00 JC 360 V 1 10 0 00 122 Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation Product description Lenze 8200 vector Lenze 8200 vector The frequency inverter 8200 vector is a product by Lenze SE The frequency inverter can directly be connected to the JX2 system bus via communications module or function module Communications module for CANopen Function module for CANopen Restrictions when connected to the Number of 8200 vector modules 10 max JX2 system bus connected to JX2 system bus Minimum requirements The frequency converter 8200 vector can directly be connected to the JX2 system bus of the following controllers and modules by Jetter AG JC 340 JC 350 V 1 05 0 00 JC 360 V 1 01 0 00 JC 24x V 3 10 JM D203 JC24x V 1 10 0 00 JX6 SB l V 2 10 Jetter AG 123 4 Mechanical and electrical installation Product description maxon EPOS maxon EPOS The positioning controller maxon EPOS is a product by maxon motor AG It can directly be connected to the JX2 system bus Order reference Description EPOS 24 1 Positioning controller 24 V 1 A EPOS 24 5 Positioning controller 24 V 5 A Restrictions when connected to the JX2 system bus Number of EPOS connected to the JX2 10 max system bus Minimum requirements The posit
47. Registers Descriptio s snenia a a a a 507 ael L E E 514 Configuring ihe IMteMmaCe sassoni adi A Aaa A 515 Sepdind charac els sssini E AAE a E A 516 Sendin TEX eannan a E O ets 517 Sending VAIUCS e ee ceeeeeceeeeeee ee eeee ee ee ceneeeeeeeeeeetaeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseceeeeeseneaeeeseeeeeeeseeeaeesenaeeeseenaees 518 Receiving characters ooo eee eceeeee ee eete ee ee ette ee erent ee eet ae ee ee tenets etna ae ee setae ee ee taaeee ee eaeeeeenaeeeeeeneeeeee 519 RECEIVING vales eseese cence ee eeee ee ee tnte ee eet ne AAEE EEEE AEAEE A AEAEE EEEE AAEE EEA EEEE 520 User programmable IP interface ccccccesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseceeeeeseneeeenseceeeeaseseeeensseeeeenseseeeeneeeenens 521 PFOQFaAMMING ctscsscccicctseectecseenteecnwecciecnveeteecneesceeedscntecenancctecnneetiecneesceeedhesteeenseccueerneetisrnestiveneeccen 523 Initializing the user programmable IP interface cece eeeeeeeeeeteee ee eeteeeeeteeeeetneeeeetneeeeeeee 524 Establishing a connection 0 00 0 eccceeeceeeeeeeeeee eee eceeeeeeeceeeeeeteaeeeeeseaeeeeeseneaeeeeeneeeeeseeeaeeeseeeaeeeeeeaeees 525 Sending dta aeeiiaii ee 529 Receiving data nessrracsniaieri nna EEEE 531 Terminating a connection 0 2 ee eececeeeenee cece ente ee ee ee eset eaeee ee eaeee ee eaeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeesesaeeeseeneeeeseaes 534 FROGISCONS iicccc08s cooks ian Nanao deck waste paket EAA EEEN AAAA site pews deed davis TaN aceasta 535 Regis NUMDOMS scs hacden vestaceveshactanrnened cue yhacdanwuseedens
48. Registers and I O numbers of JX2 I O modules on the JX2 system bus I O module numbers of JX2 I 0 modules Register numbers for JX2 1 0 modules 1 0 numbers for JX2 1 O modules Example To determine the I O module numbers of JX2 I O modules on the JX2 system bus of the JC 3xx proceed as follows Count the JX2 I O modules left to right starting with 2 Leave out the intelligent JX2 slave modules and JetMoves Leave out the power supply module JX2 PS1 Register numbers for JX2 I O modules connected to the JX2 system bus of a JC 3xx consist of the following elements PhP Pht ls Element Desertion Valuerange ox I O module number minus 2 00 22 I O numbers for JX2 I O modules connected to the JX2 system bus of a JC 3xx consist of the following elements p2 ofofo otx fz ez Module specific I O module number 02 24 Module specific I O number 2 3 4 Ld L Ei fiee omo Refer to documentation on JC 3xx 1 2 20000300z 2000002zz 20000301z 2000003zz 232 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Register and I O numbers of IP67 I O modules on the JX2 system bus I O module numbers of To d
49. Related topics Configuration registers let you read the parameters of the IP configuration A range of registers holds the data contained in the configuration memory Another range contains the parameters used for initializing the IP interface The basic register numbers of both ranges are dependent on the device The register number is calculated by adding the number of the module register MR to the number of the basic register Data range Configuration memory Basic register Register numbers number 101100 101100 101165 Parameters 101200 101200 101265 used The following table lists the registers of both ranges as well as their connection to the entries in the configuration file System config ini Section in Name in Register config ini config ini O MRI SubnetMask Eaa DefGateWay a DNSServer HOSTNAME SuffixType PORTS JetIPBase JVMDebug MR 80 FILES AutoCopyIni Description IP address of the controller Sets the subnet mask IP address of the gateway to other subnets IP address of the server for the Domain Name System The type of the automatically generated suffix is attached to the controller name Specifies the controller name IP port number for OS update and communication between controllers IP port number for debugger setup in JetSym Name for AutoCopy command file The configuration memory see page 72 The configuration file see page 73 Jetter AG 77
50. SD card from the controller s point of view before the AutoCopy function is executed ISD x autocopy ini 05 3 JC 340_1 04 0 00 0s JX3 A04_1 01 0 00 0s UserData ig MyTestData da C3 UserProgs start ini userprogtest es3 Following execution the log file autocopy log has been added Command file OPTIONS CommandCount 7 LogFile SD autocopy log LogAppend 0 update operating system of controller COMMAND 1 Command FileCopy Source SD OS JC 340_1 04 0 00 0s Destination System OS op_ system os update operating system of JX3 A04 module COMMAND 2 Command FileCopy Source SD OS JX3 A04_ 1 01 0 00 0s Destination System JX3 Module02 0S system os create user program directories probably already present but to be sure COMMAND 3 Command DirCreate Path app ErrorAsWarning 1 COMMAND 4 Command DirCreate Path app userprogtest 586 Jetter AG JC 350 Automatic copying of controller data copy user program start file COMMAND 5 Command FileCopy Source SD UserProgs start ini Destination app start ini copy user program COMMAND 6 Command FileCopy Source SD UserProgs userprogtest es3 Destination app userprogtest userprogtest set registers and flags COMMAND_7 Command DaFileRead DaFile SD UserData MyTestData da s3 Jetter AG 587 11 Automatic copying of controller data 11 3 L
51. Setting the IP address via configuration file see page 80 Setting the IP address via configuration file and DIP switch see page 81 Setting the IP address during runtime see page 85 78 Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation Setting the default IP address 192 168 10 15 Default IP address The controller JC 350 has got default IP address 192 168 10 15 You may change the IP address of the JC 350 to its default IP address at any time DIP switch settings To set the module to its default IP address 192 168 10 15 move the DIP switch sliders to the positions shown below AABAAAAAAAAG ON o N o N o w oT OT oa CUE T N a o o Jetter AG 79 4 Mechanical and electrical installation Setting the IP address via configuration file Setting the IP address DIP switch settings Transferring the configuration file You can set the IP address of the controller JC 350 in the config ini file IP Address aaa bbb ccc ddd ec O O esenp The following DIP switch settings cause the controller JC 350 to read out the IP address from the file config ini ap I uh 0 HABA AAAAAAAA ON
52. Text selection for DisplayText2 MR 2806 The value in this module register specifies which one of the two texts is to be output Module register properties Values 0 Text 1 Text2 Jetter AG 419 10 Programming Device numbers Introduction Device numbers MR 2824 The device number lets you define the HMI You may enter the following values for the parameter Device number Default device Reserved Printer module Serial interface a a a BE a Serial interface module MR 2824 holds the number of the device to be used to the JX2 or JX3 system bus Output of data on a user programmable serial interface Output of data on a serial interface module connected to the JX2 or JX3 system bus Device number of the default device This module register contains the device number of the default device If you always specify the default device in the application program device number 0 you can select during runtime which device is actually to be used Module register properties Values 1 Value after reset 2 420 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming 10 10 5 Outputting numerical values Introduction STX instruction Formatting the values to be output Outputting numerical values This chapter describes how to output numerical values via printer or serial interface and how to parameterize the corresponding STX instructions These numerical values may be constants or contents of
53. Wiring of serial interfaces Communication parameters baud rate parity etc Transmit and receive buffers JC 350 Programming 10 16 1 Interface Introduction This chapter covers the connection to a user programmable serial interface of the JC 350 Contents Topic Page Serial interface port X11 ceccceeccceceeeeeeeeeae eset sees secaeaeeeeeeesesecneneeeeeeeteees 498 Jetter AG 497 10 Programming Serial interface port X11 Devices to connect with Port X11 lets you connect the following devices this port APC An HMI by Jetter AG Any device Pin assignment of port X11 Pin Signal Desenpton O A ROA RRR receive data imened 2 ob Reference potted OO O O Os ROB Saez rceveda notinvened Ca Ro RZ echoes a a e RS 485 transmit receive data not inverted e cay hiswywtee O RS 485 transmit receive data inverted Oe mo Ram Restrictions Irrespective of the fact that various hardware drivers have been implemented only one hardware interface is available This means While for example communication via RS 422 is taking place simultaneous and independent communication via RS 232 is not possible 498 Jetter AG JC 350 Block diagram Terminating resistor Programming
54. eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeenaeeeeees 456 Register description Timeout intervals on the JX3 system DUS ee eee tees 458 Register description Versions of JX3 system DUS drivers eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeettneeeeettaeeeeee 459 Estill ici cssccetesaceccten cs astavauweccaeiivaste dese veedeecnance sa veve dyin cea baati et eecyeccebectetesunveeece seveotenetaresaesdoedeeneueraents 460 Configuring the E mail feature ecsseeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeesseeeeeseeeeeeessseeeenseseenensseeeees 461 Structure of the configuration Te sssri aa oaa AUNES AENEAN 462 Section SMTP c meaa aa iaiia esstdden a A ARE a E a 463 Section POPS inar na a a E e besa dit a A A a a N 465 section DEFAULT nesinu ts ied aan ies EAA Eaa a ETAG 467 Configuration file EX IMpleS ccncccsnerenennnsiiiieii in aE 468 Creating MalllS nci cicccsicccescesccccsivecttecriesteccetvcttnctneseceedvestinee te anaE nEaN Enara RREN 469 Name of the e mail template file 2 ee ee ccc cece ce eeeece cece ee ee eee nn aces ee eeee sede aeaeeeeeeeeesenenaeeeeeeeetees 470 Structure of the e mail template file ecccccccceceeeeeeece aces ce ee ee eeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeseeeaeaeeeeeeeseeeseiaeeeeees 471 Inserting real time Controller values 0 2 2 ce eeeeceee cence ee eene eect eae ee eeeaaeeeeesaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeecaeeeesenaeeeeeeaas 473 Sending ah emaila ararasan nA ANEA AAAA EAEE AASA 478 FROGISUGMS E coy E E E E E E A ATE 479 Overview Of registo S enenci
55. gt Display 0 Register content 0 gt Display 1 Type INT standard type Integer decimal INTX Integer hexadecimal INTB Integer binary BOOL REAL Floating point decimal STRING Text register Example JW DTAG name R1000250 type R factor 3 25 offset 500 Result EAL format 0 HHH This instruction causes the contents of register 1000250 to be multiplied by 3 25 Then 500 is added to the product The result appears in the Web browser with sign and at least five integer positions before the decimal point Leading zeros are added as appropriate Furthermore three decimal positions are added The variable name begins with a capital F followed by the flag number The following types are possible Type BOOL standard type Notation Flag 0 gt Display 0 Flag 1 gt Display 1 STRING Flag 0 gt Display FALSE Flag 1 gt Display TRUE Example lt JW DTAG name F100 type STRING format gt Jetter AG 207 9 HTTP server Inputs Outputs Result The state of flag 100 is displayed as string T or F The variable name begins with a capital followed by the input number The following types are possible ee BOOL standard type Input 0 gt Display 0 Input 1 gt Display 1 STRING Input 0 gt Display OFF Input 1 gt Display ON Example lt JW DTAG name I100000308 type STRING gt Result
56. n the Web search for FTP and commands If you do not wish to care about commands we recommend using an FTP program such as TotalCommander Required programmer s To be able to use the functions described in this chapter the programmer skills must be familiar with the following subjects The user must be familiar with the file system of the JC 350 The user must be familiar with IP networks The user must be familiar with commands Contents Topic Page LOGON AENEA Paced davai copie N nets E E nena A E A E edaveces 174 Example Windows FTP Client 2 ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeseteenieeeeeeeeteees 175 Jetter AG 173 7 FTP server Logon Logon Factory settings Administration of users Related topics 174 To be able to access the file system via FTP the FTP client must log on when the connection is established As Server Name enter the IP address of the device As User Name enter your user name e g admin As Password enter your password e g admin The factory settings include two user accounts USER1 NAME admin PW admin USER33 NAME system PW system The user administration of the file system lets you change the passwords and add new users User administration see page 155 Jetter AG JC 350 FTP server Example Windows FTP client Task Carry out the following tasks using an FTP client for example the one which comes with Windows Launch the FTP cl
57. proceed as follows Do not exceed the maximum number of 16 modules per JX3 station Calculate the aggregated input factor by adding the input factor per module Example 2 JX3 D116 and 8 JX3 Al4 modules are connected to a controller JC 3xx 2 JX3 DI16 with input factor 4 makes 8 8 JX3 Al4 with input factor 10 makes 80 gt aggregated factor is 88 Calculate the aggregated output factor by adding the output factor per module Example 2 JX3 DI16 and 8 JX3 Al4 modules are connected to a controller JC 3xx 2 JX3 DI16 with input factor 0 makes 0 8 JX3 Al4 with input factor 0 makes 0 gt aggregated factor is 0 the aggregated input factor the JX3 station is fully equipped makes 88 the aggregated output factor the JX3 station is fully equipped makes 88 the number of peripheral the JX3 station is fully equipped modules is 16 If one of the three values has been exceeded a new JX3 station must be added For this apply a bus node e g a JX3 BN ETH Jetter AG JC 350 Example Input factors in our example Output factors in our example Conclusion of I O factor calculation Mechanical and electrical installation You want to connect 11 JX3 AO4 and 5 JX3 THI2 RTD to a controller JC 3xx Quantity Module Input factor per module Aggregated factor Aggregated input 72 factor Quantity Output factor per Aggregated factor module on e o s o s o ce S S Aggregated ou
58. txt ini m gif tif tiff bmp womp jpg jpe jpeg png xml Js OCX pdf zip doc rtf CSS m wml wmlc wmls wmlsc m ico svg jar java class cab Required programmer s To be able to use the functions described in this chapter the following skills skills are required The user must be familiar with the file system of the controller The user must be familiar with IP networks Contents Topic Page Server Side INCIUGSS 2 02 51 ccaisacet ici a a and a fect 204 Jetter AG 203 9 HTTP server 9 1 Server Side Includes Introduction The HTTP server features Server Side Includes SSI This function is for showing present real time controller values on an HTML page Rules You must specify a Name Space tag at the beginning of the HTML page that is to contain the real time controller values This Name Space is for defining the namespace used in the HTML page In the body section of the HTML page the Data tags are specified Updating real time When the HTML page is uploaded to the browser the HTTP server once controller values replaces the Data tags by actual real time controller values To refresh the controller values the HTML page must be reloaded over and over again The user triggers reloading by entering the controller address and the name of the required page e g http 192 168 10 209 Homepage SSI ssiTimeAndDate htm Contents
59. 0 R 100002016 contains the number of modules connected to the JX3 system bus 1 16 R 100002016 contains the module code that has been entered into the module array by the controller Module array This register value reflects the module code that has been selected in R 100002015 ndex to module array Module register properties Type of access Read only Value after reset Amount of connected JX3 I O modules Jetter AG 455 10 Programming Register description Error logging on the JX3 system bus R 100000000 Bus status The controller or bus node enters into this register the status of the JX3 system bus Meaning of the individual bits Bit15 Bus status 1 Data exchange takes place via JX3 system bus Module register properties Type of access Read access Value after reset Depending on the initialization state R 100002008 JX3 system bus Error registers If an error on the JX3 system bus occurs the controller or the bus node enters its cause into this register Meaning of the individual bits Bit 3 Error 1 At least one JX3 module has caused an error Bit 16 Fatal error 1 A fatal non recoverable error has occurred on the JX3 system bus Data exchange has been terminated Module register properties Type of access Only 0 can be entered Value after reset Depending on the initialization state R 100002011 Number of the I O module where the error has occurred If during communication with an I O modu
60. 0 in R 200010510 Clear the sending error bit Clears bit 3 Transmit error in R 200010510 of the selected message box Result Bit 3 0 in R 200010510 Clear the FIFO buffer This command is for clearing all entries in the FIFO buffer Result R 200010503 0 Jetter AG 557 10 Programming CAN Prim interface Commands 8 Set the standard ID length to 11 bits The ID length for all CAN messages is set to 11 bits Result Bit 2 0 in R 200010500 R 200010506 0 R 200010507 0 9 Set the standard ID length to 29 bits The ID length for all CAN messages is set to 29 bits Result Bit 2 1 in R 200010500 R 200010506 0 R 200010507 0 10 Check message boxes for receiving new messages The CAN Prim interface automatically checks the inbox for new CAN messages Command 10 forces manual checking of pending messages By now issuing command 10 is not obligatory any more Module register properties Takes effect When the CAN Prim interface is enabled R 200010502 Message box number R 200010502 is for selecting a message box The data contained in the message box can then be accessed via R 200010510 through R 200010521 Module register properties Values Message box number 0 15 Takes effect When the CAN Prim interface is enabled 558 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming R 200010510 Message box status register This register shows the status of the message box Meaning of the individual bits
61. 00 38PM 5332 jetter i jpg 226 Transfer complete FTP 64d Bytes empfangen in 0 Sekunden 391660 60KB s ftp gt by 211 Goodbye iC gt Jetter AG 175 JC 350 FTP client 8 FTP client The FTP client The FTP client allows access from within the application program to files and directories of a remote network device To this end the FTP client communicates with the FTP server of this network device Functions The following functions are possible Creating directories in the remote file system Deleting directories in the remote file system Copying files from the local file system into the remote file system Copying files from the remote file system into the local file system Requirements To be able to use the FTP client feature basic knowledge of FTP connections and file systems is required The IP address of the FTP server must be known Ifthe IP address of the FTP server is not known name resolution through a DNS server must be possible User name and password for logging on at the FTP server must be known For programming this feature JetSym version 4 3 or higher is required Processing within the The controller completes only one FTP access at a time application program The corresponding task in the application program stops at the command until the access is completed During this time other tasks in the application program are processed While an FTP access of a task is being
62. 1 255 ms Timeout in milliseconds Module register properties Value after reset 20 ms 446 Jetter AG JC 350 R 200002765 Programming Timeout interval for register access to JX2 modules The response to register access to JX2 Slave modules must be within the configured timeout time JX2 slave modules JetMove 1xx 2xx and 6xx Values 1 255 ms Timeout in milliseconds Module register properties Value after reset 20 ms Jetter AG 447 10 Programming Register description Retry counter for JX2 system bus modules R 200002760 Maximum number of I O update retries During I O update the controller tries several times to read or write data Not before the maximum number of retries is exceeded a timeout error is generated Values 1 255 Maximum number of retries Module register properties Value after reset 5 R 200002761 Index to I O timeout monitoring array This index is used to select the entry of the I O retry counter array contained in R 200002762 Values 2 24 JX2 I O modules IP67 modules 70 79 CANopen modules R 200002762 I O retry counter array This array contains the sum of all retries occurred during I O update of the corresponding module Values 0 255 Number of retries 448 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Register description Versions of JX2 system bus drivers Introduction R 200002000 R 200002072 R 200002995 Jetter AG Apart from
63. 10 Programming 10 9 Controlling HMIs with alphanumeric displays Introduction This chapter contains information on how to control HMIs with text displays using the application program in a JC 350 controller It also describes the registers used to parameterize the display functions The controller provides the following display functions Displaying texts Displaying the contents of variables Scanning the HMI keys Switching the HMI LEDs Monitor function Prerequisites In this manual we proceed from the assumption that the user is familiar with the following STX instructions DisplayText DisplayText2 DisplayValue and UserInput Fora more detailed description of the instructions mentioned above refer to the online help included in the programming tool JetSym Contents Topic Page Connectable AMIS citscccciiccnceashadccesedl ccantadsceatiivundstobedicasedlincartadaceastbeutceesiens 351 Redstonas a ial eae lieder lia ialeer eed cade 353 Configuring the screen SIZE 0 eceeeee ener ee ee eeee ee ee taeeeeeeaeeeeetneeeeeeneeeere 357 Displaying TOXUS drania vetoed eesene A A 359 Displaying numerical vales essees annan 368 Entering numerical valueS esssseesssesssrresssnnestenneerennaatenneatannadesnnnanannaanenne 378 Querying the Keysis ccccezscead ee sccselidestedetphecedaesatdddeepannidtweate dese te deeuandePespeeds 391 Activating deactivating LEDS 000 0 ceseeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeseeneeeeseaas 398
64. 2 IPTYPE_TCP IPAddr Valid IP address Required only for TCP IP client Valid IP port number Will be ignored for UDP IP C E 1 073 741 824 ms 0 infinitey Return value If the return value was positive the connection could be established If the returned value was negative an error occurred and the connection could not be established Return value gt 0 A positive return value must be stored in a variable It must be made available as a handle at activating the functions Send data Receive data and Terminate connection 1 Error during connection set up 2 Internal error 3 Invalid parameter 8 Timeout Jetter AG 525 10 Programming Using this function with a TCP IP client Functioning principle with a TCP IP client Using this function with a TCP IP server If a client is to establish a TCP IP connection to a server you can invoke the function and assign the return value of a variable for further evaluation as follows Result ConnectionCreate CONNTYPE CLIENT IPTYPE TCP TP 192516875 123 46000 T 10s The task stops at the program line until the connection is established or the specified timeout has elapsed This function is processed in the following steps Step CO escription o Description The device JC 350 tries to establish a TCP IP connection via port 46000 a ae the network client with IP address a 168 75 123 A network client has accepted the A
65. 20 Parts and interfaces of the controller JC 350 ccccceeseeeeeceeeeeeeeteteeneees 21 Order reference Options ccececcccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeececeeeeeseeanaeceeeeeeneeesinaeeeeees 22 List Of documentation esinin aa a aaa aaia 23 Accessories for the JX3 system ssesseersseerrssserrssrtrrsstirrsstnnssttnnsnennnnt 25 Physical dimensions 0 eeeeeee cence ee eete eect eeneeeeeeaeeeeesaaeeeeesaeeeeeetaeeeeeenteeeseaaes 26 Jetter AG 19 2 Product description and design Product description of the JC 350 The controller JC 350 Product features Additional options Scope of delivery 20 The JC 350 is a high performance compact controller Its enhanced expandability makes this controller an excellent choice for complex tasks in modern industry The features of this product are listed below 4 6o0r8 axes 2 Ethernet ports with integrated switch Powerful programming language JetSym STX Non volatile registers 30 000 Program data memory 2 MByte 1 serial port RS 232 422 485 1 JX2 system bus interface Up to 16 JX3 modules can directly be added Real time clock m Modbus TCP 3 SD card You must specify the additional options for your controller when placing the order already The controller cannot be equipped with additional features afterwards When ordering the controller JC 350 you may choose the following options Integrated Web server e mail featu
66. 20001 20016 278001 20017 20032 278002 20033 20048 278999 35985 36000 These registers and the inputs and outputs mapped to them are merely storage cells within the RAM There is no direct mapping to the hardware Therefore it is not defined whether inputs or outputs are mapped to a register Assignment is made not until configuration in the communication units takes place Jetter AG JC 350 Unit ID Restriction Outdated system functions JetSym STX functions Programming The instruction header of a Modbus TCP telegram contains a Unit ID The Unit ID is not evaluated by Modbus TCP devices as they can be addressed without ambiguity by their IP address Therefore in the case of system functions 65 66 and 80 always value 1 is sent Converters from Modbus TCP to Modbus RTU use the Unit ID for addressing the Modbus RTU servers Therefore the corresponding system functions for reading and writing registers system functions 67 and 68 as well as for initializing RemoteScan system function 85 have been provided These system functions can be used to set the Unit ID Modbus TCP only supports transmission of registers with a width of 16 bits From this follows that only the 16 least significant bits are transmitted when 32 bit registers are sent When assigning incoming register values to the internal 32 bit registers no sign extension will be carried out As of JetSym 5 0 the system functions are outda
67. 200010504 200010506 200010507 200010509 200010510 200010511 200010512 200010513 200010514 200010521 200010530 box number 20 200010531 box number 20 200010532 box number 20 200010533 box number 20 200010534 200010541 box number 20 200010542 box number 20 200010543 box number 20 200010544 box number 20 Status register Bit 1 1 CAN message has been received Bit 2 0 CAN ID 11 bits Bit 2 1 CAN ID 29 bits Command register Direct access 7 Clear the FIFO buffer 8 Set CAN ID to 11 bits 9 Set CAN ID to 29 bits 10 Check boxes for received messages Indirect access f Enable the message box Disable the message box Send a CAN message Clear the NEW DAT bit Clear the OVERRUN bit Clear the transmit error bit Clear the FIFO buffer Set CAN ID to 11 bits Set CAN ID to 29 bits o PN Oo oO F ON 10 Check boxes for received messages Message box number indirect access FIFO buffer filling level FIFO data Global receive mask Global receive ID CAN Prim version IP Indirect access Message box status register Message box configuration register CAN ID Number of data bytes Data bytes 0 through 7 Direct access Message box status register Message box configuration register CAN ID Number of data bytes Data bytes CAN ID mask Box command register Received CAN ID Jetter AG 617 14 Quick reference JC 3xx
68. 2201 2208 2209 2216 4157 1909 1916 4241 2109 2116 2201 2208 2209 2216 2301 2308 4158 2001 2008 4242 2201 2208 2209 22146 2301 2308 2309 2316 4159 2009 2016 4243 2209 2216 2301 2308 2309 2316 2401 2408 4160 2101 2108 4244 2301 2308 2309 23146 2401 2408 2409 2416 4161 2109 2116 4162 2201 2208 16 combined outputs 41637 lt 2209 2216 JX3 Systembus 100000000 a 123012309 JX2 Systembus 200000000 J169 2309 2916 Netzwerk 1GNN910000 4166 2401 2408 4260 101 108 109 116 4167 2409 2416 4261 109 116 201 208 4262 201 208 209 216 32 combined outputs 4263 209 216 301 308 JX3 Systembus 100000000 4264 301 308 309 316 JX2 Systembus 200000000 4265 309 316 401 408 Netzwerk 1GNN910000 4266 401 408 409 416 4200 101 108 4267 409 416 501 508 4201 109 116 4268 501 508 509 516 4202 201 208 4269 509 516 601 608 Jetter AG 619 14 Quick reference JC 3xx 4270 601 608 609 616 4271 609 616 701 708 4272 701 708 709 716 4273 709 716 801 808 4274 801 808 809 816 4275 809 816 901 908 4276 901 908 909 916 4277 909 916 1001 1008 4278 1001 1008 1009 1016 4279 1009 1016 1101 1108 4280 1101 1108 1109 1116 4281 1109 1116 1201 1208 4282 1201 1208 1209 1216 4283 1209 1216 1301 1308 4284 1301 1308 1309 1316 4285 1309 1316 1401 1408 4286 1401 1408 1409 1416 4287 1409 1416 1501 1508 4288 1501 1508 1509 1516 4289 1509 1516 1601 1608 4290 1601 1608 1609 16
69. 32 combined inputs 1nnn914030 1nnn914060 16 combined inputs 1nnn914092 1nnn914120 8 combined inputs 1nnn914153 1nnn914200 32 combined outputs 1nnn914230 1nnn914260 16 combined outputs 1nnn914292 1nnn914320 8 combined outputs 4nnn914353 _ Where nnn GNN 000 268 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Addressing scheme The addressing scheme for the digital network inputs and outputs at cyclic Inputs and outputs data interchange is as follows 1 Element Description I O number Supports direct access Bus node ID GNN nnn 001 199 ID of the network node referred to as Global Node Number Designation 01 01 01 indicates that a JX3 module is to be I O 01 as a fixed number addressed Module number mm 02 17 Number of the JX3 module of a remote node Module specific I O zz 01 16 Specifies which input output on number the module is to be addressed Example Via network a controller and a bus node JX3 BN ETH are connected A JX3 DO16 is connected to the bus node The JX3 DO16 has got I O module number 3 Task The outputs of the JX3 DO16 are to be activated or deactivated as follows All outputs with odd numbers are active for half a second while all outputs with even numbers are deactivated All outputs with even numbers are active for half a second while all outputs with odd numbers are deactivated There is a moving light
70. 4135 809 816 4219 1009 1016 1101 1108 1109 1116 1201 1208 4136 901 908 4220 1104 1108 1109 1116 1201 1208 1209 1216 4137 909 916 4221 1109 1116 1201 1208 1209 1216 1301 1308 4138 1001 1008 4222 1201 1208 1209 1246 1301 1308 1309 1316 4139 1009 1016 4223 1209 1216 1301 1308 1309 1316 1401 1408 4140 1101 1108 4224 1301 1308 1309 1316 1401 1408 1409 1416 41414 1109 1116 4225 1309 1316 1401 1408 1409 1416 1501 1508 4142 1201 1208 4226 1401 1408 1409 141416 1501 1508 1509 1516 4143 1209 1216 4227 1409 1416 1501 1508 1509 1516 1601 1608 4144 1301 1308 4228 1501 1508 1509 1516 1601 1608 1609 1616 4145 1309 1316 4229 1509 1516 1601 1608 1609 1616 1701 1708 4146 1401 1408 4230 1601 1608 1609 1616 1701 1708 1709 1716 4147 1409 1416 4231 1609 1616 1701 1708 1709 1716 1801 1808 4148 1501 1508 4232 1701 1708 1709 1716 1801 1808 1809 1816 4149 1509 1516 4233 1709 1716 1801 1808 1809 1816 1901 1908 4150 1601 1608 4234 1801 1808 1809 1816 1901 1908 1909 1916 4151 1609 1616 4235 1809 1816 1901 1908 1909 1916 2001 2008 4152 1701 1708 4236 1901 1908 1909 1916 2001 2008 2009 2016 4153 1709 1716 4237 1909 1916 2001 2008 2009 2016 2101 2108 4154 1801 1808 4238 2001 2008 2009 2016 2101 2108 2109 2116 4155 1809 1816 4239 2009 2016 2101 2108 2109 2116 2201 2208 4156 1901 1908 4240 2101 2108 2109 2116
71. 5 kV 632 Jetter AG JC 350 Shielded data and I O lines EMC Immunity to interference Jetter AG Appendix Frequency band 0 15 80 MHz DIN EN 61131 2 Asymmetric RF amplitude modulated Bursts Voltage surges asymmetric line to earth Test voltage 10 V AM 80 with 1 kHz Source impedance 150 Q Criterion A Test voltage 1 kV tr tn 5 50 ns Repetition rate 5 kHz Criterion A tr th 1 2 50 us Common mode interference voltage 1 kV DIN EN 61000 6 2 DIN EN 61000 4 6 DIN EN 61131 2 DIN EN 61000 6 2 DIN EN 61000 4 4 DIN EN 61131 2 DIN EN 61000 6 2 DIN EN 61000 4 5 633 Index B Index A Application program storing to an SD card 607 Default path 606 Loading 608 Factory settings 71 Automatic copying of controller data 568 Example of a command file 585 C Changing the IP address 78 During runtime 85 Non volatile via registers 83 Operating mode GNN 86 Setting the default IP address 79 Via configuration file 80 Via configuration file and DIP switch 81 Components of the JC 350 21 Configuring a JX3 station 145 Connecting HMls 131 Cable JC DK Xm 135 Cable KAY_0386 xxxx 137 Cable KAY_0533 0025 139 Multi display mode 132 Controlling HMIs 350 Clear display 366 Connectable alpha numeric HMIs 130 Cursor position 364 Device number 362 Displaying numerical values 368 Displaying texts 360 Ente
72. Configuring error states Introduction Prerequisites Commissioning steps JetSym lets you configure the JC 350 The following requirements must be satisfied JetSym has been installed on the PC used JetSym has been licensed see online help in JetSym Limitations to be taken into account when engineering a JX3 station have been observed To successfully commission the controller and the JX3 modules connected to it proceed as follows pa Make sure that the power supply is disconnected Add the required JX3 modules to form the JX3 station When engineering a JX3 station consider the limitations applying to its setup Applying the JX3 system bus configurator see page 91 3 Use an Ethernet cable to connect the controller JC 3xx and the PC Set an IP address at the controller JC 3xx For more information refer to chapter IP configuration see page 70 On the PC set an IP address which differs from the IP address of the controller Example The controller has got IP address 192 168 1 1 Thus for the PC IP address 192 168 1 20 can be used Make sure that the first three elements of the IP addresses are identical z Switch on the power supply for the JX3 station Launch JetSym Then configure the JX3 station following the sample program For more information on this sample program refer to chapter Configuration in JetSym see page 146 Configure the JX3 station using the Hardware Manager For mo
73. EN 61131 2 connected to chassis ground internally Protective connection eo 7 DIN EN 61131 2 Overvoltage category Mo DIN EN 61131 2 EMC Emitted E TA interference Enclosure Frequency band 30 DIN EN 61000 6 3 230 MHz limit 30 dB V m DIN EN 61131 2 aba DIN EN 55011 Frequency band 230 1 000 MHz limit 37 dB uV m at 10 m distance Class B EMC Interference immunity Standard Magnetic field with mains DIN EN 61131 2 frequency DIN EN 61000 6 2 DIN EN 61000 4 8 RF field amplitude modulated Frequency band 80 MHz DIN EN 61131 2 Penz DIN EN 61000 6 2 Test field strength 10 V m DIN EN 61000 4 3 AM 80 mit 1 kHz Criterion A Discharge through air DIN EN 61131 2 Test peak voltage 8 kV DIN EN 61000 6 2 Contact discharge DIN EN 61000 4 2 Test peak voltage 4 kV Criterion A Jetter AG 631 Appendix DC power supply inputs and outputs EMC Immunity to interference Standard RF asymmetric Frequency band 0 15 80 MHz DIN EN 61131 2 Test voltage 10 V DIN EN 61000 6 2 AM 80 with 1 kHz DIN EN 61000 4 6 Source impedance 150 Q Criterion A Bursts Test voltage 2 kV DIN EN 61131 2 tr tn 5 50 ns DIN EN 61000 6 2 Repetition rate 5 kHz DIN EN 61000 4 4 Criterion A Surge voltages tr th 1 2 50 us DIN EN 61131 2 asymmetric line to earth Common mode interference DIN EN 61000 6 2 symmetrical line to earth Voltage 1 kV DIN EN 61000 4 5 Series mode interference voltage 0
74. Each connected IP67 I O module reduces the maximum line length by 1 0m The baud rate setting depends on the number of modules connected to the JX2 system bus JX2 I 0 modules JX SIO 1 000 500 250 125 JX2 slave modules CANopen kBaud kBaud kBaud kBaud JetMove modules px xe xe x px x x px of Jetter AG 53 4 Mechanical and electrical installation 4 3 LEDs indicating various states LEDs of the JC 350 The JC 350 features the following LEDs 5LEDs for indicating conditions and errors of the controller 4 LEDs for indicating user defined events 4 LEDs for indicating the conditions of the Ethernet ports Contents Topic Page LEDS Of the controller cnie a a a a A EA i ai EE 55 LEDs of the controller during boot ProCeSS c ceeseeeeseteeeetteeeeeeneeeeeeaes 57 Status LEDs Ethernet interface ccc ccccccceccccceceseseseeeeeeeseceseceeeeeseseeeseness 59 54 Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation LEDs of the controller LEDs of the controller OS and application specific LEDs Normal operating condition The controller JC 350 indicates conditions and errors via its LEDs There are three groups of LEDs Status messages of the operating system Application specific LEDs Status of the Ethernet port The status LEDs of the OS and application specific LEDs are located in the diagnostic and status area below the labeling field
75. Introduction Male connector specification controller end Female connector specification HMI end Specifications of connecting cable Cable shielding The interface cable KAY_0386 xxxx lets you connect HMls of the type LCD 60 to the JC 350 For information on connector specification refer to the list below Recommended core cross section 0 128 0 051 mm For information on female connector specification refer to the list below Type 15 pin female Sub D connector in metallized housing quality grade 3 Recommended core cross section 0 25 0 128 mm For information on cable specification refer to the list below Complete shielding no paired shielding The shield must be connected to the connector housings on both ends of the cable with the greatest possible surface area Place the shield as follows e Connect the shield by its greatest possible surface area e Clamp it under a strain relief e Wrap it with copper foil Jetter AG 137 4 Mechanical and electrical installation Wiring diagram The interface cable KAY_0386 xxxx is wired as follows SER X11 1 O O O O O O O O o 0000000 Connect shield with the greatest possible surface area A metallized housing is required Available lengths The interface cable KAY_0386 xxxx is prefabricated and available in the following lengths temno tom Description 60864359 KAY_0386 0250 JetControl to LCD 60
76. JC 350 class of protection IP20 is not ensured Do not touch any electronic components once a module housing has been removed from the backplane module If you touch the EMC clip you may damage this clip A damaged clip may result in lower noise immunity When disposing of devices the local environmental regulations must be complied with Jetter AG 15 1 Safety instructions Instructions on EMI Noise immunity of a The noise immunity of a system is determined by the weakest component of system the system For this reason correct wiring and shielding of cables is of paramount importance Measures Measures for increasing EMI in electric plants Attach the JC 350 to a DIN rail to EN 60715 having got the dimensions 35 x 7 5 mm The DIN rail must be electrically conducting and grounded by either of the two ways e Directly e Via rear panel of the electric cabinet Also refer to Application Note 016 EMC compatible installation of electric cabinets by Jetter AG The following instructions are excerpts from Application Note 016 Physically separate signal and power lines Jetter AG recommend spacing greater than 20 cm Cables and lines should cross each other at an angle of 90 The following line cables must be shielded Analog lines data lines motor cables coming from inverter drives Servo output stage frequency converter lines between components and interference suppressor filter if the suppressor
77. JX3 station Register numbers for JX3 modules 1 0 numbers for JX3 modules Example To determine I O module numbers within a JX3 station proceed as follows Count the module numbers left to right starting with 1 Leave out the power supply module JX3 PS1 Register numbers for JX3 modules connected to a JC 3xx consist of the following elements EREARRE Element Description Value range XX Number of the module within the JX3 station 02 17 Zzzz Module register number 0000 9999 I O numbers for JX3 modules connected to a JC 3xx consist of the following elements Pato fo o o x xz z Element Description Value range XX Number of the module within the JX3 station 02 17 zz Module specific I O number 1 16 Several JX3 modules have been connected to a JC 3xx controller Number Module Module number Register I O 1 JC 3xx 1 Refer to documentation on JC 3xx 2 JX3 A04 2 10002zzzz 1000002zz 3 JX3 PS1 3 4 JX3 DIO16 10 10010zzzz 1000010z
78. LAC is a product by Festo AG amp Co The motor controller SFC LAC is used as positioning and position feedback controller for linear handling axes HME SFC LAC xxx H0 CO Without control panel with CANopen interface SFC LAC xxx H2 CO With control panel with CANopen interface Number of SFC LAC modules connected 10 max to the JX2 system bus Additionally limited by the number of axes of the controller The motor controller SFC LAC can be connected to the JX2 system bus of the following controllers by Jetter AG JC 340 JC 350 V 1 10 0 00 JC 360 V 1 10 0 00 For more information on how to operate these modules along with a JC 350 refer to the following application notes MTR SFC Festo_apn042_xxx_Festo_Electrical_Motor_Controllers pdf Festo_apn043_xxx_CPX_Technologiemodule pdf Jetter AG 121 4 Mechanical and electrical installation Product description Festo SFC LACI SFC LACI The motor controller SFC LACI is a product by Festo AG amp Co The motor controller SFC LACI is used as positioning and position feedback controller for the following electric drives DNCE LAS and DFME LAS SFC LACI xxx H0 CO Without control panel with CANopen interface SFC LACI xxx H2 CO With control panel with CANopen interface Number of SFC LACI modules 10 max connected to the JX2 system bus Additionally limited by the number of axes of the controller Restrictions when connected to the JX2 system bus
79. Modify the dummy module configuration within the controller via R 200002023 and R 200002024 2 Switch the controller off Then switch the controller on Result When initializing the JX2 system bus the configured dummy modules were taken into account Information from the dummy modules can be retrieved via module array 434 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Monitoring intervals on the JX2 system bus Introduction The JC 350 checks in regular intervals whether communication with the modules connected to the JX2 system bus is still working To this end it sends monitoring signals to the modules and waits for a response Registers Overview 7 es R 210004 Error registers JC 350 R 200002008 Error registers JX2 system bus R 200002011 I O module number at timeout R 200002028 Cycle time of monitoring interval R 200002760 Max number of I O update retries Monitoring of JX2 I 0 When monitoring JX2 I O modules a missing response will not immediately modules result in a timeout error on the JC 350 Step Description The JC 350 sends a monitoring telegram to a JX2 I O module The cycle time can be configured in R 200002028 a response has been received the JC 350 proceeds monitoring the next JX2 I O module by taking step 1 NO response has been received the JC 350 sends one more and the number of allowed retries monitoring telegram has not been maxed out NO response has been receive
80. Operating principle Related topics This function must be initialized each time the application program is launched Function ConnectionInitialize Int The following return value is possible Return value 0 Always The function is used and its return value assigned to a variable for further utilization in the following way Result ConnectionInitialize The device JC 350 processes this function in the following steps Step Deseripton The device JC 350 closes all open connections of the user programmable IP interface The device JC 350 initializes all OS internal data structures of the user programmable IP interface Establishing a connection see page 525 Terminating a connection see page 534 Sending data see page 529 Receiving data see page 531 524 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Establishing a connection Introduction Before data can be sent or received a connection has to be established Here the following criteria have to be discerned m Which transaction log TCP or UDP has to be used ls ita client or a server that has to be installed Function declaration Function ConnectionCreate ClientServerType Int IPType Int IPAddr Int LPPorttint Timeout Int Int Function parameters Description of the function parameters Parameter Value Comment ClientServerType Client 1 CONNTYPE_CLIENT Server 2 CONNTYPE_SERVER UDP IP 1 IPTYPE_UDP TCP IP
81. Ox1FFFFFFF Takes effect When the CAN Prim interface is enabled and the message box is disabled i e if bit 0 0 in R 200010530 message box 20 554 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming R 200010542 message CAN ID mask box number 20 The CAN ID mask can be used to configure which bits of a received CAN ID are compared with the configured CAN ID of the message box Module register properties Values Bit 0 Bit is not compared with CAN ID Bit 1 Bit is compared with CAN ID Takes effect When the CAN Prim interface is enabled R 200010544 message Received CAN ID box number 20 In the case of an inbox the CAN IDs of received CAN messages are entered here Module register properties Type of access Read Values In the case of 11 bit CAN IDs 0 OX7FF In the case of 29 bit CAN IDs 0 Ox1 FFFFFFF Takes effect When the CAN Prim interface is enabled R 200010533 message Number of data bytes box number 20 In the case of an outbox a CAN message is sent with this number of data bytes In the case of an inbox the number of received data bytes is entered Module register properties Values Number of data bytes 0 8 Takes effect When the CAN Prim interface is enabled Jetter AG 555 10 Programming R 200010534 Data bytes 0 through 7 R 200010541 message f box number 20 In the case of an outbox a CAN message is sent with these data bytes In the case of an inbox the received data bytes are entere
82. Printer module This module register holds the number of the module which the display instruction is redirected to device 8 Module register properties Values JX3 bus 102 117 Values JX2 bus 202 224 Takes effect Next time when STX instruction DisplayText or DisplayValue is issued Module number Serial interface module This module register holds the number of the module which the display instruction is redirected to device 11 Module register properties Values JX3 bus 102 117 Values JX2 bus 202 224 Takes effect Next time when STX instruction DisplayText or DisplayValue is issued 416 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming 10 10 4 Outputting texts Introduction STX instructions Contents Jetter AG This chapter describes how to output texts via printer or serial interface and how to parameterize the corresponding STX instructions In order to output texts use the following STX instructions STX functions DisplayText DisplayText2 Topic Page STX instructions for outputting texts 0 0 eee ee eeeeeeeeeeteeeeeetneeeeeeneeeeee 418 Device NUMDENS viisiecdticiececndeadtetdienednasieieleinaaedwieldieehisiienelensacdwind 420 417 10 Programming STX instructions for outputting texts Function declaration Function parameters How to use this instruction Operating principle Function declaration Function parameters How to use this instruct
83. Programming Clearing the screen Introduction In the case of text displays there are two control characters allowing to clear the screen Totally clearing the screen Clearing the screen to the end of the line Restrictions If these display instructions are used for devices from 8 through 11 theses characters are not considered as control characters but are displayed as text Clearing the screen The default character for deleting the whole screen is the underline character When this character is used first the displayed text is deleted Then the given text is displayed starting from cursor position 1 Example DisplayText 0 10 H ello Result The screen is cleared and the word fragment ello is displayed starting from cursor position 1 Delete text to the end of The default character for deleting text up to the end of line is the dollar symbol the line This character causes the rest of the line to be cleared starting from the present cursor position Example DisplayText 0 25 Position 5 Result Starting from cursor position 25 Position is displayed and the rest of the line is cleared Changing control If underline and dollar symbol are to be displayed as characters you have to characters change the corresponding control character Define the control characters in module registers MR 2839 and MR 2840 366 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming MR 2839 Control character for clearing
84. Reboot the device Result A lock is assigned to this directory This configuration file is a text file containing one section In this section values can be set which are then used by the file system Specify each directory with its lock number in an individual line You can insert blank lines as required The following characters precede a comment line or The section is named LOCKS Here locks are assigned to directories in accordance with the following rule Directory Lock Example LOCKS test1 0 testl sub1 2 testl sub2 5 test2 userlock2 160 Jetter AG JC 350 File system Lock numbers Use the following lock numbers The valid lock numbers are 0 31 Lock number 0 No lock is assigned to this directory You can access this directory without any special permissions You can use numbers or previously defined names Jetter AG 161 6 File system Assigning names to keys locks Introduction Configuring names Structure of the configuration file Section 162 Keys locks are consecutively numbered from 1 through 31 To provide ease of handling a name can be assigned to each key lock combination These names are assigned in the configuration file System keys ini To assign names to keys locks proceed as follows Establish an FTP connection to the device when doing so log in with administrator rights 2 Open the file System keys ini
85. S5 2199 SHIFT ENTER 2206 S1 2200 SHIFT 220 S2 2208 S3 2201 F1 2209 S4 2202 F2 2210 S5 2203 F3 2204 F4 32 combined flags 2203 FS 203100 0 31 2206 F6 203101 32 63 zor ao 2208 F8 203104 128 159 2209 F9 203105 160 191 203106 192 223 2210 F10 203107 224 255 2211 F11 2212 F12 16 combined flags 2213 gt 203108 0 15 203109 16 31 RTA Iq 203110 32 47 2215 R 203111 48 63 2216 v0 203112 64 79 203113 80 95 2217 203114 96 111 2218 IC 203115 112 127 203116 128 143 2219 ENTER 203117 144 159 203118 160 175 Jetter AG 621 14 Quick reference JC 3xx 203119 203120 203121 203122 203123 32 combined special flags 2048 2080 2112 2144 2176 2208 2240 2272 203124 203125 203126 203127 203128 203129 203130 203131 16 combined special flags 2048 2064 2080 2096 2112 2128 2144 2160 2176 2192 2208 2224 2240 2256 2272 2288 203132 203133 203134 203135 203136 203137 203138 203139 203140 203141 203142 203143 203144 203145 203146 203147 Overlaid application registers flags 256 288 320 352 384 416 448 480 512 544 576 608 640 672 704 736 768 800 832 864 896 928 960 992 1024 105
86. THI2 RTD modules as shown below O Pat O Desertion O JX3 A04 Modules 1 to 5 supplied by JC 3xx 1 JX3 A04 Modules 6 to 11 supplied by JX3 PS1 3 JX3 PS1 Power supply module 6 JX3 THI2 RTD Modules 12 to 16 supplied by JX3 PS1 5 Engineering the There is also the option of connecting two JX3 THI2 RTD directly to the first JX3 station Option 2 JX3 PS1 and to connect the remaining three JX3 THI2 RTD to the second JX3 PS1 Number EE 2 3 yxapsi Power supply modde e 5 pHs 6 Piy ixar 2 Poy nonm 21W 2 1W 4 2W lt 6W Zz Pay 56 Pay sxs n04 2 Pavane 19 7W 2 5W 22 2W lt 24W Regarding power consumption you can even connect three JX3 THI2 RTD to the first JX3 PS1 DY Py 6 Psy ixzaos 3 Pivi 2 IW 3 15W 5 25W lt 6W gt Pav 6 Pry yys n0a 3 Pay no mo 19 7W 3 8W 23 5W lt 24W Jetter AG 101 4 Mechanical and electrical installation Yet the maximum number of eight modules which can
87. The state of input 100000308 is displayed as string ON or OFF The variable name begins with a capital O followed by the output number The following types are possible ester BOOL standard type Output 0 gt Display 0 Output 1 gt Display 1 STRING Output 0 gt Display OFF Output 1 gt Display ON Example lt JW DTAG name 0100000308 gt Result The state of output 100000308 is inserted as 1 or 0 208 Jetter AG JC 350 Access via pointer register Access via pointer register and offset HTTP server Access via pointer register is realized by inserting the capital letter P in front of the variable name In each case the value of the variable is displayed whose number corresponds to the content of the register specified in the variable name Examples lt JW DTAG name PR1000300 gt Result The content of the register is displayed whose number is contained in register 1000300 lt JW DTAG name PF1000300 gt Result The state of the flag is displayed whose number is contained in register 1000300 lt JW DTAG name PI1000300 gt Result The state of the input is displayed whose number is contained in register 1000300 lt JW DTAG name P01000300 gt Result The state of the output is displayed whose number is contained in register 1000300 To specify the number of the variable to be displayed it is also possible to add a constant value
88. To create and check the program proceed as follows 4 Start the programming tool JetSym p2 Create a new project In JetSym start the Hardware Manager either by clicking on the tab Hardware with the mouse keyboard shortcut Alt 5 Open the window for controller configuration by double clicking the folder CPU in the Hardware Manager Select the controller type JC 350 Enter the following information Installed OS version Ethernet interface type P address os Open the program editor 6 Enter the program specifications 7 Compile the program by clicking menu item Build in menu Build keyboard shortcut F7 Load up the project to the controller by clicking menu item Download in menu Build keyboard shortcut Strg 5 9 Open a setup window 10 Enter the variable name Count Activate the setup For a detailed description of the JetSym programming software refer to the JetSym online help Jetter AG 143 5 Initial commissioning JetSym STX program The following program increments the content of a variable by one every 2 seconds Var Count Int End Var Task Increment Autorun Loop Inc Count 3 Delay T 2s End_ Loop End Task Setup pane The JetSym setup window displays the content of the variable Present content of the The content of the variable is incremented by variable one every 2 seconds 144 Jetter AG JC 350 Initial commissioning
89. Type of access Read write clearing Programming Jetter AG 513 10 Programming 10 16 4 Programming Introduction Contents 514 This chapter describes how to configure the serial interface of the controller for use as user programmable serial interface and how to send receive characters via this interface Topic Page Configuring the interface 0 00 0 ecceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeneeeeeteieeeeetnieeeeetieeeereneeeere 515 Sending characters ee eeeeeeeeeeeee cette eter ener ee ee teeeeetaeeeeeeneeeee teases tneeeee 516 SOMO ING TOXUS eane face vend cagy sebiacce vb adceaestddaces seadtead sbdsacas vbideecesh dacesseadcaad ened 517 SONGING VAGST E A T 518 Receiving CharatiefS oercrcran ariii n RA 519 Receiving ValleSi iicieciea india ie nheiiatieha E A 520 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Configuring the interface Module registers MR 1 through MR 6 are used to configure the Introduction user programmable serial interface This guide proceeds from the assumption that wiring between controller and Prerequisites remote device is according to the standard of the selected interface Configuring the interface To configure the user programmable serial interface proceed as follows zw Enter value 1 into MR 2 2 Enter the desired communication parameters into MR 2 through MR 6 Result The serial interface is set as user programmable interface Both the transmit buffer and receive buffer are cleared J
90. a a e RS 485 transmit receive data not inverted e cay hiswywtee O RS 485 transmit receive data inverted Oe mo Ram Restrictions Irrespective of the fact that various hardware drivers have been implemented only one hardware interface is available This means While for example communication via RS 422 is taking place simultaneous and independent communication via RS 232 is not possible 44 Jetter AG JC 350 Block diagram Terminating resistor Mechanical and electrical installation 3V 1 tays 3 4 i1 33 KQ J X11 3 RDB 4 K X11 1 RDA Ri Rr lt lt q 33 kQ 3V3 2 A 33 kQ X11 5 SDB 4 gt X11 7 SDA 4 gt Ri Rr q 33 kQ Je Receiver Receives data Unused Part Function in the case Function in the case of RS 422 of RS 485 Twisted line of the serial interface Terminating resistor Connect a terminating resistor to both serial lines in the following cases a Receiver transmitter Transmits data Receives and transmits data Long lines High baud rates Select a terminating resistor which corresponds to the impedance of the line used Jetter AG 45 4 Mechanical and electrical installation Technical specifications Eecrioal isolation Ne Interface standards RS 232 RS 422 RS 485 2 Cables
91. a special register Description Description Enter the desired value into the timeout register of the application program This way the monitoring mode is activated as well When the controller receives the next telegram the device JC 350 sets the corresponding OS flag If the OS flag has been set the application program also sets the respective user flag Each new telegram causes the timeout to restart 346 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming sep scription If telegrams cease to arrive both special flags are reset by the controller upon expiry of the timeout interval The application program detects that the device has reset the special flags and therefore takes appropriate action 7 When further telegrams start arriving the device sets the corresponding OS flag The user flag however remains reset Jetter AG 347 10 Programming Programming Registers flags For interface monitoring the device provides the following registers and flags Overview Timeout registers an 203000 JetIP Ethernet Visualization Controller networking R 203001 pcomX serial interface HMls with alphanumeric display a al via serial interface R 203005 STX debugging Ethernet JetSym via Ethernet via Ethernet Special flags Fags merae e F E F JetIP Ethernet OS flag a pcom xX serial interface Ge F F2098 F2098 STX debugging Ethernet F200 R 203000 Timeout in the ca
92. and a timeout has elapsed negative value is returned If a client is to establish a UDP IP connection to a server you can invoke the function and assign the return value of a variable for further evaluation as follows Result ConnectionCreate CONNTYPE CLIENT IPTYPE UDP 0 0 0 UDP is a connectionless communication mode For this reason the device JC 350 opens only one communication channel for sending data to a network client This function is processed in the following steps Description o MEn The device JC 350 sets up a UDP IP communication channel for sending data no error occurred function is terminated and a positive value is returned as handle for further access to the connection an error has occurred the function is terminated and a negative value is returned Jetter AG 527 10 Programming Using this function with If a server is to establish a UDP IP connection to a server you can invoke the a UDPI IP server function and assign the return value of a variable for further evaluation as follows Result ConnectionCreate CONNTYPE SERVER IPTYPE UDP 0 46000 0 Functioning principle UDP is a connectionless communication mode For this reason the device with a UDP IP server JC 350 opens only one communication channel for receiving data from a network client This function is processed in the following steps Step Deseripton O The device JC 350 sets up a UDP IP
93. be connected to a JX3 PS1 will then be exceeded ret serio 102 Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation 4 8 Configuring the JX2 system bus Introduction This chapter is on configuring the JX2 system bus Number of connectable The following table shows the maximum number of modules which you can modules connect in parallel to the JX2 system bus of the controller JC 350 Controller JX2 1 0 modules JX SIO JX2 slave modules IP67 modules CANopen modules JetMove JC 350 4 23 JC 350 6 23 Connectable modules The following modules can be connected to the JX2 system bus of a JC 350 controller JX2 I O modules JX2 slave modules Servo amplifiers JetMove 1xx JetMove 2xx and JetMove 6xx IP67 I O modules LioN S and LUX7 CSL JX SIO and Smart I O Third party CANopen The following third party CANopen modules can be connected to the modules JX2 system bus Valve terminals by Festo V
94. communication channel at port 46000 for receiving data no error has occurred the function is terminated and a positive value is returned as handle for further access to the connection an error has occurred the function is terminated and a negative value is returned Related topics Terminating a connection see page 534 Sending data see page 529 Receiving data see page 531 Initializing the user programmable IP interface see page 524 528 Jetter AG JC 350 Sending data Introduction Function declaration Function parameters Return value Using this function with a TCP IP connection Jetter AG Programming Data can be sent via a previously established TCP IP connection or via a UDP IP connection of a client Via UDP IP connection of a server data cannot be sent but only received Function ConnectionSendData IPConnection Int IPAddr Int IPPort iInt Const Ref SendData DataLen Int Int Description of the function parameters Parameter Value Comment IPConnection Handle Return value of the function ConnectionCreate Valid IP address Required only for UDP IP client IPPort Valid IP port number Required only for UDP IP client SendData Address of the data block to be sent Po 1 4 000 Data block length in bytes The following return values are possible Return value 0 Data have been sent successfully 1 Error when sending e g connection interrupted 3 I
95. cyclic data Addressing scheme The addressing scheme for network registers is as follows 2 3 4 5 No Element Description Register number Supports direct access First part of register prefix nnn 001 199 ID of the network node Bus node ID GNN referred to as Global Node Number Second part of register mm 02 17 Number of the JX3 module of a prefix remote node Number of the function mm 98 Indirect addressing of the register of a module remote node mm 99 Addressing the variable destination window of a remote node Part 1 2 Register prefix 1nnnmm The prefix is preceded by a leading ONE Module register number zzzz 0000 9999 246 Jetter AG JC 350 IP address and IP port File ModConfig da Programming Before using a network register the IP addresses and IP ports of the remote network nodes must be written to two tables in the local register array If then you Carry out network configuration in these tables are generated the JetSym Hardware Manager automatically see file ModConfig da below you do not carry out network you must generate the tables in your configuration in the Hardware Manager application program Content indexing of the tables is done via GNN of the node in the first part of the register prefix 2 Register Value range Properties 235000 GNN 235000 23519
96. enters all modules detected during initialization into the module array Modules are entered into the module array in the following order First JX2 I O JX2 slave modules and JetMoves are are entered into the module array according to their position on the JX2 system bus Configured dummy modules are entered here too Then IP67 I O modules LioN S and LUX7 CSL are entered according to the set module number Vacant positions between module numbers are filled with dummy modules Finally CANopen modules are entered according to their set module number Vacant positions between module numbers are also filled with dummy modules R 200002015 Index to module array R 200002016 Module array The module array is accessed indirectly Enter the number of the module in the module array into R 200002015 Index to Module Array Read out the module code from R 200002016 Module Array JX2 OD8 8 digital outputs 8 digital inputs s O e emm prmerimerace vode 9 IXATPR O Module with operating keys Jetter AG 429 10 Programming Module codes of LJX7 CSL modules Module codes of LioN S modules Module codes of CANopen modules Module codes of CANopen slave modules 430 Module code Module code Module code Module code Module Desepton O Module Description 0930 CSL 650 8 universal I Os 0930 CSL 651 8 digital inputs Module Manufacturer Valve terminal type 8640 8200 vector
97. errors reported by a remote network node Access to the status registers Locating faults Fixing the root cause The controller has got read access to the contents of the following status registers of all network nodes at the Jetter Ethernet system bus The contents are accessed via registers 39nnnO through 39nnn5 GNN nnn 001 199 Registers JX3 BN ETH Controller JX3 COM EIPA Error register 200008 39nnn0 Enhanced error register 1 200009 39nnn1 Enhanced error register 2 200010 39nnn2 JetSync status 240010 39nnn3 Subscriber status 250000 39nnn4 Subscription ID 250002 39nnn5d The operating system writes the ID of the subscription for which last an error has been reported to register 250002 If the value of register 39nnn0 is unequal zero an error has occurred A network node has reported this error to the controller via its status registers In consequence the operating system of the controller reacts by taking the following steps Step Description 1 The operating system sets bit 10 in R 200009 2 If a On then Bit x 1 of Bit x 1 of the operating system sets bit R 200009 R 200010 7 of R 200008 3 The operating system enters the GNN of the network node having last reported an error to the controller into R 394001 4 The operating system enters the IP address of the network node having last reported an error to the controller into R 394002 5 The operating system enters the port
98. from output 1 to output 16 each corresponding output is activated for 200 ms Proceed with step 1 Solution Configure the network group in the JetSym Hardware Manager and write an application program Download both to the network nodes Related topics Hardware Manager see page 270 Jetter AG 269 10 Programming 10 3 3 Hardware Manager Introduction The Hardware Manager lets you easily configure the peripheral devices If possible always use the Hardware Manager that is part of JetSym Making configurations by hand is complicated and prone to errors Detailed information For detailed information on hardware configuration using Hardware Manager refer to the JetSym help Contents Topic Page Hardware Manager v cc scciicceseccccetecccdeeteedcadenendsdaessudcanebsved dantecdeqensdd desnsidie 271 270 Jetter AG JC 350 Hardware Manager Programming Hardware Manager The Hardware Manager manages all connected hardware components The Hardware Manager assists you in the following aspects Engineering and configuring control systems and bus nodes Engineering modules and axes at the JX2 system bus and configuring axes at the JX2 system bus Engineering JX3 modules at a JX3 BN ETH and a JC 3xx Engineering and configuring Ethernet axes Engineering an axis group path group and technology group Configuring a path group Configuring technology group Launching the Hardware For launching the Hardware Manag
99. ik see 200 A316 4015 809 816 901 908 909 916 1001 1008 as ea ie oi dees 4016 901 908 909 916 1001 1008 1009 1016 re eae idok ea eae 4017 909 916 1001 1008 1009 1016 1101 1108 i 4085 1309 1316 1401 1408 4018 1001 1008 1009 1016 1101 1108 1109 1116 4086 1401 1408 1409 1416 4019 1009 1016 1101 1108 1109 1116 1201 1208 4087 1409 1416 1501 1508 4020 1101 1108 1109 1116 1201 1208 1209 1216 does ee Hee pea 4021 1109 1116 1201 1208 1209 1216 1301 1308 pet sen dele eg ns 4022 1201 1208 1209 1216 1301 1308 1309 1316 pey Leeann Seon cae 4023 1209 1216 1301 1308 1309 1316 1401 1408 py aa nen 011708 4024 1301 1308 1309 1316 1401 1408 1409 1416 PNR a PRAO 4025 1309 1316 1401 1408 1409 1416 1501 1508 ee a8 fie ca cee 4026 1401 1408 1409 1416 1501 1508 1509 1516 ne pe ee ee 4027 1409 1416 1501 1508 1509 1516 1601 1608 pee eee 13014008 4028 1501 1508 1509 1516 1601 1608 1609 1616 a ae uaa 4029 1509 1516 1601 1608 1609 1616 1701 1708 4097 1909 1916 2001 2008 4030 1601 1608 1609 1616 1701 1708 1709 1716 4098 2001 2008 2009 2016 4031 1609 1616 1701 1708 1709 1716 1801 1808 4099 2009 2016 2101 2108 4032 1701 1708 1709 1716 1801 1808 1809 1816 ing Blak ae 3109 2M6 4033 1709 1716 1801 1808 1809 1816 1901 1908 im ep aia eee 4034 1801 1808 1809 1816 1901 1908 1909 1916 ne Sears E 4035 1809 1816 1901 1908 1909 1916 2001 2008 ae es See 4036
100. information on the OS version of the JC 350 there is also additional version information for identifying the JX2 system bus driver Version of the JX2 system bus interface Module register properties Type of access Read only Data type IP format Version of the JX2 system bus driver Module register properties Type of access Read only Data type IP format Version of the boot loader for the JX2 system bus interface Module register properties Type of access Read only Data type IP format 449 10 Programming 10 12 JX3 system bus Introduction JX3 modules are directly connected to the JX3 system bus of the controller JC 3xx or bus node JX3 BN xxx The JX3 system bus supports different modules Access to these modules is completely transparent Configuration The JX3 system bus needs not be configured The controller JC 3xx and the bus node JX3 BN xxx are able to automatically detect and commission connected modules Connectable modules JX3 modules Contents Topic Page Module array and module codes of connected modules 18 451 Dummy modules on the JX3 system DUS eee eee eee er eee eee 453 JX3 system bus Description of non volatile registers eee 454 Register description Modules detected on the JX3 system bus 455 Register description Error logging on the JX3 system bUS cee 456 Register description Timeout intervals on the JX3 system bus
101. is at terminal X10 The boot loader of the controller checks the position of selector S11 mode selector S11 RUN or the OS is launched STOP gt proceed with step 4 selector S11 LOAD position the OS is launched and an SD card has been inserted gt proceed with step 3 selector S11 LOAD position the boot loader waits until an OS and an SD card has not been update is carried out inserted The controller loads the fileautocopy ini the file could be loaded the instructions contained in it are executed the file could not be loaded proceed with step 4 The controller checks the position of selector S11 mode selector S11 RUN the application program is launched mode selector S11 STOP the application program does not start Jetter AG 61 4 Mechanical and electrical installation See Description O the position of mode selector this has no effect on the 11 is changed once the controller functioning of the controller has been turned on 62 Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation SD card slot X61 Introduction The SD card slot is for accommodating standard SD memory cards The controller accesses data stored on the SD card which is used as file system extension The SD card slot is an optional feature of the controller JC 340 SD card slot Position oN SD CARD
102. login Function FtpConnect Const Ref ServerAddr String Const Ref UserName String Const Ref PassWord String Handle Description of the function parameters ServerAddr IP address or name Name resolution by DNS server User name for logon Login Password Password for logon If the return value was positive the connection could be established and login was successful If the return value was 0 an error occurred and the connection could not be established Return value gt 0 A positive return value must be stored in a variable It must be made available as a handle at activating the following functions Terminating a connection Reading a file from the FTP server m Writing a file to the FTP server Deleting a file from the FTP server Changing a directory on the FTP server Creating a directory on the FTP server Deleting a directory from the FTP server Determining the current directory on the FTP server 0 Error when establishing a connection or logging in to the FTP server Jetter AG JC 350 FTP client The task stops at the program line until the connection is established or the timeout set for the FTP client has elapsed This function is processed in the following steps 1 The controller tries to establish a TCP IP connection to the FTP server the network client has accepted proceed with step 3 the connection established and the timeout has n
103. master JetControl is required JetControl automatically recognizes the difference between the former and the actual system configuration It assigns the new system properties to the respective places Possible system properties are Network parameters IP address port number subnet mask default gateway Parameter data Configuration data The JetSym Hardware Manager generates the configuration and parameter data The Hardware Manager transfers the data to JetControl through the feature Compare program Download The NetConsistency feature supplies a NetConsistency master defined in the system Only a JetControl can be a NetConsistency master Jetter AG 277 10 Programming Prerequisites There are the following prerequisites for using NetConsistency JetSym as of V 5 1 0 Atleast one NetConsistency master JC 940MC V 1 05 0 08 JC 945MC V 1 01 0 00 JC 340 JC 350 V 1 23 0 04 NetConsistency slaves Min 1 max 64 Produkt AB Of version JC 310 JM V 1 22 0 00 JM 200 ETH V 1 22 0 00 Ethernet axis JM xxx JM 2xx OEM V 2 07 0 37 Ethernet axis MC JM xxx JM 2xx OEM V 2 07 0 37 JX3 BN ETH V 1 18 0 02 JX3 COM EIPA V 1 01 0 00 JX3 COM PND V 1 03 0 06 Contents Topic Page NetConsistency function 00 eee eeeeeeeeeeneeeee setts eeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 279 Assigning the network parameters dependent on the GNN 05 281 Activating and deactivating JetIPScan
104. maximum number of MOCUIES ceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeetaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaas 94 Limitations of the modules data exchange rates eeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 95 Limitation depending on the power consumption of the MOdUIeS ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetees 98 Configuring the JX2 system DUS cccecssen ee eeeeee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeesseneeseeeeeeneeeeeenes 103 Wiring the JX2 system DUS secccicssccccets ictecceesccccceesetececussterccetsseeseuteeeceensenedeeesstedeeetbacerenteneceesiene 104 Line length and baud rate of the JX2 system DUS eect ee eeeeee ee eeieeeeetaeeeeeteeeeesiaeeeeee 105 JX2 System Dus topology t 2sccssietceucaied ASEE LEE E AAEE deel 106 Power supply of JX2 I O modules ccccecceceeeeeeeceecae cece eeeeceneaeaeeeeeeeseeecsaeaeeeeeeeseteenieeeeeeeettees 107 Power supply of JX2 slave modules ccccceeeeeeeececeeeeeeececaeaeeeeeeeseeeceaeaeeeeeeeseeeenieeeeeeeeneees 109 Third party CANOpen modules 2 c cececeeeee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeneeeeee sens seaeeeseseeeseesseaneeseeeens 110 Product description Module BWU1821 by Bihl Wiedemann ccceceeeeeeeeeetteeeeeenteeeeeeee 111 Product description ECOSTEP ccccccceceeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeecceaeceeeeeeesecaaaeeeeeeeeeseceuaeeeeeeeseneeed 112 Product description Festo CPV Direct cececseceeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeesececaeeeeee
105. meena User Defined Data Timeout z200 ms Baudrate Port number defaut w det AKT A JX3 BN ETH 002 X Hardware x S Configuration a Qoerationivtas otup System Z po 2 iy Hardware eS By Network S Ethernet Configuration Name BN_002 i JC 940MC Ini File Pet cpu System Pi JX2 Bus Cartier amp Diagnostic BG ETH Systembu EDS amp Enors General Program E Motion Control Subscriptions Publications User Defined Data Da a JX3 BN ETH 002 X Set the GNN at the DIP switch DIP switch sliders 1 through 8 of the JX3 BN ETH Set the operating mode GNN at the DIP switch DIP switch sliders 9 through 12 of the JX3 BN ETH 8 Launch JetSym 4 Select the device JX3 BN ETH in Hardware Manager 5 Select the tab Configuration Ea As IP Address 1 enter the IP address Select the tab Bus Node As GNN 2 enter the Global Node Number of the device The number has to match the settings of the DIP switch at the device Result IP address and GNN have been assigned to the device Jetter AG 283 10 Programming Setting the DIP switch sliders at the JX3 BN ETH Position of the DIP switch sliders at the JX3 BN ETH Compare program Download Assigned network parameters The settings of DIP switch sliders 9 through 12 activate remanent storage of the assigned network parameters in the config ini file Set DIP switch slider 9 to ON and DIP switch sliders 10 through 12 to OFF The settings of DIP switch slider
106. modules of a JX3 station exchange data either with a JC 3xx controller or with bus node modules JX3 BN CAN and JX3 BN ETH The maximum number of input and output data and of JX3 peripheral modules in a JX3 system is limited The following table lists the factors for input and output data Add the input factor of all modules used and calculate the aggregated input factor Add the output factor of all modules used and calculate the aggregated output factor Compare the aggregated factor for inputs outputs with the allowed maximum factor gt Fingangsdatenra gt 32 N Peripheriemoduie Faktor ientodui 88 Y Ausgangsdatennax N Pariphariawoduio FAKTO ostoi lt 88 where n lt 16 C E E yous yout yoo vooos S S wows o wo o o o vow a a S wwe 0 w o o eo o mero O w o o o o smer w o Jetter AG 95 4 Mechanical and electrical installation Devices not to be taken into account JX3 station Maximum configuration Engineering steps 96 The following devices are not taken into account when calculating the aggregated input output factor Controller JC 3xx Bus node JX3 BN ETH Bus node JX3 BN CAN Power supply module JX3 PS1 The table below lists the maximum allowed number of modules and the aggregated factor of input data and output data Maximum number of Aggregated input factor Aggregated output factor peripheral modules as 16 8 To engineer a JX3 station
107. names and IP addresses found in this file After the boot process the JC 350 detects a name instead of an IP address Based on this translation table the JC 350 tries to resolve the name into a related IP address the JC 350 has resolved the proceed with step 6 name the JC 350 has not resolved the proceed with step 5 name The JC 350 tries to resolve the name into a related IP address by sending a request to the DNS server name into the translation table the JC 350 has resolved the it enters the name and IP address gt proceed with step 6 the JC 350 has not resolved the the JC 350 aborts the function name e g the system function for sending an e mail and issues an error message 6 The JC 350 uses the IP address resolved for further communication This configuration file hosts holds the static assignment between names and IP addresses The JC 350 reads this file once during boot up File format Text Location etc File name hosts 88 Jetter AG JC 350 Domain Name System DNS Related topics Example Mechanical and electrical installation Example hosts file for JC 3xx 192 r92 192 192 168 33 209 168 33 208 168 1 1 168 142 jetter mail jetter demo JC340 JC350 If a name cannot be found in the file etc hosts the JC 350 tries to obtain the corresponding IP address from a DNS server During boot up the JC 350 r
108. nodes are the controller the communication modules and the bus nodes For details on characteristic features of publish subscribe please turn to chapter Hardware Manager see page 270 Publish subscribe is configured in the JetSym Hardware Manager Publish subscribe is executed by the operating system of the respective network node Publishers and subscribers are configured by means of configuration files in the file system of the network nodes The configuration file for the publisher is SysConfig JetSync Publisher pub The configuration file for the subscriber is SysConfig JetSync Subscriber sub Automatic restart of the publishers and subscribers takes place in a controller at each restart of the application program Inthe other network nodes automatic restart of the publishers and subscribers takes place during the booting phase For applying publishers and subscribers in a controller an application program must be executed with at least one task running For transferring the configuration the Hardware Manager takes the following steps Step Action 1 Stop all publishers and subscribers 2 Transfer the configuration files to all network nodes 3 Restart all publishers and subscribers Hardware Manager see page 270 260 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Publish subscribe Registers Introduction If you transmit cyclic data by publish subscribe there are several module registers availabl
109. not supported the corresponding directory must be set beforehand using the command FtpDirChange The file system of a JC 350 supports both options Available commands in the local file system Command DirCreate Function Parameter name Parameter value Allowed values Illegal values In the event of an illegal value Example Command DirRemove Function Parameter name Parameter value Allowed values Illegal values In the event of an illegal value Example Command FileCopy Function Parameter name 1 Parameter value 1 The following commands are available for access to the local file system Creates a subdirectory Path Complete directory name All valid directory names m Higher level directories are available Invalid directory name Non existent higher level directory Name of an already existing directory The controller does not generate the directory It enters the error into the log file COMMAND 1 Command DirCreate Path subl COMMAND 2 Command DirCreate Path subl sub2 Removes a subdirectory Path Complete directory name All valid directory names The directory is empty Invalid directory name Directory is not empty The controller does not delete the directory It enters the error into the log file COMMAND 8 Command DirRemove Path subl sub2 This command is for copying a file Source Complete name of the source file 578
110. number 20 The message box is able to receive CAN messages again Result Bit 1 0 in R 200010530 message box number 20 If for all message boxes the NEW DAT bit is 0 bit 1 0 in R 200010500 5 Clearing the OVERRUN bit Clears bit 2 OVERRUN in R 200010530 message box number 20 of the message box Result Bit 2 0 in R 200010530 message box number 20 6 Clearing the sending error bit Clears bit 3 Transmit error in R 200010530 message box number 20 of the message box Result Bit 3 0 in R 200010530 message box number 20 Jetter AG 553 10 Programming R 200010531 message box number 20 R 200010532 message box number 20 Module register properties Takes effect When the CAN Prim interface is enabled Message box configuration register R 200010531 message box number 20 is for configuring the message box Configuration values 0 Inbox For configuring the message box as inbox 1 Outbox For configuring the message box as outbox for standard frames 2 Outbox RTR For configuring the message box as outbox for RTR frames Module register properties Takes effect When the CAN Prim interface is enabled CAN ID In the case of an outbox a CAN message is sent using the CAN ID In the case of an inbox CAN messages with this CAN ID which is masked by the CAN ID mask are received Module register properties Values In the case of 11 bit CAN IDs 0 OX7FF In the case of 29 bit CAN IDs 0
111. number for example 222815 354 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Registers Overview Registers Overview The following table provides an overview of existing registers For a detailed description of these registers refer to the following chapters WR 2511 Maximum umber of decimal laces oser Taeot 0 Ras Peng isetat 0 OO yras Pekeng toser O R615 Suggested vawe ser O we 2624 Diss ianguege of he montor tuneion Device number for HMI 1 multi display mode MR 2826 Device number for HMI 2 multi display mode MR 2827 Device number for HMI 3 multi display mode MR 2828 Device number for HMI 4 multi display mode MR 2829 Basic flag number for HMI 1 multi display mode MR 2830 Basic flag number for HMI 2 multi display mode Basic flag number for HMI 3 multi display mode Basic flag number for HMI 4 multi display mode MR2833 Register number for LEDs on HMI 1 multi display mode MR 2834 Register number for LEDs on HMI 2 multi display mode Jetter AG 355 10 Programming Registers MR 2836 MR 2837 MR 2838 MR 2839 MR 2840 Register number for LEDs on HMI 3 multi display mode Register number for LEDs on HMI 4 multi display mode Module number Printer module Module number Serial interface module Control character for deleting the screen Control character for deleting the screen up to the end of a line 356 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming 10 9 3 Configuring the
112. numbers for JetIP and the JetSym debugger Name for AutoCopy command file Overview over the configuration memory registers som ase O toro lsn OOOO ma P aeressotaefautoatonay O mams Pass ONS sever sors hostnamesumype OOOO OOOO O O 101233 through Host name 101251 101264 Port number for JetIP 101265 Port number for STX debugger 101280 through Name for AutoCopy command file 101298 101299 Saving the settings 0x77566152 To change the configuration values to become non volatile proceed as follows Enter the desired configuration into one or several registers within the range from 101200 to 101298 To have the controller take over the values you must enter a password For this write value 2002149714 0x77566152 to register 101299 Wait for the controller to write value 0 into MR 101299 The save process is now completed 4 Boot the controller Result The settings are completed Communication is possible again Jetter AG 83 4 Mechanical and electrical installation Important note The EEPROM data on the backplane module allow for 100 000 write cycles We urgently recommend the following workflow First read out the value then compare it Only if the value has changed start writing Effect Write to register 101299 to have the controller take the following steps The controller creates a configuration file out of the values It saves the configuration file to the backpl
113. operation Jetter AG Introduction Significance of this This document is an integral part of the JC 350 user manual Keep this document in a way that it is always at hand until the JC 350 will be disposed of Pass this document on if the JC 350 is sold or loaned leased out In any case you encounter difficulties to clearly understand the contents of this document please contact Jetter AG We would appreciate any suggestions and contributions on your part and would ask you to contact us at the following e mail address info jetter de Your feedback will help us produce manuals that are more user friendly as well as address your wishes and requirements This document contains important information on the following topics Transport Mounting Installation Programming Operation Maintenance Repair Therefore you must carefully read understand and observe this document and especially the safety instructions In the case of missing or inadequate knowledge of this document Jetter AG shall be exempted from any liability Therefore the operating company is recommended to obtain the persons confirmation that they have read and understood this manual in writing 4 Jetter AG JC 350 Contents Table of Contents 1 Safety instructions 13 Basic safety IMSIrUCTIONS ss sceceiidseneek is cceeetedbenenesdccnceeassenecuidcceeet casenenesdcacuebavbateeuitacdeeed auicueveitadeeebavane 14 IMStPUCKIONS on
114. or JX3 system bus MR 2824 Device number of the default device This module register contains the device number of the default device If you always specify the default device in the application program device number 0 you can select during runtime which device is actually to be used Module register properties Values 1 11 Value after reset 2 Jetter AG 423 10 Programming Setting the length of the display field Setting the length MR 2812 lets you set the length of the display field for numerical values MR 2812 Number of figures sign decimal point Example Number of figures 6 Sign MR 2816 0 yes Decimal point None Field length MR 2812 7 Display 7 characters MR 2812 Field length for DisplayValue This module register holds the length of the display field Module register properties Values 1 12 Value after reset 11 Takes effect Next time when STX instruction DisplayValue is issued 424 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Setting the sign option Setting the sign option MR 2816 lets you set whether the sign is displayed or not In setting the display field length in MR 2812 continue to add the sign s place even if no sign is to be displayed Example Number of figures 6 Sign MR 2816 1 no Decimal point None Field length MR 2812 7 Display 6 characters MR 2816 Displaying the sign Module register properties Values 0 Sign will be displayed 1 Sig
115. or absent the controller uses the following default values IP address of the controller IP address of default gateway IP address of DNS server Controller name Suffix type of the name Ce The configuration memory is located on the backplane module Owing to this approach configuration data will be preserved when the function module is replaced The configuration file see page 73 Configuration registers see page 77 Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation The configuration file Introduction Properties File structure Configuration file Example The configuration file config ini is used to access the configuration memory of the JC 350 You can access this file through the file system of the JC 350 Foran FTP connection the user must have administrator or system rights This file is located in the folder System You cannot delete the file but only overwrite it Formatting the Flash disk drive or the SD card leaves the file unchanged The configuration file is a text file the entries of which are grouped into several sections The controller replaces missing IP configuration parameters by their default values This is an example of a configuration file config ini lt Productname gt System Configuration Copyright c 2008 by Jetter AG Ludwigsburg Germany IP Address 192 168 50 1 SubnetMask 255 255 255 0 DefGateway 192 168 50 11 DNSSer
116. or another register content to the pointer register value Examples lt JW DTAG name PR1000300 100 gt Result The content of the register is displayed whose number results from the addition of the content of register 1000300 and value 100 lt JW DTAG name PR1000300 R1000100 gt Result The content of the register is displayed whose number results from the addition of the content of register 1000300 and the content of register 1000100 lt JW DTAG name PF1000300 100 gt Result The state of the flag is displayed whose number results from the addition of the content of register 1000300 and value 100 lt JW DTAG name PF1000300 R1000100 gt Result The state of the flag is displayed whose number results from the addition of the content of register 1000300 and the content of register 1000100 lt JW DTAG name PI1000300 100 gt Result The state of the input is displayed whose number results from the addition of the content of register 1000300 and the value 100 Jetter AG 209 9 HTTP server lt JW DTAG name PI1000300 R1000100 gt Result The state of the input is displayed whose number results from the addition of the content of register 1000300 and the content of register 1000100 lt JW DTAG name PO1000300 100 gt Result The state of the output is displayed whose number results from the addition of the content of register 1000300 and the value 100 lt JW DTAG na
117. own IP address or its own default gateway to the bus node Product Assigned default gateway JC 940MC and JC 945MC if only ETH1 Default gateway of the controller has been configured JC 940MC and JC 945MC if ETH2 IP address of ETH1 of the controller and or ETH3 have been configured JC 340 JC 350 Default gateway of the controller At system launch the bus nodes use the GNN set via their own DIP switch sliders 1 to 8 This applies until the network parameters configured in the Hardware Manager via JetControl which is the NetConsisteny master are assigned to the bus node Remanent storing via NetConsistency of the network parameters assigned last is not implemented We recommend When configuring the bus nodes in the Hardware Manager use the GNN as least significant byte of the IP address Jetter AG 279 10 Programming System launch of the JX3 BN ETH The network parameters assigned by NetConsistency are saved to the remanent store in the config ini file of the JX3 BN ETH when the DIP switch sliders 9 through 12 of the JX3 BN ETH are in the position listed below DIP switch Position 9 ON 10 OFF 11 OFF 12 OFF The GNN of the JX3 BN ETH is configured via DIP switch sliders 1 through 8 The coding is binary which means that for example switch 3 in position ON means GNN 4 At system launch the JX3 BN ETH applies the network parameters which are stored in System config ini Immediately after this the ne
118. place simultaneous and independent communication via RS 232 is not possible 132 Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation Multi display mode Wiring Wiring There are no prefabricated cables for connecting several displays or HMIs to a controller Assemble the cables for multi display mode according to the following block diagram SDB 5 SDA 7 RDB 3 RDA 1 D D D D Jetter AG 133 4 Mechanical and electrical installation Ca E Jack X11 Serial interface of the JC 350 Shielding Use shielded cables both ends of which are connected to the metallized housing of the connector Power supply If several displays and HMls are used each of them must be individually connected to the power supply Interfaces of displays and HMIs Cable specification The following minimum requirements apply to cable sets Parameter Description Shielding Complete shielding no paired shielding 134 Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation Interface cable JC DK Xm Introduction Male connector specification controller end Male connector specification HMI end Specifications of connecting cable Cable shielding The interface cable JC DK Xm lets you connect displays or HMIs to the JC 350 For information on connector specification refer to the list below Recommended core cross section 0 128 0 051 mm For information on connector specification refer to the list bel
119. point None Field length MR 2812 7 Display 6 characters MR 2816 Displaying the sign Module register properties Values 0 Sign will be displayed 1 Sign will not be displayed Takes effect Next time when STX instruction DisplayValue is issued Jetter AG 375 10 Programming Setting the number of decimal places Setting the number of The number of decimal places is set in MR 2810 decimal places If you add decimal places you might have to adjust the length of the display field in MR 2812 Reason The decimal point requires one place in the display field MR 2810 Number of decimal places for DisplayValue instructions This module register holds the number of decimal places when displaying numerical values Module register properties Values 0 4 Takes effect Next time when STX instruction DisplayValue is issued 376 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Setting the format of numerical values Setting the format of numerical values Flag 2060 In setting the format of numerical values you have the choice between decimal or hexadecimal format Flag 2060 lets you set the format of numerical values Format of numerical values Flag properties Values 0 Decimal 1 Hexadecimal Takes effect Next time when STX instruction DisplayValue is issued Jetter AG 377 10 Programming 10 9 6 Entering numerical values Introduction STX instruction Formatting the Values to be Entered Keys to be used
120. program Default path Introduction When uploading the application program from JetSym to the controller this program is stored as a file to the internal flash disk The device enters the path and file name into the file app start ini Path and file name In the directory app JetSym by default creates a subdirectory and assigns the project name to it Then JetSym stores the application program to this subdirectory assigning the extension es3 to it The path and file names are always converted into lower case letters app start ini Structure This file is a text file with one section holding two entries O tement aware Project Path to the application program file This path is relative to app Name of the application program file Example Startup Project test _ program Program test _program es3 Result The application program is loaded from the file lapp test_program test_program es3 Related topics Storing the application program to the SD card see page 607 606 Jetter AG JC 350 Application program The application program is stored to the SD card Introduction Prerequisites Storing the application program to the SD card app start ini Structure Related topics When uploading the application program from JetSym to the controller the default storage for application programs is used If you want the device to read the application program from the SD card you have to config
121. rate of the controller in R 200002029 Baud rate JX2 system bus 2 Switch off the controller and all modules on the JX2 system bus za Adjust the baud rate on all modules without Auto Baud Rate 4 Switch on the controller and all modules on the JX2 system bus 432 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Result When initializing the JX2 system bus the adjusted baud rate values were used Jetter AG 433 10 Programming Dummy modules on the JX2 system bus Dummy modules Registers Overview Allowed dummy modules Modules with Address Selector Configuring dummy modules Ein Dummy Modul ist ein Modul am JX2 Systembus das physikalisch nicht vorhanden ist When assigning I O and slave module numbers the controller JC 350 treats dummy modules as if they were existing modules Dummy modules allow the user to insert a non existent module between existing modules The value contained in the registers for dummy module configuration is remanent Any changes become effective only after the controller JC 350 has been re booted R 200002023 I O dummy modules R 200002024 JX2 Slave dummy modules JX2 I O modules JX2 slave modules JetMove 1xx 2xx und 6xx Not all modules on the JX2 system bus can be configured as dummy module Modules with address selector are configured by means of this address selector The controller fills vacant positions between addresses in the module array with dummy modules
122. registers can be used for debugging or diagnostic purposes However they can t be used for other functions such as establishing or terminating a connection Contents Topic Page Register NUMDETS eeeeeceee ene eeeeenneeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 536 Register description eee eeececeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 537 Jetter AG 535 10 Programming Register numbers Introduction Register numbers Determining the register number Register overview 536 Data of one connection each are displayed within the registers of a coherent register block The basic register number of this block is dependent on the controller Basic register number Register numbers JC 350 350000 350000 350007 In this chapter only the last figure of a register number is specified for example MR 1 To determine the complete module register number add to this figure the basic register number of the corresponding device for example 350000 Number of sent bytes Number of received bytes Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Register description Introduction The operating system manages the established connections in a list Module register MR 0 Selection of a connection is used to copy connection details into other registers of a register block MR 0 Selecting a connection Connections are selected by writing values to this register Read access to this register is used to
123. store data which must be maintained when the JC 350 is de energized Properties Global variables which are assigned to permanent addresses VL Register variables always occupy 4 bytes Register variables are not initialized by the operating system Number of register variables 30 000 Register numbers 1000000 1029999 Memory access By JetSym By the e mail client By browser via HTTP server From HMls From the application program From other controllers 220 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Speicher fur nichtfluchtige Variablen desAnwendungsprogramms Introduction Non volatile variables let you store data which must be maintained when the JC 350 is de energized Properties Global variables which are assigned to permanent registers RL Variables are stored in a compact way Size 120 000 bytes Register numbers 1000000 1029999 Memory access By JetSym From HMIs From the application program Jetter AG 221 10 Programming Registers on I O modules Introduction These registers are located on modules connected to the JX2 or JX3 system bus Properties Global variables which are assigned to permanent addresses VL Type depending on the module Register numbers on JX3 system bus 100020000 100179999 Register numbers on JX2 system bus 200002000 100019999 Memory access By JetSym By the e mail client By browser via HTTP server From HMls From the app
124. the following steps Description o KAR controller sends a command to the FTP server that it has to create a subdirectory 2 The FTP server creates the directory FTP server creates the The FTP server creates the directory no errors have occurred the new directory has been created the function is terminated and value 0 is returned errors have occurred the function is terminated and a negative value is returned Jetter AG 191 8 FTP client Directory names Restrictions regarding the file system of a JetControl Related topics If the file system of the remote network node supports this the function parameter for the directory located on the FTP server can also contain the complete path including several subdirectories leading to this directory If this feature is not supported the user must navigate from one directory level to the next until the desired directory is reached This is done using the command FtpDirChange The file system of a JC 350 supports both options If you specify a directory with the corresponding path as function parameter all directories up to the directory you want to create must exist Recursive creation of several directories is not supported Example Result FtpDirCreate FtpHandle DataFiles TextFiles Release To be able to create the folder Release in the directory tree DataFiles TextFiles the directories must already exist
125. the screen This module register contains the ASCII code of the control character which causes the screen to be cleared Module register properties Values 0 255 Value after reset 95 _ Takes effect Next time when STX instruction DisplayText or DisplayText2 is issued MR 2840 Control character for clearing the screen up to the end of a line This module register contains the ASCII code of the control character which causes the screen to be cleared up to the end of a line Module register properties Values 0 255 Value after reset 36 Takes effect Next time when STX instruction DisplayText or DisplayText2 is issued Jetter AG 367 10 Programming 10 9 5 Displaying numerical values Introduction STX instruction Formatting the display format Displaying numerical values This chapter describes displaying numerical values on HMls and how to parameterize the corresponding STX instruction These numerical values may be constants or contents of registers and variables To display numerical values use the following STX instruction DisplayValue The display format of numerical values can be adapted to suit your needs The following parameters can be adjusted Display length Number of decimal places With or without sign Displaying values in decimal or hexadecimal notation When displaying numerical values the following formatting applies The numerical value is displayed right a
126. the server for the Domain Name System Allowed values gt 0 0 0 0 and m lt 223 255 255 255 In the event of an illegal JC 350 sets the value to 0 0 0 0 value 74 Jetter AG JC 350 Section HOSTNAME Mechanical and electrical installation In section HOSTNAME the name of the JC 350 is specified If desired the JC 350 automatically generates an individual name The JC 350 presently does not use the host name SuffixType In the given example Description Allowed values In the event of an illegal value Name In the given example Description Allowed values In the event of an illegal value Section PORTS 0 The type of the automatically generated suffix is attached to the controller name 0 No suffix 1 Low order byte of the IP address in decimal notation 2 Low order byte of the IP address in hexadecimal notation JetControl350 Specifies the name of the JC 350 First character A Z a Next characters A Z a JetControl350 Z yap 0 a 9 E In section PORTS the IP port numbers of data and debug servers within the JC 350 are specified The IP port numbers must be consistent with for example the port numbers set in JetSym JetIPBase In the given example Description Allowed values In the event of an illegal value JVMDebug In the given example Description Allowed values In the event of an illegal value 50000 IP port for OS
127. voltage of the JX3 system bus Power consumption absorbed from the 18 W max additional voltage of the JX3 system bus 24V Lay SY lt 18W Y 085 Total power consumption of connected JX3 modules supplied by power supply voltage from the controller JC 350 Memory configurations i Number of remanent registers 30 000 Remanent memory for variables 120 000 bytes Flash disk 4 MBytes Jetter AG 627 Appendix Technical data z 7 5 z Real time clock Power reserve Minimum 1 week if the controller has been running for at least 1 hour Typical 2 weeks Deviation Maximum 1 min per month 628 Jetter AG JC 350 Appendix Physical dimensions Physical dimensions Minimum clearances At mounting the controller JC 350 a minimum clearance above and below must be maintained This way there must be enough room to press the latches of the backplane module when replacing modules Minimum clearance above 30 mm Minimum clearance below 25 mm Module width The width of the controller JC 350 is 56 mm When the controller JC 350 is attached to a JX3 station its width increases by 50 mm Mounting orientation The orientation of the controller JC 350 is vertical Jetter
128. with 15 pin Sub D length 2 5 m 60864360 KAY_0386 0500 JetControl to LCD 60 with 15 pin Sub D length 5 m 138 Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation Interface cable KAY_0533 0025 Introduction Male connector specification controller end Female connector specification HMI end Specifications of connecting cable Cable shielding The interface cable KAY_0533 0025 lets you connect HMls of the type LCD 52 LCD 54 and LCD 54Z to the JC 350 For information on connector specification refer to the list below Recommended core cross section 0 128 0 051 mm For information on female connector specification refer to the list below Type 15 pin female Sub D connector in metallized housing quality grade 3 Recommended core cross section 0 25 0 128 mm For information on cable specification refer to the list below Nummercfores Complete shielding no paired shielding The shield must be connected to the connector housings on both ends of the cable with the greatest possible surface area Place the shield as follows e Connect the shield by its greatest possible surface area e Clamp it under a strain relief e Wrap it with copper foil Jetter AG 139 4 Mechanical and electrical installation Wiring diagram The interface cable KAY_0533 0025 is wired as follows Controller LCD 52 54 54Z SER X11 Connect shield with the greatest possible surface a
129. 0 0x7FF in all message boxes 9 Set the standard ID length to 29 bits The ID length for all CAN messages is set to 29 bits Result Bit 2 1 in R 200010500 R 200010506 0 R 200010507 0 R 200010542 message box number 20 0x7FFFFFFF in all message boxes 548 Jetter AG JC 350 R 200010503 R 200010504 Programming CAN Prim interface Commands 10 Checking message boxes for receiving new messages The CAN Prim interface automatically checks the inbox for new CAN messages Command 10 forces manual checking of pending messages By now issuing command 10 is not obligatory any more Module register properties Takes effect When the CAN Prim interface is enabled FIFO buffer filling level R 200010503 shows if further CAN messages have been received as well as the number of messages Subtracting the number read first from the number read next renders the number of new messages received Module register properties Values Number of received messages 0 16 Type of access Read Takes effect When the CAN Prim interface is enabled FIFO data R 200010504 shows which of the messages boxes has received the latest new CAN message Read access to R 200010504 removes the value which has been read last from the FIFO buffer This access decrements the value of R 200010503 by one Note Each read access to this register even via an active JetSym setup screen decrements the number of received CAN mes
130. 0 0x611 0x612 0x613 0x614 0x615 0x616 0x617 0x618 0x619 0x61A 0x61B 0x61C 0x61D 0x61E 0x61F 0x620 0x701 0x702 0x703 0x704 0x705 0x706 0x707 0x708 0x709 0x70A 0x70B 0x70C 0x70D Ox70E 0x70F 0x710 0x711 0x712 0x713 0x714 0x715 0x716 0x717 0x718 0x719 0x71A 0x71B 0x71C 0x71D 0x71E 0x71F 0x720 Jetter AG 543 10 Programming Modules on the JX2 system bus BWU1821 LJX7 CSL 544 Earmarked CAN IDs 0x281 0x282 0x283 0x284 0x285 0x286 0x287 0x288 0x289 0x28A 0x28B 0x28C 0x28D 0x28E Ox28F 0x290 0x291 0x292 0x293 0x294 0x295 0x296 0x297 0x298 0x299 0x29A 0x29B 0x29C 0x29D Ox29E 0x29F 0x301 0x302 0x303 0x304 0x305 0x306 0x307 0x308 0x309 0x30A 0x30B 0x30C 0x30D 0x30E 0x30F 0x310 0x311 0x312 0x313 0x314 0x315 0x316 0x317 0x318 0x319 0x31A 0x31B 0x31C 0x31D 0x31E 0x31F 0x481 0x482 0x483 0x484 0x485 0x486 0x487 0x488 0x489 0x48A 0x48B 0x48C 0x48D 0x48E 0x48F 0x490 0x491 0x492 0x493 0x494 0x495 0x496 0x497 0x498 0x499 0x49A 0x49B 0x49C 0x49D 0x49E 0x49F 0x501 0x502 0x503 0x504 0x505 0x506 0x507 0x508 0x509 0x50A 0x50B 0x50C 0x50D Ox50E 0x50F 0x510 0x511 0x512 0x513 0x514 0x515 0x516 0x517 0x518 0x519 0x51A 0x51B 0x51C 0x51D 0x51E 0x51F 0x5C6 0x5C7 0x5C8 0x5C9 0x5CA 0x5CB 0x5CC 0x5CD 0x5CE 0x5CF 0x646 0x647 0x648 0x649 0x64A 0x64B 0x64C 0x64D Ox64
131. 0 ms Module register properties Type of access Read only Value after reset 20 corresponds to a monitoring interval of 200 ms R 200002073 Timeout for register access to CANopen modules This timeout applies to access to the following registers CANopen modules R 200007000 R 20007999 IP67 modules R 200003000 R 20003249 Values 1 255 Timeout in milliseconds Module register properties Value after reset 20 ms R 200002074 CANopen SYNC Interval The controller sends a SYNC telegram according to the CANopen specification to the bus at configurable intervals The following CANopen modules need the SYNC telegram Lenze 2175 CANopen DeviceNet for connecting a vector 8200 Lenze CANopen PT for connecting a vector 8200 Values 0 SYNC telegram disabled 1 255 SYNC interval in milliseconds Jetter AG 445 10 Programming R 200002763 R 200002764 Module register properties Value after reset No Lenze vector 8200 present 0 ms Lenze vector 8200 present 100 ms Timeout for I O update of I O modules The response to I O updates of I O modules must be within the configured timeout time JX2 I O modules Values 1 255 ms Timeout in milliseconds Module register properties Value after reset 10 ms Timeout at register access to I O modules The response to register access to I O modules must be within the configured timeout time a JX2 I O modules Values
132. 000 9999 This lets you directly access all JX3 module registers of the remote network node Via network a controller and a bus node JX3 BN ETH are connected A JX3 Al4 module is connected to the bus node IP address 192 168 10 14 IP port 50000 Task The trailing indicator of the analog channel 4 peak value is to be read Solution You create a JetSym STX program by taking the following steps Register 235003 is loaded with the IP address of the bus node Register 235403 is loaded with the IP port of the bus node The value of network register 1003021421 is assigned to a local variable Jetter AG 249 10 Programming Indirect addressing of remote modules Introduction Registers Overview Indirect network register access 236000 zzz 1nnn980zzz Indirect addressing of network registers lets you access registers of a remote network node First enter the number of the remote node register into a table of register numbers in the local controller Content indexing of this table is carried out via the three low order figures of the network register number Overview of the registers allowing indirect addressing of remote nodes Register Value range Properties 236000 236199 Register table for the register numbers Register array for the Content 1nnn980000 1nnn980199 Note on the contents of the table nnn GNN in the range 000 199 zzz inthe range 000 1
133. 00010534 Data byte 1 R 200010535 Data byte 7 R 200010541 Acknowledge that the message has been received R 200010543 4 Result if message was successfully received Bit 1 0 in R 200010530 Jetter AG 563 10 Programming CAN Prim interface Sample program Task CAN messages with CAN ID 0x200 are to be sent via CAN Prim interface On receipt a CAN message with CAN ID 0x277 is to be sent Solution The data are sent and received via CAN Prim interface To this end a message box is configured as inbox for CAN ID 0x200 Asecond message box is configured as outbox with CAN ID 0x277 Configuration In this example the CAN Prim interface of a JC 350 is used 564 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Using CAN ID masks Introduction Usually the CAN Prim interface receives only CAN messages with a CAN ID which matches the configured CAN ID of the message box You can use a mask to expand CAN IDs of a message box which are to be received Each message box has got a CAN ID and a CAN ID mask of its own bit 0 in R 200010542 message box the bit of the CAN ID received is not number 20 evaluated bit 1 in R 200010542 message box the bit of the CAN ID received must number 20 match the configured CAN ID Jetter AG 565 10 Programming RTR frames via CAN Prim interface RTR frames RTR Remote Transmission Request frames are a type of message specific to CAN Using an RTR frame a CAN
134. 0x382 0x383 0x384 0x385 0x386 0x387 0x388 0x389 0x38A 0x38B 0x38C 0x38D 0x38E 0x38F 0x390 0x391 0x392 0x393 0x394 0x395 0x396 0x397 0x398 0x399 0x39A 0x39B 0x39C 0x39D 0x39E 0x39F 0x3A0 0x3A1 0x3A2 0x3A3 0x3A4 0x3A5 0x3A6 0x3A7 0x3A8 0x3A9 0x3AA 0x3AB 0x3AC Ox3AD Ox3AE 0x3AF 0x3B0 0x3B1 0x3B2 0x3B3 0x3B4 0x3B5 0x3B6 0x3B7 0x3B8 0x3B9 0x3BA Ox3BB Ox3BE 0x3BF 541 10 Programming Modules on the JX2 system bus JX2 slave modules JX3 modules Earmarked CAN IDs 0x081 0x082 0x083 0x084 0x085 0x086 0x087 0x088 0x089 0x08A 0x08B 0x08C 0x08D Ox08E Ox08F 0x090 OxO09F Ox0A0 0x0A1 Ox0A2 0x0A3 Ox0A4 0x0A5 Ox0A6 0x0A7 Ox0A8 0x0A9 Ox0AA OxO0AB Ox0AC Ox0AD OxOAE OxOAF 0x161 0x162 0x163 0x164 0x165 0x166 0x167 0x168 0x169 0x16A 0x16B 0x16C 0x16D 0x16E 0x16F 0x1D1 0x1D2 0x1D3 0x1D4 0x1D5 0x1D6 0x1D7 0x1D8 0x1D9 0x1DA 0x1DB 0x1DC 0x1DD 0x1DE 0x1DF 0x180 0x181 0x182 0x183 0x184 0x185 0x186 0x187 0x188 0x189 0x18A 0x18B 0x18C 0x18D 0x18E 0x18F 0x190 0x191 0x192 0x193 0x194 0x195 0x196 0x197 0x198 0x199 0x19A 0x19B 0x19C 0x19D 0x19E 0x19F 0x1A0 0x1A1 0x1A2 0x1A3 0x1A4 0x1A5 0x1A6 0x1A7 0x1A8 0x1A9 0x1AA 0x1AB 0x1AC 0x1AD 0x1AE 0x1AF 0x1B0 0x1B1 0x1B2 0x1B3 0x1B4 0x1B5 0x1B6 0x1B7 0x1B8 0x1B9 0x1BA 0x1BB 0x1BC 0x1BD Ox1BE Ox1BF 0x320 0x321 0x322 0x323 0x324
135. 1 Special flags Interface monitoring 2088 2089 2090 2091 2098 2099 Error in networking via JetIP Ethernet system bus error in R 200008 Ethernet system bus error OS flag JetIP User flag JetIP OS flag SER User flag SER OS flag Debug server User flag Debug server Special flags HMIs 2160 2161 2162 2163 2164 2165 2166 2167 2168 does not apply to LCD 27 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 620 Jetter AG JC 350 Quick reference JC 3xx 2169 9 2220 H 2221 SHIFT 2170 SHIFT 0 2222 2171 SHIFT 1 2223 SHIFT 2172 SHIFT 2 2173 SHIFT 3 2224 LED of F1 2174 SHIFT 4 2225 LED of F2 2175 SHIFT 5 2226 LED of F3 2176 SHIFT 6 2227 LED of F4 2177 SHIFT 7 2228 LED of F5 2178 SHIFT 8 2229 LED of F6 2179 SHIFT 9 2230 LED of F7 2231 LED of F8 2181 SHIFT F1 2232 LED of F9 2182 SHIFT F2 2233 LED of F10 2183 SHIFT F3 9034 LED of F11 2184 SHIFT F4 2235 LED of F12 2185 SHIFT F5 2186 SHIFT F6 2187 SHIFT F7 Special flags for HMI LCD 27 2188 SHIFT F8 2209 tl 2189 SHIFT F9 2210 u 2190 SHIFT F10 2211 Ic 2191 SHIFT F11 2212 4 2192 SHIFT F12 3483 SHIFT Special flags for HMI NUM 25 2194 SHIFT gt 2186 SHIFT S1 2195 SHIFT R 2187 SHIFT S2 2196 SHIFT O 2188 SHIFT S3 2197 SHIFT 2189 SHIFT S4 2198 SHIFT C C 2190 SHIFT
136. 1 Bit 3 LED D2 LEDR 0 OFF 1 Flashing slowly 2 Flashing fast 3 ON LEDE 0 OFF 1 Flashing slowly 2 Flashing fast 3 ON LED D1 0 OFF 1 Flashing slowly 2 Flashing fast 3 ON LED D2 0 OFF 1 Flashing slowly 2 Flashing fast 3 ON LED SD 0 OFF 3 ON LEDs U1 through U4 on off bit coded Bit 0 LED U1 Bit 1 LED U2 Bit 2 LED U3 Bit 3 LED U4 DIP switch All switches DIP switch Address DIP switch Mode Jetter AG 611 14 Quick reference JC 3xx 108015 Mode selector 1 LOAD 2 RUN 3 STOP 108020 Revision of the backplane module 108021 CPU board revision 108099 Clear EEPROM 0x12345678 108100 EEPROM registers on the backplane module 108227 General system registers 200000 OS version major 100 minor 200001 Application program is running bit 0 1 0 2 Stop program 1 Start program 3 Continue program 200008 Error register 1 identical with 210004 Bit 0 Error on flash disk Bit 1 Error on JX3 system bus Bit 2 Error on JX2 system bus Bit 3 Error on Ethernet system bus Bit 7 Error in expanded error register Bit 8 Illegal jump Bit 9 Illegal call Bit 10 Illegal index Bit 11 Illegal opcode Bit 12 Division by 0 Bit 13 Stack overflow Bit 14 Stack underflow Bit 15 Illegal stack Bit 16 Error when loading the application program Bit 17 Memory protection violated Bit 24 Timeout Cycle time Bit 25 Timeout Task lock Bit 31 Unknow
137. 16 4291 1609 1616 1701 1708 4292 1701 1708 1709 1716 4293 1709 1716 1801 1808 4294 1801 1808 1809 1816 4295 1809 1816 1901 1908 4296 1901 1908 1909 1916 4297 1909 1916 2001 2008 4298 2001 2008 2009 2016 4299 2009 2016 2101 2108 4300 2101 2108 2109 2116 4301 2109 2116 2201 2208 4302 2201 2208 2209 2216 4303 2209 2216 2301 2308 4304 2301 2308 2309 2316 4305 2309 2316 2401 2408 4306 2401 2408 2409 2416 8 combined outputs JX3 system bus 100000000 JX2 system bus 200000000 Network 1GNN910000 4320 101 108 4321 109 116 4322 201 208 4323 209 216 4324 301 308 4325 309 316 4326 401 408 4327 409 416 4328 501 508 4329 509 516 4330 601 608 4331 609 616 4332 701 708 4333 709 716 4334 801 808 4335 4336 4337 4338 4339 4340 4341 4342 4343 4344 4345 4346 4347 4348 4349 4350 4351 4352 4353 4354 4355 4356 4357 4358 4359 4360 4361 4362 4363 4364 4365 4366 4367 809 816 901 908 909 916 1001 1009 1101 1109 1201 1209 1301 1309 1401 1409 1501 1509 1601 1609 1701 1709 1801 1809 1901 1909 2001 2009 2101 2109 2201 2209 2301 2309 2401 2409 1008 1016 1108 1116 1208 1216 1308 1316 1408 1416 1508 1516 1608 1616 1708 1716 1808 1816 1908 1916 2008 2016 2108 2116 2208 2216 2308 2316 2408 2416 Special flags for networks 2075 2080 208
138. 2023 Adummy module is a module on the JX3 system bus that actually does not exist When assigning I O module numbers the controller JC 350 and the bus node JX3 BN xxx treat dummy modules as if they were existing modules Dummy modules allow the user to insert a nonexistent module between existing modules The value contained in the register for dummy module configuration is non volatile Any changes become effective only after the module has been re initialized R 100002023 1 0 dummy modules JX3 modules Modify the dummy module configuration within the controller via R 100002023 2 Switch the controller off Then switch the controller on Result The controller or bus node has initialized the JX3 system bus taking into account the configured dummy modules Information from the dummy modules can be retrieved via module array Dummy modules Module register properties Values 1 65535 bit coded Bit 0 gt module 2 Bit 1 gt module 3 Bit 15 gt module 17 Bit 1 Module may exist Bit 0 Dummy module Value after reset 65535 all modules may exist Jetter AG 453 10 Programming JX3 system bus Description of non volatile registers Introduction Non volatile registers let you configure the JX3 system bus Any changes to a non volatile register become effective only after the JC 350 has been re booted R 100002023 I O dummy modules Each bit in this register represents an I O modu
139. 203142 6 203129 6 IC 394 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming em TM itn tn 16 bit overlaying 32 bit overlaying SHIFT 2 SHIFTS 20812813 o 203128414 SHIFT S4 2189 203140 13 203128 13 SHIFT S5 2190 203140 14 203128 14 Jetter AG 395 10 Programming Registers of basic flag numbers Introduction Multi display mode lets you set the basic flag numbers for HMI keys via registers MR 2829 Basic flag number for device 1 This module register contains the basic flag number for HMI 1 Module register properties Values 160 2080 Value after reset 2000 Takes effect On the next operation of a key MR 2830 Basic flag number for device 2 This module register contains the basic flag number for HMI 2 Module register properties Values 160 2080 Value after reset 2000 Takes effect On the next operation of a key MR 2831 Basic flag number for device 3 This module register contains the basic flag number for HMI 3 Module register properties Values 160 2080 Value after reset 2000 Takes effect On the next operation of a key 396 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming MR 2832 Basic flag number for device 4 This module register contains the basic flag number for HMI 4 Module register properties Values 160 2080 Value after reset 2000 Takes effect On the next operation of a key Jetter AG 397 10 Programming 10 9 8 Activating deactivating LEDs Introducti
140. 250 type REAL format 0 FHT factor 3 25 offset 500 Result This instruction causes the contents of register 1000250 to be multiplied by 3 25 Then 500 is added to the product The result appears in the Web browser with sign and at least five integer positions before the decimal point Leading zeros are added as appropriate Furthermore three decimal positions are added Flags The variable name begins with a capital F followed by the flag number The following types are possible Type Notation BOOL standard type Flag 0 gt Display 0 Flag 1 gt Display 1 STRING Flag 0 gt Display FALSE Flag 1 gt Display TRUE Example lt JW DTAG name F100 type STRING format gt 474 Jetter AG JC 350 Inputs Outputs Programming Result The state of flag 100 is displayed as string T or F The variable name begins with a capital followed by the input number The following types are possible weston BOOL standard type Input 0 gt Display 0 Input 1 gt Display 1 STRING Input 0 gt Display OFF Input 1 gt Display ON Example lt JW DTAG name 1100000308 type STRING gt Result The state of input 100000308 is displayed as string ON or OFF The variable name begins with a capital O followed by the output number The following types are possible ection BOOL standard type Output 0 gt Display 0 Output 1
141. 3 XI 8 9 mi eC 9 Male Sub D connector 9 pin For connection to BUS OUT EA Female Sub D connector For connection to BUS IN 9 pin Not connected Do not connect these pins Jetter AG 51 4 Mechanical and electrical installation Male Sub D connector Pinout of the 9 pin male Sub connector at the JX2 system bus cable Pin Signatname Deseripton CMODEO Commissioning CAN L Data signal GND Reference potential CMODE1 Commissioning TERM Short circuited with pin 3 7 CAN H Data signal Female Sub D connector Pinout of the 9 pin female Sub D connector to the JX2 system bus cable Pin Signainame Deseripton CMODEO Commissioning CAN L Data signal GND Reference potential CMODE1 Commissioning 7 CAN H Data signal 52 Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation Line length and baud rate of the JX2 system bus Cable lengths Rules for calculating the stub length Baud rate The maximum cable length depends on the baud rate used and the number of expansion modules connected to the bus Cable length Stub length Total stub length When engineering the line length follow the rules listed below Each non intelligent JX2 I O module connected to the system bus reduces the maximum line length by 1 0 m Each connected intelligent JX2 l O slave module reduces the maximum line length by 1 0 m Each JetMove reduces the maximum line length by 1 0 m
142. 350 104533 IP address of default gateway To set the IP address and the subnet mask proceed as follows Enter the value 0 0 0 0 into 104533 Enter the value 0 0 0 0 into 104532 Enter the desired IP address into register 104531 4 Enter the desired subnet mask into register 104532 5 Enter the desired IP address of the Default Gateway into 104533 Result The settings are completed Communication is possible again The configuration memory see page 72 85 4 Mechanical and electrical installation IP address in the GNN operating mode Introduction In GNN mode Global Network Number mode the JC 350 functions as a network node within a greater controller network It derives its IP address at booting from the configuration file config ini Next the main controller which is the NetConsistency master commands the network node to log in with the GNN from the NetConsistency master After accepting the network node the main controller compares the set IP configuration with the actual IP configuration of the network node If a difference results the main controller makes the corresponding changes in the set IP configuration in the network node Configuration file Set the IP address in the configuration file config ini Setting the IP address IP Address aaa bbb ccc ddd tometer DIP switch settings The following DIP switch settings cause the JC 350 to read out the IP address from the file c
143. 4 characters Numeric keypad each LCD 52 4 lines of 6 function keys KAY 0533 0025 16 characters Numeric keypad each yP LCD 54 4 lines of 8 function keys KAY 0533 0025 16 characters Numeric keypad each Emergency stop LCD 54Z 4 lines of 8 function keys KAY 0533 0025 16 characters Numeric keypad each Emergency stop Two hand control device LCD 60 2 lines of 8 function keys with KAY 0386 xxxx 40 characters LED each Numeric keypad LCD 110 4 lines of 8 function keys with JC DK Xm 20 characters LED each Numeric keypad 130 Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation Connecting a display or HMI Connecting a display or There are prefabricated cables for connecting a display or HMI made by HMI Jetter AG to a JC 350 We recommend to use the prefabricated cables listed in the above table Interface Connect the display or HMI via serial interface to jack X11 To do so apply connections to interface standard RS 422 Jeter 7 8 9 R Jf Je sd Lille Jli E Qo crete Jteli ls Goe ie oJ Restrictions Irrespective of the fact that various hardware drivers have been implemented only one hardware interface is available This means While for example communication via RS 422 is taking place simultaneous and indepen
144. 413 10 Programming Registers Overview Registers Overview The following table provides you with an overview of existing registers For a detailed description of these registers refer to the following chapters MR 2806 Text selection DisplayText2 MR 2810 Number of decimal places DisplayValue Field length DisplayValue MR 2824 Indirect device number Device number of default device MR 2837 Module number Printer module MR 2816 Displaying the sign MR 2838 Module number serial interface module 414 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming 10 10 3 Module numbers Interface modules Introduction To be able to redirect display instructions to a printer or serial interface module connected to the JX2 or JX3 system bus the module number must be set Redirection to an internal user programmable serial interface is clearly defined by the device number Therefore no configuration effort is required Contents Topic Page Configuring module NUMDETS eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteee settee eetneeeeetneeeeee 416 Jetter AG 415 10 Programming Configuring module numbers Determining module numbers MR 2837 MR 2838 The module number to be entered is calculated based on the number of the module on the system bus plus a constant value considering the system bus Module number number of the module system bus constant System bus System bus constant JX2 200 Module number
145. 50 JC 350 4 W M Corresponds to the information on the nameplate Hardware revision 00 Hardware option 32 Jetter AG JC 350 Section PRODUCTION Section FEATURES EDS file of JX3 modules Identifying The serial number and production date can be seen from section PRODUCTION Name ampe Dosenipton SerNum 20090513070001 Corresponds to the information on the nameplate In the section FEATURES special properties of the controller are specified The OS of the controller will ignore properties of missing entries in the file O Name Example O Desorption Version Version of this section MAC Addr Ethernet MAC address Serial The serial interface is available Switch A RUN STOP LOAD switch is available 1 STX Runtime environment for application program is available NVRegs Number of remanent registers mes 4 Number of supported X2 ans modules For examples of EDS files for JX3 modules refer to the manual of the corresponding module Jetter AG 33 3 Identifying Related topics EDS registers see page 35 34 Jetter AG JC 350 EDS registers Introduction Register numbers Readable data Jetter AG Identifying EDS registers let you retrieve entries in the Electronic Data Sheet EDS The basic register number is dependent on the controller The register number is calculated by adding the number of the module register MR to the number of the basic register Device Basic register
146. 6 1088 1120 1152 1184 1216 1248 1280 1312 1344 1376 1408 1440 1472 1000000 1000001 1000002 1000003 1000004 1000005 1000006 1000007 1000008 1000009 1000010 1000011 1000012 1000013 1000014 1000015 1000016 1000017 1000018 1000019 1000020 1000021 1000022 1000023 1000024 1000025 1000026 1000027 1000028 1000029 1000030 1000031 1000032 1000033 1000034 1000035 1000036 1000037 1000038 176 192 208 224 240 191 207 223 239 255 2079 2111 2143 2175 2207 2239 2271 2303 2063 2079 2095 2111 2127 2143 2159 2175 2191 2207 2223 2239 2255 2271 2287 2303 287 319 351 383 415 447 479 511 543 575 607 639 671 703 735 767 799 831 863 895 927 959 991 1023 1055 1087 1119 1151 1183 1215 1247 1279 1311 1343 1375 1407 1439 1471 1503 1000039 1000040 1000041 1000042 1000043 1000044 1000045 1000046 1000047 1000048 1000049 1000050 1000051 1000052 1000053 1000054 1000055 1504 1536 1568 1600 1632 1664 1696 1728 1760 1792 1824 1856 1888 1920 1952 1984 2016 1535 1567 1599 1631 1663 1695 1727 1759 1791 1823 1855 1887 1919 1951 1983 2015 2047 622 Jetter AG JC 350 Quick reference JC 3xx System function For reasons of compatibility the system functions are l
147. 6 2W Check for permitted power consumption For JC 3xx For JX3 PS1 Poy lt 6W P y lt 6W Pay S18W Paay lt 24W The number of JX3 A04 modules is limited by the power consumption at 24 V For JC 3xx P ake awy ISW _ 5475 Pay 3 29W For JX3 PS1 Puy n Pav AW 19957 Py 3 29W This module lets you directly connect up to 5 JX3 AO4 to a JC 3xx Then insert a JX3 PS1 Then you can connect the remaining 6 JX3 AO4 to this JX3 PS1 Determine the current consumption of the JX3 module JX3 THI2 RTD given in the technical data Current consumption from the logic voltage of the JX3 system bus 210 mA Current consumption from the additional voltage of the JX3 system bus 0 mA Calculate the power consumption of an JX3 THI2 RTD Py 5V 210mA 1 05W Pay 24V OmA 29 1 24W 0 85 Add the power consumption of n JX3 THI2 RTD ep n Pey Pray sn Pav For 5 JX3 THI2 RTD modules the aggregated power consumption is as follows gt By 5 Py 5 25W gt Pav 5 Pay 6 20 Check for permitted power consumption For For dC3xx o For JX3 PS1 P lt 6W Pay lt 24W 100 Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation The number of JX3 THI2 RTD modules is limited by the power consumption at 5 V For JC 3xx and JX3 PS1 Pv 6w Py 105W n 5 7135 Engineering the Engineer the JX3 station in our example which is equipped with eleven JX3 station Option 1 JX3 AO4 modules and five JX3
148. 7 R 200010548 R 200010549 Message box status register This register shows the status of the message box Meaning of the individual bits Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Valid 1 The message box is enabled NEW DAT 1 The message box has received a CAN message Reception of additional CAN messages is blocked OVERRUN 1 Anew CAN message for this message box was being received while bit 1 NEW DAT was 1 The new message is discarded 552 Jetter AG JC 350 R 200010543 message box number 20 Programming Meaning of the individual bits Bit 3 Sending error 1 An error has occurred when sending a CAN message from this message box Module register properties Type of access Read Takes effect When the CAN Prim interface is enabled Box command register R 200010543 message box number 20 is used to transfer certain commands to the message box CAN Prim interface Commands 1 Enabling the message box The message box is enabled When enabling the message box the system checks whether the CAN ID of the message box has been reserved by the JX2 system bus or not Result if the CAN ID has not been reserved Bit 0 1 in R 200010530 message box number 20 2 Disabling the message box The message box is disabled Result Bit 0 0 in R 200010530 message box number 20 3 Sending CAN messages A CAN message is sent 4 Clearing the NEW DAT bit Clears bit 1 NEW DAT in R 200010530 message box
149. 9 Register table for IP addresses 235400 GNN 235400 235599 Register table for IP ports Note on the contents of the table GNN Global Node Number in the range 000 199 When you download the configuration files the Hardware Manager transfers the file ModConfig da to the controller The OS of the controller loads this file when the controller is energized or when the corresponding command is automatically issued by the Hardware Manager after download The file ModConfig da lists registers with their corresponding values The OS enters the corresponding values into these registers This file also holds the IP addresses register 235000 GNN and port numbers register 235400 GNN of the nodes on the network It is no longer required to enter values into registers via application program Jetter AG 247 10 Programming Registers located on JX3 modules Introduction Acyclic network access configured for cyclic data interchange configured for cyclic data interchange The controller handles access via network registers to module registers of JX3 modules of a remote node second part of the register prefix mm 02 17 in a specific way lies then the network register has been the controller accesses the locally stored register value the controller executes acyclic network access the network register has not been For acyclic register access to a remote JX3 mo
150. 934 Port number of the SMTP server This register lets you read the port number of the SMTP server in the same format as specified in the file EMAIL email ini Module register properties Type of access Read Value after reset Depending on configuration Takes effect Once R 202930 2 1 R 292935 Port number of POP3 server This register lets you read the port number of the POP3 server in the same format as specified in the file EMAIL email ini Module register properties Type of access Read Value after reset Depending on configuration Takes effect Once R 202930 2 1 R 292937 Status of e mail processing This register lets you track the e mail status Module register properties Values 0 No e mail is being sent 1 Parameters are being handed over to the e mail client of the JC 350 2 E mail is being compiled and connection with the server is being established 3 E mail has been sent to the server Type of access Read 482 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming R 292938 Task ID e mail The ID of the task that is just sending an e mail can be seen from this register Module register properties Values 0 99 Task ID 255 There is no task sending an e mail Value after reset 255 Type of access Read Jetter AG 483 10 Programming 10 14 Sorting data Introduction Application System function 50 JetSym STX function QSort This chapter describes system function 50 This system function is used to tri
151. 99 For indirect access to a remote node via network register the controller uses the first part of the register prefix as an index to the tables containing the IP addresses and IP ports The values read out of these tables are used by the controller to address the bus node in the network For further information on registers 235000 ff please refer to Network registers IP address and IP port see page 246 The module register number no 5 in the addressing scheme see page 246 is used by the controller as an index to a table of register numbers The register number read out of this table is used by the controller to address the register in the bus node 192 168 10 208 192 168 10 209 192 168 8 105 235003 192 168 10 14 235004 192 168 12 200 _ SS a L m GNN 003 1003980002 236000 236001 236002 101100 102911 200008 250 Jetter AG JC 350 Action Example Programming If you want to access the register of a remote network node using register addresses as of 1 billion proceed as follows Enter the IP address of the remote network node into register 235000 Value range of the GNN 0 199 Enter the port number into register 235400 GNN Value range of the GNN 0 199 Enter the required register number of the
152. AG 629 Appendix Operating parameters Environment and mechanics Environment Operating temperature range 5 55 C Ls Storage temperature range 40 70 C DIN EN 61131 2 DIN EN 60068 2 1 DIN EN 60068 2 2 Air humidity 10 95 DIN EN 61131 2 Non condensing Pollution degree Pollution degree DIN EN DINEN61131 2 Korrosion No special protection against corrosion KECTAN air Chemical resistance must be free from higher concentrations of acids alkaline solutions corrosive agents salts metal vapors or other corrosive or electroconductive contaminants Maximum operating altitude 3 000 m above sea level DIN EN 61131 2 Mechanical parameters Free falls withstanding test For weight lt 10 kg DIN EN 61131 2 Height of fall units within DIN EN 60068 2 31 packing 1m Product packaging 0 3 m Vibration resistance 5 9 Hz Amplitude 3 5mm DIN EN 61131 2 9 150 Hz DIN EN 60068 2 6 1 g acceleration 1 octave minute 10 sinusoidal frequency sweeps all three spatial axes Shock resistance 15 g occasionally 11 ms DIN EN 61131 2 sinusoidal half wave 3 DIN EN 60068 2 27 shocks in the directions of all three spatial axes Degree of protection IP20 DIN EN 60529 Mounting orientation Vertically snapped on DIN rail 630 Jetter AG JC 350 Appendix Operating parameters Enclosure Electrical safet Protection class Mo DIN EN 61131 2 Dielectric test voltage Functional ground is DIN
153. AutoCopy COMMAMNAS 2 ccceecececeeeeeceeeeeeeeecaueeeseeeueeesecueeeseeaueeeseeueaeseeseeeeeeesenenens 572 Terminating AUtOCOpy MOG esisin aia aAA ANE NAAA AALA DEAA EANA A 574 AUTOCOPY IME StPUClU Me sasinan EAEAN NERAN AAAA ENAREN ARAARA 575 Section OPTIONS ciiai ana ainada iaa aaia edhe e aa a ie i 576 COMMANG Seccions ssatina T a aa Ea NE A a E a cae tpl ides vivdeet ete 577 Exampl of a command file soesto ynion anaa a iaaa a aa aaa eae a a aE 585 11 Contents 12 13 14 Appendix 12 12 1 12 2 A OS update Updating the operating system of the Controller cccccesseeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeneeeneeeenens OS update by means Of JOtSyM ucsecceccececceeesencceesececueesaaacdeeaeecseceseaneeeesaeedesseaandeeeasecdeesneanaees Operating system update Via FTP issis siisii iaai inaa aaia Automatic OS update from an SD Card cceceeeecceceeeeeeeeeeaeceeeeeeesecaeaeceeeeeseseccueaeeeeeeeseteeaees Operating system update from within the application program cccccecceeceeeeeeeseeseneeeeees OS update of a JX modu l sssini asaini cecaedaenecaedtecteseasenecnedercdee OS update by Means Of JES YM seiceisdescdevveactudtonceelvendiedeedanctisanacdscsvaeecceideedsecaadancdeaaeaeteeazeancers Operating system update Vid FTP ccececsecceceeeeeeeceenaececeeeeeseceeaaeceeeeeeesecsecaeeeeeeeeesecsacaeeeeees Automatic OS update from an SD Card cccceceecceceeeeeeeeeeeeceeee
154. Bit 0 Valid 1 The message box is enabled Bit 1 NEW DAT 1 The message box has received a CAN message Reception of additional CAN messages is blocked Bit 2 OVERRUN 1 Anew CAN message for this message box was being received while bit 1 NEW DAT was 1 The new message is discarded Bit 3 Sending error 1 An error has occurred when sending a CAN message from this message box Module register properties Type of access Read Takes effect When the CAN Prim interface is enabled R 200010511 Message box configuration register R 200010511 is for configuring the message box Configuration values 0 Inbox For configuring the message box as inbox 1 Outbox For configuring the message box as outbox for standard frames 2 Outbox RTR For configuring the message box as outbox for RTR frames Module register properties Takes effect When the CAN Prim interface is enabled Jetter AG 559 10 Programming R 200010512 CAN ID In the case of an outbox a CAN message is sent using the CAN ID In the case of an inbox only CAN messages with this CAN ID are received Module register properties Values In the case of 11 bit CAN IDs 0 OX7FF In the case of 29 bit CAN IDs 0 Ox1FFFFFFF Takes effect When the CAN Prim interface is enabled and the message box is disabled i e if bit 0 0 in R 200010510 R 200010513 Number of data bytes In the case of an outbox a CAN message is sent with this number of data bytes In the ca
155. C 350 MR 1010 1016 MR 1020 1026 Programming Type of access Read Reply no 1 is not the same as replies 2 and 3 The controller scans the network configuration three times and compares the three replies If replies 2 and 3 are the same yet reply 1 is different the controller sets the respective bit in these registers Meaning of the individual bits Bit 0 No warning Bit 1 Warning Module register properties Bit number GNN 1 Type of access Read Reply no 2 is not the same as replies 2 and 3 The controller scans the network configuration three times and compares the three replies If replies 1 and 3 are the same yet reply 2 is different the controller sets the respective bit in these registers Meaning of the individual bits Bit 0 No warning Bit 1 Warning Module register properties Bit number GNN 1 Type of access Read Jetter AG 305 10 Programming MR 1030 1036 Reply no 3 is not the same as replies 2 and 3 The controller scans the network configuration three times and compares the three replies If replies 1 and 2 are the same yet reply 3 is different the controller sets the respective bit in these registers Meaning of the individual bits Bit 0 No warning Bit 1 Warning Module register properties Bit number GNN 1 Type of access Read MR 1100 1106 Wrong CtrlID or CtrllDopt Anode having got the required GNN has called yet the CtrilD or CTRLIDopt do not agree wi
156. Deleting directories see page 193 192 Jetter AG JC 350 FTP client Deleting directories Introduction This function lets you remove a directory from the file system of a remote network node Function declaration Function FtpDirRemove FtpConnection Handle Const Ref ServerDir String Int Function parameters Description of the function parameters Parameter Value Remarks O FtpConnection Handle Value returned by the function FtpConnect ServerDir Directory name Name of the directory to be deleted Return value If the returned value is negative an error has occurred If the returned value is 0 the directory could successfully be removed from the file system of the remote network node Return value 0 No error 1 Invalid handle 2 Communication error there is for example no response from FTP server 3 Error message from the FTP server e g directory does not exist Operating principle In the following cases the task is not processed further after issuing the function call The FTP server must first remove the subdirectory An error has occurred This function is processed in the following steps Description S ECAR controller sends a command to the FTP server that it has to remove ES e e E o 2 Te FTP server removes the The FTP server removes the subdirectory no errors have occurred the directory is removed the function is terminated and value 0 is returne
157. E 0x64F 0x746 0x747 0x748 0x749 0x74A 0x74B 0x74C 0x74D 0x74E 0x74F 0x481 0x482 0x483 0x484 0x485 0x486 0x487 0x488 0x489 0x48A 0x48B 0x48C 0x48D 0x48E 0x48F 0x490 0x491 0x492 0x493 0x494 0x495 0x496 0x497 0x498 0x499 0x49A 0x49B 0x49C 0x49D 0x49E 0x49F 0x501 0x502 0x503 0x504 0x505 0x506 0x507 0x508 0x509 0x50A 0x50B 0x50C 0x50D Ox50E 0x50F 0x510 0x511 0x512 0x513 0x514 0x515 0x516 0x517 0x518 0x519 0x51A 0x51B 0x51C 0x51D 0x51E 0x51F 0x581 0x582 0x583 0x584 0x585 0x586 0x587 0x588 0x589 0x58A 0x58B 0x58C 0x58D 0x58E 0x58F 0x590 0x591 0x592 0x593 0x594 0x595 0x596 0x597 0x598 0x599 0x59A 0x59B 0x59C 0x59D 0x59E 0x59F 0x5A0 0x601 0x602 0x603 0x604 0x605 0x606 0x607 0x608 0x609 Ox60A 0x60B Ox60C 0x60D Ox60E Ox60F 0x610 0x611 0x612 0x613 0x614 0x615 0x616 0x617 0x618 0x619 0x61A 0x61B 0x61C 0x61D 0x61E 0x61F 0x620 0x701 0x702 0x703 0x704 0x705 0x706 0x707 0x708 0x709 0x70A 0x70B 0x70C 0x70D 0x70E 0x70F 0x710 0x711 0x712 0x713 0x714 0x715 0x716 0x717 0x718 0x719 0x71A 0x71B 0x71C 0x71D 0x71E 0x71F 0x720 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming User programmable CAN Prim interface Operating principle Operating principle The user programmable CAN Prim interface uses message boxes for data exchange between CAN bus and application program Each message box is able to accommodate a com
158. E 40 00 FF 330 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming 10 5 Startup delay register Introduction The device JC 350 provides a register to which a delay time can be written Application The boot process of the device is delayed by the entered delay time Contents Topic Page Setting the startup delay ccccccecesecetseececeteeeteceeseeeeeeseneneeeeseeceeeteneneateees 332 Jetter AG 331 10 Programming Setting the startup delay Introduction If other devices connected to the bus have got a longer startup time the boot process must be delayed Set delay time To set the delay time proceed as follows Switch on the device JC 350 Enter the desired delay time in steps of 100 ms into register 202971 Enter the password For this write value 1112502132 0x424f6f74 to R 202970 Result The next boot process will be delayed by the set startup delay time before initializing the JX2 and JX3 system bus R 202970 Password register Enter 1112502132 0x424F6F 74 into this register Then enter the desired value into the startup delay time register Now the controller sets the value of this register to 0 Register properties Value 1112502132 0x424F6F74 R 202971 Startup delay time Write into this register the delay time in multiples of 100 milliseconds Register properties Values 0 OFF 3 000 300 seconds Value after reset As described above remanent Procedure The controller only executes start dela
159. EMI seeesccecstevecetinarescvade seectasazedevadavicestagantevsads deeebasanevevidaceecbasdneeeestaceestasanvevetactenst edie 16 2 Product description and design 19 Product description of the JC 350 ccceccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee sce i a A AEA 20 Parts and interfaces of the controller JC 350 oe ecceeeeeeeeee cence ee eeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesieeeeetieeeeeeea 21 Order referenCe OPtlOnS eiscicccssiaisccsseacsncasndaddedantecedssanndteastad sadsvdaaddeaatdasedsrasandesanaddndasdeaddaneadacadsveads 22 LIST OF docum emat OM sxcccivicecccesstncdesseeecedeaphacdea vatececeapuacden stecedeuphacden setedecerssnddea teberecuapiacderrenicerieres 23 Accessories for the JX3 SyStem cciccecesnteceessicceseetheceesshdececeundaceessnteeesesthadeesstsedecenidedebbnneceevenede 25 Physical dimensions siniecscccccecsdencdesvpeecaceaphacdenselececespenc EET 26 3 Identifying 27 3 1 Identification by means of the nameplate ccccecceesenteeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeneeeeseeeeeenseeneeenseeneeenees 28 JC 3xx Nameplate 0 cece ceccecceceeeeececacae cece ee eeceaaaeceeeeeeececeaaaeceeeeeeesecsacaeeeeeeeseseccasaeeeeeeesesenaneseees 29 3 2 Electronic Data Sheet EDS ccccccsceceeseneeeeeeneeeeenenseeeseeeeeesseeneeeeseeseesseeneeeasecneeeaseeneeenseeneeenees 30 EDS THC E E E A cain eceatia dears p tate eaideadn anaes catia saaren stile asad at eae anierniade 31 EDS reQiSters ceccccceceecccceeeeeceeeeneececeeeeacaeeeseeaaeeesaeaaaessaaaeeesa
160. Em Set the mode selector to RUN or STOP position poa Switch the controller on Result The controller is rebooting 574 Jetter AG JC 350 Automatic copying of controller data 11 2 autocopy ini Structure Introduction This chapter covers the structure of the file autocopy ini and the available commands File structure This command file of the AutoCopy function is a text file the entries of which are grouped into several sections In these sections you can set values then used by the AutoCopy function You can insert blank lines as required Introduce comment marks by oder Sections The command file has two section types Inthe OPTIONS section you can make default settings This file is unique In the COMMAND_ section you can specify the commands that are to be executed The number of command section is limited to a value of 128 Contents Topic Page Section OPTIONS essiccccesitscccseid scctd cave sdcesadceccusuagscesehdguetdvadesceneadauceednigeeends 576 Command SECTIONS cccccccccececececesecececeseeecesecececeeeceseseceseseseseseseseseseseness 577 Example of a command file 0 ccccceceeeccee cece cece eeceeceeeeeeeeeeseeneeeeeeeeeteees 585 Jetter AG 575 11 Automatic copying of controller data Section OPTIONS Introduction In the OPTIONS section you can make default settings This section exists only once preferably at the beginning of the file
161. Error evaluation at NetConsistency Possibilities of error There are the following possibilities of error output output Via the logger of NetConsistency and JetIPScan Via the enhanced error register R 200009 Via error number register R 200051 of JetIPScan Via error number register R 200061 of NetConsistency R 200009 Enhanced error register R 200009 is a bit coded register Meaning of the individual bits Bit 12 Error message by JetIPScan 0 No error 1 JetIPScan has reported an error The error number is contained in R 200051 Bit16 Error message by NetConsistency 0 No error 1 NetConsistency has reported an error The error number is contained in R 200061 and R 470040 Module register properties Type of access Read Jetter AG 297 10 Programming R 200051 Error numbers of JetiPScan R 200051 shows the error numbers of JetIPScan The content of this register is identical with JetIPScan MR 13 Module register properties Values 0 5 1001 1002 1003 20 40 1001 1199 2001 2199 3001 3199 Type of access Read R 200061 Error numbers of NetConsistency No error or warning The user has terminated the function The first received response does not match response 2 and 3 see MR 101x The second received response does not match response 1 and 3 see MR 102x The third received response does not match response 1 and 2 see MR 103x All 3 responses are dissimil
162. Introduction Processing within the application program System function 110 JetSym STX function EMailSend This chapter gives a description on how to send previously created e mails from within the application program When sending an e mail from the application program the device JC 350 creates the e mail based on the e mail template file and inserts variable values if required Sending an e mail may take considerable time Therefore other tasks of the application program are processed while an e mail is being sent Only a function call via e mail is not possible While an e mail of a task is being sent all other tasks which invoke the e mail function are therefore blocked until this operation is completed As of JetSym 5 0 system function 110 is outdated Instead apply JetSym STX function EMailSend The JetSym STX function EMailSend has been described in detail in the online help of JetSym Declaration of functions Function EmailSend Const Ref FileName String Int Jetter AG JC 350 Programming 10 13 4 Registers Introduction This chapter gives a description of those registers from which you can query the status of e mail processing Contents Topic Page Overview Of registers 0 cc cece etter ee testit ee eneee ee eeeeeeteeeeeseeeeetaeeeee 480 Registers Description 0 00 eececeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeeeneeeeeenas 481 Jetter AG 479 10 Programming Over
163. It allows fast travel between the mechanical end stops stopping gently and without impact in the end position I CPX CMPX Electronic end position controller Number of CPX CMPX modules on the 5 max CPX terminal Number of entries in object 0x6100 Number of entries in object 0x6300 The technology module CPX CMPX can be connected to the JX2 system bus of the following controllers by Jetter AG JC 340 JC 350 V 1 10 0 00 JC 360 V 1 10 0 00 For more information on how to operate these modules along with a JC 350 refer to the following application notes MTR SFC Festo_apn042_xxx_Festo_Electrical_Motor_Controllers pdf Festo_apn043_xxx_CPX_Technologiemodule pdf 118 Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation Product description Festo MTR DClI MTR DCI Restrictions when connected to the JX2 system bus Minimum requirements Application Note The motor controller MTR DCI is a product by Festo AG amp Co The motor controller MTR DCI is an innovative motor with integrated power electronics and has been designed for positioning tasks Number of MTR DCI units connected to 10 max the JX2 system bus Additionally limited by the number of axes of the controller The motor controller MTR DCI can be connected to the JX2 system bus of the following controllers by Jetter AG JC 340 JC 350 V 1 10 0 00 JC 360 V 1 10 0 00 For more information on how to operate these modul
164. Jetter automation R EDD i sD u w us u sit User Manual JC 350 Controller 60874480 We automate your success Introduction Item 60874480 Revision 1 24 1 August 2015 Printed in Germany This document has been compiled by Jetter AG with due diligence and based on the known state of the art In the case of modifications further developments or enhancements to products shipped in the past a revised document will be supplied only if required by law or deemed appropriate by Jetter AG Jetter AG shall not be liable for errors in form or content or for missing updates as well as for damages or disadvantages resulting from such failure The logos brand names and product names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of Jetter AG of associated companies or other title owners and must not be used without consent of the respective title owner 2 Jetter AG JC 350 Address Assignment to product Introduction How to contact us Jetter AG Graeterstrasse 2 71642 Ludwigsburg Germany Phone Switchboard 49 7141 2550 0 Phone Sales 49 7141 2550 433 Phone Technical Hotline 49 7141 2550 444 Fax Sales 49 7141 2550 484 E mail Sales sales jetter de E mail Technical Hotline hotline jetter de This user manual is an integral part of JC 350 Type Serial Year of manufacture Order To be entered by the customer Inventory Place of
165. MI by Jetter AG AJX3 BN ETH a JX3 COM xxxx or a JetMove 200 ETH Any device Ports X14 and X15 are internally connected via Ethernet switch ETHERNET Number Description a o Connector X14 Ethernet port 2 Connector X15 Ethernet port ee ie For connecting devices to ports X14 and X15 you can order the following cables 60537500 Patch cable 1 1 1 m gray Hirose Cat 5e shielded 60854512 Patch cable 1 1 2 m gray Hirose Cat 5e shielded 60854514 Patch cable 1 1 5 m gray Hirose Cat 5e shielded 60854515 Patch cable 1 1 10 m gray Hirose Cat 5e shielded Jetter AG 47 4 Mechanical and electrical installation 4 2 JX2 system bus interface Female connector X19 Introduction Connectable modules Contents 48 This chapter gives a description of the JX2 system bus interface of the JC 350 The JX2 system bus of the controller JC 350 lets you connect the following devices JX2 I O modules JX2 slave modules Servo amplifiers JetMove 1xx JetMove 2xx and JetMove 6xx IP67 modules LioN S and LUX7 CSL Third party CANopen modules e g valve terminals Topic Page Female connector X19 Pin ASSIQGNMENL eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 49 JX2 system bus cable Specificati
166. Modbus TCP client sis esc2decssscidteassetecgisnidteassblenesahieieeitous ial hile 492 Modbus TCP client with STX variables cccccccccccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 494 485 10 Programming 10 15 1 Modbus TCP server Introduction If a valid license is available if the Modbus TCP feature has been enabled and the Modbus TCP server has been launched an external client can access registers flags inputs and outputs This chapter covers the addressing process and describes the commands supported by the Modbus TCP server Number of possible Four connections may be opened at the same time connections Restriction Modbus TCP only supports transmission of registers with a width of 16 bits From this follows that only the 16 least significant bits are transmitted when 32 bit registers are sent When assigning incoming register values to the internal 32 bit registers no sign extension will be carried out Contents Topic Page Addressing oraso aar a N T 487 Supported commands Class 0 0 ceeeeceecee cece cess eeceeeeeeeeeeeeetecsaeeeeeeeeeees 489 Supported commands Class 1 cceeeeeecee cece cece eeeeeeaeeeeeeeeesecnaeeeeeeeeteees 490 Supported commands Class 2 0 cceceeeececceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseteeninaeeeeeeeeees 491 486 Jetter AG JC 350 Addressing Introduction R 272702 R 272704 R 272705 Example 1 Example 2 Jetter AG Register properties Programming The addr
167. Module register properties Access Read Takes effect if MR 004 gt 0 200 Jetter AG JC 350 MR 009 MR 100 MR 101 FTP client Port number of FTP client The value in this register shows the port number of the FTP client Module register properties Access Read Takes effect if MR 004 gt 0 Processing status on part of FTP client This register lets you track the processing status on part of FTP client Module register properties Values 0 No access at the moment 1 Parameters are being handed over to the FTP client of the controller 2 The FTP client communicates with the FTP server 3 Access completed Access Read Task ID This register shows the ID of the task which is processing an FTP client function at that moment Module register properties Values 0 99 Task ID 255 None of the tasks is carrying out an FTP function Value after reset 255 Access Read Jetter AG 201 JC 350 HTTP server 9 HTTP server Introduction A standard browser is sufficient for accessing the HTTP server The browser is for reading and displaying files which have been downloaded to the controller via FTP Here it may be necessary to enter the user name and password to have access to certain pages depending on the file system configuration Default file names The default file names are index htm and index html Supported file types The following file types are supported m htm html shtml
168. Monitor fUNCtIONS e ee eeeeceeecnne cece eeneee ee eaeeeeesaaeeeeesaeeeeeeaaeeeseenaeeeeeenaeeeeneaes 402 350 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming 10 9 1 Connectable HMIs Introduction This chapter lists the HMIs by Jetter AG which you can connect to the JC 350 Connection For a detailed description on how to connect these HMls to the controller refer to chapter Mounting and installation Connecting HMIs see page 129 Contents Topic Page Overview of displays and HMIS ceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteteeeeeeneeeeetneeeeee 352 Jetter AG 351 10 Programming Overview of displays and HMIs List of displays and HMIis The following table lists the alphanumeric displays HMIs by Jetter AG which you can connect to the JC 350 Order Display Keys Interface cable reference LCD 16 4 lines of 5 function keys with JC DK Xm 20 characters LED each Can be expanded by a keyboard module NUM25 LCD 23 2 lines of Cursor left JC DK Xm 24 characters Cursor right each ENTER LCD 27 2 lines of 5 function keys JC DK Xm 24 characters Cursor keypad each ypa Clear ENTER LCD 34 2 lines of 5 function keys JC DK Xm 24 characters Numeric keypad each LCD 52 4 lines of 6 function keys KAY 0533 0025 16 characters Numeric keypad each yP LCD 54 4 lines of 8 function keys KAY 0533 0025 16 characters Numeric keypad each Emergency stop LCD 54Z 4 lines of 8 function keys KAY 0533 0025 16 characters Numeric keypad each Em
169. NetConsistency Module register properties Values 10 Type of access Read Value after reset 10 Number of error messages transmitted to the logger R 470031 displays the number of error messages transmitted to the logger by NetConsistency Module register properties Values 0 10 Type of access Read Maximum number of warnings for the logger R 470032 sets the maximum number of warnings forwarded to the logger by NetConsistency Module register properties Values 10 Type of access Read Value after reset 10 Number of warnings forwarded to the logger R 470033 displays the number of warnings transmitted to the logger by NetConsistency Module register properties Values 0 10 Type of access Read 290 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming R 470034 Maximum possible number of error history entries R 470034 defines the maximum possible number of error history entries Module register properties Values 10 Type of access Read Value after reset 10 R 470035 Number of entries in the error history R 470035 displays the number of error messages entered into the error history by NetConsistency Module register properties Values 0 30 Type of access Read R 470040 Error numbers R 470040 shows the error numbers NoError GroupFunction GroupCStandard GroupJetterFileSystem GroupJetterLogger GroupJetterOS GroupJetterParserXxml GroupJetterPcom GroupUtility GroupJetlpScan Api Manager Managerlnit Man
170. Nopen modules 1 0 numbers for CANopen modules Example To determine the I O module numbers of CANopen modules on the JX2 system bus of the JC 3xx proceed as follows In most cases the I O module numbers correspond to the node ID of the CANopen module Exceptions SMC EX120 and Lenze frequency inverters Register numbers for CANopen modules connected to the JX2 system bus of the JC 3xx consist of the following elements PoP Phe Element Desorption Valu rae Ox I O module number 70 79 oz Module register number 00 99 I O numbers for CANopen modules connected to the JX2 system bus of a JC 3xx consist of the following elements 2lo o o H Element Deseripton Valerange Ox Module specific I O module number z Module specific I O number eoo A CANopen module is connected to a JC 3xx controller E m Op OU nut o PROON amp oree b DE ee OE eb OE e EEEEEEEE JC 3xx 1 Refer to documentation on JC 3xx 2 Festo CPX 2000070zz 2000070zz 234 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Register and I O numbers of JX3 modules connected to a JX3 BN ETH Global Node Numbers on JetSym Hardw
171. Nopen modules on the JX2 system bus234 Register and I O numbers of JX3 modules connected to a JX3 BN ETH 235 Registers and I O numbers of JX3 nodules from the JX3 BN ETH DELS POCIIVE as icciceis bed cvetd i a aiaa ance Vays gudeveud AA AEA Aaa AEEA sanctus 237 227 10 Programming Registers and module registers Module registers Definition Registers Definition Definition Global Node Number Example Module registers Registers Example 228 Module registers are the data interface of a JX3 module Module registers let you read process configuration and diagnostics data from the JX3 module or write such data to it The module register number within a module is unique This unique register number lets you access a specific module register within the system There are several ways to access registers directly Via an application program Via a JetSym setup pane Via a visualization application The register number within the system is unique The Global Node Number GNN is an ID number to identify Jetter controllers e g bus nodes bus nodes within an Ethernet network The GNN within a network has to be unambiguous for each Jetter device The JetSym Hardware Manager automatically assigns the GNN during configuration The value range of the GNN within a project is 000 199 The controller has always got GNN 000 Via module register 9 the OS revision of a JX3 Al4 module
172. O or CANopen module timeout Bit 4 JX2 slave module timeout Bit 9 Error of I O module periphery Bit 12 Object length has not been set Bit 13 Error during JX2 system bus initialization Bit14 Timeout of system registers Bit 15 SDO abort I O module number at timeout JX2 slave module number at timeout Amount of connected I O modules Amount of connected JX2 slave modules Index to module array Module array Dummy I O module JX2 slave dummy modules Monitoring interval for I O modules 10 ms Baud rate of JX2 system bus 616 Jetter AG JC 350 200002032 200002039 200002070 200002071 200002072 200002073 200002074 200002077 200002080 200002085 200002086 200002087 200002088 200002760 200002761 200002762 200002763 200002764 200002765 200002821 200002824 200002825 200002826 200002827 200002828 200002995 200003xx0 200003xx9 200004000 200004367 200005x00 200006x99 200007x00 200007x99 2000xx100 2000xx999 ON delay I O module where a peripheral fault has occurred bit coded Number of CANopen modules Actual I O sum of modules on the JX2 system bus Version of JX2 system bus driver IP Timeout for register access to CANopen modules CANopen SYNC interval ms Enabling JX2 system bus special functions JC 340 and JC 350 Bit 2 CAN Prim in addition to JX2 system bus Bit 3 CAN Prim only Bit 4 CAN IDs 0x081 9x09F for CAN Prim JC 360 MC un
173. OS version of the JC 350 there is also additional version information for identifying the JX3 system bus driver Version of the JX3 system bus interface Module register properties Type of access Read only Data type IP format Version of the JX3 system bus driver Module register properties Type of access Read only Data type IP format 459 10 Programming 10 13 E mail Introduction Activating the E mail feature Required programmer s skills The user creates template files for e mails Into these templates the controller JC 350 can enter variables for sending if required The controller sends e mails to an e mail server which will then forward the message This chapter gives a description on how to configure the e mail feature in the JC 350 and on how to create and send e mails To activate the e mail feature in the JC 350 the following requirements must be met When ordering the controller option W was selected Avalid e mail configuration file exists while the controller is booting If both requirements have been met the corresponding bit in the web status register is set To be able to use the e mail feature the following skills are required Since files are used to configure the e mail feature and e mails as such are based on these files the user must be familiar with the file system P networks Contents Topic Page Configuring the E mail feature ec eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeee
174. P address of the controller Subnet mask IP address of default gateway P address of DNS server Controller name IP port number for the JetSym debugger Basic port number for communication via JetIP Name for AutoCopy command file To carry out IP configuration of the JC 350 knowledge of IP networks is required such as P addressing IP address port number subnet masks etc FTP connection setup data transmission etc Topic Page Factory selingi eroien necesita tivities ivi EEE divine E 71 The configuration MEMOTY cece eeeeeeeeeeeeee ee eeneee ee eeaeeeeesaeeeeeenneeeeeenaeeeeees 72 The Configuration file cece ee eeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeseeeeesaeeeeeteeeessneeeeees 73 Configuration reQisters siiani ainiaan nandi AANER NANEN 77 Changing the IP address of the controller c ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 78 Setting the default IP address 192 168 10 15 ccccecccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeettes 79 Setting the IP address via configuration file eccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaes 80 Setting the IP address via configuration file and DIP switch ee 81 Setting the IP address via registers to be non volatile 0 ceeeeeeee 83 Setting the IP address during runtime ee eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeteeeeeneeeeeeaaes 85 IP address in the GNN operating mode ec eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeteeeeeeeeenaeees 86 Using names for IP AddreSSeS 0 0 0 eeecceeeeeeeeeeneee
175. PW system READKEYS 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 WRITEKEYS 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 723 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 SYSKEYS All keys are available to this user admin and he she is therefore able to read all directories and files and to write to them All keys except for key 1 are available to user system too Two out of the 31 keys have a predefined function O oey Function Ethernet configuration User administration 2 Operating system update of the CPU Operating system update of JX2 and JX3 modules Jetter AG 159 6 File system Assigning locks Introduction Prerequisites Installing the lock Structure of the configuration file Section In the configuration file System flashdisklock ini you assign locks to directories located on the flash disk Only users with the corresponding key are allowed to read or write delete files and subdirectories located in these directories If you want to use names for the locks you must make them known to the device beforehand Therefore set up the names first Setting up names for keys locks see page 162 To assign a lock to a directory proceed as follows Establish an FTP connection to the device when doing so log in with administrator rights 2 Open the file System flashdisklock ini Adjust the file entries Save the changed file to the device za
176. Product description ECOSTEP ECOSTEP The servo amplifier ECOSTEP is a product by Jenaer Antriebstechnik GmbH uif ji m my ai 100 xx 000 Servo amplifier 0 56 kW 200 xx 000 Servo amplifier 2 kW Restrictions when connected to the JX2 system bus Number of ECOSTEP modules 10 max connected to the JX2 system bus Additionally limited by the number of axes of the controller Minimum requirements The ECOSTEP module can be connected to the JX2 system bus of the following controllers and modules by Jetter AG JC 340 JC 350 V 1 04 0 00 JC 360 V 1 01 0 00 JC 24x V 3 14 JM D203 JC24x V 1 10 0 00 JX6 SB l V 2 18 112 Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation Product description Festo CPV Direct CPV Direct The CPV Direct valve terminal is a product by Festo AG amp Co Additional CP modules can be connected to a CPV Direct cv ey TILL CPV10 GE CO2 8 Valve terminal which directly connects to CANopen CPV14 GE CO2 8 Valve terminal which directly connects to CANopen CPV18 GE CO2 8 Valve terminal which directly connects to CANopen Restrictions when io JX2 system bus Minimum requirements The CPV Direct valve terminal can directly be connected to the JX2 system bus of the following controllers and modules by Jetter AG JC 340 JC 350 V 1 04 0 00 JC 360 V 1 01 0 00 JC 24x V 2 00 JM D203 JC24x V 1 10 0 00 JX6 SB l V 2 10 Jetter AG 113 4 Mechanical
177. TX variables application program Access PC or application program Access time Depending on the reaction time of the server Configuration Only when using network registers Reach International 238 Jetter AG JC 350 Minimum requirements Contents Topic Page The Global Node NUMDED eccceceeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeseeeeeeeseeaeeeeeenaees 240 Acyclic data interchange seselan aidaa a iaa R 241 Cyclic data interchange ieena aa ian AE 257 Hardware Manager vivecctecraveae iinde eiia N EA AE ERN 270 Error handling at the Jetter Ethernet system DUS ccceeeeeeeeeeeereeeees 272 NetConsistency function 22c cceccteessaceeetenciehs ithaieeetidia ent seeetinaeesecicveest 277 JetIPScan Register description cee cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeseaas 299 Administrating the connections of the JetIP TCP and STX debug server 310 Executing an ARP requeSt cceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeteeeeetieeeeetiaeeeeetieeeeee 314 JetSync DIOCKAGE cee eeeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaes 316 Jetter AG 239 Programming The device is operated in a system consisting of various components by Jetter AG In order to ensure proper interaction of these components the operating system used and the programming tool JetSym must have at least the release numbers listed below Component V 1 01 0 00 10 Programming The Global Node Number Defi
178. The JC 350 enters the error into the log file COMMAND 12 Command DaFileRead DaFile SD Data MyTestData da Jetter AG 579 11 Automatic copying of controller data Command DaFileWrite Function Parameter name 1 Parameter value 1 Allowed values Illegal values In the event of an illegal value Parameter name 2 Parameter value 2 Allowed values Illegal values In the event of an illegal value Parameter name 3 Parameter value 3 Allowed values Illegal values In the event of an illegal value Parameter name 4 Parameter value 4 Allowed values Illegal values In the event of an illegal value Parameter name 5 Parameter value 5 Allowed values Illegal values In the event of an illegal value This command is for storing register values and flag states to a data file DaFile Complete name of the data file All allowed file names for data files The destination directory does exist Incorrect filename Non existent destination directory The controller does not generate the data file It enters the error into the log file Append Defines whether a new data file is to be created or it is to be appended to an existing one 0 Delete the data file which may exist and create a new data file m 1 Append the file to an existing one If no file exists the controller creates a new data file lt 0 gt 1 Anew data file will be created Type Define
179. The assigned default gateway depends on the controller type Product Assigned default gateway JC 340 Default gateway of the controller JC 350 neither with ETH2 nor with the controller assigns the default ETH3 network parameters have gateway of ETH1 been configured With ETH2 or with ETH3 the controller assigns the network parameters have been IP address of ETH1 as the default configured gateway with ETH3 no network the controller assigns the default parameters have been gateway of ETH1 configured with ETH3 network the controller assigns the parameters have been IP address of ETH1 as the default configured gateway Jetter AG 285 10 Programming Activating and deactivating JetIPScan in JetControl Introduction Enable JetiIPScan Disable JetIPScan You have to enable JetIPScan by making an entry into the system command register The settings are remanent To enable JetIPScan proceed as follows See oe os 2 Write value 1112502132 0x424f6f74 to password register 202960 za Enter value 331 into system command register 202961 gt Bit 2 of register 202962 is set and JetIPScan is enabled To disable JetIPScan proceed as follows pa Switch the device ON 2 Write value 1112502132 0x424f6f74 to password register 202960 ze Enter value 330 into system command register 202961 gt Bit 2 of register 202962 is cleared and JetIPScan is disab
180. This register contains the weekday of the actual date Register properties Values 0 6 0 Sunday Value following a reset the power reserve has actual time not elapsed the power reserve has elapsed Jetter AG 337 10 Programming R 102915 Day This register contains the day of the actual date Register properties Values the power reserve has actual time not elapsed the power reserve has 1 elapsed R 102916 Month This register contains the month of the actual date Register properties Values the power reserve has actual time not elapsed the power reserve has 1 elapsed R 102917 Year This register contains the year of the actual date Register properties Values Value after reset the power reserve has actual time not elapsed the power reserve has elapsed 338 Jetter AG JC 350 R 102920 R 102921 R 102922 R 102923 Programming Milliseconds This register contains the milliseconds stored in the buffer Register properties Values 0 999 Value after reset 0 Takes effect After read write access to register 102928 Seconds This register contains the seconds stored in the buffer Register properties Values 0 59 Value after reset 0 Takes effect After read write access to register 102928 Minutes This register contains the minutes stored in the buffer Register properties Values 0 59 Value after reset 0 Ta
181. Topic Page First entry in the HTML file eee ee eeneeeeeeneeeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaas 205 Inserting real time Controller values cc eceeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeseenaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 206 Example of an HTML page 0 cccccceeseeceececeeeeeeeceeaeceeeeeeeteseeneeeeeeeeeeees 211 204 Jetter AG JC 350 HTTP server First entry in the HTML file Configuration The Name Space must be the first entry in the HTML file It has got the following structure lt NS DTAG xmlns NS http jetter de ssi jetcontrol with NS representing the namespace The namespace is a character string with a maximum length of 63 characters The namespace introduced here will be re used for the subsequent Data tags The remaining parts of the line are preassigned and have to be specified in exactly the same way In the following examples the namespace applied is JW Jetter AG 205 9 HTTP server Inserting real time controller values Introduction Actual real time controller values are integrated into parameter entries within the sections via tag functions This way the contents respectively states of registers text registers inputs outputs and flags can be displayed Tag delimiters All tags start and end with defined strings delimiters Between these tag delimiters the variables are defined Tag start lt JW DTAG Variable definition The variable definition in a tag contains attributes which are used to set f
182. Track 20 sectors 128 used 64 blocked 64 free 0 Track 21 sectors 128 used 85 blocked 43 free 0 Track 22 sectors 128 used 128 blocked 0 free 0 Track 23 sectors 128 used 128 blocked 0 free 0 Track 24 sectors 128 used 128 blocked 0 free 0 Track 25 sectors 128 used 128 blocked 0 free 0 Track 26 sectors 128 used 128 blocked 0 free 0 Track 27 sectors 128 used 128 blocked 0 free 0 Track 28 sectors 128 used 128 blocked 0 free 0 Track 29 sectors 128 used 128 blocked 0 free 0 Track 30 sectors 128 used 128 blocked 0 free 0 Track 31 sectors 128 used 128 blocked 0 free 0 Track 32 sectors 128 used 128 blocked 0 free 0 Track 33 sectors 128 used 105 blocked 0 free 23 Track 34 sectors 128 used 0 blocked 0 free 128 Jetter AG 165 6 File system Track 35 sectors 128 used 0 blocked 0 free 128 Track 36 sectors 128 used 0 blocked 0 free 128 Track 37 sectors 128 used 0 blocked 0 free 128 Track 38 sectors 128 used 0 blocked O free 128 Track 39 sectors 128 used 0 blocked 0 free 128 Track 40 sectors 128 used 0 blocked 0 free 128 Track 41 sectors 128 used 0 blocked 0 free 128 Track 42 sectors 128 used 0 blocked 0O free 128 Track 43 sectors 128 used 0 blocked 0 free 128 Track 44 sectors 128 u
183. X instruction for outputting numerical values Function declaration Function parameters How to use this instruction Operating principle Function DisplayValue Dev Int Pos Int Value Double Description Number of the device where the value is to be output Will not be evaluated Constant value name of a register or a variable To output a numerical value on a printer module the instruction must be invoked as follows DisplayValue 8 0 12 345 DisplayText 8 0 S t DisplayValue 8 0 Axis2 Position DisplayText 8 0 S n The first STX instruction lets you output value 12 345 The second STX instruction inserts a tab t The third STX instruction lets you output the content of the variable Axis2 Position Finally the fourth STX instruction triggers a carriage return and a line feed n The task in the application program stops at the instruction DisplayText or DisplayValue until the whole text value string has been output 422 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Device numbers Introduction The device number lets you define the HMI Device numbers You may enter the following values for the parameter Device number MR 2824 holds the number of the device to be used Do not use Output of data on a printer module connected to the JX2 or JX3 system bus Output of data on a user programmable serial interface Output of data on a serial interface module connected to the JX2
184. X2 I O modules equipped with various interfaces JX2 slave JX2 slave modules with power supply of their own other than JetMove 5 jor JX2 system bus cable leading to additional modules Jetter AG 109 4 Mechanical and electrical installation 4 8 2 Third party CANopen modules Introduction Configuration Contents 110 Third party CANopen modules can directly be connected to the JX2 system bus of a JC 350 The JX2 system bus needs not be configured The JC 350 is able to automatically detect and commission connected CANopen modules Topic Page Product description Module BWU1821 by Bihl Wiedemann 0 111 Product description ECOSTEP cccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeees 112 Product description Festo CPV Direct cccccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeees 113 Product description Festo CPX terminals ccccccccccceceeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 114 Product description Festo CPX CP interface ccccccccccccceeeeeeeseseeeeenes 116 Product description Festo CPX CMAX 1 cccccccceceeceeseeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeseeens 117 Product description Festo CPX CMPX ccccccccesesseseeeseeeeeeeseseeeseseeens 118 Product description Festo MTR DCL c ccccceceseeesseseseeeeeseeeeesesesenees 119 Product description Festo SFC DC 0 cccccccccccccccccscceseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 120 Product description Festo SFC LAC 0 cccccccccccccccccece
185. a Oa o e O o aa m w o O as 392 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Numerical keys Register bit Register bit 16 bit overlaying 32 bit overlaying SHIFT 8 2178 203140 2 203128 2 SHIFT 9 2179 203140 3 203128 3 gt lt Register bit Register bit 16 bit overlaying 32 bit overlaying 203141 9 203128 25 203141 10 203128 26 203141 11 203128 27 203141 12 203128 28 203141 13 203128 29 203141 14 203128 30 203141 15 203128 31 203142 0 203129 0 203142 1 203129 1 203142 2 203129 2 203142 3 203129 3 203142 4 203129 4 203140 5 203128 5 203140 6 203128 6 203140 7 203128 7 203140 8 203128 8 203140 9 203128 9 203140 10 203128 10 203140 11 203128 11 203140 12 203128 12 203140 13 203128 13 203140 14 203128 14 203140 15 203128 15 203141 0 203128 16 2201 2202 2203 2204 2205 2206 2207 2208 2209 2210 2211 2212 2181 2182 2183 2184 2185 2186 2187 2188 2189 2190 2191 2192 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 SHIFT F1 SHIFT F2 SHIFT F3 SHIFT F4 SHIFT F5 SHIFT F6 SHIFT F7 SHIFT F8 SHIFT F9 SHIFT F10 SHIFT F 11 SHIFT F12 Jetter AG 393 10 Programming 16 bit overlaying 32 bit overlaying SHIFT 2199 203141 7 203128 23 ENTER y SHIFT 2200 203141 8 203128 24 2213 203142 5 203129 5 LCD 27 Ear SE 16 bit overlaying 32 bit overlaying n T a 2214
186. a network node into the corresponding register the controller triggers an ARP request This request is used for resolution of an IP address into an Ethernet address MAC address R 104250 Executing an ARP request Register properties Values Valid IP address Jetter AG 315 10 Programming 10 3 9 JetSync blockage Introduction In this chapter the system command registers and the system commands for activating and deactivating the JetSync blockate will be explained in detail Contents Topic Page Description of system command registers ccceceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeneeeeeeaes 317 Description of the JetSync blockage system commands 0 eceeeeee 320 316 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Description of system command registers Registers Overview The following registers are used in this manual R 202960 System password register R 202961 System command register R 202962 System status register R 202960 System password register Enter system password 1112502132 0x424F6F74 into this register Then enter the required command value into the system command register Now the controller sets the value of this register to 0 Register properties Value 1112502132 0x424F6F74 R 202961 System command register Enter the system commands into this register Then the controller executes the command Then it sets the value of this register to 0 Commands 102 Restart the controller 104 Reset remanent par
187. accordingly If to the CP string 1 or 2 then the number of CP CPI output modules are z analog outputs reduces to 8 connected CP valve terminals are connected _ analog outputs reduces to 8 CP CPI input modules are connected analog inputs reduces to 8 If to the CP string 3 or 4 then the number of CP CPI output modules are analog outputs reduces to 4 connected CP valve terminals are connected analog outputs reduces to 4 CP CPI input modules are connected analog inputs reduces to 4 The maximum amount of CANopen modules which can be connected to the JX2 system bus is limited when additional I O module numbers are used Each additional I O module number used by CPX FB14 reduces the number of CANopen modules by one Jetter AG 115 4 Mechanical and electrical installation Product description Festo CPX CP interface CPX CP interface The CPX CP interface is for connecting expansion modules of the CP CPI installation system to the CPX terminal CPX CPI Interface for modules of the CP CPI installation system Restrictions when connected to the Number of CPX CPI modules on the PS CPX terminal JX2 system bus Size of the cyclic I O data bytes per string 8 bytes max Number of entries in object 0x6100 1 entry per string Number of entries in object 0x6300 1 entry per string Minimum requirements The technology module CPX CP interface ca
188. aceeeesaeaaeeesaeaeeeeneeaeeesneeeeesneeseeeenaass 35 3 3 Version registers wi 0c2cccccccic cts ecteceneeccicceeecticceencctecdeendtceeensteecesentecesenctic coeesttieeeesteccevecdideeenstiveendtiens 37 Hardware revisions cccceceeseeeeeeeene ee ee erne ee ttunttuna AtA ee eee ee eet ie ee ee naeee ee teee ee eeeeeeteeeeennaeeeenena 38 Software VErSiIONS cece eee e eect eee tee erent eee nee eee ee eee eee renee eee eee aeee ed naeee ee naeeeenaeeeeee 39 4 Mechanical and electrical installation 41 4 1 WTO TACOS onson aA AADA AAAA AE ieetenebecen 42 Power supply terminal X10 c ccccceceeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeseceeaaeeeeeeeeeseceaaaeeeceseeesesneaeeeeeeeeeseeennieeeeeeess 43 Serial interface port XVM eis sche AavccccctsasendcndageseatsSedsccssaceacckuaasaxcnsgacdccbuaes AEE Ea aE Aaaa AN 44 Ethernet ports Female connectors X14 X15 ccccccccccccccccceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeess 47 4 2 JX2 system bus interface Female connector X19 ssssssssenunrennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 48 Female connector X19 Pin ASSIQNMENL eee eeeee cette ee etee ee ee ette ee eet atte eet aeee ee saeeeeetaeeeeetnaeeeenena 49 JX2 system bus cable Specification cceccccccseeeeceeseneeceeneneeceeneneeceenenseceeneaeecesneaeeesenseaeeneneaaes 51 Line length and baud rate of the JX2 system DUS eee eeeeee teeter eter enteeeeetaeeeeetneeeeetnaeeeereaa 53 4 3 LEDs indicating various St
189. aees 145 Configuration in JEtSyM sssri eiea iaai an AAAA NEA 146 141 5 Initial commissioning Preparatory work for initial commissioning Ethernet connection with the controller Behavior after power up Status of the LEDs The JC 350 in delivered condition has got IP address 192 168 1 1 Configure the Ethernet interface of your PC so that it communicates with the controller via this IP address If the mode selector is in position STOP when the controller is powered up the application program will not be launched Following a correct commissioning the LEDs are lit as follows Description o x eccna voltage supply is OK application program has been 7 ee a e OFF O og po SD O The controller does not access the SD card The controller does not access the SD card controller does not access the SD card Or LEDs which are programmed depending on the application 142 Jetter AG JC 350 Initial commissioning Initial commissioning of a JC 350 Configuration Creating an application program JetSym online help The initial commissioning is based on the following configuration Number Pat eseiton 2 JC 350 Controller
190. agerDeinit ManagerMultiplelnit Instance Instancelnit Jetter AG 291 10 Programming 292 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Module register properties Values 2 0 Type of access Read R 470041 Time of the error in milliseconds R 470041 displays the time of the error in milliseconds When JetControl has been activated for 50 days an overflow occurs Module register properties Values 0 2 ms 0 50 days Type of access Read R 470042 Instance at which the error occurred R 470042 displays the instance at which the error occurred In fact only one instance is possible Module register properties Values 0 First instance Type of access Read R 470043 Number of error parameters R 470043 shows the number of error parameters Module register properties Values 0 5 Type of access Read Jetter AG 293 10 Programming R 470044 R 470045 R 470046 R 470047 R 470048 Error parameter 1 R 470044 shows error parameter 1 The value is only valid if R 470043 gt 1 Module register properties Values 0 2 Type of access Read Error parameter 2 R 470045 shows error parameter 2 The value is only valid if R 470043 gt 2 Module register properties Values 0 2 Type of access Read Error parameter 3 R 470046 shows error parameter 3 The value is only valid if R 470043 gt 3 Module register properties Values 0 2 Type of access Read Error parameter 4 R 470047 shows
191. alid 11 A GNN of the set value list is lt 1 or gt 255 or it is a multiple GNN Values 20 40 Internal error 302 Jetter AG JC 350 Module register properties 1001 2001 3001 Type of access Read 1199 2199 3199 Programming The node has reported the wrong CtrllD or CtrllIDopt see MR 110x The node has not called see MR 120x Several nodes of the same GNN have called see MR 130x Jetter AG 303 10 Programming Warnings and errors Register description Introduction MR 1000 1006 304 Detailed diagnostics of the warnings and errors which have occurred can be carried out by means of these registers If during checking and setting the IP address of all nodes a warning or an error occurs the controller sets the corresponding bit in the registers described below In this case the bit corresponds to the GNN of the node The GNN of the node and the bit number relate as follows Bit number GNN 1 As a register contains 32 bit individual groups of 7 subsequent registers each are created see table All 3 responses are dissimilar The controller scans the network configuration three times and compares the three replies If all three replies are dissimilar the controller sets the respective bit in these registers Meaning of the individual bits Bit 0 No error Bit 1 Error Module register properties Bit number GNN 1 Jetter AG J
192. alve terminals by SMC Valve terminals by Burkert I O system 750 by Wago Gateway BWU1821 by BihltWiedemann EcoStep drives by Jenaer Antriebstechnik EPOS drives by maxon Drives by Festo Drives by Lenze Milan drive by GFC Contents Topic Page Wiring the JX2 system DUS 2 c ccceccceseeeeccuenseencedescecchesseenceseueacevenseeneees 104 Third party CANOpen modules cccceecceceeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeseeenseeeeeeeees 110 Jetter AG 103 4 Mechanical and electrical installation 4 8 1 Wiring the JX2 system bus Introduction Contents 104 This chapter gives a description of the physical structure of the JX2 system bus Topic Page Line length and baud rate of the JX2 system DUS n se 105 JX2 system DUS topology ee eeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeaeeeseeeaeeeseeeateeseeaaees 106 Power supply of JX2 I O modules ccceceeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeteteeneeeeeeeeteees 107 Power supply of JX2 Slave modules ccccceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeteeeenaeeeeeeeetees 109 Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation Line length and baud rate of the JX2 system bus Cable lengths Rules for calculating the stub length Baud rate The maximum cable length depends on the baud rate used and the number of expansion modules connected to the bus Cable length Stub length Total stub length When engineering the line length follow the rules listed below
193. am are not processed Advantage The controller executes I O accesses as fast as possible Disadvantage As certain I O accesses are significantly slower than access to internal variables response time of other tasks may increase System command 161 Activate Task switch on I O access Effect While the controller is accessing modules on the JX2 or JX3 system bus it processes the other tasks of the application program Advantage The execution time of certain I O accesses which may be relatively long does not affect the response time of other tasks Disadvantage The run time of the other tasks influences the execution time of several I O accesses System command 170 Deactivate Resume task time slot Effect When a normal application task has been interrupted by a cyclic task or the Ethernet system bus publisher processing the following application task is resumed The remaining time of the time slot of the interrupted task lapses for one cycle Jetter AG 327 10 Programming System command 171 System command 310 System command 311 System command 312 Advantage The total cycle time for processing all tasks is not influenced so much by the cyclic events Disadvantage This way the interrupted task is assigned less runtime Activate Resume task time slot Effect When a normal application task has been interrupted by a cyclic task or the Ethernet system bus publisher processing the
194. ame PR1000300 R1000100 gt Result The content of the register is displayed whose number results from the addition of the content of register 1000300 and the content of register 1000100 lt JW DTAG name PF1000300 100 gt Result The state of the flag is displayed whose number results from the addition of the content of register 1000300 and value 100 lt JW DTAG name PF1000300 R1000100 gt Result The state of the flag is displayed whose number results from the addition of the content of register 1000300 and the content of register 1000100 lt JW DTAG name PI1000300 100 gt Result The state of the input is displayed whose number results from the addition of the content of register 1000300 and the value 100 476 Jetter AG JC 350 Jetter AG Programming lt JW DTAG name PI1000300 R1000100 gt Result The state of the input is displayed whose number results from the addition of the content of register 1000300 and the content of register 1000100 lt JW DTAG name PO1000300 100 gt Result The state of the output is displayed whose number results from the addition of the content of register 1000300 and the value 100 lt JW DTAG name P01000300 R1000100 gt Result The state of the output is displayed whose number results from the addition of the content of register 1000300 and the content of register 1000100 477 10 Programming 10 13 3 Sending an e mail
195. ameters 122 Deactivate Wait for communication 123 Activate Wait for communication 160 Deactivate Task switch on I O access 161 Activate Task switch on I O access 170 Deactivate Resume task time slot Jetter AG 317 10 Programming Commands 171 310 311 312 313 330 331 410 411 412 Activate Resume task time slot Load configuration files Load module configuration Load process data configuration for Ethernet system bus Stop process data communication for Ethernet system bus Disable JetIPScan client Enable JetIPScan client Disable JetSync blockage Enable JetSync blockage for all ports Enable JetSync blockage for port X15 Register properties Access System password register contains the correct password R 202962 System status register The system status register lets you evaluate the system conditions Meaning of the individual bits Bit 0 Bit 1 318 Task switch on I O access 0 No task switching in the application program on I O access 1 Task switching is carried out in the application program on I O access Wait for communication 0 The controller waits for communication requests for a short time 1 The controller does not wait for communication requests Jetter AG JC 350 Jetter AG Programming Meaning of the individual bits Bit 2 JetIPScan client 0 JetIPScan client not active 1 JetIPScan client active Bit 3 Resume task time
196. amming tool JetSym Contents Topic Page Supported serial interfaces 0 c cccccccececceeceeeeeeeeeecneaeeeeeeeeenecnieeeeeeeeteees 410 REGISCCIS eccccceceecceceeeeeceeeenecceeeseeeceeesnsneneesaeaeeesaneneesnaaeeeesnanceeesteeeeeneneaes 412 Module numbers Interface modules ccccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneees 415 OUTPUTUINIG TOXIS eai AEA 417 Outputting numerical values 00 0 ee eee eeeeee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseenaeeeteenaees 421 Jetter AG 409 10 Programming 10 10 1 Supported serial interfaces Introduction This chapter lists the printers and serial interfaces which are supported by the JC 350 Contents Topic Page Overview Interfaces 00 ccccecccecececececeseceeececececeseseseseceseseseseseseseeeseeeseness 411 410 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Overview Interfaces List of printers and serial interfaces Configuring interfaces The following table lists the supported printers and serial interfaces It also indicates the device number which must be addressed by the display instruction in order to output information on the interface JX2 PRN1 Centronics printer module User programmable serial Serial interface of the CPU interface JX2 SER1 Serial interface module JX3 MIX2 Serial interface on the module For more information on how to configure and program interfaces refer to the documentation on the corresponding module Module Doeumemton JX2 PRN1 jx2_pr
197. and electrical installation Product description Festo CPX terminals CPX terminal A CPX terminal lets you connect digital and analog inputs and outputs as well as valves of different sizes CPX FB14 Fieldbus node for CANopen Restrictions when Number of CPX FB14 modules 10 max connected fo the connected to the JX2 system bus JX2 system bus 4 Analog inputs and outputs per 12 max CPX FB14 Digital inputs and outputs per CPX FB14 192 max and CPX CP interface Minimum requirements The CPX terminal can be connected to the JX2 system bus of the following controllers and modules by Jetter AG JC 340 JC 350 V 1 04 0 00 JC 360 V 1 01 0 00 JC 24x V 3 26 0 00 JM D203 JC24x V 1 13 0 00 JX6 SB l V 2 21 114 Jetter AG JC 350 Restrictions when using the CPX CP interface Restrictions when connecting analog I Os Restrictions when connecting CANopen modules Mechanical and electrical installation When using a CPX CP interface connected to CPX FB14 the following restrictions have to be observed The CPX FB14 supports only one CPX CP interface The CPX FB14 occupies on the system bus up to three I O module numbers for CANopen modules These I O module numbers are not available to other CANopen modules The number of analog I Os connected to the CPX FB14 is reduced When a CPX CP interface is used the number of analog inputs and outputs which can be connected to the CPX FB14 is reduced
198. and received frames is carried out using the transaction ID This chapter describes how to carry out noncyclical or cyclical transmission to a Modbus TCP server using system functions Connections to eleven different Modbus TCP servers may be opened at the same time System functions 65 and 67 reading registers as well as 66 and 68 writing registers are used to establish a noncyclical transmission channel to a Modbus TCP server These system functions establish a connection to the specified Modbus TCP server transmit the desired data and clear down the connection If RemoteScan has already established a connection for cyclical data transmission this connection will be used Setting up and clearing down the connection is therefore not required Cyclical data transmission is made through the configurable function RemoteScan The inputs and outputs 20001 through 36000 that are combined in the 16 bit registers 278000 through 278999 are cyclically transmitted from and to the Modbus TCP servers Only one connection is established to each Modbus TCP server IP address and port irrespective of the number of communication units which have been configured on this server If several communication units are configured on one Modbus TCP server accesses are serialized since servers often do not support command pipelining If several servers have been configured communication is carried out in parallel Register Inputs and outputs 278000
199. ane module as System config ini If you have entered comments and formatting details into this file the comments and formatting details will get lost during this process Related topics 84 The configuration memory see page 72 Setting the IP address during runtime see page 85 Setting the IP address via configuration file see page 80 Setting the IP address via configuration file and DIP switch see page 81 Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation Setting the IP address during runtime Introduction Important note Prerequisites Register overview Setting IP addresses and subnet mask Related topics Jetter AG The IP interface is initialized by the settings in the configuration memory during the boot process The following settings can also be changed via registers to be non remanent IP address of the controller Subnet mask IP address of default gateway The settings made during runtime do not change the parameters in the configuration memory At de energizing the controller your settings will be lost While settings are being made no communication via IP interface is allowed Otherwise this would lead to a loss of data The values entered must be valid This can be ensured e g by including a validity check in the application program This is important because there is no check if you set the parameters during runtime of the controller IP address of the JC
200. apped to the key flags and register bits Key Description orb Entering a decimal point or decimal comma Entering a negative positive numerical value you can press the key any time during input Clearing previous entries Displaying a suggested value a second time ENTER ENTER Terminating the input process accepting the value Terminating the input process accepting the value input process accepting the value Contents Topic Page Assigning KOYS ccceceeeteceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeseeaeeeseenaeeeeeeaas 392 Registers of basic flag NUMDELS eeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 396 Jetter AG 391 10 Programming Assigning keys Introduction HMI keys are assigned to an array of special flags and registers overlaid over them Flag numbers Key flags are addressed relative to a basic flag number Multi display mode lets you set this basic flag number via registers Register Standard basic flag Flag numbers number Single display 2000 2160 2223 MR 2829 2000 2160 2223 MR 2830 2000 2160 2223 MR 2831 2000 2160 2223 aa MR 2832 2000 2160 2223 Assignment Here the assignments between keys special flags and overlaid registers are listed This assignment list applies to single display mode and default settings of multi display mode Numerical keys Natmaricaticeys OOO EARE JE 16 bit overlaying 32 bit overlaying m e a O
201. ar see MR 100x The IP settings of at least one node could not be changed see MR 140x The JetIPScan function has been invoked although it is active already The length of the set value list is lt 1 or gt 255 or the pointer to the list is invalid AGNN of the set value list is lt 1 or gt 255 or it is a multiple GNN Internal error The node has reported the wrong CtrlID or CtrilDopt see MR 110x The node has not called see MR 120x Several nodes of the same GNN have called see MR 130x R 200061 shows the error numbers of NetConsistency see R 470040 Related topics Register description NetConsistency basic driver see page 288 Register description JetIPScan see page 299 298 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming 10 3 6 JetiIPScan Register description Introduction This chapter describes the registers from which the status information of the JetIPScan feature can be read out You can use these registers for debugging or diagnostics Further features such as for example checking the network configuration cannot be triggered this way Contents Topic Page Register NUMDESS sisia eee tee eee eee annei aaiae eaaa aeaaea aeia a 300 Global status Register description sseeeeeeeseeseerreserrssrrrrsrerrrssrernssreens 301 Warnings and errors Register description cee eee cnet 304 Configuration Register description eee eee eee eter ete eeeneeeeees 308
202. ar EE E 480 Registers DESCIMPUOM e nnrcnanennnea e A AA 481 Jetter AG 10 15 2 10 15 3 10 16 10 16 1 10 16 2 10 16 3 10 16 4 10 17 10 17 1 10 17 2 10 18 11 Jetter AG Contents Sorting data sessie aaa E E ee ended te eaten ee eedeed teenie ne eet tee ee 484 Modbus TCP wcstscesecetececcedicsccetesecntedd vecssccrte cede cd teesseer seer ev cits aana Aaaa iaaa Andaina anaua ianari 485 MOdbDUS T CP S IVER 3 i cccictecsiesccecscecctecsreceteenivceteentececeessesadesntesecuanteveteontesetuentecatecnsesccucntveateerteses 486 AGNGSSING sic cies teeet jes cev evans deeetiaceesesiledeectanicevevidedeevtatt ceedeals devbaad teevsti doesnt aeeedla devin eed naceenetes 487 Supported commands Class Qisim iadaa aaia 489 Supported c mmands Class Masini aa i aa ia iaia 490 Supported commands ClasS 2min iaai aiaa aaia daa 491 Modbus TO Pehe rissaa A 492 Modbus TCP client with STX variables ssssnunseunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 494 User programmable serial interface cccssseecceeeeeeeeeeneeeeseeneeenseeneeeeseeneeeneeseeeenseseeeneeeeeens 496 LEE a E E E E E E E E E 497 Senal interface POM XIen aa a a a 498 Functioning principle of the user programmable serial interface 2 s eeceeeeeeeeees 501 Functioning principle csiccs sccscesees oie ciaatds eaves tansanntied aad iaa aa eaa a ra a aaa aaa aaaea eai 502 ae ae o a E E E E E E E 505 Register NUMDES ceski a a 506
203. are Manager assigns a Global Node Number to the bus node the Jetter Ethernet JX3 BN ETH on the Jetter Ethernet system bus system bus of a JX3 BN ETH Register numbers for The register number for JX3 modules at the Ethernet bus node consists of the JX3 modules following elements ttn total xi xtzlz Element Description Value range Global Node Number of the JX3 BN ETH on the Ethernet system bus Number of the module within the JX3 station 24 17 Module register number 0000 9999 9999 I O numbers for The I O number for JX3 modules connected to an Ethernet bus node consists JX3 modules of the following elements ete tele y Eemo essen verano Global Node Number of the JX3 BN ETH on the Ethernet system bus Number of the module within the JX3 station Module specific 1 O number Jetter AG 235 10 Programming Example Two bus nodes JX3 BN ETH are connected to a JC 3xx controller a Fa Pa ta a C ae Jotter a n ed gi i PbS al ege pae r an JE aa ql e BH TE ae 38
204. are individual publish subscribe IDs to be called in each register array Jetter AG 261 10 Programming Registers for There are several registers available which go with all subscriptions administration of all subscriptions 250000 Status register Command register ID in case of Displays the ID of the subscription in which an error error has occurred a Total amount of subscriptions amount of Total amount of subscriptions 250004 16 bit CRC Cyclic Redundancy Code of the subscriber configuration file Subscriber status Status registers of all subscriptions From MR 250000 you can read the collective status of all subscriptions In case of an error you first read out the ID of the subscription in which an error has occurred Meaning of the individual bits Bit 0 Error in CRC computing of the configuration file 0 No error has occurred 1 For CRC computing the configuration file does not exist For this reason CRC computing has not taken place Bit 1 Error in connection with a subscription 1 An error has occurred in a subscription At the moment this is only a timeout error Bit 7 Subscription is functioning 0 If a subscription fails bit 7 is reset 1 The subscriptions are functioning Module register properties Type of access Read 262 Jetter AG JC 350 Subscriber command Selecting a subscription Configuring a subscription Programming Command registers of all subscriptions
205. ases by 50 mm Mounting orientation The orientation of the controller JC 350 is vertical 26 Jetter AG JC 350 Identifying 3 Identifying Purpose of this chapter This chapter is for supporting you in identifying the following information with regard to JC 350 Determining the hardware revision Retrieving Electronic Data Sheet EDS information The EDS holds numerous remanent production relevant data Determining the OS version of the device and its software components Prerequisites To be able to identify the JC 350 the following prerequisites must be fulfilled The controller is connected to a PC The programming software JetSym 4 1 2 or higher is installed on the PC Information for hotline If you wish to contact the hotline of Jetter AG in case of a problem please requests have the following information on the JC 350 ready Serial number OS version number Hardware revision Contents Topic Page Identification by means of the nameplate ececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeaees 28 Electronic Data Sheet EDS sic ccevscc craton cniaee aiea cn sa aE ener 30 Version registers enre plete ile lee alates 37 Jetter AG 27 3 Identifying 3 1 Identification by means of the nameplate Introduction The nameplate is attached to the housing of the JC 350 and contains details such as hardware revision number and serial number If you wish to contact the hotline of Jetter AG in case of a problem please
206. asinnervis slices wacetdv vseecd na cent dienes 187 Changing GireCtOries ciccc cicends need ieeidias chat ibecleheil A 189 Creating a dreto es iccticiccedactssdeckees teeta dh ecees divetannnbeaet dinda dh tenatedendaneete 191 Deleting direcione Sesana ES 193 Determining the current directory ssesesssesesrsesesnnesesnnarsnneerannaaennneatannaanenne 195 178 Jetter AG JC 350 FTP client Initializing the FTP client Introduction Function declaration Return value How to apply this function Operating principle At each application program start the FTP client must be initialized at least once Function FtpInitialize Int The following return value is possible Return value 0 Always The function is used and its return value assigned to a variable for further utilization in the following way Result FtpInitialize The controller processes this function in the following steps Step scription Fae The controller closes all open connections of the FTP client Le The controller initializes all OS internal data structures of the FTP client Jetter AG 179 8 FTP client Establishing a connection to the FTP server Introduction Function declaration Function parameters Return value 180 Before data can be sent or received a connection to the FTP server must be established first When establishing the connection the client logs in to the FTP server by a user name and a password
207. ask is not processed further after issuing the function call The FTP server must first delete the file ServerTestFile txt Please note This file name serves as an example only An error has occurred This function is processed in the following steps Description S KAN controller sends a command to the FTP server that the file ServerTestFile txt must be deleted 2 The FTP server deletes the file ServerTestFile txt FTP server deletes the file ServerTestFile The FTP server deletes the file ServerTestFile txt NO errors have occurred the file has been deleted successfully the function is terminated and value 0 is returned errors have occurred the function is terminated and a negative value is returned 187 8 FTP client File names m 188 The function parameter for the local file may contain the path to this file e g Data TestFiles LocalTestFile txt If the file system of the remote network node supports this the function parameter for the file located on the FTP server can also contain the path to this file Otherwise the directory must be set beforehand using the command FtpDirChange The file system of a JC 350 supports both options Jetter AG JC 350 FTP client Changing directories Introduction Function declaration Function parameters Return value Operating principle This function lets you remove the current directory from the file system of a rem
208. ates cccccsseneceessneeeeeeneeeeseeneeeeseceeeeeseeneeeeseeneeeeseneeeeaseeneeenseeneeennes 54 LEDs Of the controller icce ccccccessusecentiacecetseacecevetacecetssacecnestacecutanaceceeenacteutsaceenhsuaceaviveaceeevataceeateeane 55 LEDs of the controller during boot ProCeSS ccicceceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeetiieeeeesaneeeeeeieeeeetneeeereaa 57 Status LEDs Ethernet interface 22 cccccccceceseenedeceneeedeeenenedeceeeeeeeaaneneseaneeedenanenedeceneeesedeneeees 59 4 4 Controls and SD memory card 1 0 0 ceseeeceesseee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeseseeeeeseseeeeesseeeeeeeeseeeenesseenens 60 Function description of mode Selector S11 cccececeeeeeecceceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeaeeeeeeeeeseeensaeeeeteess 61 SD Card Slol KOT sos sec ava scecea te deeeeseasceteste Meet acute R N dea seeenatadeedenanteactastcastedve 63 4 5 Installing replacing and removing the module cccceecceeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeenseeneeenseeneeenees 65 Installing the JC 350 on a DIN rail eee cece eeeeeeeeenne ee eect eect tenets eeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeseeaeeeeeeaeeeetenaeeeeeeaes 66 Replacing the controller JC 350 cccccccccecceceececeeeeeeceeeeeeeceeeeneceeeeseecceaeeeeceaeeeeecaeeeseeceeeeseeceeenenees 67 Removing the JC 350 from the DIN rail cece eeeeee ee eeee eter tenets ee ee ee ee teeeee sees eetieeeeeeneeeeeena 69 4 6 IP COMP GUAT ON sssrini AE nc educieed wenn AAAA ANNENS ASENNAT 70 FACTOrY SCUIN OS vic cats
209. ay a flag status proceed as follows Press the key R twice or the key I O three times Result The HMI switches to displaying the monitor function 2 Enter the flag number 3 Press the key ENTER Result The flag status is displayed for the period of time set in MR 2819 Monitor functions Display duration Once this period has elapsed the HMI displays the normal screen To display an output state proceed as follows Press the key I O Result The HMI switches to displaying the monitor function Ew Enter the output number 3 Press the key ENTER Result The output state is displayed for the period of time set in MR 2819 Monitor functions Display duration Once this period has elapsed the HMI displays the normal screen Jetter AG 405 10 Programming Displaying an input state To display an input state proceed as follows Press the key I O twice Result The HMI switches to displaying the monitor function Enter the input number Press the key ENTER Result The input state is displayed for the period of time set in MR 2819 Monitor functions Display duration Once this period has elapsed the HMI displays the normal screen Modifying a variable To modify a variable value proceed as follows value Have the value of the variable displayed see above Press the key Result You are prompted to enter a new value for this variable Meanwhile the curren
210. before sending an e mail During the logon process USER and PASSWORD must be entered The JC 350 supports the following authentication procedures LOG ON PLAIN CRAM MD5 Description Allowed values Illegal values In case of illegal value or Description Allowed values Illegal values IP 192 168 40 1 In the given example IP address of the SMTP server can also be specified as name gt 1 0 0 0 m lt 223 255 255 255 Network address Broadcast address The e mail feature is not available missing entry PORT 25 000 In the given example Port number of the SMTP server gt 0 m lt 65 536 gt 65 335 25 In case of missing entry Jetter AG 463 10 Programming 464 HELO In the given example Description Allowed values In case of missing entry USER In the given example Description Allowed values In case of missing entry PASSWORD In the given example Description Allowed values In case of missing entry JetControl_2 Name for logging on at the e mail server String of 63 characters max When sending the e mail the controller uses the entry contained in FROM JetControl0815 Log on name for SMTP authentication If this entry exists the entry PASSWORD is required too String of 63 characters max SMTP authentication will not be carried out MyPassWord Log on password for SMTP authentication If this entry exists
211. ber of write erase cycles approx 1 million Internal flash disk size 4 MBytes SD card size 32 MByte 4 GByte Memory access By operating system By JetSym Via FTP connection By the e mail client By browser via HTTP server By means of file commands from within the application program Jetter AG 217 10 Programming Application program memory Introduction By default the application program is uploaded from JetSym to the controller and is stored to it Properties Stored as file within the file system Default directory app Files may also be stored to other directories or on SD card Memory access By operating system By JetSym Via FTP connection By means of file commands from within the application program Related topics Application program see page 605 218 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Memory for volatile application program variables Introduction Properties Memory access Jetter AG Volatile variables are used to store data which need not be maintained when the JC 350 is de energized Global variables which are not assigned to permanent addresses not VL or RL Local variables Variables are stored in a compact way Variables are initialized with value 0 when they are created By JetSym From the application program 219 10 Programming Memory for non volatile application program registers Introduction Non volatile registers let you
212. bers Determining the register number Registers Overview Data of one connection each are displayed within the registers of a coherent register block Two other registers show the status of the command being executed by the application program The basic register number of these registers is dependent on the controller Device Basic register number Register numbers JC 350 320000 320000 320101 In this chapter only the last three figures of a register number are specified e g MR 002 To determine the complete register number add to this module register number the basic register number of the corresponding device for example 320000 FTP client module registers Overview wr 002 Tineostinseconds OOOO O O O mR PornumberoftneFTPsener O wr 00s Comeciontende OOOO O O wr 100 Processing siatus on pat of FTP olent wmn o O 198 Jetter AG JC 350 FTP client Registers Description Introduction MR 000 MR 002 MR 003 MR 004 Established connections are managed by the operating system of the controller in a list Module registers MR 004 or 005 are used to copy connection data into registers MR 006 through MR 009 Number of open connections The value in this register shows how many connections are currently open Module register properties Reading values 0 2 147 483 647 Number of connections Timeout To this register write the timeout of the FTP client at accessing the FTP server
213. can be accessed A JX3 Al4 module is connected to a controller JC 3xx The module number of this module is 2 1 1 0 0 0 2 RATARA 2 3 Number Element Description 1 Register number Supports direct access 2 Register prefix 10002 Assigned to the first JX3 module connected to a JC 3xx controller 3 Module register zzzz 0009 OS version of JX3 Al4 number Jetter AG JC 350 Example Registers on the Ethernet system bus Programming In the setup pane of JetSym you can directly read out the operating system version 1 2 0 0 from register number 100020009 100020009 100020009 1 2 0 0 A JX3 Al4 module is connected to a bus node JX3 BN ETH The module number of the JX3 module is 2 The bus node has got the ID GNN 001 4 5 Number Element Description pa Register number Supports direct access Bus node ID GNN 001 ID of the first JX3 BN ETH Module number 02 The first JX3 I O module connected to the JX3 BN ETH Register prefix 100102 Module register number 0009 OS version of JX3 Al4 In the setup pane of JetSym you can directly read out the operating system version 1 4 0 0 from register number 1001020009 1001020009 100102000 1 4 0 0 Jetter AG 229 10 Programming Register and I O numbers of JX3 modules connected to a JC 3xx Module numbers in a
214. ccactecscotees ccscceettancteteesseceeveasucceyecsccecetenceese eu veceensascedevedseceetteccteteesseeerensete 402 Overview of displays ANd HMIS ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeseeaeeeseeeaeeeseeaeeeseeaeeeseeiaeeeseenaeeeeseaaes 403 Meaning of keys in monitor function sisside ainiai ni aiia aaa RANA 404 9 Contents 10 10 10 10 10 1 10 10 2 10 10 3 10 10 4 10 10 5 10 11 10 12 10 13 10 13 1 10 13 2 10 13 3 10 13 4 Displaying and changing Variables ceceeeeeeeeeeteee ee ente ee erence ee eeee ee eeeeeesiieeeeetieeeeesneeeeee 405 Configuring the monitor FUNCtION 00 0 eee eeeeeeee ee eeee ee ee eeeeee ee ceaeeeeeseeaeeeseneaeeeseneaeeeseeaeeetennaees 407 Controlling printer and Serial interfaces cccccsseeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeneeseeeeneseeees 409 Supported serial interfaces ccccccesseeseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeceeeee see eeaneeceeeeesenseaneaseseeeseesseaneeeenees 410 Overview INTC ACES acrancar evtactuncesideseeed dednesevsdeveestauditedsddiveestananenes 411 Rogister Sa n dete sc decenseatedete ne ducewssdcedetevecwcansscecedeesducenssaceeedvecdudeessecededs eveueteeeceuexsies 412 Register NUMDGMS esccain eectesteee hits dee dansees dna eedactee Addie bees aadivednie einen 413 Registers OVEPVIGW vis ce iies sens deetidectdasees hats E Acdadetdna ees dad G 414 Module numbers Interface modules cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeecneeeeseeneeenseeneeenseeneeensee
215. ceaes 315 Jetter AG JC 350 10 3 9 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7 10 8 10 9 10 9 1 10 9 2 10 9 3 10 9 4 10 9 5 10 9 6 10 9 7 10 9 8 10 9 9 Jetter AG Contents J tSyne DIO CK AGE ais ec cecis ceca te cceec ve ccc cc ennea EEA ee ended ve ence te aed dean te ets 316 Description of system command registers c eee ee eeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeaeeeeenaaeees 317 Description of the JetSync blockage system COMMAMNAS ec eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeteeeeeeeeeeaeeeteeaeees 320 General system registers isi cccceseccies sceccceesetececwacteceeeteaceddessieceretesedeeestueceeudtecteesssaceereteceerdesteeces 322 Description of system command registers cc cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeseeeaeeeseeeaeeeeeeaatees 323 Description of system COMMAMNGS ccccceeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeseeeeeeeseeeaeeeseeaeeeeeeaaeees 326 Startup delay TeGISte Ns ccicescccccta ieee ceeesctc conn Ninan EnA AANA ANNEN NAA SENNA AARNA ANNAA AARNA 331 Setting the startup dolay ocsosscrudisisdranni rai ara E TE 332 Realtime clock RUC coc ccccccccecectecsecetets ccnecetetvceuien sececeeetvecutieeecndeiedvseutensecedbeeteneutie cecedeteseectberses 333 Technical specifications si neuier daasanddernsaucddeannaddentaued da sabdicentandddenaed 334 Programming ossen E ype doa sled cea E ea cea Se dee 335 Runtime registers ic ca ceccscnccccc cece ceececen cece eeeedetesueetens excudeidsrencetec
216. ceceeeeeceeceeceeeeeeeseceeeaeeeeeeeeeseesneaeess 380 Device NUMDES 5 fee secs ce ceedcec sacetea EE TE 381 CURSOR POSITION seiccs ccasceicenivnctacensccagccdvnatadenecasceduusanauccls dea coed dvasadeue aes ceehunenddyv dua cvea snes dcvveanadersaacgecnness 383 Setting the length of the input field escroissir eaan ENNA aE 385 Setting the maximum number of decimal places 0 0 0 cece eeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeenaeeeseenaeeeeeeneeeeeeaaes 386 Setting the suggested VAlUC c cceccenceceeeenceceeseneeceeneneeceennseneenneeceenenseceeneneeceenenaeeeeneneeenenenes 387 Polling the number of decimal places 0 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeaeeeseeaeeeeeeaeess 388 Userlnput Polling the StatUS n enancrnncarnen eaananeesaanecensaaedeneeaduecebeaaneeeens 389 Userlnput Aborting the instruction 0 cccccccceccceeeseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeeaeeesenaeeesenaeees 390 Querying the KEYS iisipan anara a nanan a aaar aaaea Vaanin aa aaia 391 ASSIGNING KOyS rororsndininin nin a RA EEA EA A 392 Registers of basic flag NUMDEFS erensia EE 396 Activating deactivating LEDS cceccccessenneeeeeeeseeeeeenseeeenenseeeseenseeeseeeseseseaeseseseanseeseeeneeesneaes 398 ASSIGNING LEDS cscri a ebeilaneceilaceeneiiiacenealace eivilancevniageelieeevalienaiaeeetdias 399 Registers of LED register NUMDESS 22 ccccceecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeesecaeeeeeedeeeeseeseneeeeeneneeess 400 Monit r TUN CUONS oso ccege
217. ceeed dandeneaueDeennddecd cxssuacencusasee swans lvceeadececxesnetereed soceey 257 PubliSh SUDSCTIIDE seeen aeRO AEAEE AEA 259 Publish subscribe REQiSters cccceeceteeeee cence ee eene seer ene ee ee tutant ee eaeee ee At En Annt EE nant nn nanten nn anent nen 261 Network registers network inputs and outputs 0 cceceeeeeeeeee cece eeeeeeceaeeeeeeeeeteeeeseeeeeeeeteee 267 Hardware Manager ssosisissisprrsisonas inunan ioa ASN NNa NEKEAREN NAATA AKENE ANASA AERES 270 BEM EUCAE LATIO C AEE 271 Error handling at the Jetter Ethernet system DUS assssuussssnunsnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 272 Acyclic data interchange Error logging cccecceeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 273 Error message during CRC COMPUtING cee ee eeeeeeeeenee ee erent ee ee RNANA ANAN EENEN AENEAS 274 Error message on part Of a subscription eee cececsee cece cece eeeene cece teen sede aaaeaeeeeeeeseteeceeeeeerentes 275 Controller evaluates errors reported by a remote network NOdE cece eeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeees 276 NetConsistency TuUmctio tei isceiecicecccecdiceescucee fected ve ctuenevesetadeeeectidepetecdeaeescedieeescuideeestuaeeevseecee evel 277 NelConsiStenCy UNCON fice ceed s E ity de Whee 279 Assigning the network parameters dependent on the GNN 0 c ceeeeseeceeseeeeeeeneeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 281 Activating and deactivating JetIPScan in JetControl 2 eee eeeeeeeeeene
218. ch of the messages boxes has received a new CAN message In R 200010500 CAN Prim Status bit 1 NEW DAT 1 546 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Register description CAN Prim interface Registers for configuring The CAN Prim interface is enabled in R 200002077 JX2 system bus special the JX2 system bus functions Registers Description R 200002029 JX2 system bus Baud rate R 200002077 JX2 system bus special functions Registers for configuring aes the CAN Prim interface Registers Reserpine R 200010500 CAN Prim status R 200010501 CAN Prim command register R 200010503 FIFO occupancy Number of received messages R 200010504 FIFO data Numbers of message boxes which have received new messages R 200010506 Global receive mask R 200010507 Global receive ID R 200002077 Enabling JX2 system bus special functions The value of this register influences the behavior at initializing of the JX2 system bus Meaning of the individual bits Bit 2 Activate CAN Prim in addition to JX2 system bus 1 The CAN Prim interface and the JX2 system bus are enabled following the next launch of the JX2 system bus This requires a restart of the controller This function allows to connect JX2 expansion modules Bit 3 Enable CAN Prim only 1 Only the CAN Prim interface is enabled following the next launch of the JX2 system bus This requires a restart of the controller All Node IDs can be used without any restrictions The control
219. cter Module register properties Values 1 1 stop bit 2 1 5 stop bits if MR 3 5 2 stop bits if MR 3 6 7 8 Value after reset 1 Parity This register lets you set the parity of a character Module register properties Values 0 None no parity 1 Odd parity 2 Even parity 3 1 mark 4 0 space Value after reset 2 508 Jetter AG JC 350 MR 6 MR 10 MR 11 Programming Interface standard This register lets you set the hardware interface which is used to receive and transmit characters Module register properties Values 0 RS 232 1 RS 422 2 Reserved 3 RS 485 2 wire Value after reset 1 Transmit buffer The character that has to be sent must be entered into this register lf the transmit buffer is able to accomodate the character it is entered into this buffer This character will be sent once all previously entered characters have been sent Prior to sending characters from the application program it must be checked whether the transmit buffer is able to accommodate characters This can be checked by reading out MR 11 The transmit buffer functions according to the FIFO principle The first character entered is sent first Module register properties Values 0 31 5 bits per character 0 63 6 bits per character 0 127 7 bits per character 0 255 8 bits per character Type of access Read Character written last Write Sending a character Sending buffer filling level This regis
220. cuictees i leeaveedtaatipead cca sh dddantulddceavhddactaylel deatyhddacavebdltenvehdieeiapeal annie cade das aate 71 The Configuration Memory saroietan a E aaa L dete AAA ated ES 72 The comiguration ilen roseo enaa iaa aE E A E 73 COMNMGUPFATION registo Sre EE E EA AE E N 77 Jetter AG 5 Contents 4 7 4 7 1 4 8 4 8 1 4 9 Changing the IP address of the Controller ec ceceeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeetaeeeeeeneeeeesaeeeeseneeeenes 78 Setting the default IP address 192 168 10 15 ec eee ee eetee eee ttne seer teee ee teeeee teaser sneeeere 79 Setting the IP address via Configuration file 0 02 ececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeseaeeeeetaeeeeetnaeeeeesneeeeee 80 Setting the IP address via configuration file and DIP SWitCh 0 ececeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeteneeeeetteeeeee 81 Setting the IP address via registers to be non volatile 2 2 eee ee eeteee ee eeee eter eeeeeeeteaeeeeetneeeeees 83 Setting the IP address during runtime ee eee ee eeeee ee ette ee ee eene ee ee taeee ee taeeeeetaeeeessaeeeeesneeeere 85 IP address in the GNN operating mode 000 0 eee ce eeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeeeeiaeeeseetaeeeeeenas 86 Using names Tor IP addresses ccceccccscecescadacdeduleceees n 88 Engineering of JX3 station equipped with a JC 350 sssssssssunessnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnna 90 Limitations to be taken into account when engineering a JX3 Station ccseeeeeeseeeeeees 91 Limitations of the
221. d errors have occurred the function is terminated and a negative value is returned Jetter AG 193 8 FTP client Directory names If the file system of the remote network node supports this the function parameter for the directory located on the FTP server can also contain the complete path including several subdirectories leading to this directory If this feature is not supported the user must navigate from one directory level to the next until the desired directory is reached This is done using the command FtpDirChange The file system of a JC 350 supports both options Related topics Creating a directory see page 191 194 Jetter AG JC 350 FTP client Determining the current directory Introduction Function declaration Function parameters Return value This function lets you determine the current directory in the file system of a remote network node Function FtpDirPrint FtpConnection Handle Ref str String Int Description of the function parameters FtpConnection Handle Value returned by the function FtpConnect str String address Current directory with path specification If the returned value is negative an error has occurred If the returned value is 0 the current directory could successfully be determined in the file system of the remote network node Return value 0 No error 1 Invalid handle 3 Communication error there is for example n
222. d the JC 350 generates a timeout in and the number of allowed retries step 3 has been maxed out The JC 350 generates a timeout The I O module number is entered into R 200002011 In R 200002008 bit 3 is set to 1 In R 210004 bit 2 is set to 1 The red error LED on the JC 350 is lit 4 The JC 350 proceeds with step 1 for the next JX2 I O module Jetter AG 435 10 Programming Monitoring of IP67 and When monitoring IP67 and CANopen modules a missing response will CANopen modules immediately result in a timeout error on the JC 350 IP67 and CANopen modules are monitored using the CANopen service nodeguarding sep scription O O The JC 350 sends a monitoring telegram to an IP67 or CANopen module The cycle time can be configured in R 200002028 a response has been received the JC 350 proceeds with step 1 for monitoring the next module NO response has been received the JC 350 generates a timeout in and the number of allowed retries step 3 has been maxed out The JC 350 generates a timeout The I O module number is entered into R 200002011 In R 200002008 bit 3 is set to 1 In R 210004 bit 2 is set to 1 The red error LED on the JC 350 is lit The JC 350 proceeds with step 1 for monitoring the next IP67 oder CANopen module 436 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming JX2 system bus Description of non volatile registers Introduction Non volatile registers let
223. d Module register properties Value after reset Non volatile factory setting 0 Takes effect Next time when the controller is launched Jetter AG 439 10 Programming Register description of modules connected to the JX2 system bus R 200002013 Amount of connected I O modules The controller JC 350 enters the sum of the following I O modules into this register JX2 I O modules IP67 module CANopen modules O dummy modules CANopen dummy modules Values 0 31 Number of I O modules Module register properties Type of access Read only Value after reset Amount of connected I O modules R 200002014 Number of connected slave modules The controller JC 350 enters the sum of the following slave modules into this register JX2 slave modules JetMove 1xx 2xx and 6xx CANopen slaves JX2 Slave dummy modules Values 0 16 Number of slave modules Module register properties Type of access Read only Value after reset Number of connected slave modules 440 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming R 200002015 Index to module array This index lets you select the module array entry contained in R 200002016 Values 0 R 200002016 contains the number of modules connected to the JX2 system bus 1 51 R 200002016 contains the module code that has been entered into the module array by the controller R 200002016 Module array This register value reflects the module code that has been selected i
224. d Module register properties Values Data of data bytes 0 255 Takes effect When the CAN Prim interface is enabled 556 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming CAN message box Description of registers for indirect access Indirect access To get indirect access to message boxes of the CAN Prim interface always select the message box using R 200010502 Message Box Number To allow compatibility with previous OS versions the registers for indirect access are still supported Always use the registers for direct access when programming the CAN Prim interface R 200010501 CAN Prim command register R 200010501 is used to transfer certain commands to the CAN Prim interface CAN Prim interface Commands 1 Enable the message box The selected message box in R 200010502 is enabled When enabling the message box the system checks whether the CAN ID of the message box has been reserved by the system bus or not Result Bit 0 1 in R 200010510 Disable the message box The selected message box in R 200010502 is disabled Result Bit 0 0 in R 200010510 Send a CAN message ACAN message is sent containing the data of the selected message box Clear the NEW DAT bit This command is for clearing bit 1 NEW DAT in R 200010510 which enables the selected message box to receive CAN messages again Result Bit 1 0 in R 200010510 Clear the OVERRUN bit Clears bit 2 OVERRUN in R 200010510 of the selected message box Result Bit 2
225. d SMTP IP 192 168 40 1 POP3 IP 192 168 40 1 USER JetControl4711 PASSWORD Pop3PassWord DEFAULT MAILCFG EmailDefaults cfg Authentification through In case the e mail server requires an encrypted authentication SMTP SMTP IP 192 168 40 1 USER JetControl0815 PASSWORD MyPassWord 468 Jetter AG JC 350 10 13 2 Creating e mails Programming Introduction This chapter describes how to create an e mail Then the application program sends these e mails For each e mail the user has to create an e mail template file Contents Topic Page Name of the e mail template file eee cee ceecececeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeteceeeeeeeeeettees 470 Structure of the e mail template file cceccceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeteenteeeeeeeeteees 471 Inserting real time controller VAlUCS c cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 473 Jetter AG 469 10 Programming Name of the e mail template file Introduction This naming convention must only be kept to if system function 110 is applied which should not be used any further though The STX feature EMailSend lets you select any file name and directory as long as the limitations owed to the file system are kept to The name of an e mail template file consists of a fixed part of the name anda variable part The variable part of the name allows the application program to choose various e mails for sending File name email cfg Name prefix wh
226. d JC 365 MC Bit 3 2 01 CAN Prim in addition to JX2 system bus Bit 3 2 10 CANopen interface only CANopen STX API Bit 3 2 11 CAN Prim only Bit 4 1 CAN IDs 0x081 9x09F for CAN Prim Bit 6 1 CANopen feature in the JX2 system bus driver is deactivated Bit 6 makes sense only if bit 3 has not been set CANopen module index for JX2 system bus application registers SysBus application registers Register number 65 89 SysBus application registers Object ID SysBus application registers Sub index SysBus application registers Length Max number of I O update retries Index to array of I O retry counters Array of I O retry counters Timeout for I O update of I O modules ms Timeout for register access to I O modules ms Timeout for register access to JX2 slave modules ms Write 1 to set the CAN error counters to 0 Counter for stuff errors Counter for CRC errors Counter for formal errors Counter for acknowledge errors Counter for bit errors Bootloader version of JX2 system bus interface Registers on I O modules xx I O module number 2 00 22 Inputs outputs mapped to registers see below I O registers CANopen JX SIO x I O module number 70 0 9 Configuration registers CANopen JX SIO x I O module number 70 0 9 JX2 slave registers xx JX2 Slave Nummer 10 Quick reference JC 3xx CAN Prim registers 200010500 200010501 200010502 200010503
227. d rate of the JX2 system bus Areduced baud rate allows longer lines Values 7 1 000 kBaud 6 500 kBaud 5 250 kBaud 4 125 kBaud Module register properties Value after reset Non volatile factory setting 7 Takes effect Next time when the controller is launched ON delay After the JC 350 has been energized it waits the period given in this register before it starts initializing the JX2 system bus Values 20 600 ON delay from 2 s to 60s Module register properties Value after reset Non volatile Factory setting 60 ON delay 6 s Takes effect Next time when the controller is launched 438 Jetter AG JC 350 R 200002077 Programming Enabling JX2 system bus special functions The value of this register influences the behavior at initializing of the JX2 system bus Meaning of the individual bits Bit 2 Activate CAN Prim in addition to JX2 system bus 1 The CAN Prim interface and the JX2 system bus are enabled following the next launch of the JX2 system bus This requires a restart of the controller This function allows to connect JX2 expansion modules Bit 3 Enable CAN Prim only 1 Only the CAN Prim interface is enabled following the next launch of the JX2 system bus This requires a restart of the controller All node IDs can be used without any restrictions The controller does not initialize any JX2 expansion modules on the JX2 system bus For this reason JX2 expansion modules cannot be connecte
228. dent communication via RS 232 is not possible Jetter AG 131 4 Mechanical and electrical installation Connecting several displays or HMIs Multi display mode Introduction Multi display mode allows a JC 350 to be operated with up to four alphanumeric displays and HMIs connected to one of the serial interfaces When doing so the various HMls display the same or different texts and or variable contents Interface Connect the display or HMI via serial interface to X11 This port supports the interface standard RS 422 Jeter 7 s i 9 R PHE _ Bea goog aL 1il 2llal o AQ aall fs 90 ARRIER EEA malt o 2 Im Q a DADA DEEE salt MII Pra fre Cra Pra Prs Jl Je Jeter goon polola mea EA Cra Prz Cra Pra Prs JEJE e BiG JEER O O O O Wee Cra Pre Cra Pra Cre Jf s Restrictions Irrespective of the fact that various hardware drivers have been implemented only one hardware interface is available This means While for example communication via RS 422 is taking
229. dinaanan 468 461 10 Programming Structure of the configuration file Introduction The configuration of the e mail client in the controller is based on the contents of the file EMAIL email ini The JC 350 reads the values during the boot process only Structure of the This configuration file is a text file the entries of which are grouped into several configuration file sections These sections are for entering values which are then used by the e mail client You can insert blank lines as required The following characters precede a comment line or Sections The configuration file contains up to three sections Section SMTP is mandatory The user does not need to create the other sections unless they are actually required Section Configuration values SMTP P address and port number of the SMTP server Log on parameters POP3 P address and port number of the POP3 server Log on parameters DEFAULT Name of an e mail template file containing default values 462 Jetter AG JC 350 Section SMTP Introduction Example Authentication Configuration values Programming This section lets you specify the parameters for establishing a connection with the SMTP server SMTP IP 192 168 40 1 PORT 25000 HELO JetControl 2 USER JetControl0815 PASSWORD MyPassWord This type of authentication requires the JC 350 to log on at the SMTP server
230. display whether the following registers contain connection details Module register properties Reading values 0 Connection exists 1 Connection does not exist Module register properties Writing values 0 Address the first connection in the list gt 0 Address the next connection in the list lt 0 Address the previous connection in the list MR 1 Type of connection The value in this register shows whether the connection is a client or a server connection Module register properties Values 1 Client 2 Server MR 2 Transport protocol The value in this register shows whether TCP or UDP is used as transport protocol Module register properties Values 1 UDP 2 TCP Jetter AG 537 10 Programming MR 3 MR 4 MR 5 MR 6 IP address The value in this register shows the configured IP address Module register properties Values 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 IP port number The value in this register shows the configured IP port number Module register properties Values 0 65 535 State The value in this register shows status the connection is currently in Module register properties Values 0 Connection terminated 1 Connection is being established 2 Connection is established 3 TCP IP server Waiting for connection request from client 4 Internal usage Number of sent bytes The value in this register shows the number of data bytes sent via the given connection Since this is a signed 32 bit r
231. dule the controller uses the first part of the register prefix as an index to the tables containing the IP addresses and IP ports The values read out of these tables are used by the controller to address the bus node in the network For further information on registers 235000 ff please refer to Network registers IP address and IP port see page 246 The controller adds the register offset for the JX3 system bus of a remote node 100 000 000 to the second part of the register prefix and the module register number no 3 and 5 in the addressing scheme see page 246 The controller uses the resulting number to address the register 235 004 192 168 12 200 a as T T T T T T T T T i i cj ee E GNN 003 i l 1003021421 PAE 248 Jetter AG JC 350 Action Example Programming If you want to access the JX3 module register of a remote network node using register addresses as of 1 billion proceed as follows Enter the IP address of the remote network node into register 235 000 GNN Value range of the GNN 1 199 Enter the port number into register 235400 GNN Value range of GNN 1 199 Now you can access the value via register 1nnnmmzzzz Value range of GNN nnn 001 199 Value range mm 02 17 Value range zzzz 0
232. e 154 152 Jetter AG JC 350 File system Flash disk Properties Capacity The following disk space is available to the user Flash disk capacity 4 MBytes Properties The internal flash disk drive has got the following properties Up to 7 directory levels and 1 file level are allowed Differentiation between upper and lower case Directory and file names with a length of up to 63 characters are possible All characters except and are permitted for directory and file names User access administration for a maximum number of 31 locks and 33 users Jetter AG 153 6 File system SD card Properties Capacity The available capacity depends on the SD card used Tested capacities 8 MByte 4 GByte Properties The SD memory card has got the following properties The SD memory card must be compatible with FAT 16 Directory and file names of 260 characters length max can be used Differentiation between upper and lower case The following characters are not permitted in directory and file names ae bee Een at di me Ws and J There is no user access administration 154 Jetter AG JC 350 File system 6 2 User administration Introduction Prerequisites Properties Files Restrictions The file system for the internal flash disk lets you define authorization for access locks to directories and set up users For each user you can set individual access r
233. e 748371092 0x2c9b3c94 into the control register 202936 of the file system Switch the device OFF Switch the device ON Result While booting the device checks the SD card The value in the control register remains unchanged so that the card is checked whenever the JC 350 is rebooted This function repairs the administrative structures on the SD card in order that it can be used further However it may happen that the device cannot restore in all cases data of a file which for example has been written incompletely 172 Jetter AG JC 350 FTP server 7 FTP server Introduction The FTP server lets you handle directories and files using an FTP client The files can be stored to the following storage media Internal flash disk SD card This chapter covers the login process and describes the commands supported by the FTP server FTP clients The user has the option of using a command line FTP client which comes with many PC operating systems or graphic FTP tools Number of possible The FTP server on the JC 350 is able to manage up to four FTP connections connections simultaneously Any additional FTP client which tries to connect with the FTP server will get no response to its request for establishing a connection Supported commands The FTP server supports standardized commands For more information refer to FTP server help menu connect with FTP server and enter the command help or help binary
234. e JetControl receives from a Modbus TCP client the command write coils specifying output number 205 and the instruction to set this output Register 272705 Output Offset contains value 100000000 Hence output 100000205 of a peripheral module JX3 DO16 will be set 488 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Supported commands Class 0 fc 3 read multiple registers Reading register sets The starting register number within JC 350 is calculated as follows Register number specified in the command plus the content of R 272702 Register Offset fc 16 write multiple registers Writing register sets The starting register number within JC 350 is calculated as follows Register number specified in the command plus the content of R 272702 Register Offset Jetter AG 489 10 Programming Supported commands Class 1 fc 1 fc 2 fc 4 fc 5 fc 6 490 read coils Reading outputs The output number within the JC 350 is calculated as follows Output number specified in the command plus the content of register 272705 Output Offset read input discretes Reading inputs The input number within JC 350 is calculated as follows Input number specified in the command plus the content of register 272704 Input Offset read input registers Reading inputs blockwise in 16 bit words The starting register number within JC 350 is calculated as follows Register number specified in the command plus the content of R 272702 Register Offset
235. e device not expressly authorized by Jetter AG will 14 Jetter AG JC 350 Transport Storing Repair and maintenance Replacing modules Disposal Safety instructions result in a loss of any liability claims to Jetter AG The original parts are specifically designed for the device Parts and equipment from other manufacturers have not been tested by Jetter AG and are therefore not released by Jetter AG The installation of such parts may impair the safety and the proper functioning of the device Any liability on the part of Jetter AG for any damages resulting from the use of non original parts and equipment is excluded The JC 350 contains electrostatically sensitive components which can be damaged if not handled properly To exclude damages to the JC 350 during transport the backplane module must be mounted to it and it must be shipped in its original packaging as well as in apt protective packaging Use an appropriate outer packaging to protect the JC 350 against impact or shock Incase of damaged packaging inspect the device for any visible damage Inform your freight forwarder and Jetter AG When storing the JC 350 observe the environmental conditions given in the technical specification The operator is not allowed to repair the device The device does not contain any parts that could be repaired by the operator If the device needs repairing please send it to Jetter AG When replacing the
236. e for administration configuration and error detection You have got read and partial write access to these module registers Register overview Module registers Description 210004 200008 General error registers 200009 250000 250004 Registers for administration of all subscriptions 250x10 250x11 Registers for administration of one subscription 250x20 250x30 Registers for configuring one subscription 254001 254003 Registers for error detection o 255000 255004 Registers for administration of all publications 255x10 255x11 Registers for administration of one publication 255x20 255x30 Registers for configuring one publication Flag 2080 Enable for publishing an error Flag 2081 Error collection of the subscriber x 0 9 Availability Administration and configuration registers are available as follows For subscriptions and publications 10 arrays for administration and configuration registers are available The register arrays differ by the hundred s place of the respective register number The placeholder x indicates the number of the register array Value range of x 0 9 External clients use register array x 1 such as JetSym with visualization application and PCOMX protocol STX functions use register array x 0 In order to gain faster access to individual publish subscribe administration registers several register arrays are at your disposal There
237. e on which they are processed Adata record is received by the subscriber Therefore it is called subscription A subscriber can manage several subscriptions To receive a publication there must exist a corresponding subscription One publication can be received by subscriptions on various network nodes simultaneously as the publications are published via multicast frames JetSym When a combination of a controller and one or several network nodes is configured in JetSym the Hardware Manager generates the configuration files for the publishers and for the subscribers The Hardware Manager generates one to one relationships between the publications and the subscriptions Features of If in Hardware Manager you add network nodes with the modules connected publish subscribe to them Hardware Manager will automatically generate the process data belonging to these modules as publish subscribe variables Features of publish subscribe Parameter Value Description Number of network nodes 000 199 200 network nodes max They are entered into the Hardware Manager by their name and as GNN Maximum amount of 64 64 process variables max process variables per This corresponds to 256 bytes of publication subscription process data Jetter AG 259 10 Programming Configuring and executing publish subscribe Related topics Parameter Value Description Cycle time 1 Default 2 ms 2 147 483 647 ms Network
238. eaczenriphedzeeshaddanvedeedeineeae eee 536 Register GOSCriPllOM sssi chee Seeds devt deencive mera OO 537 User programmable CAN Prim interface cccccssseeccseeneeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeenseseeeenseseenenseseenens 540 Restrictions regarding the CAN Prim interface eccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeaeees 541 User programmable CAN Prim interface Operating principle eccecceceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 545 Internal processes of the CAN Prim interface 0 cccccceceeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeesenseaeeeeeereeteees 546 Register description CAN Prim interface ec ceeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeseeeanees 547 CAN message box Description of registers for direct ACCESS eeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeetteeeeenteeeeeenaes 551 CAN message box Description of registers for indirect ACCESS cccceeesteeeeeeeteeeeeenteeeeeenaes 557 Using the CAN Prim INtCM aCe sees aE aan eae eeceee 561 CAN Prim interface Sample program c ccccceceeeeeeeeneeceeeeeeesecencaeceeeeeeesecenaeeeeeeeseseesnaees 564 Using CANAD masks ve teissstneiiesceesieeneiiele a AE E A 565 RTR frames via CAN Prim interface crniiin inini 566 Automatic copying of controller data 568 OPO MALI principle sirere esaea EEr aeea aee EAE Ea EEEE ee EEEE AANEEN 570 Activating the AutoCopy feature esseeeesssesssssesrnesrsnnsseennnssinnnntnnnaatannnaeunnnatannaadaanaanannanaannan aaa 571 Executing
239. eads the IP address of the DNS server out of the configuration memory The configuration memory see page 72 Jetter AG 89 4 Mechanical and electrical installation 4 7 Engineering of JX3 station equipped with a JC 350 Introduction JX3 station Number of connectable JX3 modules Contents 90 This chapter describes how to engineer a JX3 station equipped with a JC 350 A JX3 station consists of a JX3 BN xxx bus node or a JC 3xx controller and JX3 peripheral modules connected to it The possible number of JX3 modules depends on the following parameters Maximum number of JX3 modules Maximum data exchange rate Maximum power consumption Topic Page Limitations to be taken into account when engineering a JX3 station 91 Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation 4 7 1 Limitations to be taken into account when engineering a JX3 station Introduction JX3 system bus configurator This chapter covers the following limitations of a JX3 station Maximum number of JX3 modules Maximum data interchange rate Maximum power consumption Take all three limitations into account when engineering a JX3 station and match the JX3 peripheral modules considering all limiting factors If you need more JX3 peripheral modules for your plant you can expand it by means of JX3 BN xxx The JX3 system bus configurator assists you in detecting limitations through engineering a real JX3
240. eaeeeseeaeees 195 8 2 FROGISTGIS E E ER A S de E O E E E E E 197 Register NUMberS asssseeeesseessrneseenneessnnantinnaannnnadtannaattAAaaAAAAAaAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAA AAAAAA AAAA AA AAAA anana 198 Registers Description esessssseesserrssttrtttttttttttt eee t u ee ee tenn ee ee teaeee ee taeeeeetaeeeeesaeeeeesieeeesenneeee 199 9 HTTP server 203 9 1 Server Side Includes icisisscsectsesscectinsstecseesccecs aa aa aE Ea ON AE 204 Firstentry inthe ATE Tile ecesiascsccag ase ceend a T 205 Inserting real time controller values 0 0 22 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ee enee cece teens ee taeeeeetaeeeeetaeeeeetieeeeetieeeeteaa 206 Example of an HIME page eaii a aaia a oveshaacausviaedevcsanccauatnesecvensaadandtiesdeceasas 211 10 Programming 213 Abbreviations module register properties and formats cccceceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeetaeeeeeeeeeeeees 214 10 1 Memories lt OVervioW i cic ciceecvecceiecescecec cvacetieveseeteeceesdtuevesontiecssectedsetanteecrscauacsesastiecrastuaecerssserers 215 Operating system MeMO wictiicicccceecseccetecieecesecteeceeeneeceuvenweeetcdaseeaveceucesteneueduneceuevnedaeeestedavevatins 216 File System MEMO sece nenir ces ieeeecsane sete EE R A 217 Application program MeEMOLy ea ccicseceeetoieerdeiseecavateasendibetulcicindaiieside EE AE E i essadeane 218 Memory for volatile application program variables ccccccceeseccceceeeeeseeneeeeeeeeeeseeeenieeeeeeeees 219 Jetter AG 7 Content
241. eccccrcarensireni ai sdasteteatadeetvaacutenidiseetiae 170 Formatting the SD OIA eecccsccn ir EE deat diseieidileid aanteiiinetins 171 Checking the SD Card ecrssercrcdiais drani a E AEE 172 7 FTP server 173 LOJO ai E RA vaueeacntaand darted 174 Example Windows FTP Clientes uniin eaae aaa aaa aaea aa 175 8 FTP client 177 8 1 Programming ssirissrsneariniurennina ennnen n aAA AEAEE EEA EEEIEE AAAA 178 Initializing the FTP chent nesenai a EE A SEEE 179 Establishing a connection to the FTP server ceccceceeeeneeeeeeeneeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeseeaeeeeeenaeees 180 Terminating a Connection 0 2 ee cecece ee ceee eee e cnet ee ee tater ee eaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeseenaeeesesiaeeeesenaeeeeseaaes 182 Reading a eee ceeee 183 Writing tO a FIC seniai EEE EEE AEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EN EEEa 185 Deleting a file oo ceeecceceeecceeeeeceeeeeenceeeeeenaeeeeaaaaeesseaaeaesseaaeaessaaaaaeseeaaaaeeqeaaaaesseaaaaesseaseeseeaaaeetees 187 Changing directories eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeaeeeseeaaeeeseeaaeeeseeaaeeeseeaeeeseenaeeeseeneeeeseaes 189 Creating a CireCtOry cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee scence eeceeeeeeseeeeeeseneeeeeseneeeeeseneaeeeseeeaeeeseeeaeeeseeaeeseeaaees 191 Deleting directories ec eceeeeee tence erent ee ee tees eee aeee ee eaae seer eaeee ee eeee ee tieeeeesieeeeetiaeeeeesieeeeees 193 Determining the Current GireCtOry eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeese
242. ectteedecetteenancciecnnestiecnaneceeednenteversncciecnteetiversescbechectie 359 STX Instructions for displaying texts ceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeseeiaeeeeeeiaeeeeseneeeeneaes 360 DeViC MUMDESS ccceesccceeeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeaaeeeseaaeeeseaaaeesseaaeaessaaaaeeseeaaaaesaaaaaaeseeaaeaeseeaaaeeseeaaentees 362 C rsor position ee cere 364 Clearing the SCreGN ccccccceecceeeeeseeeeeeeceneeeeecaeeeeeaaeeeseaaeseeeeaaeeeeeaaeaeseeaaeeeeeeqneeseenenaeeeeeneees 366 Displaying numerical VAlUCS cccceeeeeceeeeeee cece seen ee eeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeseaneeeeseeeeeeseeneeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeenees 368 STX instruction for displaying numerical values 0 0 0 eee ee eeeeee ee eneeeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeseeaeeeeeeaeeeeseaaes 369 DeVICE NUMDETS eerca EEE ee eet ee ee teeter tana ee setae EEEE EEE 370 CURSOR POSTION isis dees ccscedsnnanaccas aa ia deaceeaunandd TAAA E A E dea a TAE ADEE EEE 372 Setting the length of the display field ncsmrisseiiaiinenni e 374 Setting the SIGN OPtlOM inten fee EEEE S 375 Setting the number of decimal places eecccecceccececeenceceensneneeeeeneeeeeteeaeeeeneneeeeseeneeeeeneaaeeeetnees 376 Setting the format of numerical values 20 0 eee eeente ee ee eee eeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeseeaeeeseeaeeeseenaeeeeeenaes 377 Entering numerical values cess ceeeeeeeee seen ee eeeeee seen eeaeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeaseeneeeasseneeenees 378 STX instruction for the input of numerical values ccce
243. eeeeeceeeeceeeeeeesecaeeeeeeeeesesceaeaeeeeeerseseenaeeeeeeeenees 126 Product description SMC EX250 c c ccccceeeeeeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeceaeeeceeeeeseeeneaeeeceeeeesesenneeeeeeeetees 127 Product description WAGO I O System 750 0 0 ecccceeeeeeenteeeeeetneeeeetaeeeeeeaeeeeetaeeeeesnaeeeeee 128 Connecting displays ANd HMIS cccceesseeeeeeeeee ee eeee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseseeeeesseeeeeeeeeenenesenenes 129 Overview of displays and HMIS 0 c ccccciseccccseseccceesseecceedeeeccvensnencuevueadsveeceencvtedeacsvenwecncuveecceves 130 Connecting a display Or IMI ccsceaceesvueds Sudswtes ivvuneah evliseas cevegeecv dvead dvvveas dyciewas evvveus velueesddeveeat gies 131 Connecting several displays or HMIs Multi display MOde ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeenaees 132 Multidisplay MOde W iQ sctcpccuies tdseeeds ames EE sec vga nee 133 Interface Cable IC DK X Mis missis cceendneavddoned acevapaeeuchnosasecvaduanyentvessdeeunad dvannweaddeeagaadvadvecsdeesunaneyes 135 Interface cable KAY _O386 XXXX nininini aces ener ee a aA a E aE EA E a a 137 Interface cable KAY 0533 0025 cisini a i eaa Eaa AE is 139 Initial commissioning 141 Preparatory work for initial COMM ISSIONINg sssseseeseeessrreseirtrstrrssttrrssternnsttnnntttnnsstennnseennnnnen 142 Initial commissioning Of A JC 350 ooo eee eee eee eene ee ee eene ee eee ae ieina nnan EaR 143 Configuring error StTAtSS sic ss cccecitececetidenescvadece eekdede
244. eeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 286 Program run at system AUCH esiosa EENE eee tien see eee eae 287 Register description NetConsistency basic driver cccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeteteeeeeseaeeeeettaeeeeetnaeeeeees 288 Register description of the NetConsistency instance 0 cccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeetieeeeetneeeeees 296 Error evaluation at NetConsisternGyenceccanin A 297 JetIPScan Register description cccsceccsseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeseseseeeseseeeeeseseseeesesesneesesesnensessenenes 299 Register NUMDGNS tisecccseeeectea dic snceiieei E AEEA ence tendiceeee 300 Global status Register description ec cceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeseeeeeeeseneeeeeseneeeeeteeaeeeeennaees 301 Warnings and errors Register GESCTiIPtion cc cceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 304 Configuration Register description cccceeeeeeeeeee cence ee eeeeeeeeceneeeeeseneaeeeseeeaeeeseeeaeeeteeaeeetennaees 308 Administrating the connections of the JetIP TCP and STX debug Server cceseecceeeees 310 Automatic termination Of CONNECTIONS ee ccceeeeeteeeeeenee eect eeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeesesaeeeeeenaeeeeeenaes 311 REISTE roi AEE EE AEE AAEE 313 Executing an ARP request i ccccececececccvectecscesencteteseenes n nnana nAn seuetd de qncuns eesecued cyeueeeecesecetidees 314 Executing am ARP request lt hcs vtekeiecisaceseeetidleeesndd wictidieesjacdaveceleeisncdaventidieensaciaveeeta
245. eeeeeneeeeeetaeeeeesaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 54 Controls and SD memory card eee eeeeee ee eete eset tenets ee eteeeeeeneeeeetneeeene 60 Installing replacing and removing the module cc eeeeeeeeeteeeeeenteeeeeeaes 65 IP coniguraU Oies E E A E S 70 Engineering of JX3 station equipped with a JC 350 ssssssssssssesrrnnssserree 90 Configuring the JX2 system DUS eee eceeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeseeeaeeeeeeeaeees 103 Connecting displays ANd HMIS ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeseeaeeeeeeaeees 129 Jetter AG 41 4 Mechanical and electrical installation 4 1 Interfaces Terminal X10 The function of terminal X10 is as follows Power supply for the controller JC 350 Power supply for connected JX3 peripheral modules Terminal X11 The function of terminal X11 is as follows Serial interface to a PC Serial interface to an HMI by Jetter AG Serial interface to any device Connectors X14 X15 The function of terminals X14 and X15 is as follows Ethernet port to a hub switch or router Ethernet port to a PC Ethernet port to an HMI by Jetter AG Ethernet port to a JX3 BN ETH a JX3 COM xxxx or a JetMove 200 ETH Ethernet port to any device Contents Topic Page Power supply terminal X10 ccccccceeseseceeeeeeeeeceneaeceeeeeeeseceaaeeeeeeeeeeennaees 43 Serial interface port X11 ceceecccccce cece eeeee eee ce eeeeseeeceaeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeeeeeeteees 44 Ethernet po
246. eeeneeeeeeeaaeeeseeaeeeseenaeeeeeeaaes 88 Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation Factory settings Introduction Before the JC 350 is shipped various parameters are set to a certain value The parameters can be changed by the user IP address of default gateway IP address of DNS server Controller name IP port number for debugger IP port number for JetIP Name for AutoCopy command file All other DIP switch sliders OFF User s password admin User s password system Jetter AG 71 4 Mechanical and electrical installation The configuration memory Introduction Enabling conditions Default values Storage location controller replacement Related topics 72 The controller reads the parameters for initializing the IP interface out of the configuration memory during the boot process The user can access the data stored in the configuration memory in the following ways Afile located in the system directory of the file system lets you read out and modifiy data Various registers or one registers let you read out data The controller reads out data located in the configuration memory only during the boot process If you make changes to the configuration memory reboot the controller for these changes to take effect Only this way these changes take effect Before the controller further processes data from the configuration memory it checks them for plausibility If entries are invalid
247. eees 540 Jetter AG 213 10 Programming Abbreviations module register properties and formats Abbreviations Module register properties Numerical formats JetSym sample programs The abbreviations used in this document are listed in the table below R 100 Register 100 MR 150 Module register 150 Each module register is characterized by certain properties Most properties are identical for many module registers the value after reset is always zero for example In the following description module register properties are mentioned only if a property deviates from the following default properties The numerical formats used in this document are listed in the table below Notation Name tomat The notation for sample programs used in this document is listed in the table below Notation Description Fa ie he e 100 0x100 0b100 Constant numerical values 214 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming 10 1 Memories Overview Introduction The JC 350 features several types of program and data memories There is volatile and non volatile memory Volatile memory loses its content at switching off Non volatile memory keeps its content even when the power supply is off The memory is located directly in the CPU or in separate memory or I O modules This chapter gives an overview of the available memory Contents Topic Page Operating system MEMOSY cccceceeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeseceaeaeeeee
248. eeesdetevectadanteeviauseeelaediehvidnvvestidennevidaveeeiaeareaes 145 Configuration IN JStSyimisict e is sete det a tsa ucts EAEE ud ia edd cel A 146 Jetter AG JC 350 Contents 6 File system 151 6 1 Propertie Sikanie rae a ia aaia cheatuanennesiccrdaaduslnhapsdnvcnedtennmaedantenessannnnadentennnss 152 Flash disk Properties arccos nadia aa a a Aa aea AaS aa aaa Aa EEEE NEE 153 SD Card Propertie S niian oai iiai aE aa aa a aa a ga iaaa aaa SE aaa 154 6 2 User administrati n sccccs ieccvecsieedeecs cectecedteettecs cetcceegdeedeee sented eg ANAA NA sguueeasinaceseysandeeedissteestiseiereds 155 AdMiInIStration OF USCIS essenin aeie eva gag cv Aa EEEE EAE SEA AE EREA EE 157 As delivered condition Predefined users and KCYS cccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeeeeseaeeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeenees 159 ASSIQMING Ocke csn E ap canansudeeaaed eczema aseeeae Geczeusuecaneace 160 Assigning names to ke ys lockS 22 lt tsvicecccsagicenesidheceuseasaceetaaiaceiae aiceeesdaeacnesenscexeracsaceendascenendaeceereas 162 6 3 Reviewing the flash disk Capacity used cccessseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneeeneeenseeeeeensesneeenseeeeenneeeeens 164 Flashdisk capacity Used ciiir cn T A 165 6 4 Operating system update and application program sssssssssssseersnnnnnnnnrennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nna 168 6 5 Formatting and checking c ccceseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeenseeeeeeeseceeeeaseeeeeeaseeeeeeasesneeenseseeeseneenenens 169 Formatting the flash disk c
249. eeeseaas 432 Dummy modules on the JX2 system DUS 2 0 2 eeeee ee etn ee erste ee ee taeee ee taeeeeesaeeeeetaeeeeesaeeeeee 434 Monitoring intervals on the JX2 system DUS eee eeeeeeeetee cece eeneee ee taeeeeesaeeeeetaeeeeetnaeeeee 435 JX2 system bus Description of non volatile registers ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeenaneeeeeaas 437 Register description of modules connected to the JX2 system DUS cece eeeeeeeeeteeeeeees 440 Register description Error logging on the JX2 system DUS eee eeeeeeeeetteeeeettteeeeeeneeeeees 442 Register description Timeout and interval times for modules on the JX2 system bus 445 Register description Retry counter for JX2 system bus modules c eeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeees 448 Register description Versions of JX2 system bus drivers ee ee eee eee e eee ee taeeeeeeteees 449 JX3 system DUS 55 ois secede Fe ed ncs Se tiees sa ccna wees de wee aa eee dace ica AKAAERE SAKENS 450 Module array and module codes of connected modules ccccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeteeeeneeeeeeeeettees 451 Dummy modules on the JX3 system DUS 2 00 eee e tener ee ee eene ee eee aeee ee eaeeeeetaeeeeetaeeeeesneeeee 453 JX3 system bus Description of non volatile registers eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 454 Register description Modules detected on the JX3 system DUS eee eeeeeeeeeeteeeeeenteeeeees 455 Register description Error logging on the JX3 system DUS
250. eeesecaaaeceeeeesesecsacaeeeeeeesetenaees Operating system update from within the application program cccccceecseceeeeeeeteeeesteeeeees Application program Application program Default path cccccecccceecce cece eeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeceacaeceeeeeseeenencaeeeeeeesetenaees The application program is stored to the SD Card ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeteneaeaeeeeeeeseteenaees Loading an application Program c ceccccecceceeeeeeeceneaeeeeeeeeececeaeaeeeeeeesesceaeeeeeeeeesetsenieeeeeeeeneees Quick reference JC 3xx Technical SpeCifiCatiOms seiissccccsicscasecsenssccentesasnccnesscetesennnncdiececeensesaasdinscetetesnaacucceeceseentancatedeecnie JC 350 Technical ata sessssacesecieceeas sanccathcaescaasasncdeteeverceuadancssiaeensecaaace dsheseexceaadancacteenetecvnaddacss Physical dimensions eccoir aT TE TARA Operating parameters Environment and mechanics eeceeecce cece ee eeceeeeeeeeeeeeteesncaeeeeees Operating parameters Enclosure 2 c ccccceceeeeeeeeceaeeeceee ee seeeaeaeeeeeeeeeseeeaeaeeeeeeeseseesinaeenees DC power supply inputs and outputs 0 cceeeeeceeeee cece ee eeeeceaeeeeeeeeeeedcaaeeeeeeeeesesennieeeeeeeeteees Shielded datasand VO NS iseic ead asiees td cued Caadaddeetinecabesatadaei end via neces Jette 605 606 607 608 609 rAG JC 350 Safety instructions 1 Safety instructions Introduction This chapter informs the user o
251. eeesecenaeeeeeeeteeeeea 113 Product description Festo CPX terminals ccccceceeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeesecenaeeeeeeeeeteees 114 Product description Festo CPX CP interface cccccececeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeesecenaeeeeeeeteneees 116 Product description Festo CPX CMAX 1 ccccecceccece cece eeeeeeaeceeeeeeeteccaeeeeeeeeeseceieaeeeeeeeeeneeea 117 Product description Festo CPX CMPX 0 cccecceceecce cece ee eeeeeeae cece eres seceaeeeeeeeeeseseiaeeeeeeeteteeea 118 Product description Festo MTR DCI cccccccceceecceceeeeeeeeeeeaeceeeeeeeseceeaeeeeeeeeeseneieaeeeeeeeeeneeea 119 Product description Festo SFC DC ccccccceeeeeecee cece ee eesececaeeeeeeeeesecaaeaeeeeeeesesennaeeeeeeeenees 120 Product description Festo SFC LAC cccccceceeccecee cece eeeesecnneeeeeeeeeeesecaaeeeeeeeeesesennaeeeeeeeeeees 121 Product description Festo SFC LACLI ccccccceceeceeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseceaeeeeeeeeeseseesieeeeeeeeeees 122 Product description Lenze 8200 VeCtol cececeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeteceaeaeeeeeeeseseenieeeeeeeeetes 123 Product description Maxon EPOG cccceceeeeeeeceeeceeeeeeececaeaeeeeeeesesecaeaeceeeeeseesenieeeeeeeeneees 124 Product description Milan drive c cccceeeeeeecenceeceeeeeeececcaeaeeeeeeeeesecaaeaeeeeeeesetsenieeeeeeeeneees 125 Product description SMC EX120 ccccsccccec
252. eeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 121 Product description Festo SFC LACI ccccccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 122 Product description Lenze 8200 vector ccc cceccccccceseceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 123 Product description MAXON EPOS cccccccccccccceeseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 124 Product description Milan drive ccc cccccccccccccecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseneeenes 125 Product description SMC EX120 cccccccccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeees 126 Product description SMC EX250 00 ccccccccccccccccceeeeececeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeseseeees 127 Product description WAGO I O System 750 seeen 128 Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation Product description Module BWU1821 by Bihl Wiedemann BWU1821 The BWU1821 is a gateway between CANopen and AS interface BWU1821 AS interface CANopen gateway Restrictions when Number of BWU1821 modules connected to the connected to the JX2 system bus of JX2 system bus JC 3xx I O module number 70 or 71 only The BWU1821 module occupies the next 8 module numbers as well Minimum requirements The BWU1821 can be connected to the JX2 system bus of the following controllers and modules by Jetter AG JC 340 JC 350 V 1 05 0 00 JC 360 V 1 01 0 00 JC 24x V 3 23 JM D203 JC24x V 1 12 0 00 JX6 SB V 2 18 Jetter AG 111 4 Mechanical and electrical installation
253. eeetneeeeee 600 Operating system update Via FTP cececeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeteteeeeesneeeeetneeeee 601 Automatic OS update from an SD card 0 eceecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeenenaees 602 Operating system update from within the application program 603 Jetter AG 599 12 OS update OS update by means of JetSym Introduction The programming tool JetSym offers an easy way to transfer an OS file to a JX module connected to the JX2 or JX3 system bus of the controller Prerequisites An OS file for the JX module is available AUDP IP and a TCP IP connection between programming tool and controller is possible The number of the IP port is set in the configuration memory as IP basic port number for JetIP communication The operating system is running The controller has initialized both the JX2 and JX3 system bus with the connected JX modules without errors Note Make sure the controller and the JX modules remain energized Updating the OS To update the OS of a JX module proceed as follows Select in the JetSym menu Build the menu item Update OS Alternative In the Advanced Configuration dialog of the Hardware Manager click on the button Update OS Result A file selection dialog opens Select the new OS file here Ergebnis In JetSym a confirmation dialog opens Confirm by clicking Yes Ergebnis JetSym opens an input box for entering the interface type and module number Enter here t
254. eeseteeneeeeeeeeeteees 216 Filesystem MOM ONY ies rience cageves an aE aa aE 217 Application program Me MOTry ec eceececeeeeeeeeeecaeceeeeeeesecaeaeeeeeeeeeteeaees 218 Memory for volatile application program variables eceeeeeeeeees 219 Memory for non volatile application program registers a se 220 Speicher f r nichtfluchtige Variablen desAnwendungsprogramms 221 Registers on I O MOGUles sivieics ccdetccdvteestdcuededcducscaceedvvsesacdevias kiiri 222 Memory for non volatile registers on the backplane module 223 Special TEGISISNS eunoe aia vans ceevvanncteveous E E EEA Y 224 Inp tsand OutpUtS assaig aa ia h 225 Flago nr E EE AE a oncaeid edne 226 Jetter AG 215 10 Programming Operating system memory Introduction The OS is stored to a non volatile flash memory in the CPU Therefore the OS can be executed immediately after the device is powered up Properties Internal flash memory for storing OS data Internal volatile RAM for storing OS data Memory access The user is not allowed to directly access the OS memory To modify the OS it must be updated Related topics OS update see page 594 216 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming File system memory Introduction The file system memory is for storing data and program files Properties Internal flash disk and SD memory card Non volatile Slow access Milliseconds up to seconds Alimited num
255. egister and the sent bytes are added each time the number range may be exceeded from the positive maximum value to the negative maximum value Module register properties Values 2 147 483 648 2 147 483 647 538 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming MR 7 Number of received bytes The value in this register shows the number of data bytes received via the given connection Since this is a signed 32 bit register and the received bytes are added each time the number range may be exceeded from the positive maximum value to the negative maximum value Module register properties Values 2 147 483 648 2 147 483 647 Jetter AG 539 10 Programming 10 18 User programmable CAN Prim interface CAN Prim interface CAN Prim The benefit Applications Required programmer s skills Contents 540 The user programmable CAN Prim interface allows to send and receive CAN messages The CAN messages are completely processed in the application program This feature is not only apt for CANopen devices The customer can rather communicate with third party devices which are based on a CAN protocol The user programmable CAN Prim interface can be used for the following applications Devices which are equipped with a CAN interface can be controlled via proprietary protocols Controlling of CANopen capable devices To be able to program user programmable CAN Prim interfaces basic knowledge of Controller Area Network
256. egisters is as follows scheme 2 3 4 5 No Element Description 1 Register number Supports direct access 2 First part of register prefix nnn 001 199 ID of the network node Bus node ID GNN referred to as Global Node Number 3 Second part of register mm 02 17 Number of the JX3 module of a prefix remote node Number of the function mm 91 Registers of the combined digital module inputs and outputs of a remote node 4 Part 1 2 Register prefix 1nnnmm The prefix is preceded by a leading ONE Jetter AG 267 10 Programming Ono etament Desertion Network registers for accessing JX3 modules Register overview Inputs and outputs ea Module register number zzzz 0000 9999 Characteristic feature of the register number for access to remote JX3 modules The value of the second part of the register prefix is the number of the module at the JX3 system bus 02 17 In cyclic data interchange access to the process data of the remote JX3 modules is made via network registers For further information on configuration of data interchange and generated variables for access to JX3 modules please turn to chapter Hardware Manager see page 270 The register number in which the digital inputs and outputs of the remote nodes have been combined is characterized by the value being 91 in the second part of the register prefix Overview 1nnn914000
257. election DisplayText2 222808 Number of decimal places UserlInput Bit 15 Illegal stack 3 222810 Number of decimal places DisplayValue Bit 16 Error when loading the application program 222811 Max number of decimal places UserInput Bit24 Timeout Cycle time 222812 Field length DisplayValue Jetter AG 613 14 Quick reference JC 3xx 222813 Field length UserlInput 1nnn202000 JX2 module registers ai 1nnn227999 222814 Indirect cursor position 1nnn810000 JetMove registers 222815 Default value for Userlnput Integer Float 4nnn819999 222816 Displaying the sign 1nnn980000 Indirect access via local register 236xxx 1nnn980199 222817 Status of UserInput 4nnn990000 Indirect access with variable target window 222818 Enable disable monitor functions 1nnn999999 222819 Display text monitor function 222820 Switching over to monitor display Ethernet system bus 222821 Dialog language Subscriber 222824 Indirect buffer number 250000 Status bit coded Multi display mode Bit 0 1 No CRC 222825 Text buffer for display 1 Bit 1 1 Error in connection with a subscription 222826 Text buffer for display 2 Bit 7 1 Subscriber is running 222827 Text buffer for display 3 250001 Command is 102 Restart 222828 Text buffer for display 4 222829 Basic flag number for display 1 me Sopp 222830 Basic flag number for display 2 110 Acknowledge error 222831 Basic flag number for display 3 250002 Subscription ID of the last er
258. elete Screen and Delete to End of Line are of no special significance and will be output without any changes To send texts via user programmable serial interface proceed as follows Use the instruction DisplayText or DisplayText2 Specify Device 9 Result The task waits at this instruction until all characters have been entered into the transmit buffer Jetter AG 517 10 Programming Sending values Introduction Prerequisites Restrictions Sending Values 518 The instruction DisplayValue allows redirection of values to Device 9 This way values can easily be sent via user programmable serial interface This guide proceeds from the assumption that the following conditions are met The user programmable serial interface is configured The user is familiar with the options of the instruction DisplayValue refer to the online help which comes with JetSym When redirecting instruction DisplayValue to the user programmable serial interface the following restriction applies The cursor position will not be evaluated To send values via user programmable serial interface proceed as follows The special registers for formatting the display which are used in connection with the instruction DisplayValue have to be set to the desired values za Use the instruction DisplayValue 3 Specify Device 9 Result The task waits at this instruction until all cha
259. em DUS o n 233 Registers and I O numbers of CANopen modules on the JX2 system DUS eeeeeeeees 234 Register and I O numbers of JX3 modules connected to a JX3 BN ETH 2 eeeeeeeeeeees 235 Registers and I O numbers of JX3 nodules from the JX3 BN ETH perspective 2 237 Jetter Ethernet system DUS ccccceseeseseseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeneeseseseeeseeeseaeseeeseeeseeeeneeseseeneeseseeneees 238 The Global Node NumbeP 1302303 celeste tedeaethiadaeleleeihbiceeelnasabhat A 240 Acyclic data interchange iiccic ciccceecssecceecstecaeesnescee este cteeestesceecstestaeestesceeestectoeetiescoeestectaeenteccee 241 Command group NetCopy scesssernsiivsss mirsa iaaa anaia A AEN a S A 243 Command group NetBit secscsnroniasie n igure iacetlinns 245 Network registers 0 c cece sence erent ee erent eee ene ee eee ne ee eee ee eee eee ee eeee ee taeeeeesieeeeeseeeeesieeeeree 246 Registers located on JX3 MOUIES 0 eee eee eeeete eter entree ee eneee ee eaeee ee taeeeee teases tieeeeesiaeeeeees 248 Indirect addressing of remote modules 0 ec eee eeeeeeeeenee eect eee ee eeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeesenaeeeeeenas 250 Addressing with variable destination WiINdOW cccecccceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeseenaeeeeeeaas 252 Register description Acyclic data interchange cccccseeeeeeeetteeeeeseieeeeeteeeeeetiieeeeesneeeee 254 Cyclic data interchange ciciicecccsetescteedsoteceesces
260. en application program and network client via TCP IP or UDP IP connections For this purpose function calls are used These function calls are included in the programming language of the JC 350 To program this feature proceed as follows 4 Initializing the user programmable IP interface 2 Opencomestons O 3 Transfer data 4 Terminate the connections Technical data of the user programmable IP interface Festus eepto While the controller JC 350 is processing one of the functions of the user programmable IP interface tasks having called the functions should not be stopped through TaskBreak or restarted through TaskRestart Failure to do so could result in the following errors Connections do not open Data loss during sending or receiving Connections remain open unintentionally Connections are closed unintentionally Contents Topic Page Initializing the user programmable IP interface ceeeeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeeeee 524 Establishing a CONNGCUOM is 2 cccct cv hetateedanseeiecntieesidenee ata deesiaaeetaane dees 525 Sending Gata cs cieiserceiatecceniactichdeegeceeidaeecvddane A 529 Receiving daa cakes ceo ctd eg eeeadectetste dg cueseen de Spbemeceeedentes debstedgedertce peenigeeddtte seed 531 Terminating a Connettori onneaan Eaa 534 Jetter AG 523 10 Programming Initializing the user programmable IP interface Introduction Function declaration Return value How to use this function
261. endian Read access to this register removes 2 characters from the receive buffer and returns them as 16 bit value Assignment Module register properties Values 0 65 535 Type of access Read Removes 2 characters from the buffer Takes effect if MR 14 gt 1 MR 16 Receive buffer 16 bit big endian Read access to this register removes 2 characters from the receive buffer and returns them as 16 bit value Assignment Module register properties Values 0 65 535 Type of access Read Removes 2 characters from the buffer Takes effect if MR 14 gt 1 Jetter AG 511 10 Programming MR 17 MR 18 Receive buffer 32 bit little endian Read access to this register removes 4 characters from the receive buffer and returns them as 32 bit value Assignment Module register properties Values 2 147 483 648 2 147 483 647 Type of access Read Removes 4 characters from the buffer Takes effect if MR 14 gt 3 Receive buffer 32 bit big endian Read access to this register removes 4 characters from the receive buffer and returns them as 32 bit value Assignment Second Bit 16 23 Module register properties Values 2 147 483 648 2 147 483 647 Type of access Read Removes 4 characters from the buffer Takes effect if MR 14 gt 3 512 Jetter AG JC 350 MR 19 Error counter This register shows the number of detected errors Module register properties Values 0 2 147 483 647
262. eneeeeetieeeeetneeeee 461 Creating e mails 0 cccceceeee tence teen ee ee ette ee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeetiieeeeesieeeee 469 Sending AN e mail cece eet eee eter e terete ee eee te ee ee taeee ee eaeeeeetaeeeeeeaeeeer 478 Registers sisccinicd deadevsiacdeciaeecacaveiatecsvendcedensadedaavpidiaceneiacgeaveadcadssiadedesbueezecetiace 479 460 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming 10 13 1 Configuring the E mail feature Introduction Prerequisites Contents Jetter AG This chapter gives a description on how to configure the e mail feature so as to allow sending e mails from within the application program During the boot process the JC 350 reads out configuration data from the file EMAIL email ini For creating the configuration file the following prerequisites must be fulfilled The IP address of the e mail server is known If the IP address of the e mail server is not known name resolution through a DNS server must be possible refer to Using names for IP addresses see page 88 The log on and authentication parameters at the e mail server are known To obtain this information contact your network administrator Topic Page Structure of the configuration file ec eeeceeeeeeeeee eter eeeeteteeeeetneeeeeeneeeee 462 SOECHON SMTP jenssin E 463 Section POPI naiai aaa aaa adadi 465 section DEFAULT eeren AA 467 Configuration file EXampleS lt sssssssiirssisisieesntiiisnanniinnan niinen nidianan
263. ent 320000 Number of open connections 320001 Command 320002 Timeout 320003 Server port 320004 Selection via number 320005 Selection via handle 320006 Server socket IP address 320007 Server socket Port 320008 Client socket IP address 320009 Client socket Port 320100 Access status 320101 Task ID User programmable IP interface Reading out the connection list Bit 3 1 Remanent memory 380001 Command 14 Clear error log 2 Start error log 3 Stop error log 4 Stop if error buffer is full 5 Circular buffer 6 Stop on error code ON 7 Stop on error code OFF 10 Remanent memory 11 Dynamic memory 380002 Buffer length 380003 Maximum buffer length 380004 Number of error entries 380005 Index to error list 380006 Error entry 380007 Error stop code 380008 Number of codes until stop 380029 Group index to error list 380030 64 error entries 380093 I O networking 390000 node 10 390001 node 10 390002 node 10 390003 node 10 390004 node 10 390005 node 10 394001 394002 394003 395000 node 10 Status registers Error register Enhanced error register 1 Enhanced error register 2 JetSync status Subscriber status Subscription ID of the last error Address of a bus node not of a controller having reported an error GNN IP address Port number Control register Command NetConsistency function Only for JC 340 JC 350 JC 940MC and JC 945MC Basic drivers 350000 Last re
264. er klick in JetSym the tab Hardware Manager As an alternative launch the Hardware Manager via keys Alt 5 Related topics E JC350_PubSub System Sy Release iy Hardware AT erok 53 5 JC 350 ppt cPu PPI JX2 Systembus pol Jx3 DI16 Ppl IX3 404 oy ETH Systembus Publications re PubToBN_001 2 Subscriptions min SubFromBN_001 i JX3 BN ETH 001 Pil Ux3 al4 Ppl JX3 D1016 ay ETH Systembus Publications eR PubFromBN_001 Subscriptions M SubToBN_001 E Motion Control Ethernet system bus see page 238 Jetter AG 271 10 Programming 10 3 4 Error handling at the Jetter Ethernet system bus Introduction Contents 272 This chapter covers error handling at the Jetter Ethernet system bus Topic Acyclic data interchange Error logging ccceeseeeeseereeeeeeenteeeeeenaees Error message during CRC COMPUtING ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeentteeeeeaes Error message on part of a subscription ee eeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeteeetteeeeees Controller evaluates errors reported by a remote network node Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Acyclic data interchange Error logging Introduction The programmer uses the following information for error logging Return values of the commands JetIP networking registers and flags NetCopy and NetBit For error logging use the return values of the respective command You will find them in the JetSy
265. er 2 bit coded Bit 1 Error in the MC object Bootloader version IP format OS version IP format Controller type 340 350 360 Currently available heap Available heap at system launch Available heap before application program Runtime register in milliseconds rw Runtime register in seconds rw Runtime register in R 201003 Units rw 10 ms units for R 201002 rw Runtime register in milliseconds ro Runtime registers in microseconds ro Web status bit coded Bit 0 1 FTP server available Bit 1 1 HTTP server available Bit 2 1 E mail available Bit 3 1 Data file function available Bit 4 1 Modbus TCP has been licensed Bit 5 1 Modbus TCP available Bit 6 Reserved Bit 7 1 FTP client available Control register of the file system Oxc4697a4b Formatting the flash disk 0xd364e64d Formatting the SD card 0x2c9b3c94 Checking the SD card Password for system command register 0x424f6f74 System command register 102 Controller restart reboot 104 Reset remanent parameters 122 Wait for communication OFF 123 Wait for communication ON 160 Task switch on I O access OFF 161 Task switch on I O access ON 170 Continue task time slice OFF 612 Jetter AG JC 350 Quick reference JC 3xx 171 Continue task time slice ON Bit 25 Timeout Task lock 310 Load the configuration data Bit 31 Unknown error 311 Load the module configuration 210006 Highest task number 312 Load p
266. er is written to the value changes made in or out of register set 2 are transferred Register overview The following registers have been assigned to the real time clock Register set 1 Direct access Register R 102910 Milliseconds R 102911 Seconds R 102912 Minutes R 102913 Hours R 102914 Weekday 0 Sunday R 102915 Day R 102916 Month R 102917 Year Description Jetter AG 335 10 Programming Register set 2 Buffer access R 102920 Milliseconds Seconds Minutes Hours R 102924 Weekday 0 Sunday R 102926 Month R 102927 Year R 102928 Read write trigger R 102910 Milliseconds This register contains the millisecond of the actual time Register properties Values 0 999 Value after reset 0 R 102911 Seconds This register contains the seconds of the actual time Register properties Values Value after reset the power reserve has actual time not elapsed the power reserve has elapsed 336 Jetter AG JC 350 R 102912 R 102913 R 102914 Programming Minutes This register contains the minutes of the actual time Register properties Values Value after reset the power reserve has actual time not elapsed the power reserve has elapsed Hours This register contains the hours of the actual time Register properties Values Value after reset the power reserve has actual time not elapsed the power reserve has elapsed Weekday
267. er the suggested value and completes executing the instruction you press another key thathas the controller clears the been used during input suggested value and has the value resulting from the pressed key displayed 3 The input numerical value is displayed left aligned in the input field until executing the instruction is completed or aborted Result After finishing the input the latest display remains on the screen Contents Topic Page STX instruction for the input of numerical values eeereeeeeeeeees 380 Device numbers eniem s 381 C rsor POSION aan a a a a a EA 383 Setting the length of the input field aaeeaeeeeneneeneseesnenesnrnseernnsesnnnseennnneenn 385 Setting the maximum number of decimal places ee 386 Setting the suggested value ceeeceeeceessceteeeceeeeeesaeeeeeesaceeseeaanenseeaanentees 387 Polling the number of decimal places ccceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeaas 388 Userlnput Polling the status 0 00 0 eceeeeeeneeeeeenneeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 389 Userlnput Aborting the instruction 0 cc eeecceeeeeneeeeecteeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeenas 390 Jetter AG 379 10 Programming STX instruction for the input of numerical values Function declaration Function parameters Result of the function How to use this instruction Operating principle Function UserInput Dev Int Pos Int Double Number of the device where
268. er value Complete directory name Allowed values All valid directory names Illegal values Invalid directory name In the event of an illegal The controller does not switch the directory It enters value the error into the log file Example COMMAND 12 Command FtpDirChange ServerDir Data MyTestData Command FtpDirCreate Function Creating a subdirectory in the FTP server Parameter name ServerDir Parameter value Complete directory name Allowed values All valid directory names Higher level directories are available Illegal values Invalid directory name Non existent higher level directory Name of an already existing directory In the event of an illegal The controller does not generate the directory It enters value the error into the log file Example COMMAND 6 Command FtpDirCreate ServerDir Data MyTestData Restriction If a directory with the corresponding path is specified as function parameter all directories up to the directory to be created must exist Recursive creation of several directories is not supported Command FtpDirRemove Function Clear the subdirectory in the FTP server Parameter name ServerDir Parameter value Complete directory name Allowed values All valid directory names The directory is empty Illegal values Invalid directory name Directory is not empty In the event of an illegal The controller does not delete the directory It enters the value error into the log file
269. erTestFile txt must be transmitted 2 The contr receives the contents ofthe fle ServerTestFieat 8 The contoler wits the contents othe le LocalTestFlext NO errors have occurred the file has been copied successfully the function is terminated and value 0 is returned errors have occurred the function is terminated and a negative value is returned File names The function parameter for the local file may contain the path to this file e g Data TestFiles LocalTestFile txt If the file system of the remote network node supports this the function parameter for the file located on the FTP server can also contain the path to this file Otherwise the directory must be set beforehand using the command FtpDirChange The file system of a JC 350 supports both options Related topics Writing to a file see page 185 184 Jetter AG JC 350 Writing to a file Introduction Function declaration Function parameters Return value Jetter AG FTP client This function lets you copy the content of a file belonging a local file system to a file belonging to the file system of a remote network node Function FtpFileWrite FtpConnection Handle Const Ref ServerFile String Const Ref ClientFile String Int Description of the function parameters Parameter Value Remarks FtpConnection Handle Value returned by the function FtpConnect ServerFile File name File name as wh
270. ergency stop Two hand control device LCD 60 2 lines of 8 function keys with KAY 0386 xxxx 40 characters LED each Numeric keypad LCD 110 4 lines of 8 function keys with JC DK Xm 20 characters LED each Numeric keypad 352 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming 10 9 2 Registers Introduction This chapter gives an overview of registers by which you can parameterize the control of HMIs or query status information Restrictions The settings made in this register are of global effect that is they will impact all functions for controlling HMls If different settings are used in several tasks of the application program then these settings may impact each other Contents Topic Page Register MUIMDENS sie css sag eecsiss Seiad Capes dossntevessscnsecersperavesiadascuvaaseieten E Ee 354 Registers OVErVieW cece eee rete etre eet ae seta ae tenia etae eet aeeeeaaeeneeee 355 Jetter AG 353 10 Programming Register numbers Introduction The registers are combined into one register block The basic register number of this block is dependent on the controller Register numbers g Controller Basic register number Register numbers JC 340 JC 350 JC 360 220000 222804 222840 Determining register In this chapter only the last four figures of a register number are specified numbers e g MR 2815 Add to this module register number the basic register number of the corresponding device to determine the complete register
271. error parameter 4 The value is only valid if R 470043 gt 4 Module register properties Values 0 2 Type of access Read Error parameter 5 R 470048 shows error parameter 5 The value is only valid if R 470043 5 Module register properties Values 0 2 Type of access Read 294 Jetter AG JC 350 R 470049 R 470050 R 470157 Programming Number of characters of the error message R 470049 shows the number of characters of the error message The error message has been stored to registers 470050 470157 Module register properties Values 0 300 Type of access Read Text of the error message These registers contain the text of the error message Module register properties Type of access Read Value after reset oe Data type RegString Jetter AG 295 10 Programming Register description of the NetConsistency instance Register overview R 471010 Status register R 470010 shows the status of the first NetConsistency instance Meaning of the individual bits Bit 0 Error 0 No error 1 Error Bit 2 Status of initialization 0 The first instance has not been initialized 1 The first instance has been initialized Bit 3 Status of execution 0 No execution 1 Execution in process Module register properties Type of access Read Value after reset 0x00000004 R 471011 Command register The value is 0 as there are no commands 296 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming
272. es along with a JC 350 refer to the following application notes MTR SFC Festo_apn042_xxx_Festo_Electrical_Motor_Controllers pdf CPX Festo_apn043_xxx_CPX_Technologiemodule pdf Jetter AG 119 4 Mechanical and electrical installation Product description Festo SFC DC SFC DC The motor controller SFC DC is a product by Festo AG amp Co The motor controller SFC DC is a positioning and position feedback controller for electric mini slides SLTE SFC DC xxx H0 CO Without control panel with CANopen interface SFC DC xxx H2 CO With control panel with CANopen interface Number of SFC DC modules connected 10 max to the JX2 system bus Additionally limited by the number of axes of the controller Restrictions when connected to the JX2 system bus Minimum requirements The motor controller SFC DC can be connected to the JX2 system bus of the following controllers by Jetter AG JC 340 JC 350 V 1 10 0 00 JC 360 V 1 10 0 00 Application Note For more information on how to operate these modules along with a JC 350 refer to the following application notes MTR SFC Festo_apn042_xxx_Festo_Electrical_Motor_Controllers pdf Festo_apn043_xxx_CPX_Technologiemodule pdf 120 Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation Product description Festo SFC LAC SFC LAC Restrictions when connected to the JX2 system bus Minimum requirements Application Note The motor controller SFC
273. ese modules is able to supply up to 8 downstream JX3 modules with logic voltage Certain JX3 modules however have a higher power consumption which may reduce the number of JX3 modules that can be connected to one JX3 station Depending on the power consumption you must equip the JX3 station with additional power supply modules JX3 PS1 The following table shows the allowed power consumption of JX3 modules connected to the right downstream of the power supply module Power Supply Module Power consumption P24 vy Power consumption Psy JC 3xx 18 W 6W JX3 BN ETH 18W 6W JX3 BN CAN 22W il 6w JX3 PS1 24W ew The following devices are not taken into account when calculating power consumption Controller JC 3xx Bus node JX3 BN ETH Bus node JX3 BN CAN Power supply module JX3 PS1 Jetter AG JC 350 Engineering steps Example Jetter AG Mechanical and electrical installation To engineer a JX3 station proceed as follows Gather the following information from the technical data contained in the manual of your JX3 module Current consumption from the logic voltage of the JX3 system bus I5v Current consumption from the additional voltage of the JX3 system bus l24v E Calculate the power consumption of the JX3 modules Py 5V Isy Py Pay 24V ly O Add the power consumption of JX3 modules included in
274. esedbiedaecuseecesedbiesveqconeeveedeiersectberee 342 Description of the runtime registers eee eee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeenaeees 343 Monitoring interface activities cccccseseeeeseeneeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeceeeenseeeeeeneeeeeeenseseeeenseseeeenseseenens 345 Operating Principles tiit n ti Gasaaccdensanliacasseed aa aada a Aene aa 346 Programimi essea E E a ea ee 348 Controlling HMIs with alphanumeric displays ccseeccseseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeseseeenaeeeenens 350 Connectable AMIS wcssiccccccssceccesisctenessscteeesicccenesscctueeescetencstcctieessccteeesscctbeesscetuecsscctieestebieessccieesse 351 Overview of displays ANd HMIS ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeaeeeseeaeeeseeaeeeeeeiaeeeseenaeeeeneaaes 352 Registers seicciccccicccsccteccteeccicententivetancciccnneeteccnanecisexseetecereuccbecnneettyexaeeciecdbentevenseetecnsuccieernenttvereectie 353 Register numbers cece siteccs sua dcedevacdacad ied cent A vient eintcan eat 354 Registers OVErViOW ceccceeeeteeeeeeene ee ee enne ee ee ttne ee erent ee eet e ee ee taeee ee teeee ee taeeeeeneeeeetieeeeseieeeee 355 Configuring the screen SiZC ceeeeeeceeseneeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeseeeeeenseceeesasseeeeenseseeeenseseeesensseeeens 357 Configuring the Screen size manually eee eeeeeeeeeenee ee eeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeeeenaneeeneaaes 358 Displaying teXtS ccccccccecccctececceceeeccte canestiecne
275. esses which have been received via Modbus TCP can be modified locally in the Modbus TCP server For this purpose three registers have been provided The basic addresses for accessing registers inputs and outputs are entered into these registers Then the address contained in the Modbus TCP frame specifies the address with reference to the basic address Register offset The basic address for accessing registers via Modbus TCP is entered into R 272702 Register properties Value after reset 1000000 Input offset The basic address for accessing inputs via Modbus TCP is entered into R 272704 Value after reset 4 00000000 Output offset The basic address for accessing outputs via Modbus TCP is entered into R 272705 Register properties Value after reset 100000000 The Modbus TCP server on the JetControl receives from a Modbus TCP client the command read multiple registers starting from register number 100 The number of registers to be read is 5 Register 272702 Register Offset contains the value 1000000 Hence registers 1000100 through 1000104 will be read The Modbus TCP server on the JetControl receives from a Modbus TCP client the command read input discretes specifying input number 210 and the instruction to read this input Register 272704 Input Offset contains the value 100000000 Hence input 100000210 of a peripheral module JX3 DI16 will be read 487 10 Programming Example 3 The Modbus TCP server on th
276. etermine the I O module numbers of IP67 I O modules on the JX2 system IP67 1 O modules bus of the JC 3xx proceed as follows Set the I O module numbers by means of the addressing switch located on the module itself LioN S and LUX7 CSL modules are counted among IP67 I O modules Register numbers for Register numbers for IP67 I O modules connected to the JX2 system bus of a IP67 I O modules JC 3xx consist of the following elements p2fofofo o s x I O module number minus 2 00 22 Module register number z ae I O numbers for IP67 I O I O numbers for IP67 I O modules connected to the JX2 system bus of a modules JC 3xx consist of the following elements EARS ESERESERESE Module specific I O module number 02 24 Module specific I O number Example Several IP67 I O modules are connected to a JC 3xx controller 2 3 OUP LN OOE my COON OE ole Ma JE CC TORONA Oo 6 JC 3xx 1 Refer to documentation on JC 3xx 2 20000300z 2000002zz 3 20000301z 2000003zz Jetter AG 233 10 Programming Registers and I O numbers of CANopen modules on the JX2 system bus I O module numbers of CANopen modules Register numbers for CA
277. etter AG 515 10 Programming Sending characters Introduction Acharacter is sent by entering it into the register Transmit buffer Prerequisites This guide proceeds from the assumption that the user programmable serial interface has been configured Sending characters To send characters via user programmable serial interface proceed as follows Check the transmit buffer filling level whether there is enough space in the transmit buffer If there is no space in the transmit buffer wait until there is enough space Enter the character to be sent into register Transmit buffer Result The character is written into the transmit buffer and will be sent from there 516 Jetter AG JC 350 Sending texts Introduction Prerequisites Restrictions Sending Texts Programming An easy way to send texts via the user programmable serial interface is redirecting the instructions DisplayText and DisplayText2 to Device 9 This guide proceeds from the assumption that the following conditions are met The user programmable serial interface is configured The user is familiar with the options of the instructions DisplayText and DisplayText2 refer to the online help which comes with JetSym When redirecting the instructions DisplayText and DipslayText2 to the user programmable serial interface the following restrictions apply The cursor position will not be evaluated The characters for D
278. ew Registers 100000 100999 Electronic Data Sheet EDS 101000 101999 Configuration 102000 102999 Real time clock 103000 103999 Serial interface 104000 104999 Ethernet 107000 107499 SD card 107500 107599 Flash disk 108000 108999 CPU backplane 200000 209999 210000 219999 220000 229999 HMI control 230000 239999 Networking via JetIP 240000 249999 JetSync 250000 259999 260000 269999 RemoteScan 270000 279999 Modbus TCP 290000 299999 E mail 310000 319999 General system registers Application program Ethernet system bus File system data files 320000 324999 350000 359999 380000 389999 390000 399999 470000 479999 510000 519999 520000 529999 FTP client User programmable IP interface Error history I O networking NetConsistency DNS server DNS cache JetIPScan 1000000 1001999 JC 340 Application registers remanent integer float JC 340 Application registers remanent integer float with option SD JC 350 Application registers remanent integer float JC 360 JC 365 Application registers remanent integer float JC 360 JC 365 Application registers remanent integer float with option R 1000000 1019999 1000000 1029999 1000000 1059999 1000000 1119999 100xx0000 100xx9999 JX3 modules xx 02 17 200002000 200029999 JX2 system bus Networking via Jetter Ethernet sy
279. f basic safety instructions It also warns the user of residual dangers if there are any Furthermore it contains information on EMC Contents Topic Page Basic safety instructions 22 cccecccceeeescceeeeenceceedeneeeeeneneeceeneneeeeeseneeeeenenes 14 Instructions on EMI citsciinhntenie ae ide ee Renee 16 Jetter AG 13 1 Safety instructions Basic safety instructions Introduction Intended conditions of use Usage other than intended Personnel qualification Modifications and alterations to the module This device complies with the valid safety regulations and standards Jetter AG attaches great importance to the safety of the users Of course the user should adhere to the following regulations Relevant accident prevention regulations Accepted safety rules EC guidelines and other country specific regulations Usage according to the intended conditions of use implies operation in accordance with this user manual The controller JC 350 is used to control machinery such as conveyors production machines and handling machines Operate the controller JC 350 only within the limits and conditions set forth in the technical specifications The operating voltage of the controller JC 350 is classified as SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage Therefore the JC 350 controller is not subject to the EU Low Voltage Directive The device must not be used in technical systems which to a high degree have to be fai
280. f users Introduction Prerequisites Administration of users Structure of the configuration file Sections The configuration file System users ini lets you manage the user administration for the file system If you want to use names for the keys you must make them known to the device beforehand Therefore set up the names first as described in Setting up names for keys locks see page 162 To manage user administration proceed as follows Action Reboot the device Result The changed user administration settings are now enabled This configuration file is a text file the entries of which are grouped into several sections For each user a separate section is to be created In these sections values can be set which are then used by the file system You can insert blank lines as required The following characters precede a comment line or The sections are named USER1 through USER33 Here the user name and the related password as well as read and write permissions are specified Example USER4 NAME TestUser3 PW testpass READKEYS 5 openLock2 10 11 WRITEKEYS openLock2 10 11 SYSKEYS Jetter AG 157 6 File system 158 NAME In the given example Description Allowed values In case of illegal value or missing entry PW In the given example Description Allowed values In case of missing entry READKEYS In the given exam
281. face see page 524 Establishing a connection see page 525 Terminating a connection see page 534 Receiving data see page 531 530 Jetter AG JC 350 Receiving data Introduction Function declaration Function parameters Return value Programming Data can be sent via a previously established TCP IP connection or via a UDP IP connection of a server Via UDP IP connection of a client data cannot be received but only sent Function ConnectionReceiveData IPConnection Int Ref IPAddr Int Ref IPPort Int Ref ReceiveData DataLen Int Timeout Int Int Description of the function parameters IPConnection Handle Return value of the function ConnectionCreate IPAddr Address of a variable for Required only for UDP IP saving the IP address of server the sender IPPort Address of a variable for Required only for UDP IP saving the IP port number server of the sender ReceiveData Address of the data block to be received DataLen 1 4 000 Maximum data block length in bytes 0 1 073 741 824 ms 0 infinitely The following return values are possible Return value gt 0 Number of received data bytes 1 Error when receiving data e g connection interrupted 3 Invalid handle e g receiving data via a UDP IP client 8 Timeout Jetter AG 531 10 Programming Using this function with a TCP IP connection Functioning principle with a TCP IP connection Using this functio
282. filter has not been placed at the component directly Shield cables at both ends Unshielded wire ends of shielded cables should be as short as possible The entire shield must in its entire perimeter be drawn behind the isolation and then be clamped under the earthed strain relief with the greatest possible surface area When male connectors are used Draw the shield in its entire perimeter under the shielding clamp of the metallized connector housing impedance shielding respectively of the EMC gland bushing its greatest possible surface area being clamped under a strain relief Only use metallized connectors e g Sub D with metallized housing Make sure that the strain relief is directly connected with the housing here as well 16 Jetter AG JC 350 Safety instructions Downloading Application You can download Application Note 016 EMC Compatible Installation of Note 016 Electric Cabinets from the Jetter AG homepage http www jetter de In order to download Application Note 016 browse the following path ndustrial Automation Support Downloads 07_application_notes Jetter AG 17 JC 350 2 Product description and design Product description and design Introduction This chapter covers the design of the device as well as how the order reference is made up including all options Contents Topic Page Product description Of the JC 350 0 0 cccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeseeeseeees
283. for entering numerical values Restrictions This chapter describes input of values on HMls how to assign them as register and variable values and how to parameterize the corresponding STX instruction To input register and variable contents via HMI use the following STX instruction UserInput The format of numerical values to be entered can be adapted to suit your needs The following parameters can be adjusted Length of input field Maximum number of decimal places Displaying a suggested value orb Entering a decimal point or decimal comma Entering a negative positive numerical value You can press the key any time during input Clearing previous entries Displaying a suggested value a second time ENTER Terminating the input process accepting the value The following restrictions apply to the STX instruction UserInput While inputting numerical values the keys used for this are not mapped to the key flags While the monitor function is active the STX instruction UserInput is not executed by the controller until the monitor function is completed 378 Jetter AG JC 350 Displaying inputs Programming During input the following values are being displayed Step Description 1 The controller shows the suggested value The formatting parameters are used the same way as for displaying numerical values 2 Li con then you press the keyENTER the controller takes ov
284. for port X11 For connecting devices to port X11 you can order the following cables temno item Deseription 60867209 KAY_0576 0050 JetControl to modem with 9 pin Sub D length 0 5 m 60868359 Cable assy 196 2 5M JetControl to PC with 9 pin Sub D length 2 5 m 60860013 Cable assy 196 5M JetControl to PC with 9 pin Sub D length 5 m 60868956 Cable assy 196 8M JetControl to PC with 9 pin Sub D length 8 m 60860011 Cable assy 192 2 5M JetControl to HMI with 15 pin Sub D length 2 5 m 60860012 Cable assy 193 5M JetControl to HMI with 15 pin Sub D length 5 m 60872142 Cable assy 192 10M JetControl to HMI with 15 pin Sub D length 10 m 60872884 Cable assy 192 15M JetControl to HMI with 15 pin Sub D length 15 m 60864359 KAY_0386 0250 JetControl to LCD 60 with 15 pin Sub D length 2 5 m 60864360 KAY_0386 0500 JetControl to LCD 60 with 15 pin Sub D length 5 m 60864897 KAY_0533 0025 JetControl to LCD 52 54 with 15 pin Sub D length 0 25 m 60864257 Cable assy 197 5M JetControl to JetView 200 300 with 9 pin Sub D length 5 m 60871930 Cable assy 197 12M JetControl to JetView 200 300 with 9 pin Sub D length 12 m 46 Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation Ethernet ports Female connectors X14 X15 Devices to connect with these ports Pin assignment Technical specifications Cables for ports X14 and X15 Ports X14 and X15 let you connect the following devices APC a An H
285. formation on electrical and mechanical data as well as on operating data of the JC 350 Topic Page JG 350 TechniCal Gata ascites tccuee es idaceees cceuce aaaea aaa aN 627 Physical dimensions eenrcsnccsanaiini oiana 629 Operating parameters Environment and mechanics c ceeeee 630 Operating parameters Enclosure ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesetetnteeeeeeeeeeees 631 DC power supply inputs and outputs cccceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeteees 632 Shielded data and I O lineS ccccceeeeeeeecee cece ee eeeeceaeaeeeeeeeseseenieeeeeeeeteees 633 Jetter AG JC 350 Appendix JC 350 Technical data wo Paramet Rated voltage DC 24 V Permissible voltage range 15 20 Technical specifications The controller JC 350 provides the JX3 system bus with logic and additional JX3 system bus voltage The connected JX3 modules are supplied by these two types of voltage Logic voltage of the JX3 system bus DC 5 V 15 10 Additional voltage of JX3 system bus DC 24 V 15 20 Data of connected The following table shows the maximum current and power consumption of JX3 modules JX3 modules connected to the controller JC 350 Current consumption absorbed from the lsv max 1 200 mA logic voltage of the JX3 system bus Power consumption absorbed from the 6 W max logic voltage of the JX3 system bus Current consumption absorbed from the l24v max 750 mA additional
286. function is terminated and a connection positive value is returned as handle for further access to the connection the connection could not be step 1 is carried out established and the timeout of 10 seconds has not elapsed yet an error has occurred or the the function is terminated and a timeout has elapsed negative value is returned If a server is to establish a TCP IP connection to a client you can invoke the function and assign the return value of a variable for further evaluation as follows Result ConnectionCreate CONNTYPE SERVER IPTYPE TCP 0 46000 T 100s 526 Jetter AG JC 350 Functioning principle with a TCP IP server Using this function with a UDPIIP client Functioning principle with a UDP IP client Programming The task stops at the program line until the connection is established or the specified timeout has elapsed This function is processed in the following steps See scription The device JC 350 sets up TCP IP port 46000 for receiving connection a a Ss network client has established no a connection requests to a connection this port are accepted the function is terminated and a positive value is returned as handle for further access to the connection the connection could not be the system waits for a connection to established and the timeout be established of 100 seconds has not elapsed yet an error has occurred or the the function is terminated
287. g Copy values from the local array to the JX3 AI4 nResult NetCopyVarToReg IP 192 168 10 2 anParam 100021124 16 3 1 244 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Command group NetBit Introduction Advantages of NetBit Access via NetBit Parameters of the NetBit commands The NetBit command is an all purpose tool to set or clear register bits of Jetter products The Jetter products are interconnected via an Ethernet network NetBit commands let you both set and clear bits in one go Simulating NetBit commands by means of NetCopy commands ANetCopy command lets you copy the register value from the remote node to the local controller ANetCopy command lets you change the state of the bits on the local controller as desired Another NetCopy command lets you copy the register value to the remote node again For this several commands are required Thus a register value may be changed during this action by an application program running on the remote controller The second NetCopy command will then overwrite this value again There is an undefined data condition which is prevented by the NetBit functions Further advantages of NetBit commands as compared with the use of network registers Within the command you can directly specify any valid IP address Within the command you can directly specify any valid IP port The entire register address range of a remote node can be directly addre
288. g entry USER JetControl4711 In the given example Log on name for POP3 authentication If this entry exists the entry PASSWORD is required too String of 63 characters max POP3 log on will not be carried out PASSWORD In the given example Pop3PassWord Log on password for POP3 authentication If this entry exists the entry USER is required too String of 63 characters max POP3 log on will not be carried out Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Section DEFAULT Introduction In this section specify the name of an e mail template file which contains default settings for e mails If the respective section is not available in the respective e mail template the JC 350 applies these default settings for sending an e mail message Example DEFAULT MAILCFG EmailDefaults cfg Related topics Structure of template file see page 471 Jetter AG 467 10 Programming Configuration file Examples Introduction Minimum configuration This section contains several examples of the e mail configuration file EMAIL email ini If no authentication is required and the default value is assigned to the IP port of the SMTP server the configuration file must contain only the IP address of the SMTP server SMTP IP 192 168 40 1 Authentication through In case the e mail server requires previous log on through POP3 and an POP3 Log on e mail template containing default setting has been define
289. gger the sorting algorithm provided by the operating system For sorting data in controller registers by their value The sort algorithm is provided by the operating system of the controller The data to be sorted are indirectly addressed through a descriptor using parameter 1 As of JetSym 5 0 system function 50 is outdated Instead apply JetSym STX function QSort The JetSym STX function QSort has been described in detail in the online help of JetSym Declaration of functions Function QSort DataPtr Int ElementCnt Int ElementSize Int SortOffset Int SortType STXBASETYPE SortMode QSORTMODE Int Jetter AG JC 350 Programming 10 15 Modbus TCP Introduction Enabling the Modbus TCP feature Required programmer s skills Contents Jetter AG This chapter describes the functions of the Modbus TCP server and client integrated into JC 350 In case of JC 340 you must order the controller plus option M In any other controller of this series the feature Modbus TCP remains activated If this requirement has been met bits 4 and 5 in the Web status register 202930 are set To be able to use the functions described in this chapter the following skills are required The user must be familiar with Modbus TCP and the supported commands P networks Topic Page Modbus TCP Serve cccccccccccccceceeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseseseseseseseneses 486
290. ging the error If a subscriber has not received any process data from the assigned publisher before timeout the subscriber will generate an error The subscriber for the subscription of which the error has been generated can run either on a controller or on a network node The remote network node is a JX3 BN ETH for example The error may be caused as follows Communication with the network client providing the process data is terminated The operating system of the device responds to the error by taking the following steps ee Deserpion a Sest mR asm 2 Wes te suwserpion Die 250002 3 seme O Writes value 11103 and the ID to the error buffers The error buffer can be accessed via registers 380000 ff error history Writes the GNN of the network node communication with which has been terminated to R 254001 Writes the IP address of the network node communication with which has been terminated to R 254002 flag 2080 is set bit 3 is set in R 210004 and R 200008 The red status LED of the controller is lit 7 Writes the port number of the network node communication with which has been terminated to R 254003 By means of NetCopy commands you can precisely locate the error and fix the root cause This works because GNN IP address and port number of the other network node are known To acknowledge the error write command 110 to register 250001 Jetter AG 275 10 Programming Controller evaluates
291. gister description Acyclic data interchange Introduction In acyclic data interchange data transmission from a controller to remote network nodes is carried out via JetIP protocol The client in the controller is supplied with registers for configuration and error diagnostics Registers flags 232708 Timeout in milliseconds 232709 Response time in milliseconds Flags Description R 232708 Timeout To R 232708 write the timeout in milliseconds for acyclic access via network Module register properties Values 1 65 535 ms Value after reset 250 ms R 232709 Response time R 232709 displays the total response time of latest acyclic access via network in milliseconds The total response time includes the time for data transmission and the processing times in the controller and in the remote network node Module register properties Values 0 65 535 ms Type of access Read 254 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming R 232710 Amount of network errors R 232710 shows the total number of network errors Module register properties Values 2 147 483 648 2 147 483 647 overflowing R 232711 Error code R 232711 shows the error code of the latest network access Module register properties Values 0 No errors 1 Timeout 3 Error message from remote node 5 Invalid network address 6 Invalid amount of registers 7 Invalid interface number R 232717 Maximum number of retries R 232717 lets you set
292. hat is specified by the entry AutoCopylni in the configuration file System config ini The controller reads the values from section OPTIONS The controller reads the command and its parameters from the section COMMAND 1 processes it and writes the results if any into the log file The controller processes the other commands in ascending order up to the number given in section OPTIONS The controller calculates the statistic values for all command results and writes them into the log file e a beotprosesscrheccatolan E E T the boot process of the controller the OS status LEDs indicate the following 572 Jetter AG JC 350 Automatic copying of controller data The OS reads the settings of the DIP switch on the backplane module and checks if an Ethernet switch exists The OS initializes the modules on the JX3 and JX2 system bus and the SD card The command file of the AutoCopy function is being processed AutoCopy function is completed no errors occurred AutoCopy function is completed errors occurred Jetter AG 573 11 Automatic copying of controller data Terminating AutoCopy mode Introduction Only a restart of the controller terminates the AutoCopy mode Prerequisites Processing the AutoCopy command is completed Terminating AutoCopy To terminate the AutoCopy mode proceed as follows mode i a 4 Switch the controller off 2 The SD card can now be removed not required
293. have this information ready Contents Topic Page JC 3xxi Nameplate diiirn siian i eaaa data adaa anaia 29 28 Jetter AG JC 350 Identifying JC 3xx Nameplate Nameplate The nameplate of a JC 3xx controller contains the following information 1 eee A Jetten IMIMITNNIIMNNNINNN NTI dear Part No 10000704 JC 3xx x Rev 02 00 00 N 2 3 4 L Number Description a o Serial number 2 Controller name 2 Hardware revision a Item number Jetter AG 29 3 Identifying 3 2 Electronic Data Sheet EDS Introduction Contents 30 Each JC 350 features an Electronic Data Sheet EDS Numerous production relevant data are permanently stored in the EDS The EDS data can be read out via files in the file system of the JC 350 or via special registers Topic Page EDS files sinpi enadi died 31 EDS registers naasna n elias aerial ene 35 Jetter AG JC 350 EDS file Introduction Properties Path to EDS files File structure Identifying EDS data can be retrieved from the file eds ini You can access this file through the file system of the controller For an FTP connection the user needs administrator rights user admin or system rights user system The EDS file of the controller is located in the directory System The EDS file of JX3 modules is located in the directory of the corresponding mod
294. he CPU and the other ports This way networks are split and thus data traffic e g from the machine network to higher level networks is reduced Address space Splitting is carried out on Ethernet level via the multicast address range of the Jetter Ethernet system bus 0x01 00 5E 40 00 00 0x01 00 5E 40 00 FF Enable JetSync blockage for port X15 Effect The JetSync blockage is enabled for port X15 only Bit 8 in R 202962 is set Jetter Ethernet system bus multicast frames of the CPU are forwarded to port X14 only Jetter Ethernet system bus multicast frames of port X14 are forwarded to the CPU only Jetter Ethernet system bus multicast frames of port X15 are forwarded to the CPU and to port X14 All other Ethernet frames are forwarded as usual Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Purpose This command lets you prevent forwarding Jetter Ethernet system bus multicast frames to port X15 This way networks are split and thus data traffic e g from the machine network to higher level networks is reduced Address space Splitting is carried out on Ethernet level via the multicast address range of the Jetter Ethernet system bus 0x01 00 5E 40 00 00 0x01 00 5E 40 00 FF Jetter AG 321 10 Programming 10 4 General system registers Introduction In this chapter the system command registers and the system commands will be explained in detail Contents Topic Page Description of system command reQ
295. he application program must be running Note Make sure it remains energized To start an OS update out of the application program proceed as follows a the OS file to a file of any name and of the extension os in the directory System OS To activate the transferred OS for example by writing to the system command register re boot the controller Var SourceName String DestinationName String UpdatelIt Bool End Var J RR KKK KKK HK KR IK KK I A I OK eK Name OSupdate 1 Activate Tracing in JetSym 2 Set the name of the source file in SourceName 3 Set the flag UpdateIt J BK RK RK KK IK KK A I I Task OSupdate Autorun Var ResCopy Int End Var DestinationName System OS OperatingSystem os Loop UpdateIt False When UpdateIt Continue ResCopy FileCopy SourceName DestinationName race Result IntToStr ResCopy n m End Loop End Task 598 Jetter AG JC 350 OS update 12 2 OS update of a JX module Introduction This chapter describes how to carry out an OS update of a JX3 module on a JX2 or JX3 system bus which is connected to the JC 350 You have got several options to transfer the OS file to the JX module From within the programming tool JetSym Via FTP connection From an SD card option for JC 340 From the application program Contents Topic Page OS update by means of JetSyM ee eeeceee ener ee eeteeeeeteteeeeetnnee
296. he device to be used Do not use Output of data on a printer module connected to the JX2 or JX3 system bus Output of data on a user programmable serial interface Output of data on a serial interface module connected to the JX2 or JX3 system bus MR 2824 Device number of the default device This module register contains the device number of the default device If you always specify the default device in the application program device number 0 you can select during runtime which device is actually to be used Module register properties Values 1 11 Value after reset 2 Single display mode In single display mode an HMI always displays data from device no 2 Multi display mode In multi display mode an HMI always displays data from the device the number of which is contained in the corresponding configuration register MR 2825 through MR 2828 Jetter AG 381 10 Programming MR 2825 MR 2826 MR 2827 MR 2828 Device number for HMI 1 in multi display mode Module register properties Values 1 4 Value after reset 1 Device number for HMI 2 in multi display mode Module register properties Values 1 4 Value after reset 2 Device number for HMI 3 in multi display mode Module register properties Values 1 4 Value after reset 3 Device number for HMI 4 in multi display mode Module register properties Values 1 4 Value after reset 4 382 Jetter AG JC 350 Cursor positio
297. he interface type 1 for the JX3 system bus 2 for the JX2 system bus and the module number 2 23 Launch the OS upload by clicking the button Update eter ne pe ees come Wait until the update process is completed you ae to update further JX3 proceed with step 1 modules you do not wish to ee any reboot the controller to launch the other JX3 modules new operating system 600 Jetter AG JC 350 OS update Operating system update via FTP Introduction Using an FTP client an OS file can be transferred to a JX module connected to the JX2 or JX3 system bus of the controller Prerequisites An OS file for the JX module is available An FTP connection to the controller must be possible The login parameters for a user with administrator or system rights are at hand The operating system of the controller must be running The controller has initialized both the JX2 and JX3 system bus with the connected JX modules without errors Note Make sure the controller and the JX modules remain energized Updating the OS To update the OS of a JX module proceed as follows pa Establish an FTP connection to the controller 2 Log in with administrator or system rights Navigate to the OS directory of the JX module Example System JX2 Slave02 OS or System JX3 Module05 OS 4 Transfer the OS file into this directory og mmea paseon Wait until the update process is SESE you Ee to update furt
298. her JX3 EE with step 3 modules you do not wish to ee any Clear the FTP connection Then other JX3 modules reboot the controller to launch the new operating system Jetter AG 601 12 OS update Automatic OS update from an SD card Reference An automatic OS update of a JX2 or JX3 module from the SD card can be carried out using the AutoCopy function For a detailed description turn to the chapter AutoCopy see page 568 602 Jetter AG JC 350 OS update Operating system update from within the application program Introduction The file functions included in the STX language scope let you transfer an OS ile to a JX module on the JX2 or JX3 system bus of the controller Prerequisites An OS file for the JX module is available in the file system of the controller The operating system of the controller and the application program must be running The controller has initialized both the JX2 and JX3 system bus with the connected JX modules without errors Note Make sure the controller and the JX modules remain energized Updating the OS To update the OS of a JX module proceed as follows Action Copy the OS file to a file of any name and of the extension os in the OS file of the module Example System JX2 Slave02 OS system os or System JX3 Module05 OS Anything os you wish to update further JX3 proceed with step 1 modules you do not wish to update any reboot the controller to la
299. ical functions are assigned to each message box The registers of individual message boxes start from a certain basic register number ee ee e E a ee le a le ee ee e le e ee a le ee a e a e a a ratrorr0 a a ee a a e 20 registers with identical functions are assigned to each message box The register number of individual message boxes is calculated from the basic register number and the message box number 0 15 R 200010530 Message box status register message box number 20 R 200010531 Message box configuration register message box number 20 R 200010532 CAN ID message box number 20 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 R 200010533 Number of data bytes message box number 20 R 200010534 Data byte 0 message box number 20 R 200010535 Data byte 1 message box number 20 Jetter AG 551 10 Programming R 200010530 message box number 20 message box number 20 message box number 20 message box number 20 message box number 20 message box number 20 message box number 20 message box number 20 message box number 20 message box number 20 message box number 20 message box number 20 message box number 20 message box number 20 message box number 20 R 200010536 R 200010537 R 200010538 R 200010539 R 200010540 R 200010541 R 200010542 R 200010543 R 200010544 R 200010545 R 200010546 R 20001054
300. ication program Jetter AG JC 350 Programming 10 2 Register and I O numbers with a JC 3xx Introduction Applying a register number Applying an I O number Contents Jetter AG Controllers and modules produced by Jetter AG offer a host of functions which can be accessed by the user via registers A unique number is assigned to each register and each digital input or output Register numbers are applied in the following cases You want to read or write to a module register in the JetSym setup You want to declare a module register a variable in the JetSym application program You want to declare a module register a tag in JetViewSoft I O numbers are applied in the following cases You want to read from a digital input in the JetSym setup You want to read or write to a digital output in the JetSym setup You want to declare a digital input or output a variable in the JetSym application program You want to declare a digital input or output a tag in JetViewSoft Topic Page Registers and module registers cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 228 Register and I O numbers of JX3 modules connected to a JC 3xx 230 Register numbers of JX2 slave modules connected to the JX2 system bus231 Registers and I O numbers of JX2 I O modules on the JX2 system bus 232 Register and I O numbers of IP67 I O modules on the JX2 system bus 233 Registers and I O numbers of CA
301. ich always remains fixed Number of the e mail value between 0 and 255 cfg Fixed file extension Storage location E mail template files must be stored to the same directory on the internal flash disk as is the configuration file EMAIL Examples email 0 cfg email 37 cfg email 255 cfg 470 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Structure of the e mail template file Introduction An e mail template file is a text file which is divided into sections For sending the e mail the JC 350 compiles the information contained in these sections E mail template file Sections FROM and TO are mandatory This information may be specified either in the e mail to be sent or in the e mail template file containing the default settings All parameters in these sections can be tagged with realtime controller values refer to Inserting realtime controller values see page 206 FROM Sender TO Addressee CC Additional addressee s SUBJECT Subject ATTACHMENT Complete path and file name MESSAGE E mail message text Sections FROM Description E mail sender Comments Please check with your IT administrator which information must be entered here Length 63 characters Example FROM JetControl jetter de TO Description E mail addressee Comments Several addressees are separated by the semicolon Length 255 characters Example TO service mydomain com Jetter AG 471 10 Programmi
302. ich the FTP server is to save the written file ClientFile File name Name of the file in the local file system the content of which the controller is to send to the FTP server If the returned value is negative an error has occurred If the returned value is 0 the controller was able to read the file and store it to the file system of the remote network node Return value 0 No error 1 Invalid handle 2 Error when reading the local file e g file does not exist 3 5 8 Communication error there is for example no response from FTP server 4 7 Error message from the FTP server e g file cannot be created 185 8 FTP client Operating principle File names Related topics In the following cases the task is not processed further after issuing the function call The controller must first read the file e g LocalTestFile txt and save it to the file system of the remote network node as e g ServerTestFile txt An error has occurred This function is processed in the following steps hcl e The controller sends a command to the FTP server that the content of the file ServerTestFile txt must be saved 2 The controller sends the contents of the file LocalTestFile txt The FTP server writes the contents to the file ServerTestFile txt NO errors have occurred the file has been copied successfully the function is terminated and value 0 is returned errors have occurred
303. id network address 102 Restart 6 Invalid amount of registers 105 STOPP 7 Invalid interface number 110 Acknowledge error 232717 Max number of retries 255002 Publication ID of the last error 232718 Number of retries 255003 Number of publications 255004 CRC of configuration file 255010 Selection via command Noiworkragistars 255011 Selection via ID 235000 IP addresses Publication 235399 235400 Port numbers 295020 latus 235799 255021 Mode 236000 Indirect register numbers 255022 Number of elements 236399 255023 Multicast group GNN nnn 000 199 255024 Hash 1nnn020000 JX3 module registers 255025 Current sequence number 1nnn179999 614 Jetter AG JC 350 Quick reference JC 3xx 255026 Size bytes 255027 Cycle time 255028 Number of publications sent 255029 Number of retries 255030 Number of transmit errors 255100 9 more publisher register blocks 255999 RemoteScan 262965 Protocol type 262966 Amount of configuration blocks 262967 Status Modbus TCP 272702 Register offset 272704 Input offset 272705 Output offset 278000 16 bit I O registers overlaid by virtual I Os 20001 278999 36000 E mail 292932 IP address of the SMTP server 292933 IP address of the POP3 server 292934 Port number of the SMTP server 292935 Port number of POP3 server 292937 Status of e mail processing 292938 Task ID E mail File system data file function 312977 Status of file operation 312978 Task ID FTP cli
304. ient by opening a connection and entering the IP address Log in as user admin with password admin Displaying the content of the current directory using dir Transferring the file jetter1 jpg to the JetControl using the command put Displaying the content of the current directory using dir Terminating the session and the FTP client using bye Action C gt ftp 192 168 186 288 Nerbindung mit 192 168 186 208 wurde hergestellt 22 JETTER FIP Server V1 5 22 10 2007 192 168 18 208 lt none gt gt admin rd required for admin successful 150 Opening ASCII mode data connection for LIST 09 10 00 10 37PM lt DIR gt sD 09 10 00 190 lt DIR gt System Yari a G6 lt DIR gt app 6 11 86 07 lt DIR gt SysConfig 02 10 00 651 index htm 02 10 00 1229 ssil i htm 02 10 00 471 pfeil gif 226 Transfer complete FTP 64d Bytes empfangen in Sekunden 339608 6KB s ftp gt put jetterl jpg 200 PORT command successful 156 Opening ASCII mode data connection for STOR 226 Wait for file system 226 Transfer complete FTP 64d Bytes gesendet in Sekunden 5332008 Q GKB s ftp gt dir 200 PORT command successful 150 Opening ASCII mode data connection for LIST 02 10 00 38PM lt DIR gt sD 149 146 808 2 38PM lt DIR gt System 07 24 00 1 28PM lt DIR gt app 46 11 88 2 48PM lt DIR gt SysConf ig 49 16 80 1 36PM 651 index htm 02 10 00 37PM 1229 ssil i htm 49 16 80 37PM 471 pfeil gif 02 10
305. ights keys Users are not allowed to access directories and files for which they do not have the required key In case of an FTP IP connection these directories and files are not displayed Administrator rights are required for user administration The properties of user administration are as follows Property Number of predefined users Length of a user name 31 alphanumeric characters Password length 31 alphanumeric characters 1 You can make settings for user administration in three files located in the directory System flashdisklock ini Assignment of locks to directories Assignment of names to locks keys These files are always existing They cannot be deleted but only modified or overwritten Please take the following restrictions into account User administration can only be applied to the internal flash disk It cannot be applied to SD cards If user administration has been assigned to a file its contents are readable at once The settings become active only after a reboot Jetter AG 155 6 File system Contents Topic Page Administration Of Users s 2c c cieicieacee hase lageae iaaa aaa NAA aa 157 As delivered condition Predefined users and keys 159 ASSIGNING IOCKS lt lt co 2c2cceitd ad ect saanebesidsvicest iaseeeeadd E 160 Assigning names to keyS IOCKS ccccceeeeeeeeneeeseeneeeseenaeeeseenaeeeeeenaneeeeeaas 162 156 Jetter AG JC 350 File system Administration o
306. in JetControl ee eeeeeeeeeeee 286 Program run at system launch 0 eeeeeeeeeece cece ee eeeeenaeeeeeeeeesetsenaeeeeeeeeetee 287 Register description NetConsistency basic driver ceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeee 288 Register description of the NetConsistency instance 0 ceeeeeeeeeee 296 Error evaluation at NetConsistency 0 cceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeenaeeeeesnaeeeeeenas 297 278 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming NetConsistency function Restrictions Function System launch of the bus nodes NetConsistency is only available for the Jetter Ethernet system bus The network nodes have to be connected to the same subnet Only if JetIPScan is active NetConsistency will be executed JetControl executes NetConsistency only once at booting the JetControl which is the master of NetConsistency The NetConsistency feature in its actual version comprises the system property Network parameters P address Subnet mask Default gateway For this NetConsistency uses JetIPScan One of the JetIPScan features is to assign network parameters to bus nodes via GNN The controller assigns the network parameters to those bus nodes which you have configured in Hardware Manager The controller assigns the IP address to those bus nodes which you have configured in Hardware Manager As subnet mask the controller assigns its own subnet mask to the bus node As default gateway the controller assigns its
307. interface activities can be used amongst others for the following scenarios Plants requiring process visualization to ensure safe operation They can be transferred into a save state if communication fails When the service technician connects an HMI the application program automatically displays additional status information Contents Topic Page Operating principle ccecececeecce cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeeeeseeennieeeeeeeeteees 346 Programming seseriai iai neaei aia aia EEA EET 348 Jetter AG 345 10 Programming Operating principle Introduction The application program monitors the activity of a client communicating with a server of the device JC 350 by means of two special flags and one special register per interface Overview The illustration below shows the interdependence between interface activity and the two special flags as well as the special register 1 Telegrams l User Flag l Application program WHEN OS_FLAG Continue 4 User_FLAG TRUE O Bemet sito The client places requests to the server OS flag OS flag set by the device JC 350 after receiving a request User flag You must set the user flag in the application program once the device has set the OS flag This indicates that the connection has temporarily been disrupted even if the device resets the OS flag very quickly Timeout Time of inactivity after which the OS resets both special flags This time can be set in
308. interrupted application task is resumed This way the interrupted task is processed for the remaining time of its time slot Advantage The interrupted task is assigned its total runtime Disadvantage The total cycle time for processing all tasks is influenced by the cyclic events to a greater extend Load configuration files Effect The controller loads the module configuration file ModConfig da and the configuration files for process data communication on the Jetter Ethernet system bus Publisher pub Subscriber sub from the file system This corresponds to a combination of commands 311 and 312 Purpose Once the transfer of these files into the controller s file system is completed system command 310 enables their contents Load module configuration Effect The controller loads the module configuration file ModConfig da from the file system Purpose Once the transfer of this file into the controller s file system is completed system command 311 enables its contents Load process data configuration for Ethernet system bus Effect The controller loads the configuration files for process data communication on the Jetter Ethernet system bus Publisher pub Subscriber sub from the file system 328 Jetter AG JC 350 System command 313 System command 330 System command 331 System command 410 System command 411 Programming Purpose Once the transfer of these files into the cont
309. ion Operating principle Function DisplayText Dev Int Pos Int Const Ref Text String Description Number of the device on which the text is to be output Will not be evaluated Constant text or name of a string variable To output a text on a printer module the instruction must be invoked as follows DisplayText 8 0 Hello World DisplayText 8 0 StringVar The first instruction causes the printer module to output the text Hello World Then the second STX instruction causes the content of the string variable StringVar to be output The task in the application program stops at the instruction DisplayText until the whole text has been output Function DisplayText2 Dev Int Pos Int Const Ref Text1 String Const Ref Text2 String Description Number of the device on which the text is to be output Will not be evaluated Constant text or name of a string variable Constant text or name of a string variable To output one text out of two texts on a serial interface module the instruction must be invoked as follows DisplayText2 11 0 Fehler Error The STX instruction causes either the text Fehler or Error to be output on a serial interface module MR 2806 lets you control which text will be output The task in the application program stops at the instruction DisplayText2 until the whole text has been output 418 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming
310. ion window The destination window is a register array of a remote network node This destination window is shifted by this offset 272702 of the remote node Note on the contents of the table nnn GNN in the range 000 199 zzzz in the range 0 9 999 For access via network register with variable destination window to a remote node the controller uses the first part of the register prefix as an index to the tables containing the IP addresses and IP ports The values read out of these tables are used by the controller to address the bus node in the network For further information on registers 235000 ff please refer to Network registers IP address and IP port see page 246 The module register number no 5 in the addressing scheme see page 246 is used by the controller to address the register in the bus node A register number is transmitted to the remote network node by the controller The remote network node adds the content of register 272702 to this register number and uses the result as register number E Lal SCeecsscso amen ey ee coal poss GNN 003 1003990500 lt lt Cito aa 252 Jetter AG JC 350 Steps to take for addressing with destination window Example Programming To u
311. ioning controller EPOS can be connected to the JX2 system bus of the following controllers and modules by Jetter AG Controller module As of version JC 340 JC 350 V 1 04 0 00 JC 360 V 1 01 0 00 JC 24x V 3 15 JM D203 JC24x V 1 10 0 00 JX6 SB l V 2 14 124 Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation Product description Milan drive Milan drive The servo drive Milan drive is a product by GFC Antriebssysteme GmbH bh Db bh h A Restrictions when connected to the JX2 system bus Number of Milan drives connected to JX2 10 max system bus Additionally limited by the number of axes of the controller Minimum requirements The Milan drive can be connected to the JX2 system bus of the following controllers and modules by Jetter AG JC 340 JC 350 V 1 04 0 00 JC 360 V 1 01 0 00 JC 24x V 3 23 JM D203 JC24x V 1 13 0 00 JX6 SB V 2 18 Jetter AG 125 4 Mechanical and electrical installation Product description SMC EX120 SI unit EX120 Restrictions when connected to the JX2 system bus Minimum requirements The SI unit EX120 is a product by SMC Pneumatik GmbH A SI unit EX120 allows connection of valves of different sizes SI unit with the CANopen interface SI unit with the CANopen interface SI unit with the CANopen interface Number of SI units EX120 connected to 10 max the JX2 system bus The SI unit EX120 can be connected to the JX2 system bus of the follo
312. is way orientation is simplified Module register properties Type of access Read Value after reset NetConsistency Data type RegString Version of NetConsistency R 470009 shows the version of NetConsistency Module register properties Values IP 0 00 0 00 IP 9 99 9 99 Type of access Read Value after reset Version of NetConsistency Status register R 470010 shows the status of the NetConsistency basic driver Meaning of the individual bits Bit 0 Error 0 No error 1 Error 288 Jetter AG JC 350 R 470011 R 470020 R 470021 Programming Bit 2 Status of initialization 0 Basic driver not initialized 1 Basic driver initialized Module register properties Type of access Read Value after reset 0x00000004 Command register The value is 0 as there are no commands Maximum possible number of instances R 470020 shows the maximum possible number of NetConsistency instances The actual value is always 1 Module register properties Values 1 Type of access Read Value after reset 1 Number of instances ready for operation R 470021 shows the number of NetConsistency instances Module register properties Values 0 1 Type of access Read Value after reset 1 Jetter AG 289 10 Programming R 470030 R 470031 R 470032 R 470033 Maximum number of error messages for the logger R 470030 sets the maximum number of error messages which are transferred to the logger by
313. isted below In JetSym STX use the corresponding JetSym STX functions instead of system functions 4 Conversion from BCD to HEX 5 Conversion from HEX to BCD 20 Square root 21 Sine 22 Cosine 23 Tangent 24 Arc sine 25 Arc cosine 26 Arc tangent 27 Exponential function 28 Natural logarithm 29 Absolute value 30 Separation of digits before and after the decimal point 50 Sorting register values 60 CRC generation for Modbus RTU 61 CRC check for Modbus RTU 65 67 Reading register block via Modbus TCP 66 68 Writing register block via Modbus TCP 80 85 Initializing RemoteScan 81 Starting RemoteScan 82 Stopping RemoteScan 90 Writing a data file 91 Appending a data file 92 Reading a data file 96 Deleting a data file 110 Sending an e mail 150 Configuring NetCopyList 151 Deleting NetCopyList 152 Sending NetCopyList JetSym STX functions System function Corresponding JetSym STX function 4 Function Bcd2Hex Bcd Int Int 5 Function Hex2Bcd Hex Int Int 50 Function QSort DataPtr Int ElementCnt Int ElementSize Int SortOffset Int SortType STXBASETYPE SortMode QSORTMODE Int 60 Function ModbusCRCgen FramePtr Int Length Int Int 61 Function ModbusCRCcheck FramePtr Int Length Int Int 65 67 Function ModbusReadReg Const Ref MbParam MODBUS_PARAWM Int 66 68 Function ModbusWriteReg Const Ref MbParam MODBUS_PARAWM Int 80 85 Function RemoteScanConfig Protocol RSCAN_PROTOCOL Elemen
314. isterS ccceeeeeeeeeceeeteeeeeeteeeeeeaes 323 Description of System COMMAMNAS cccceeeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeeteeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 326 322 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Description of system command registers Registers Overview The following registers are described in this manual R 202960 System password register R 202961 System command register R 202962 System status register R 202960 System password register Enter system password 1112502132 0x424F6F74 into this register Then enter the required command value into the system command register Now the controller sets the value of this register to 0 Register properties Value 1112502132 0x424F6F74 R 202961 System command register Enter the system commands into this register Then the controller executes the command Then it sets the value of this register to 0 Commands 102 Restart the controller 104 Reset remanent parameters 122 Deactivate Wait for communication 123 Activate Wait for communication 160 Deactivate Task switch on I O access 161 Activate Task switch on I O access 170 Deactivate Resume task time slot Jetter AG 323 10 Programming Commands 171 Activate Resume task time slot 310 Load configuration files 311 Load module configuration 312 Load process data configuration for Ethernet system bus 313 Stop process data communication for Ethernet system bus 330 Disable JetIPScan client 331 Enable Je
315. k diagram Elements of the interface 502 The OS of the JC 350 provides for the user programmable serial interface a receiving buffer and a transmit buffer They can be used to adjust the transfer rate between application program and serial interface The following illustration shows the block diagram of the user programmable serial interface Receive FIFO Pi 5 Driver Receiver y o 3 y 9 1 Y a g a 2 s YM ojoje sa i A Driver q J Transmitter lt 3 g E Transmit FIFO The user programmable serial interface consists of the following elements Interface driver Converts signals of different interface standards RS 232 RS 422 RS 485 into internal signal levels 2 Addressee Performs serial parallel conversion a Receiving buffer Buffer for received characters Receive register Read access to this register reads the received characters in the receive buffer 3 Interface driver Converts internal signal levels into signals of different interface standards RS 232 RS 422 RS 485 Transmit buffer Buffer for characters to be sent Transmit register Write access to this register causes the characters to be entered into the transmit buffer 7 and to be sent by the transmitter 6 6 Transmitter Performs parallel serial conversion Jetter AG
316. kes effect After read write access to register 102928 Hours This register contains the hours stored in the buffer Register properties Values 0 23 Value after reset 0 Takes effect After read write access to register 102928 Jetter AG 339 10 Programming R 102924 R 102925 R 102926 R 102927 Weekday This register contains the weekday stored in the buffer Register properties Values 0 6 0 Sunday Value following a 0 reset Takes effect After read write access to register 102928 Day This register contains the day stored in the buffer Register properties Values 0 31 Value after reset 0 Takes effect After read write access to register 102928 Month This register contains the month stored in the buffer Register properties Values 0 12 Value after reset 0 Takes effect After read write access to register 102928 Year This register contains the year stored in the buffer Register properties Values 0 99 Value after reset 0 Takes effect After read write access to register 102928 340 Jetter AG JC 350 R 102928 Programming Read write trigger This register allows transferring values between buffer register and real time clock Register properties Read The actual date and time are transferred from real time clock to buffer registers 102920 through 102927 The reading is undefined Write The values contained in buffer registers 102920 102927 are t
317. l safe such as for example in ropeways and airplanes The JC 350 is no safety related part as per Machinery Directive 2006 42 EC This device is not qualified for safety relevant applications and must therefore NOT be used to protect persons If you intend to operate the device at ambient conditions not being in conformity with the permitted operating conditions please contact Jetter AG beforehand Depending on the life cycle of the product the persons involved must possess different qualifications These qualifications are required to ensure proper handling of the device in the corresponding life cycle Product life cycle Minimum qualification Transport storage Trained and instructed personnel with knowledge in handling electrostatic sensitive components Mounting installation Specialized personnel with training in electrical engineering such as industrial electronics technician Commissioning Trained and instructed experts with profound programming knowledge of and experience with electrical drive engineering such as electronics engineer for automation technology Operation Trained instructed and assigned personnel with knowledge in operating electronic devices Decommissioning Specialized personnel with training in electrical disposal engineering such as industrial electronics technician For safety reasons no modifications and changes to the device and its functions are permitted Any modifications to th
318. lay a value DisplayValue 0 1 12 345 DisplayValue 0 25 Axis2 Position The first STX instruction causes the value 12 345 to be displayed starting at cursor position 1 The second STX instruction causes the content of the variable Axis2 Position to be displayed starting at cursor position 25 Both numerical are displayed on the default device Dev 0 Jetter AG 369 10 Programming Device numbers Introduction The device number lets you define the HMI Device numbers You may enter the following values for the parameter device number Default device MR 2824 holds the number of the device to be used Number aes L224 P Printer module Output of data on a printer module connected to the JX2 or JX3 system bus Serial interface Output of data on a user programmable serial interface Serial interface module Output of data on a serial interface module connected to the JX2 or JX3 system bus MR 2824 Device number of the default device This module register contains the device number of the default device If you always specify the default device in the application program device number 0 you can select during runtime which device is actually to be used Module register properties Values 1 11 Value after reset 2 Single display mode In single display mode an HMI always displays data from device no 2 Multi display mode In multi display mode an HMI always displays data from the device the
319. le an error occurs the controller enters the number of the I O module into this register An error might occur in the following cases Read write access to process data of JX3 modules Read write access to module registers of a JX3 module Values 2 17 Number of the JX3 I O module 456 Jetter AG JC 350 R 100002111 Programming Module register properties Type of access Only 0 can be entered Register number of the module where the error has occurred If during communication with an I O module an error occurs the controller enters the number of the module register into this register An error might occur in the following cases Read write access to module registers of a JX3 module Values 1 9999 Module register number of the JX3 module Module register properties Type of access Only 0 can be entered Value after reset 1 Jetter AG 457 10 Programming Register description Timeout intervals on the JX3 system bus R 100002764 458 Timeout interval for register access to JX3 modules The response to register access to JX3 modules must be within the configured timeout interval JX3 modules Values 1 255 ms Timeout in milliseconds Module register properties Value after reset 15 ms Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Register description Versions of JX3 system bus drivers Introduction R 100002000 R 100002072 Jetter AG Apart from information on the
320. le an error occurs when trying to create the directory app as this directory already exists The device enters this error as a warning When the device reads the DA file an error also occurs The device enters this error into the log file Jetter AG 589 11 Automatic copying of controller data 11 4 Data files Introduction This chapter covers data files where register and flag values are stored Contents Topic Page PS ORM A Gs cosets asker crete cidseseesat se Getter a e E 591 590 Jetter AG JC 350 File format Format Data lines Example Automatic copying of controller data The data file consists of the following elements Pure text file Each entry must be in a separate line of text Each line must be terminated by carriage return line feed Comment lines must be preceded by Each data file is to start with the entry SD1007 A data line consists of the following elements ID of the variable at the beginning of the line Now follows the number of the variable separated by a blank or tab Then follows the value of the variable separated by a blank or tab Variable ID Variable type SD1001 Data File Jetter AG r Registers 1000000 1000005 RS 1000000 12345 RS 1000001 2 RS 1000002 1062729008 RS 1000003 502 RS 1000004 50 RS 1000005 3 QS 1009000 3 14 Flags 10 13 FS 10 0 FS Li 1 FS 12 1 FS 13 0 Jetter AG 591 JC 350 OS update 12 OS upda
321. le on the JX3 system bus Meaning of the individual bits Bit 0 Configuration of I O module 2 0 I O module is a dummy module 1 I O module is not a dummy module Bit 1 Configuration of I O module 3 0 I O module is a dummy module 1 I O module is not a dummy module etc Configuration of I O module 4 17 0 I O module is a dummy module 1 I O module is not a dummy module Module register properties Value after reset Non volatile factory setting 65535 Takes effect Next time when the controller is launched R 100002034 Number of retries This register lets you set the number of retries in accessing the JX3 modules Before you make changes to this value consult the hotline at Jetter AG Module register properties Values 1 5 Value after reset Non volatile factory setting 1 Takes effect Next time when the controller is launched 454 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Register description Modules detected on the JX3 system bus R 100002013 R 100002015 R 100002016 Number of detected I O modules The controller JC 3xx and the bus node JX3 BN xxx enter the sum of the following I O modules into this register JX3 I O modules O dummy modules Values 0 16 Number of I O modules Module register properties Type of access Read only Value after reset Amount of connected JX3 I O modules Index to module array This index lets you select the module array entry contained in R 100002016 Values
322. led 286 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Program run at system launch Program run at system The following table shows the program run at system launch launch During the boot process each network node except for JetControl and JX3 BN ETH uses the settings of the DIP switch as a fixed IP address During the boot process of the JetControl each network node is assigned a network configuration IP address subnet mask gateway address via JetIPScan at executing the NetConsistency function After the boot process of the JetControl and thus after executing the NetConsistency function the network nodes can be reached by the network configurations set in the Hardware Manager Program run at NetConsistency passes the following states of the JetControl boot process NetConsistency Sse eserpton O a The basic driver is initialized za An instance is initialized 3 The functions of NetConsistency is executed Jetter AG 287 10 Programming Register description NetConsistency basic driver Registers Overview R 470000 R 470008 R 470009 R 470010 Register Description 470000 470008 Cookie 470009 Version number 470010 Status 470011 Command 470020 Maximum possible amount of instances 470021 Number of instances ready for operation 470030 470035 Restrictions 470040 470157 Locating faults Cookie This register shows the beginning of the NetConsistency registers Th
323. legal values Example Restriction Establishing a connection to an FTP server ServerAddr IP address or name of FTP server P address of the FTP server Name which can be resolved through DNS P address other than that of the FTP server Name which cannot be resolved UserName User name for logging on at the FTP server Password Password for logging on at the FTP server The controller does not establish the connection It enters the error into the log file COMMAND 1 Command FtpConnect ServerAddr 192 168 123 45 UserName admin admin Password Only one connection with an FTP server can be established at a time The controller terminates the existing connection before a connection to another FTP server is established Jetter AG 581 11 Automatic copying of controller data Command FtpFileRead Function Parameter name 1 Parameter value 1 Parameter name 2 Parameter value 2 Allowed values Illegal values In the event of an illegal value Example Command FtpFileWrite Function Parameter name 1 Parameter value 1 Parameter name 2 Parameter value 2 Allowed values Illegal values In the event of an illegal value Example Copying file from FTP server into the local file system ServerFile Complete name of the source file in the FTP server ClientFile Complete name of the destination file in the local file system All allowed file names The destination di
324. ler JC 3xx the controller JC 3xx The document at hand Jetsym Programming Tool 24 Jetter AG JC 350 Product description and design Accessories for the JX3 system Labelling strips Ten labelling strips are included in the scope of delivery of the JC 350 a DIV_DEK_5 5_MC 10_NEUT_WS Packaging unit 100 pcs Keying pins ying p DIV_BL_SL_3 5_KO_OR Strain relief for BU 10_E_ BLZF_GE_RM End clamp for DIN rail Saas DIV_CLIPFIX_35 D SS M Screwdriver eE SD 0 4 x 2 5 DIN 5264 A DIV_SCHRAUBENDREHER_2 5 75 Jetter AG 25 2 Product description and design Physical dimensions Physical dimensions A 1 i A ma xY 9P b ga ES O y y Minimum clearances At mounting the controller JC 350 a minimum clearance above and below must be maintained This way there must be enough room to press the latches of the backplane module when replacing modules Minimum clearance above 30 mm Minimum clearance below 25 mm Module width The width of the controller JC 350 is 56 mm When the controller JC 350 is attached to a JX3 station its width incre
325. ler does not initialize any JX2 expansion modules on the JX2 system bus For this reason JX2 expansion modules cannot be connected Bit 4 CAN IDs 0x081 9x09F for CAN Prim 1 The CAN Prim interface allows communication with the CAN IDs 0x081 OxO9F Via these CAN IDs master slave operations with JX2 slave modules and MC axes are normally executed Module register properties Value after reset Non volatile factory setting 0 Jetter AG 547 10 Programming R 200010500 R 200010501 Takes effect Next time when the controller is launched CAN Prim status register R 200010500 allows to evaluate the status of the CAN Prim interface Meaning of the individual bits Bit 1 NEW DAT 1 At least one message box has received a new CAN message Bit 2 Length of CAN ID O The length of sent received CAN IDs is 11 bits 1 The length of sent received CAN IDs is 29 bits Module register properties Type of access Read Takes effect When the CAN Prim interface is enabled CAN Prim command register R 200010501 is used to transfer certain commands to the CAN Prim interface CAN Prim interface Commands 7 Clearing the FIFO buffer This command is for clearing all entries in the FIFO buffer Result R 200010503 0 8 Set the standard ID length to 11 bits The ID length for all CAN messages is set to 11 bits Result Bit 2 0 in R 200010500 R 200010506 0 R 200010507 0 R 200010542 message box number 2
326. lication program From other controllers 222 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Memory for non volatile registers on the backplane module Introduction Properties Memory access Jetter AG These registers are located on the backplane module of the controller Global variables which are assigned to permanent addresses VL Integer registers Slow access Milliseconds Limited number of write erase cycles Approx 10 000 Number of registers 128 Register numbers 108100 108227 By JetSym By the e mail client By browser via HTTP server From HMIs From the application program From other controllers 223 10 Programming Special registers Introduction Special registers let you control OS functions and retrieve status information Properties Global variables which are assigned to permanent addresses VL When the operating system is launched special registers are initialized using default values Register numbers 100000 999999 Memory access By JetSym By the e mail client By browser via HTTP server From HMls From the application program From other controllers 224 Jetter AG JC 350 Inputs and outputs Introduction Properties of virtual inputs outputs Properties of digital inputs outputs Memory access Jetter AG Programming Inputs and outputs are 1 bit variables This means they can either have the value TRUE or FALSE Global variables assigned to per
327. ligned The sign is the first character which is output if the sign has not been disabled before Positive values are preceded by a space character as sign Negative values are preceded by Ifthe display field is too small the leftmost figures are truncated The value is rounded to the set decimal places Contents Topic Page STX instruction for displaying numerical values eeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeees 369 Device NUMBENS rassier a E neat fas eevee dee 370 CURSOR POSION ciiai aaaea a aaa aaa cxeaacadedarecaadevemnads 372 Setting the length of the display field ee ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeetneeeee 374 Setting the sign Option ee eceeeeeeeeee teeter eter eeteee ee eeeeeetnieeeeetaeeeestneeeee 375 Setting the number of decimal PlaC S ee eee eeteeeeeeeeeeeeeteteeeeeenneeeeeed 376 Setting the format of numerical values cece eeeeeeeeeteeeeeeteteeeeetneeeee 377 368 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming STX instruction for displaying numerical values Function declaration Function parameters How to use this instruction How it works Function DisplayValue Dev Int POS ING Value Double Dev Number of the device where the value is to be output Pos 1 Possible number of Cursor position starting from which characters on the screen the value is to be displayed Value Value to be displayed Constant value name of a register or a variable How to invoke the instruction to disp
328. lish a noncyclical transmission channel to a Modbus TCP server These functions copy data between registers of a Modbus TCP server and STX variables They establish a connection to the specified Modbus TCP server transmit the desired data and clear down the connection again If RemoteScan has already established a connection for cyclical data transmission this connection will be used Setting up and clearing down the connection is therefore not required Cyclical data Cyclical data transmission is made through the configurable function transmission RemoteScanConfig The data are cyclically transmitted from and to the Modbus TCP servers by means of STX variables Only one connection is established to each Modbus TCP server IP address and port irrespective of the number of communication units which have been configured on this server If several communication units are configured on one Modbus TCP server accesses are serialized since servers often do not support command pipelining If several servers have been configured communication is carried out in parallel Unit ID Converters from Modbus TCP to Modbus RTU use the Unit ID for addressing the Modbus RTU servers For this reason the Unit ID can be set 494 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming JetSym STX functions The JetSym STX functions have been described in detail in the online help of JetSym System function Corresponding JetSym STX function eo Function ModbusCRCgen FrameP
329. ly configured by the operating system Using TCP IP and UDP IP frames allow for data interchange exceeding the limits of one s own subnet Jetter AG 241 10 Programming Client Below programming the client in the controllers is described In doing so the following topics are dealt with Transferring variable register sets command group NetCopy Setting and clearing register bits command group NetBit Transmitting individual register values network registers Examples of the application Event triggered data interchange Parameterization Configuration Used protocol The client of the controller uses the JetIP protocol based on UDP IP for data transfer Server The server functions do not require any programming or configuration by the user Protocols Acyclic data interchange on the Jetter system bus can be established by the following protocols XCOM protocol by Jetter AG JetIP protocol by Jetter AG UDP IP TCP IP Pv4 Contents Topic Page Command group NetCopy c ceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeieeeeeseaeeeeesieeeeetneeeeee 243 Command group NetBI crvestairessii innn E 245 Network registers 0 ceeccceeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 246 Registers located on JX3 modules 0 00 ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeetaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaas 248 Indirect addressing of remote modulesS eeeesseeeeseeerrsseerrsserrrsserrsseernsee 250
330. m online help Jetter AG recommends not to execute error logging via the registers and flags of the JetIP network Network registers Error logging for network registers and flags of the JetIP networking Flag 2075 Errors at acyclic data interchange Register 232710 Amount of errors at acyclic data interchange Register 232711 Error code of the latest acyclic data interchange Jetter AG 273 10 Programming Error message during CRC computing Detecting the error Root cause of the error Response of the device to this error Fixing the root cause Acknowledging the error Both publisher and subscriber carry out a CRC of their configuration files The calculated value can be read from registers 255004 and 250004 If there is no configuration file they report an error This error may be caused by the following root cause CRC computing failed because there is no configuration file The operating system of the device responds to the error by taking the following steps The operating system sets bit 0 in the status register of the publisher R 255000 or of the subscriber R 250000 Demaa arnai a configuration file After deploying a configuration file restart both publisher and subscriber 274 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Error message on part of a subscription Detecting the error Root cause of the error Response of the device to this error Fixing the root cause Acknowled
331. mand 412 Jetter Ethernet system bus multicast frames which are received on a port are not forwarded to any of the other ports All other Ethernet frames are forwarded as usual Purpose This command lets you prevent forwarding Jetter Ethernet system bus multicast frames to the CPU and the other ports This way networks are split and thus data traffic e g from the machine network to higher level networks is reduced Address space Splitting is carried out on Ethernet level via the multicast address range of the Jetter Ethernet system bus 0x01 00 5E 40 00 00 0x01 00 5E 40 00 FF Enable JetSync blockage for port X15 Effect The JetSync blockage is enabled for port X15 only Bit 8 in R 202962 is set Jetter Ethernet system bus multicast frames of the CPU are forwarded to port X14 only Jetter Ethernet system bus multicast frames of port X14 are forwarded to the CPU only Jetter Ethernet system bus multicast frames of port X15 are forwarded to the CPU and to port X14 All other Ethernet frames are forwarded as usual Purpose This command lets you prevent forwarding Jetter Ethernet system bus multicast frames to port X15 This way networks are split and thus data traffic e g from the machine network to higher level networks is reduced Address space Splitting is carried out on Ethernet level via the multicast address range of the Jetter Ethernet system bus 0x01 00 5E 40 00 00 0x01 00 5
332. manent addresses IX QX Used for RemoteScan via Modbus TCP Amount 16 000 O numbers 20001 36000 Global variables assigned to permanent addresses IX QX Located on modules connected to the JX2 or JX3 system bus O numbers on the JX3 system bus 100000201 100001716 O numbers on the JX2 system bus 200000201 200002416 O numbers of remote devices connected to a JX3 BN ETH 1nnn010201 1nnn011716 nnn GNN By JetSym By the e mail client By browser via HTTP server From displays and HMIs From the application program 225 10 Programming Flags Introduction Properties of user flags Properties of overlaid user flags Properties of special flags Memory access 226 Flags are one bit operands This means they can either have the value TRUE or FALSE Global variables which are assigned to permanent addresses MX Non volatile Amount 256 Flag numbers 0 255 Global variables which are assigned to permanent addresses MX Non volatile Overlaid by registers 1000000 1000055 Amount 1 792 Flag numbers 256 2047 Global variables which are assigned to permanent addresses MX When the operating system is launched special flags are initialized using their default values Amount 256 Flag numbers 2048 2303 By JetSym By the e mail client By browser via HTTP server From HMls From the appl
333. me PO01000300 R1000100 gt Result The state of the output is displayed whose number results from the addition of the content of register 1000300 and the content of register 1000100 210 Jetter AG JC 350 HTTP server Example of an HTML page Task Action Storage location Insert current real time controller values into an HTML page It should then be possible to display the HTML page in a browser using the Server Side Includes feature lt JC DTAG xmlns JC http jetter de ssi jetcontrol gt lt html gt lt head gt lt meta http equiv Content Type content text html charset windows 1252 gt lt meta name GENERATOR content Microsoft FrontPage 4 0 gt lt meta name ProgID content FrontPage Editor Document gt lt title gt Index lt title gt lt head gt lt body gt Hello World amp nbsp lt p gt Actual controller values can be inserted into an html page like this amp nbsp lt p gt lt p gt Register 201000 lt JC DTAG name R201000 type INT format H gt or Hex notation O0x lt JC DTAG name R201000 type INTX format 0 gt or rather this way lt JC DTAG name R201000 type BOOL gt if only Boolean is queried Binary notation is also an option lt JC DTAG name R201000 type INTB format ttt tt gt b amp nbsp lt p gt lt p gt Strings could also be defined lt JC DTAG name R201000 type STRING gt
334. meters 1 through 5 Number of characters of the error message Text of the error message First instance Status Bit O 1 Error Bit 1 1 Alarms Bit 2 1 An instance has been initialized Bit 3 1 Execution in process Command 0 There are no commands Global status information Summary of status messages State of execution Corresponds to the feedback value State Number of cycles Corresponds to the feedback value Count Number of changes Corresponds to the feedback value Changed Result of the function Corresponds to the feedback value Result Warnings and errors All 3 responses are dissimilar Reply no 1 is not the same as replies 2 and 3 Reply no 2 is not the same as replies 1 and 3 Reply no 3 is not the same as replies 1 and 2 Wrong CtrlID or CtrilDopt The node has not called Multiple call The IP settings could not be changed Configuration GNN Set configuration Actual configuration 1 Actual configuration 2 Actual configuration 3 Application registers 1000000 1001999 1000000 1019999 JC 340 32 bit integer or floating point number non volatile JC 340 32 bit integer or floating point number non volatile with option SD 1000000 1029999 1000000 1059999 1000000 1119999 1000000 1059999 1000000 1119999 JC 350 32 bit integer or floating point number non volatile JC 360 32 bit integer or floating point number non vola
335. meters to their default values factory settings Register number Description T Factory settings 100002023 JX3 system bus I O dummy modules 65535 100002034 JX3 system bus Number of retries 1 E m 200002023 JX2 system bus I O dummy modules 1 E 200002024 x2 system bus Slave dummy modules 255 200002029 JX2 system bus Baud rate E 7 E 200002032 JX2 system bus Switch on delay E 60 a 200002077 Jx2 system bus Special functions 0 m Application Use this command if you want to undo changes to remanent parameters Deactivate Wait for communication Effect Not before there are definite requests the controller will communicate with external communication partners Advantage The controller executes the application program faster Disadvantage On average external communication partners have to wait longer for a response from the controller 326 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming System command 123 Activate Wait for communication Effect The controller cyclically checks for communication requests from external partners for 1 to 2 ms Advantage External communication partners get a faster reply from the controller Disadvantage Application program processing takes slightly longer System command 160 Deactivate Task switch on I O access Effect While the controller is accessing modules on the JX2 or JX3 system bus other tasks of the application progr
336. module register specifies the suggested value which is displayed when the STX instruction UserInput is invoked and after pressing the clear key C Module register properties Values Int 2 147 483 648 2 147 483 647 Values Float 1 2x10 3 4x10 Type Int or Float depending on the value entered last Takes effect At the next STX instruction UserInput Jetter AG 387 10 Programming Polling the number of decimal places Polling the number of The number of decimal places which have been input can be read out from decimal places MR 2808 MR 2808 Number of decimal places which have been input in the case of Userlnput instruction This module register specifies the number of decimal places which have been input by the user Module register properties Values 0 MR 2811 388 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Userlnput Polling the status Polling the status The status of the UserInput instruction can be polled from MR 2817 MR 2817 Userlnput status This module register specifies the status of the UserInput instruction Module register properties Values 0 No UserlInput active 1 Userlnput active Jetter AG 389 10 Programming Userlnput Aborting the instruction Aborting the active By writing value 0 to MR 2817 you abort an active STX instruction instruction UserInput Operating principle To abort an active STX instruction UserInput the controller proceeds as follow
337. n Introduction Restrictions Cursor position 0 MR 2814 Programming This parameter is used to define the screen position where the first character of the text or variable is to appear There is no cursor position evaluation for devices 8 through 11 Cursor position 0 has a special meaning The controller evaluates this parameter in the following steps o Step i eseription y 4 The controller reads the content of MR 2814 MR 2814 is larger than 0 the value is used as cursor position MR 2814 equals 0 the message is displayed starting from the current cursor position Example MR 2814 0 DisplayText 0 1 Temp DisplayValue 0 0 Temperature Result The temperature is displayed directly after the colon starting from cursor position 7 Indirect cursor position This module register specifies the cursor position if 0 has been programmed as parameter Module register properties Values 0 Number of characters on the screen Value after reset 0 Jetter AG 383 10 Programming Cursor position of HMIs The following table shows the correlation between cursor position as parameter of an instruction and the position on the screen LCD 16 LCD 110 2 3 4 LCD 23 LCD 27 LCD 34 25 48 LCD 52 LCD 54 Z 384 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Setting the length of the input field Setting the length MR 2813 The input field length for numerical value
338. n R 200002015 Index to module array Module register properties Type of access Read only Value after reset Number of connected I O and slave modules R 200002070 Number of connected CANopen modules The controller JC 350 enters into this register the number of CANopen modules connected to the JX2 system bus Values 0 10 Number of connected CANopen modules Module register properties Type of access Read only R 200002071 Actual I O sum of modules on the JX2 system bus The controller JC 350 calculates the I O sum of the connected modules and enters it into this register Module register properties Type of access Read only Jetter AG 441 10 Programming Register description Error logging on the JX2 system bus R 200002008 Error registers JX2 system bus If an error on the JX2 system bus occurs the controller enters its cause into this register Meaning of the individual bits Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 9 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 I O module timeout 1 At least one I O module has caused a timeout JX2 slave module timeout 1 At least one JX2 slave module has caused a timeout Peripheral fault 1 At least one I O module suffers a peripheral fault e g short circuit or overload Object length has not been set 1 In case of write access to the CANopen application registers the object length has not been set Initialization error 1 During JX2 system bus initialization an error occ
339. n Sub D length 10 m 60872884 Cable assy 192 15M JetControl to HMI with 15 pin Sub D length 15 m 60864359 KAY_0386 0250 JetControl to LCD 60 with 15 pin Sub D length 2 5 m 60864360 KAY_0386 0500 JetControl to LCD 60 with 15 pin Sub D length 5 m 60864897 KAY_0533 0025 JetControl to LCD 52 54 with 15 pin Sub D length 0 25 m 60864257 Cable assy 197 5M JetControl to JetView 200 300 with 9 pin Sub D length 5 m 60871930 Cable assy 197 12M JetControl to JetView 200 300 with 9 pin Sub D length 12 m 500 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming 10 16 2 Functioning principle of the user programmable serial interface Introduction This chapter describes the functioning principle of the user programmable serial interface Restrictions When using the user programmable serial interface the following restrictions apply Irrespective of the fact that various hardware drivers have been implemented only one hardware interface is available This means While for example communication via RS 422 is taking place simultaneous and independent communication via RS 232 is not possible The controller does not execute the pcomX protocol any more This means This protocol can no longer be used to communicate for example with JetSym JetViewSoft or HMls via this protocol Contents Topic Page Functioning principle ss spaan aiiai aaan iaa aiaa 502 Jetter AG 501 10 Programming Functioning principle Introduction Bloc
340. n be connected to the JX2 system bus of the following controllers and modules by Jetter AG JC 340 JC 350 V 1 03 0 00 JC 360 V 1 03 0 00 JC 24x V 3 26 JX6 SB l V 2 21 116 Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation Product description Festo CPX CMAX 1 CPX CMAX 1 Restrictions when connected to the JX2 system bus Minimum requirements Application Note The CPX CMAX is a servo pneumatic positioning system for controlling pneumatic drives It is connected to a CPX terminal and controls the positions of different pneumatic drive systems linear or rotatory It is protected to IP65 9 Ga CPX CMAX 1 Servo pneumatic positioning controller CPX terminal Numerot omies n oseto a Number otenries nostos 4 O The technology module CPX CMAX 1 can be connected to the JX2 system bus of the following controllers by Jetter AG JC 340 JC 350 V 1 10 0 00 JC 360 V 1 10 0 00 For more information on how to operate these modules along with a JC 350 refer to the following application notes MTR SFC Festo_apn042_xxx_Festo_Electrical_Motor_Controllers pdf Festo_apn043_xxx_CPX_Technologiemodule pdf Jetter AG 117 4 Mechanical and electrical installation Product description Festo CPX CMPX CPX CMPX Restrictions when connected to the JX2 system bus Minimum requirements Application Note The CPX CMPxX is an electronic end position controller for pneumatic drives
341. n error 200009 Enhanced error register 1 bit coded Bit 3 Error in ModConfig da Bit 10 A bus node publish subscribe client has reported an error Bit 12 JetIPScan has reported an error Bit 16 NetConsistency has reported an error Bit 24 Applies to JC 360 MC and JC 365 MC Tae conflict detected 200010 Enhanced error register 2 bit coded Bit 1 Error in the MC object 200051 Error numbers of JetIPScan 0 No error or warning 5 The user has terminated the function 1001 The first received response does not match response 2 and 3 1002 The second received response does not match response 1 and 3 200061 200010 200168 200169 200170 200300 200301 200302 201000 201001 201002 201003 201004 201005 202930 202936 202960 202961 1003 The third received response does not match response 2 and 3 1 All three responses are dissimilar 2 The IP settings of at least one node are dissimilar 3 The JetIPScan function has been invoked although it is active already 10 The length of the set value list is lt 1 or gt 255 or the pointer to the list is invalid 11 A GNN of the set value list is lt 1 or gt 255 or it is a multiple GNN 20 40 Internal error 1001 The node has reported the wrong CtrlID or 1199 CtrllIDopt 2001 The node has not called 2199 3001 Several nodes of the same GNN have 3199 called Error numbers of NetConsistency see R 470040 Enhanced error regist
342. n will not be displayed Takes effect Next time when STX instruction DisplayValue is issued Jetter AG 425 10 Programming Setting the number of decimal places Setting the number of The number of decimal places is set in MR 2810 decimal places If you add decimal places you might have to adjust the length of the display field in MR 2812 Reason The decimal point requires one place in the display field MR 2810 Number of decimal places for DisplayValue instructions This module register holds the number of decimal places when displaying numerical values Module register properties Values 0 4 Takes effect Next time when STX instruction DisplayValue is issued 426 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Setting the format of numerical values Setting the format of numerical values Flag 2060 In setting the format of numerical values you have the choice between decimal or hexadecimal format Flag 2060 lets you set the format of numerical values Format of numerical values Flag properties Values 0 Decimal 1 Hexadecimal Takes effect Next time when STX instruction DisplayValue is issued Jetter AG 427 10 Programming 10 11 JX2 system bus Introduction The controller JC 350 features an internal JX2 system bus master Several modules can be connected to the JX2 system bus Access to these modules is completely transparent Configuration The JX2 system bus needs not be configured The JC 350 is able to a
343. n with a UDPI IP server If data are to be received via a TCP IP connection you can invoke the function and assign the return value of a variable for further evaluation as follows Result ConnectionReceiveData hConnection Dummy Dummy ReceiveBuffer sizeof ReceiveBuffer T 10s When using TCP IP data are sent via a previously opened connection Therefore specification of the IP address and IP port number is not required any more and can be ignored in the function In the following cases the task is not processed further after issuing the function call The data have been received An error has occurred In case of a TCP IP connection data are transmitted as data stream The device JC 350 processes this function in the following steps Step Description 1 The device JC 350 waits until data have been received but no longer than the specified timeout 2 If then the timeout has elapsed or the the function is exited and an error connection has been terminated message is issued data have been received they are copied to the receiving buffer given along with the data but not exceeding the amount given along with the data Then the function continues with stage 3 3 If then more data have been received than these are buffered by the JC 350 to could have been copied into the be fetched by further function calls receiving buffer 4 The function is exited and the number of da
344. n1_ba_xxxx_manual pdf User programmable serial User programmable serial interface see page 496 interface JX2 SER1 jx2_ser1_ba_xxxx_manual pdf JX3 MIX2 jx3_mix2_ba_xxxx_manual pdf Jetter AG 411 10 Programming 10 10 2 Registers Introduction This chapter provides you with an overview of registers which are used to parameterize printer and serial interfaces Restrictions The settings made in the given registers are of global effect that is they will impact all functions for controlling printers and serial interfaces If different settings are used in several tasks of the application program then these settings may impact each other Contents Topic Page Register NUMDEIS nissen o A Heedoetd ageddeevenddeest agus 413 Registers OVCrViOW ccccceeceneceeeeeneeeeeetaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeseenaeeeeeenaeeeeeenas 414 412 Jetter AG JC 350 Register numbers Introduction Register numbers Determining register numbers Programming The registers are combined into one register block The basic register number of this block is dependent on the controller Device Basic register number Register numbers JC 350 220000 222806 222838 In this chapter only the last four figures of a register number are specified e g MR 2838 Add to this module register number the basic register number of the corresponding device to determine the complete register number for example 222838 Jetter AG
345. ncluding several subdirectories leading to this directory If this feature is not supported the user must navigate from one directory level to the next until the desired directory is reached This is done using the command FtpDirChange The file system of a JC 350 supports both options Related topics Determining the current directory see page 195 190 Jetter AG JC 350 FTP client Creating a directory Introduction This function lets you create a new directory from the file system of a remote network node Function declaration Function FtpDirCreate FtpConnection Handle Const Ref ServerDir String Int Function parameters Description of the function parameters Parameter Value Remarks O FtpConnection Handle Value returned by the function FtpConnect ServerDir Directory name Name of the directory to be created Return value If the returned value is negative an error has occurred If the returned value is 0 the directory could successfully be created in the file system of the remote network node Return value 0 No error 1 Invalid handle 2 Communication error there is for example no response from FTP server 3 Error message from FTP server e g directory already exists Operating principle In the following cases the task is not processed further after issuing the function call The FTP server must first create a subdirectory An error has occurred This function is processed in
346. nding a CAN message To send a CAN message proceed as follows Select a message box In this manual message box 1 is used Enter the number of data bytes to be sent R 200010553 Number of bytes Enter the content into the data bytes to be sent R 200010554 Data byte 0 R 200010555 Data byte 1 R 200010561 Data byte 7 Start transmission of the CAN message R 200010563 3 Result if sending was successful Bit 3 0 in R 200010550 Configuring a message To configure a message box for receiving messages proceed as follows box as inbox Select a message box In this manual message box 0 is used basic register number 200010530 Configure message box 0 as inbox R 200010531 0 Configure the CAN ID for receiving messages R 200010532 CAN ID Activate message box 1 R 200010543 1 Result if configuration was successful Bit 0 1 in R 200010530 562 Jetter AG JC 350 Receiving a CAN message Programming To receive a CAN message in message box 0 proceed as follows Bit 1 NEW DAT 1 in a CAN message has been R 200010500 received Proceed with step 2 Read the number of the message box which has received a new CAN message Message box number R 200010504 Check the message box for overflow Bit2 OVERRUN 1 an overflow has occurred in R 200010530 Read the number of received bytes Number of bytes R 200010533 Read the received bytes Data byte 0 R 2
347. nditions of use 14 Interfaces Overview 21 IP configuration Configuration file 73 Configuration memory 72 Configuration registers 77 J Jacks Connector X19 JX2 system bus 49 Jack X11 Serial interface 44 Jacks X14 and X15 Ethernet 47 JetIPScan JetIPScan Activating and deactivating 286 Registers Description 299 Configuration 308 Global status 301 634 Jetter AG JC 350 Index Register numbers 300 Warnings and errors 304 Jetter Ethernet system bus 238 Cyclic data exchange 257 Network inputs and outputs 267 Network registers 267 Publish subscribe 259 Publish subscribe Registers 261 Executing an ARP request 314 Explicit data exchange 241 Addressing with variable destination window 252 Indirect addressing of remote modules 250 NetBit 245 NetCopy 243 Registers Description 254 Registers located on JX3 modules 248 Global Node Number 240 JetSync blockage 316 System commands 320 System command register 317 Locating faults CRC calculation 274 Explicit data exchange 273 Remote node 276 Subscription 275 NetConsistency 277 Assigning network parameters 281 Description of registers Basic driver 288 Description of registers Instance 296 Function 279 JetIPScan Activating and deactivating 286 Process Timing 287 TCP S Connection management 310 JX2 system bus 428 Coding of modules 429 Config
348. neeenas 415 Configuring module NUMDETS essaia a aia a AALAN AA AA ANE NAAA 416 OUTPUTCING TEKS iania aAA AANEEN ENAREN ATSANA ARENAN ARKTA 417 STX instructions for outputting texts 0 eee eeeeeee ee eeee eter eeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeaeeeteeaeeeeeeaaes 418 Device NUM DES vei eas ecadsctraute vet ctbtint eet Aanetetenaeet a E eerste 420 Outputting numerical VAlUCS cece tee essence eeee ee eeeeee ee ee seen nese eeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseseeeeesseeeeseseeeeeeessenenen 421 STX instruction for outputting numerical VAIUCS 0 eee eect ee eeeeee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeseeeaeeeeeenaees 422 Device number ae iat acadeescctbeveet coed tadat a tects iene sean tad tected alee 423 Setting the length of the display field 0 0 2 ee ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeaeeeseneeeeeseeaaeeeseeaaees 424 Setting the Som oplo eean a a a a E E 425 Setting the number of decimal places sssseeesssesssrresssnnasssnnentsnnaarnnneatannaatnnnaatannaannnnaatannaannnnnaa 426 Setting the format of numerical values seeessseessrsesssnnasssnnenssnnaaenanaatennaatnnnnatannaanennaatannaaennnaaa 427 JX2 system DUS wsecicecsscccecetscceeecsacenteessccteeesscciveesscen cecebcei senesced necsbscaseesscei recsncedseessceneneshicrsessccties 428 Module array and module codes of connected modules ccccceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeettees 429 JX2 system bus Baud rate o oo cece ee eeeeee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeesesaaeeeseeaeeeeeenaeeeseenae
349. ng 472 CC Description Comments Length Example SUBJECT Description Length Example ATTACHMENT Description Comments Length Example MESSAGE Description Comments Length Example Additional e mail addressee s Several addressees are separated by the semicolon 255 characters CC service mydomain com hotline mydomain com Subject 255 characters SUBJECT Fatal Error Complete name of the file to be attached The attached file must be a text file 511 characters ATTACHMENT logfiles error report log E mail message text Text only message 65 535 characters MESSAGE Have a nice day JetControl Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Inserting real time controller values Introduction Actual real time controller values are integrated into parameter entries within the sections via tag functions This way the contents respectively states of registers text registers inputs outputs and flags can be displayed Tag delimiters All tags start and end with defined strings delimiters Between these tag delimiters the variables are defined Tag start lt JW DTAG Variable definition The variable definition in a tag contains attributes which are used to set for example how the value of a variable is to be displayed name Function Variable name Comments Code letter followed by the variable number Example name R1000023 type Description Variable type of nota
350. nition Global Node The Global Node Number GNN is an ID number to identify Jetter controllers Number e g bus nodes bus nodes within an Ethernet network The GNN within a network has to be unambiguous for each Jetter device The JetSym Hardware Manager automatically assigns the GNN during configuration The value range of the GNN within a project is 000 199 The controller has always got GNN 000 Using the GNN The Global Node Number is used in the following applications Register number for network registers Identification of publications and subscriptions at cyclic data interchange Identification of nodes at automatic network configuration NetConsistency Networking example The following illustration shows networking of a possible JX3 system with a JC 3xx and two JX3 BN ETH PC
351. nits for R 201002 This register contains the multiplier for runtime register R 201002 Register properties Values 1 2 147 483 647 10 ms Value after reset 10 gt 100 ms Enabling conditions After atleast 10 ms R 201004 System time base in milliseconds Every millisecond this register value is incremented by one Register properties Values 2 147 483 648 2 147 483 647 overflowing Type of access Read R 201005 System time base in microseconds Every microsecond this register value is incremented by one Register properties Values 2 147 483 648 2 147 483 647 overflowing Type of access Read 344 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming 10 8 Monitoring interface activities Introduction Monitored interface activities Several servers for variables have been integrated into the controller to make variables used within the controller accessible from outside These servers support several protocols on different interfaces The servers do not require any programming in the application program but process requests from external clients on their own This chapter explains one possibility for detecting from within the application program whether communication with the servers takes place through these interfaces The following interface activities can be monitored pcom lt X server via serial interface JetIP server via Ethernet interface STX debug server via Ethernet interface Purpose The monitoring function for
352. node A can prompt another CAN node B to send a message An RTR frame cannot be used to send user data Node B is prompted to send a frame of the same CAN ID and the corresponding data Configuration for sending and receiving RTR frames Select any message box for sending RTR frames and another message box for receiving them In this manual message box 0 is used for sending and message box 1 for receiving RTR frames Configure message box 0 as outbox for RTR frames R 200010531 2 Configure the CAN ID of the RTR frame R 200010532 CAN ID Activate message box 0 R 200010543 1 Result Bit 0 1 in R 200010530 Configure message box 1 as inbox for replies to an RTR frame R 200010551 0 Activate message box 1 R 200010563 1 566 Jetter AG JC 350 Sending and receiving RTR frames Programming a sending an RTR frame from message box 0 R 200010543 3 Wait for a Wait for a reply to the RTR frame in message box 1 to the RTR frame in message box 1 bit 1 NEW DAT 1 in the controller has received the R200010550 reply to the RTR frame Proceed with step 3 Read the number of received bytes Number of bytes R 200010553 Read the received bytes Data byte 0 R 200010554 Data byte 1 R 200010555 Data byte 7 R 200010561 Acknowledge reception R 200010563 4 gt The message box is again ready to receive Jetter AG 567 11 Automatic copying of contr
353. number Register numbers JC 350 100000 100500 100817 The following table lists the EDS registers of a controller as well as their connection to the entries in the EDS file System eds ini By means of this register array you can have the EDS of the controller or of a JX3 module displayed For this you must select the controller or the desired JX3 module via module registers 500 and 501 The contents of the selected EDS are then displayed in the following registers Register Section in the Name in the Description EDS file EDS file Functional group 1 JX3 modules Module number if MR 500 gt 0 Version of this section Module name or controller name PcbOpt Hardware option through MR700 PRODUCTION Version of this section SerNum Serial number through MR 707 D MR 712 Internal usage 35 3 Identifying MR 806 NVRegs Number of remanent registers EDS file EDS file section m application program NVRegs Number of supported JX2 axis modules Web server and e mail client ModbusTCP Modbus TCP client and server SD LED LED of the SD card slot UserLEDs User defined LEDs ee E A Real time clock EDS file of JX3 modules The assignment of module registers 6xx and 7xx EE ICES to the assignment with JX3 module Related topics EDS file see page 31 36 Jetter AG JC 350 Identifying 3 3 Version registers Introduction The operating system provides several registers which can be
354. number of the network node having last reported an error to the controller into R 394003 By means of NetCopy commands you can precisely locate the error and fix the root cause This works because GNN IP address and port number of the other network node are known Make sure the contents of registers 39nnn0O through 39nnn5 are read by the application program Further registers having got a value unequal zero indicate that further network nodes have reported an error Make sure you also clear these errors 276 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming 10 3 5 NetConsistency function Target Application System properties Configuration data The NetConsistency master The goal of NetConsistency is automated comparison of actual system properties with the set system properties If the actual system properties are not in accordance with the set system properties the respective issues are automatically replaced within the system by the set system properties The user can take the following actions by applying NetConsistency Exchanging a defective system component a network node by simply adjusting it to the new system component within an engineered plant The JetControl which is the NetConsistency master automatically configures the new system component by all kinds of information given in the former system component Easily updating an already existing plant Download of the new system properties to the NetConsistency
355. nvalid handle e g sending via a UDP IP server If data are to be sent via a TCP IP connection you can invoke the function and assign the return value of a variable for further evaluation as follows Result ConnectionSendData hConnection 0 0 SendBuffer SendLen 529 10 Programming Functioning principle with a TCP IP connection Using this function with a UDPIIP client Functioning principle with a UDPIIP client Related topics When using TCP IP data are sent via a previously opened connection Therefore specification of the IP address and IP port number is not required anymore and can be ignored in the function In the following cases the task is not processed further after issuing the function call The data have been sent and their reception confirmed An error has occurred If with a client data are to be sent via a UDP IP connection you can invoke the function and assign the return value of a variable for further evaluation as follows Result ConnectionData hConnection LP 192 168 75 123 46000 SendBuffer SendLen With UDP IP there is no connection between two given network clients Therefore with each function call data can be sent to another client or another port The task will pause at the function call until the data are sent You will not get any acknowledgment of the remote network client having received the data Initializing the user programmable IP inter
356. o response from FTP server 4 Error message sent by the FTP server 5 Invalid response from server Jetter AG 195 8 FTP client Operating principle In the following cases the task is not processed further after issuing the function call The FTP server must first determine the actual directory An error has occurred This function is processed in the following steps Description S a controller sends a command to the FTP server that it has to ee the current a ee 2 The FTP server transmits the actual The FTP server transmits the actual directory with path specification with path specification no errors have occurred the variable contains the complete path of the current directory the function is terminated and value 0 is returned errors have occurred the function is terminated and a negative value is returned Related topics Changing directories see page 189 196 Jetter AG JC 350 FTP client 8 2 Registers Introduction This chapter describes the registers on the controller which contain status information of the FTP client These registers can be used for debugging or diagnostic purposes However they can t be used for other functions such as establishing or terminating a connection Contents Topic Page Register MUIMBONS seriei a a tied 198 Registers Description Jetter AG 197 8 FTP client Register numbers Introduction Register num
357. odules are not permitted to send any CAN messages The interval between two CAN messages received via CAN interface should be at least 10 ms In case of shorter time intervals the JC 350 is not able to process all CAN messages for CAN Prim reception If several CAN messages of the same CAN ID are to be received an application program featuring a high reaction and processing speed is required to prevent buffer overflows overrun bit Adjusting the task switch procedure and task prioritization TASKPRIORITY do not necessarily grant processing all CAN messages When peripheral modules are simultaneously operated on the JX2 system bus and the CAN Prim interface certain CAN IDs are earmarked Modules on the JX2 system Earmarked CAN IDs bus For all modules 0x100 0x701 0x702 0x703 0x704 0x705 0x706 0x707 0x708 0x709 0x70A 0x732 0x733 0x734 0x735 0x736 0x737 0x738 0x739 0x73A 0x73B 0x746 0x747 0x748 0x749 0x74A 0x74B 0x74C 0x74D 0x74E 0x74F JX2 1 O modules 0x180 0x181 0x182 0x183 0x184 0x185 0x186 0x187 0x188 0x189 0x18A 0x18B 0x18C 0x18D 0x18E 0x18F 0x190 0x191 0x192 0x193 0x194 0x195 0x196 0x197 0x198 0x199 0x19A 0x19B 0x19C 0x19D 0x19E 0x19F 0x1A0 0x1A1 0x1A2 0x1A3 0x1A4 0x1A5 0x1A6 0x1A7 0x1A8 0x1A9 0x1AA 0x1AB 0x1AC 0x1AD 0x1AE 0x1AF 0x1B0 0x1B1 0x1B2 0x1B3 0x1B4 0x1B5 0x1B6 0x1B7 0x1B8 0x1B9 0x1BA 0x1BB 0x1BC 0x1BD 0x1BE 0x1BF 0x380 0x381
358. odules within the JX3 station 230 Removing Removing a controller JC 350 69 Replacing the Controller 67 Repair 14 Replacing modules 14 Runtime registers 342 S Safety instructions 13 Mode selector S11 61 SD card slot X61 63 System commands 326 System registers 317 Jetter AG 635 Index T Technical specifications 627 Ethernet port 47 JX2 system bus 49 Power supply 43 SD card 63 Serial interface 44 Transport 14 Nameplate 29 U Usage other than intended 14 User programmable CAN Prim interface 540 Sample program 564 Function 545 Internal process 546 Registers Description 547 551 557 Restrictions 541 Transmitting RTR telegrams 566 Use 561 Using CAN ID masks 565 User programmable IP interface 521 Programming the IP interface 523 Registers Overview 536 User programmable serial interface 496 Connection 44 Operating principle 502 Programming the serial interface 514 Registers Overview 506 V Version registers 37 Z Accessories for the JX3 system 25 636 Jetter AG Jetter AG Graeterstrasse 2 71642 Ludwigsburg Germany Phone 49 7141 2550 0 Fax 49 7141 2550 425 info jetter de www jetter de Jetter automation We automate your success
359. of the controller JC 350 dxf file with 2D illustrations stp file with 3D illustrations The following document and the following software tool support you in engineering a JX2 station on the JX2 system bus E Manual on the controller JC 3xx m System bus topology JX2 system bus specification a Product descriptions of JX2 modules IP 67 modules as well as third party modules ez System bus configurator Excel file for designing the system bus SysBus_Configuration_xxx_e xls xxx Version Jetter AG 23 2 Product description and design Engineering a The following document and the following software tool support you in JX3 station on the engineering a JX3 station on the JX3 system bus JX3 system bus Manual on the controller JC 3xx Engineering a JX3 station a Product descriptions of JX3 modules System bus configurator Excel file for designing the JX3 system bus JX3 SysBus_Configurator_xxx_e xls xxx Version Installation The following documents support you at installing the controller Installation manual manual GE information on _Instaling the controller on a DIN rail the controller on a DIN rail Manual onthe controller JC 3xx Manual onthe controller JC 3xx the controller JC 3xx The document at hand Programming The reiia dounerian bonae ioien document and software tool support you at programming the controller Manual on the controller JC 3xx Manual on the control
360. og file Introduction This chapter covers the structure and contents of the log file into which the device enters the outcome of the respective commands Contents Topic Page File COMTI esse fciccs ecco ech en ea a ceed ead id ded ees 589 588 Jetter AG JC 350 File contents Introduction Example Description Automatic copying of controller data The log file is a plain text file By making an entry into the command file you define whether a log file is to be created or whether the device is to append the entries to an existing log file JetControl AutoCopy log file 07 11 2008 09 14 09 1 Ok FileCopy SD OS JC 340_1 04 0 00 0s System OS op_system os 345740 byte 2 Ok FileCopy SD OS JX3 A04 1 01 0 00 0s System JX3 Module02 0S system os 16832 byte 3 Warning DirCreate app 4 Ok DirCreate app userprogtest 5 Ok FileCopy SD UserProgs start ini app start ini 63 byte 6 Ok FileCopy SD UserProgs userprogtest es3 app userprogtest userprogtest es3 169 byte 7 Error DaFileRead SD UserData MyTestData da Command statistics Total 7 Ok ane Warning 1 1 Error When for each executed AutoCopy function a section is appended to an existing log file the log file consists of three elements The header contains date and time The following block contains information on the executed commands Finally it contains short statistics on command processing In the above examp
361. oller data 11 Automatic copying of controller data Introduction This chapter describes the AutoCopy function which allows to copy data within the controller and or between the controller and an FTP server the connected expansion modules and a controller within the network To this end you can create a command file which is then stored along with the data to an SD card for example This command file is automatically processed by the controller during the boot process Functions within the The AutoCopy function executes the following functions local file system Storing registers and flags to a file Restoring registers and flags from a file Creating directories Deleting directories Copying files Deleting files Functions within the file The AutoCopy function executes the following functions system of an FTP server Copying files from the FTP server Copying files to the FTP server Deleting files Changing directories Creating a directory Deleting directories Areas of application There are the following application scopes for the AutoCopy function Where remote control is not possible Where there is no PC on site Ifthe operator is not able or should not be allowed to make modifications to the plant The following actions can be taken using the AutoCopy function Modification to the application program Modification to the application data Modification to the controller configura
362. oller on the upper edge of the DIN rail Move the controller in the direction of the arrows until it snaps into place Installation of the controller on the DIN rail is now completed Related topics Replacing the controller JC 350 see page 67 Removing the controller JC 350 from the DIN rail see page 69 66 Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation Replacing the controller JC 350 Introduction At replacing a controller of the JetControl 300 series the following configuration information is retained on the backplane module IP address Subnet mask Gateway DNS server Switching between Any controller of the JetControl 300 series can be replaced by another controller models controller model of this series To increase performance for example the controller model JC 340 0 may be replaced by controller model JC 350 3 Due to their compatibility the following controllers are interchangeable JC 340 JC 350 JC 360 JC 360MC Removing the controller To remove the JC 350 from the backplane module proceed as follows a Remove power from the JX3 station Press the upper and lower latches located on the right half of the JC 350 Keep the latches pressed Pull off the controller from the backplane module
363. ollowing value JetIP TCP server STX debug server Contents Topic Page Automatic termination Of CONNECTIONS ccc cece cee eccsceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 311 RegS tE nire E T E T 313 310 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Automatic termination of connections Introduction Default setting No automatic termination of connections Terminating the connection with the longest time of inactivity Terminating the connection when the set minimum time has expired Terminating any connection If the maximum number of simultaneously established connections has been reached any further connections cannot be established If further connect requests are made the user can set the response by the JetIP TCP server and of the STX Debug server There are the following possibilities Reject new connection Terminate one existing connection and establish the new one Terminate all existing connections and establish the new one By default the server terminates the connection with the longest time of inactivity If the server is not to terminate any of the existing connections proceed as follows 4 Enter value 0 into MR 1 If the server is to terminate the connection that has been inactive the longest time proceed as follows 4 Enter value 1 into MR 2 2 Enter value 1 into MR 1 If the server is to terminate a connection after a set minimum time of inactivity proceed as follows a
364. om cursor position 7 Indirect cursor position This module register specifies the cursor position if 0 has been programmed as parameter Module register properties Values 0 Number of characters on the screen Value after reset 0 372 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Cursor position of HMIs The following table shows the correlation between cursor position as parameter of an instruction and the position on the screen LCD 16 LCD 110 2 3 4 LCD 23 LCD 27 LCD 34 25 48 LCD 52 LCD 54 Z Jetter AG 373 10 Programming Setting the length of the display field Setting the length MR 2812 lets you set the length of the display field for numerical values MR 2812 Number of figures sign decimal point Example Number of figures 6 Sign MR 2816 0 yes Decimal point None Field length MR 2812 7 Display 7 characters MR 2812 Field length for DisplayValue This module register holds the length of the display field Module register properties Values 1 12 Value after reset 11 Takes effect Next time when STX instruction DisplayValue is issued 374 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Setting the sign option Setting the sign option MR 2816 lets you set whether the sign is displayed or not In setting the display field length in MR 2812 continue to add the sign s place even if no sign is to be displayed Example Number of figures 6 Sign MR 2816 1 no Decimal
365. on ececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeettteeeeeeneeeeees 51 Line length and baud rate of the JX2 system DUS eee eee 53 Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation Female connector X19 Pin assignment Pin assignment Technical specifications Jetter AG O BUS OUT O id Pn Signet sent St MODED commissomng O O fe om ma O 4 owo commisso OOOO r oe gw Se Se a 49 4 Mechanical and electrical installation Cable for connector X19 For connecting modules to the JX2 system bus via connector X19 you can order the following cables Stem mm Related topics JX2 system bus cable Specification see page 51 Line length in mm and baud rate see page 53 50 Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation JX2 system bus cable specification JX2 system bus cable Fare Specification Core cross sectional area 1 000 kBaud 0 25 0 34 mm 500 kBaud 0 34 0 50 mm 250 kBaud 0 34 0 60 mm 125 kBaud 0 50 0 60 mm Cable capacitance 60 pF m max Resistivity 1 000 kBaud 70 Q km max 500 kBaud 60 Q km max 250 kBaud 60 Q km max 125 kBaud 60 Q km max Shielding Complete shielding no paired shielding Core pairs CAN L and CAN H are twisted Connection diagram 1 2 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 calle s 6 S 8 7 T 8
366. on This chapter gives a description on how you can activate or deactivate LEDs located in HMI keys Mapping LEDs The controller reads out the state of LEDs located in HMI keys from the least significant 12 bits of the corresponding register Contents Topic Page ASSIGNING LEDS ers a E sxdase sade denyaccveusyatddvesjhevereeandtvensdld 399 Registers of LED register NUMDEIS c ee eee eee e tee ee tae eee ee tenet 400 398 Jetter AG JC 350 Assigning LEDs Introduction Register flag numbers Assignment Programming By default LEDs located in HMI keys are assigned to a register which is overlaid by special flags You can set the number of the register from which the LED state is read out via registers in multi display mode Register Default LED register Flag numbers number Single display 203143 2224 2235 MR 2833 203143 2224 2235 MR 2834 203143 2224 2235 MR 2835 203143 2224 2235 4 MR 2836 203143 2224 2235 Here the assignments between keys special flag and overlaid register are listed This assignment list applies to single display mode and default settings of multi display mode LeDinthetey Flag Register O Jetter AG 399 10 Programming Registers of LED register numbers Introduction In multi display mode the register numbers indicating the state of LEDs in HMls can be set via registers MR 2833 LED register number for device 1 This module regis
367. onfig ini and the GNN out of the lower eight positions of the DIP switches goa A l HEAHAARAHRHRH J HANARA HAE 123 45 6 7 8 9 101112 il uu HHEEHHHHEHE Ti T Valid values for the GNN 1 199 The DIP switches are binary coded 86 Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation Ton on ort ore or or o ore 3 a S S E oN on oFF OFF OFF on on 199 o 0 ee ee on ON oN ON ON ON ON Jinvatid Jetter AG 87 4 Mechanical and electrical installation Using names for IP addresses Introduction Name resolution Configuration file Names can be specified as IP addresses for target systems e g when configuring the e mail client The JC 350 resolves the names into IP addresses A configuration file or the Domain Name System is used to assign names to their corresponding IP address Names are resolved to IP addresses in the following way Sep eseription O During the boot process the JC 350 reads the IP address of the DNS server out of the configuration memory During the boot process the JC 350 reads the file etc hosts The JC 350 creates a translation table with the
368. or example how the value of a variable is to be displayed name Function Variable name Comments Code letter followed by the variable number Example name R1000023 type Description Variable type of notation Example type REAL format Description Representation format Comments Refer to format definition Example format 0ttt tHE factor Description Factor by which the real time controller value is multiplied Comments Multiplication is executed prior to adding the offset Example factorS 1 5 offset Description Value which is added to the real time controller value Comments Multiplication by the factor is executed prior to adding the value to the real time controller value Example offset 1000 206 Jetter AG JC 350 Format definition Registers text registers Flags HTTP server You can define the representation of variables by means of their attribute The number of digits characters used for representing a variable can be defined by the character Prefix 0 sets the output of leading zeros This applies to the register types INT INTX and REAL Prefix sets the output of a sign and REAL Prefixing a blank sets the output of types INT and REAL This applies to the register types INT a blank This applies to the register The variable name begins with a capital R followed by the register number The following types are possible Notation Register content 0
369. or response from network nodes 2 Send an inquiry telegram 3 Check the replies sent by the nodes 4 Write the configurations of the nodes Type of access Read Jetter AG 301 10 Programming MR 11 Number of cycles Corresponds to the feedback value Count Module register properties Values 0 3 Number of cycles Type of access Read MR 12 Number of changes Corresponds to the feedback value Changed Module register properties Values 0 199 Number of changed network nodes Type of access Read MR 13 Result of the function Corresponds to the feedback value Result and the register content of the global error number 2000051 This register indicates the value of the latest error or warning Values greater than zero indicate warnings Values smaller than zero are error messages Module register properties Values 0 No error or warning 5 The user has terminated the function 1001 The first received response does not match response 2 and 3 see MR 101x 1002 The second received response does not match response 1 and 3 see MR 102x 1003 The third received response does not match response 1 and 2 see MR 103x 1 All 3 responses are dissimilar see MR 100x 2 The IP settings of at least one node could not be changed see MR 140x 3 The JetIPScan function has been invoked although it is active already 10 The length of the set value list is lt 1 or gt 255 or the pointer to the list is inv
370. ot elapsed yet The controller logs on to the FTP server with its user name Administrator and password AdminPassword Operating principle the connection could not be proceed with step 1 an error has occurred or the the function is terminated and timeout has elapsed value 0 is returned the FTP server has accepted the the function is terminated and a positive value is returned as handle connection for further access to this connection the FTP server has not accepted the function is terminated and the connection for example value 0 is returned because of an invalid user name or wrong password Related topics Terminating a connection see page 182 Jetter AG 181 8 FTP client Terminating a connection Introduction Clear all connections which are no longer required as this will reduce PLC load for managing connections Function declaration Function FtpDisconnect FtpConnection Handle Int Function parameters Description of the function parameters FtpConnection Handle Value returned by the function FtpConnect Return value The following return values are possible Return value 0 Connection terminated and deleted 1 Invalid handle 2 3 Communication error there is for example no response from FTP server Related topics Establishing a connection to the FTP server see page 180 182 Jetter AG JC 350 Reading a file Introd
371. ote network node Function FtpDirChange FtpConnection Handle Const Ref ServerDir String Int Description of the function parameters Parameter O O vae Remarks FtpConnection Handle Value returned by the function FtpConnect ServerDir Directory name Name of the directory into which the user wants to change If the returned value is negative an error has occurred If the returned value is 0 the system has managed to change directories Return value 0 No error 1 Invalid handle 2 Communication error there is for example no response from FTP server 3 Error message from the FTP server e g directory does not exist In the following cases the task is not processed further after issuing the function call The FTP server must first change directories An error has occurred This function is processed in the following steps Description The controller sends a command to the FTP server that it has to change to a subdirectory The FTP server changes directories NO errors have occurred the new directory is set the function is terminated and value 0 has been returned errors have occurred the function is terminated and a negative value is returned Jetter AG 189 8 FTP client Directory names If the file system of the remote network node supports this the function parameter for the directory located on the FTP server can also contain the complete path i
372. ous Jx3_system_bus tools Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation Contents Topic Page Limitations of the maximum number of Modules 2 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 94 Limitations of the modules data exchange rates neeesser 95 Limitation depending on the power consumption of the modules 98 Jetter AG 93 4 Mechanical and electrical installation Limitations of the maximum number of modules Limited maximum The maximum number of JX3 peripheral modules per JX3 station is limited number The following rule applies Up to 16 JX3 peripheral modules can be integrated into a JX3 station You can directly connect up to eight JX3 peripheral modules to a JC 3xx controller Downstream the eighth JX3 peripheral module you must insert a JX3 PS1 power supply module In addition you can connect up to eight JX3 peripheral modules to a JX3 PS1 power supply module Fully equipped The following illustration shows a JX3 station with a JC 3xx controller and JX3 station 16 JX3 peripheral modules Downstream the eighth JX3 peripheral module a JX3 PS1 power supply module has been inserted
373. ow Type 15 pin male SUB D connector in metallized housing quality grade 3 Recommended core cross section 0 25 0 128 mm For information on cable specification refer to the list below Numerotoes Complete shielding no paired shielding The shield must be connected to the connector housings on both ends of the cable with the greatest possible surface area Place the shield as follows e Connect the shield by its entire perimeter e Clamp it under a strain relief e Wrap it with copper foil Jetter AG 135 4 Mechanical and electrical installation Wiring diagram The interface cable JC DK Xm is wired as follows SER X11 a eeoeoaeoeede eeeee8000 oO Connect shield with the greatest possible surface area A metallized housing is required 24 V DC GND 12 Available lengths The interface cable JC DK Xm is prefabricated and available in the following lengths ee ee ee eee 60860011 Cable assy 192 2 5M JetControl to HMI with 15 pin Sub D length 2 5 m 60860012 Cable assy 193 5M JetControl to HMI with 15 pin Sub D length 5 m 60872142 Cable assy 192 10M JetControl to HMI with 15 pin Sub D length 10 m 60870894 Cable assy 192 7M JetControl to HMI with 15 pin Sub D length 7 m 60872884 Cable assy 192 15M JetControl to HMI with 15 pin Sub D length 15 m 136 Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation Interface cable KAY_0386 xxxx
374. p B Files Es Check the result of the automatic hardware scan Jetter AG 149 5 Initial commissioning Activate the programming environment by entering Alt 0 on your keyboard As an alternative you can click the tab File Enter the program shown below Upload the program to the controller LED 9 of the peripheral module JX3 DIO16 will be flashing This output will be refreshed every 5 seconds JetSym STX program Cuil aaie mie REDON esad eias again lt s 9 of the module JX3 DIO16 is set and then reset again Upload the given configuration to the controller 5 H JX3_Station_mit_JC350 System i IC module Demosta ones all node configurations Advanced configuration i 5 0 ETH Systembus Motion Control Functions Hii Hardware S Setup 3 Files Task Flashing_light Autorun Loop OUTPUTS 100000309 True Delay T 5s OUTPUTS 100000309 False Delay T 5s End Loop End Task Related topics Hardware Manager see page 270 150 Jetter AG JC 350 File system 6 File system Introduction This chapter describes the file system of the JC 350 The file system lets you access files located on the internal flash disk and the SD card The SD card slot is an optional feature of the controller JC 340 File categories The files of the file system are categorized as follows System directories or system files used by the operating system
375. parameter device number Default device MR 2824 holds the number of the device to be used Number aes L224 P Printer module Output of data on a printer module connected to the JX2 or JX3 system bus Serial interface Output of data on a user programmable serial interface Serial interface module Output of data on a serial interface module connected to the JX2 or JX3 system bus MR 2824 Device number of the default device This module register contains the device number of the default device If you always specify the default device in the application program device number 0 you can select during runtime which device is actually to be used Module register properties Values 1 11 Value after reset 2 Single display mode In single display mode an HMI always displays data from device no 2 Multi display mode In multi display mode an HMI always displays data from the device the number of which is contained in the corresponding configuration register MR 2825 through MR 2828 362 Jetter AG JC 350 MR 2825 MR 2826 MR 2827 MR 2828 Programming Device number for HMI 1 in multi display mode Module register properties Values 1 4 Value after reset 1 Device number for HMI 2 in multi display mode Module register properties Values 1 4 Value after reset 2 Device number for HMI 3 in multi display mode Module register properties Values 1 4 Value after reset 3 Device number fo
376. ple Description Allowed values In case of missing entry WRITEKEYS In the given example Description Allowed values In case of missing entry SYSKEYS Description TestUser3 User s login name A maximum of 31 alphanumeric characters User administration settings are not made testpass User s login password A maximum of 31 alphanumeric characters The user is allowed to log in without password 5 openLock2 10 11 Keys for read access read keys 1 31 or corresponding names No read keys are assigned to the user openLock2 10 11 Keys for write access write keys 1 31 or corresponding names No write keys are assigned to the user No function assigned reserved for future extensions Jetter AG JC 350 File system As delivered condition Predefined users and keys Introduction Factory settings Predefined users Predefined keys Two predefined users with set rights are included in the file system It is not possible to delete these two users The user administration lets you only change the password for these two users In delivered condition the content of the configuration file included in the controller is as follows USER1 NAME admin PW admin READKEYS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2 2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 WRITEKEYS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 SYSKEYS USER33 NAME system
377. plete CAN message 16 message boxes are available to the user Each of these boxes can be configured either as inbox or as outbox with a specific CAN ID Technical specifications Er o Fumetion scription CAN ID 11 bit or 29 bit Enabling the The CAN Prim interface is enabled via Bits im R 200002077 JX2 system bus user programmable special functions Register description R 200002077 see page 547 CAN Prim interface Jetter AG 545 10 Programming Internal processes of the CAN Prim interface Introduction The CAN Prim interface processes the following tasks independently Sending of CAN messages Reception of CAN messages Filtering of CAN messages on reception Internal reception of The CAN Prim interface receives new CAN messages in the following way CAN messages Step scription a The CAN bus receives a valid CAN message 2 The CAN ID matches the receiving mask The CAN ID matches the CAN ID of a message box which has been configured as inbox If in R 200010530 message box number 20 of the message box bit 1 NEW DAT 0 bit 1 NEW DAT becomes 1 proceed with step 5 bit 1 NEW DAT 1 bit 2 OVERRUN becomes 1 CAN message data are discarded R 200010503 FIFO filling level is incremented This register shows whether new CAN messages have been received as well as the number of messages The message box number is entered into R 200010504 FIFO data This register shows whi
378. processed all other tasks which invoke an FTP command are blocked until the FTP access is completed Contents Topic Page Programming rerai aiia E A 178 FROGISUONS eca AAE Aextaetaeceeds Medddenieade dees 197 Jetter AG 177 8 FTP client 8 1 Programming Introduction The FTP client allows to access files and directories on a network device from within the application program For this purpose function calls are used These function calls are included in the programming language of the controller To program this feature proceed as follows O A initio he FTP tent 2 Open the comnectons tothe FTP sewers O O 8 Tamstra a emanes OOOO Restrictions While the controller is processing one of the functions of the FTP client tasks supporting the FTP client should not be stopped through TaskBreak or restarted through TaskRestart Otherwise the controller fails to complete this function which will block new function calls by the FTP client Contents Topic Page Initializing the FTP Client cc c cccsessccecenseceecheeeccdeensseecenassecedensueecetessecs 179 Establishing a connection to the FTP server cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 180 Terminating a CONNECTION ceecceeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeaeeeeeenaees 182 Reading File i ycicciaseal ciate a ieee alanis 183 Wing toG TIS ia fas caceedecte coeee neue tmeeen cocnuptan T cecuentied 185 Deleting a fE isc ccei sdcecets eect duceedecisceect
379. program Contents Topic Page OS update by means of JetSyM ooo eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeetneeeereneeeer 595 Operating system update Via FTP cceceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeseteeeeeteeeeeeeneeeeee 596 Automatic OS update from an SD card 0000 02 ceecceeecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesetsenaees 597 Operating system update from within the application program 598 594 Jetter AG JC 350 OS update OS update by means of JetSym Introduction The programming tool JetSym offers an easy way to transfer an OS file to the JC 350 Prerequisites An OS file for the JC 350 must be available AUDP IP and a TCP IP connection between programming tool and JC 350 is possible The number of the IP port is set in the configuration memory as IP basic port number for JetIP communication While booting the controller must wait for the OS update or the OS must already be running Note Make sure the controller remains energized Updating the OS To update the OS proceed as follows Select in the JetSym menu Build the menu item Update OS Alternative In the Advanced Configuration dialog of the Hardware Manager click on the button Update OS Result The file selection dialog opens Select the new OS file here Result In JetSym a confirmation dialog opens 3 Launch the OS upload by clicking the button Yes 4 Wait until the update process is completed 5 To activate the transferred OS re boot the controller Je
380. properties Values 1 199 Value after reset 1 MR 2010 2015 SET configuration These registers let you read the default SET configuration 2010 NodelD GNN 2011 CtrllD MR 2110 2123 ACTUAL configuration 1 These registers let you read the first received ACTUAL configuration Register Command line parameter 2110 NodelD GNN 2111 CtrlID 2112 CtrllDopt 2113 IpAddr 2114 lpMask 2115 Gateway 2120 Quantity 2121 MAC address high 2122 MAC address low 308 Jetter AG JC 350 MR 2210 2223 MR 2310 2323 Programming 2123 Sent IP address ACTUAL configuration 2 These registers let you read the second received ACTUAL configuration ACTUAL configuration 3 These registers let you read the third received ACTUAL configuration Jetter AG 309 10 Programming 10 3 7 Administrating the connections of the JetIP TCP and STX debug server Introduction Number of connections This document covers the connection management enhancements of the JetIP TCP server and of the STX debug server in a JetControl PLC If for example the Ethernet cable was unplugged or cut the node was not able to clear the connection The connection remained active The enhanced connection management allows for the server to clear connections according to criteria that can be set by the user The number of simultaneously established connections for the TCP server ina JetControl is limited to the f
381. r HMI 4 in multi display mode Module register properties Values 1 4 Value after reset 4 Jetter AG 363 10 Programming Cursor position Introduction Restrictions Cursor position 0 MR 2814 This parameter is used to define the screen position where the first character of the text or variable is to appear There is no cursor position evaluation for devices 8 through 11 Cursor position 0 has a special meaning The controller evaluates this parameter in the following steps step iescription a The controller reads the content of MR 2814 MR 2814 is larger than 0 the value is used as cursor position MR 2814 equals 0 the message is displayed starting from the current cursor position Example MR 2814 0 DisplayText 0 1 Temp DisplayValue 0 0 Temperature Result The temperature is displayed directly after the colon starting from cursor position 7 Indirect cursor position This module register specifies the cursor position if 0 has been programmed as parameter Module register properties Values 0 Number of characters on the screen Value after reset 0 364 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Cursor position of HMIs The following table shows the correlation between cursor position as parameter of an instruction and the position on the screen LCD 16 LCD 110 2 3 4 LCD 23 LCD 27 LCD 34 25 48 LCD 52 LCD 54 Z Jetter AG 365 10
382. r function Display output state 1 Key I O with monitor function Display output state Bit 3 Displaying an input state 0 Key I O without monitor function Display input state 1 Key I O with monitor function Display input state Bit 4 Changing register contents 0 Key without monitor function Change register contents 1 Key with monitor function Change register contents Bit 5 Changing the flag state 0 Key without monitor function Change flag state 1 Key with monitor function Change flag state Bit 6 Changing an output state 0 Key without monitor function Change output state 1 Key with monitor function Change output state Bit 7 Permanent indication of input state 0 Key without monitor function 1 Key with monitor function Jetter AG 407 10 Programming MR 2819 Display time for monitor functions This module register contains the display time in multiples of 100 ms Module register properties Values 0 65 535 Value after reset 35 3 5 s Takes effect Next time when the display changes to monitor operation MR 2820 Switch over to monitor display This module register is for configuring the function of the key ENTER Module register properties Values 0 Switching between monitor screen and normal display is activated 1 Switching between monitor screen and normal display is deactivated MR 2821 Dialog language This module register is for configuring the dialog language u
383. racter is not correct in the receive buffer and error bit Parity error is set The error counter is incremented Buffer overflow Acharacter is received The character is discarded and although the receive buffer is error bit Overflow is set The error full counter is incremented Troubleshooting As error bits cannot be assigned to individual characters in the receive buffer all characters should be removed from the receive buffer and discarded when an error bit is set Jetter AG 503 10 Programming Possible causes of error and troubleshooting Framing error Buffer overflow Jammed data transmission caused by EMC problems defective cables or connectors Incorrectly set communication parameters baud rate number of stop bits etc Jammed data transmission caused by EMC problems defective cables or connectors Incorrectly set parity The external device sends characters at too high a rate and the application program is not able to read them out of the receive buffer in due time Check the wiring and connectors Use shielded cables Do not lay cables near sources of interference Make sure the set communication parameters are consistent with the settings of the connected device Check the wiring and connectors Use shielded cables Do not lay cables near sources of interference Make sure the parity setting is consistent with the setting of the connected device Program a softwa
384. racters have been entered into the transmit buffer Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Receiving characters Introduction A character is received by reading characters from register Receiving buffer Prerequisites This guide proceeds from the assumption that the user programmable serial interface has been configured Receiving characters To receive characters via user programmable serial interface proceed as follows Check the filling level of the receiving buffer to make sure that it contains at least 1 character p2 Read the character from the register Receiving buffer Result The character is taken from the receiving buffer Jetter AG 519 10 Programming Receiving values Introduction Values are received by reading characters from registers MR 15 through MR 18 Receiving buffer registers Prerequisites This guide proceeds from the assumption that the user programmable serial interface has been configured Receiving values To receive values via user programmable serial interface proceed as follows Check the filling level of the receive buffer to make sure that it contains at least 2 or 4 characters Read the values from Receiving buffer registers MR 15 through MR 18 Result The characters are read from the receiving buffer 520 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming 10 17 User programmable IP interface The user programmable IP interface Applications Required programmer s skills Res
385. ramming Bit 1 Error in connection with a publication 1 An error has occurred in a publication Bit 7 Publication is functioning 0 If a publication fails bit 7 is reset 1 The publications are functioning Module register properties Type of access Read Command registers of all publications Via MR 255001 you transmit commands to all publications Commands 102 Reboot all publishers 105 Stop all publishers 110 Acknowledge error The following registers let you select a publication The index is for selecting publications e If the publication exists R 255x11 shows its ID e Ifthe publication does not exist R 255x11 shows value 1 In this case enter the ID of the publication into R 255x11 e If the publication exists the content of R 255x11 is kept e If the publication does not exist R 255x11 shows value 1 Resistor Name peserpton Index Index of the publications 0 Selects the first publication 1 Selects the next publication 2 etc 25x ID The ID of the publication is entered The following registers show the configuration of a publication which you have selected via R 255x10 and R 255x11 Resistor Name Deserpion 255x20 Status Bit 0 Publication transmitted Mode 0 Cyclic 1 Upon request Jetter AG 265 10 Programming As configured variables As configured Internal usage Internal usage Number of publications sent Number of retries Number of tran
386. ransferred to the real time clock The value written is ignored Jetter AG 341 10 Programming 10 7 Runtime registers Introduction The JC 350 provides several registers which are incremented by the operating system at regular intervals Application These registers can be used to easily carry out time measurements in the application program Contents Topic Page Description of the runtime registers ce eeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 343 342 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Description of the runtime registers Register overview The device is equipped with the following runtime registers R 201000 Application time base in milliseconds R 201001 Application time base in seconds R 201000 Application time base in milliseconds Every millisecond this register is incremented by one Register properties Values 2 147 483 648 2 147 483 647 overflowing R 201001 Application time base in seconds Every second this register is incremented by one Register properties Values 2 147 483 648 2 147 483 647 overflowing R 201002 Application time base in application time base units Every R 201003 10 ms this register value is incremented by one Using the reset value 10 in register 201003 this register is incremented every 100 ms Register properties Values 2 147 483 648 2 147 483 647 overflowing Jetter AG 343 10 Programming R 201003 Application time base u
387. rating Principle sicesssecstcieaieccesseeaccessadascenvarescedverd aiia aaaea aana 570 a tocopy INI STuUCtUr O o oo cece ee iani aae eaa 575 LOG TG x tehiseecdacteetietiiiiads a lndielainer E TAAS 588 Data filesini iaiia erect ha siisectea tl Wvtadigne debbie hate dadiews 590 Jetter AG 569 11 Automatic copying of controller data 11 1 Operating principle Introduction This chapter describes how to start and execute the AutoCopy function Contents Topic Page Activating the AutoCopy feature ecceeceenneeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeeeneeeeeeaas 571 Executing AutoCopy COMMAMNAS cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeenaeeeeetnaeeeeeeaas 572 Terminating AutoCopy MOE ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeeeeteeeaeeeteeaeeeteeaaees 574 570 Jetter AG JC 350 Automatic copying of controller data Activating the AutoCopy feature Introduction Prerequisites Activating the AutoCopy feature The AutoCopy function can only be executed when the controller is booting i e after startup You have created the command file and stored it to the respective directory If the entry AutoCopylni is not available in the configuration file config ini the name of the command file and of the directory is set as follows SD Root directory on the SD card Since operating system version 1 09 of JC 350 the following applies Die Datei autocopy ini kann in einem beliebigen Unterverzeichnis des Stammverzeichnisses SD auf der SD Karte sein
388. re The following items are included in the scope of delivery of the controller JC 350 Controller JC 350 2 pin connector spring cage connection Terminal labels Installation manual Keying pins Jetter AG JC 350 Product description and design Parts and interfaces of the controller JC 350 Parts and interfaces The controller JC 350 features the following parts and interfaces e TA Let poe Nas 6 8 7 Part scription Upper latch Lets you remove the module enclosure from the backplane module JX2 system bus interface Backplane module For installing the module on a DIN rail X119 Connector for additional JX3 modules DIN rail latch For removing the JC 3xx from the DIN rail 7 Lower latch Lets you remove the module enclosure from the backplane module Not visible in the illustration Os kwo Poweraippy OOOO O Omo OO ame OOOO O On axs ommers OOO Om eo O oiegrosteandsatstEDs Jetter AG 21 2 Product description and design Order reference options Order reference Ordering additional options Number of axes Integrated Web server and e mail feature Modbus TCP The order reference consists of the name of the controller JC 350 and the desired options Each of the additional options given below supplements the controller JC 350 The order reference reflects only existing options oo a w Element De
389. re handshake Set a lower baud rate Make sure that characters are read out from the receive buffer faster To achieve this the program code has to be optimized 504 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming 10 16 3 Registers Introduction This chapter describes the registers associated with the user programmable serial interface These registers are used for the following tasks Parameterizing the interface Sending characters Receiving characters Contents Topic Page Redister MUIMBOMS sisisi a R T 506 Registers Description ass sessaraii inanasan AEEA TEATAN AAA 507 Jetter AG 505 10 Programming Register numbers Introduction Register numbers Determining register numbers Registers Overview The registers of each interface are combined into one register block The basic register number of this block is dependent on the controller Controller Basic register number Register numbers JC 350 103000 103000 103019 In this chapter only the last two figures of a register number are specified e g MR 14 To calculate the complete register number add the basic register number of the corresponding device to the respective device e g 103000 SRO ererste wrt pot wre pers O MRa numberof percha O mea numerosos OOOO O O wes pty Transmit buffer filling level Receive buffer without deleting characters on reading Receive buffer 32 bit big endian Error counter 506 Jetter AG
390. re information refer to chapter Hardware Manager see page 270 9 Enter the sample program Then upload the program to the controller Jetter AG 145 5 Initial commissioning Configuration in JetSym Introduction Asimple example is to illustrate configuration in JetSym Connect the peripheral module JX3 DIO16 as a second module to a JC 3xx controller In a minimum program a flashing light has been programmed Output 9 of the module JX3 DIO16 is set and reset again Configuration This example is based on the following configuration 3 4 5 a 2 a pete ae if 5 j Qi anonn eeeSpen on oe AEE E Number art Deserpton O 1 PC Progamming OOO Oa meone Perpnertmoaie O a ooe Penphelmoade O O s eao Penphelmoade O OOOO Important note Connect the power supply to the terminals X21 DC24V X21 0V and X32 DC24V X32 0V of the module JX3 DIO16 Now you can activate the digital outputs X32 9 16 Preparatory work To properly configure the JX3 station proceed as follows Create a new project Ea Start the programming tool JetSym 146 Jetter AG JC 350 Initial commissioning In JetSym start the Hardware Manager by clicking on the tab Hardware with the mouse or by pressing Alt 5 on your keyboard Result 5 H JX3_S
391. rea A metallized housing is required Available lengths The interface cable KAY_0533 0025 is prefabricated and available in the lengths men KAY_0533 0025 JetControl to LCD 52 54 with 15 pin Sub D length 0 25 m 140 Jetter AG JC 350 Initial commissioning 5 Initial commissioning Purpose of this chapter Prerequisites Contents Jetter AG The first part of this chapter gives a compact description of the initial commissioning of the JC 350 and covers the following functions Creation and execution of a program which increments a variable This chapter covers the following topics on initial commissioning of the peripheral module JX3 DIO16 connected with the JC 350 Configuring the hardware of a JX3 station and installing it Configuring the software in JetSym Creating and executing a program to set and reset output 9 of the peripheral module JX3 DIO16 For initial commissioning the JC 350 the following prerequisites must be fulfilled The controller is connected to a PC via Ethernet The programming tool JetSym 4 2 or higher is installed on the PC Mode selector S11 is in STOP position Topic Page Preparatory work for initial COMMISSIONING ccceeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeteeeeeeaes 142 Initial commissioning Of a JC 350 0 eececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 143 Configuring error States cc cececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseenaeeeseeaeeesenn
392. rectory does exist Incorrect filename Non existent source file Non existent destination directory The controller does not copy the file It enters the error into the log file COMMAND 8 Command FtpFileRead ServerFile app cantest cantest es3 ClientFile SD cantest3 es Copying the file from the local file system into the file system of the FTP server ServerFile Complete name of the destination file in the FTP server ClientFile Complete name of the source file in the local file system All allowed file names The destination directory does exist Incorrect filename Non existent source file Non existent destination directory The controller does not copy the file It enters the error into the log file COMMAND 5 Command FtpFileWrite ServerFil System OS op_ system os ClientFile SD OS JC 340 1 09 0 00 0s Command FtpFileRemove Funktion Parameter name Parameter value Allowed values Illegal values In the event of an illegal value Deleting a file from the FTP server ServerFile Complete filename All allowed file names Incorrect filename The controller does not delete the file It enters the error into the log file Jetter AG JC 350 Automatic copying of controller data Example COMMAND 9 Command FtpFileRemove ServerFile subl Manual pdf Command FtpDirChange Function Changing the working directory in FTP server Parameter name ServerDir Paramet
393. reen _ in text Then this instruction causes the text Hello World to be displayed starting at cursor position1 The second STX instruction causes the content of the string variable StringVar to be displayed starting at cursor position 25 Both texts are displayed on the default device Dev 0 Function DisplayText2 Dev Int Pos Int Const Ref Const Ref Textl String Text2 String Description Number of the device on which the text is to be output 1 Number of characters on Cursor position starting from which the screen the text is to be displayed Constant text or name of a string variable Constant text or name of a string variable 360 Jetter AG JC 350 How to use this instruction How it works MR 2806 Programming How to invoke the instruction to display one of two texts DisplayText2 0 25 Fehler Error On the default device Dev 0 starting from cursor position 25 the STX instruction causes the text Fehler or the text Error to be displayed MR 2806 lets you control which text will be displayed Text selection for DisplayText2 The value in this module register specifies which one of the two texts is to be displayed Module register properties Values 0 Text1 1 Text2 Jetter AG 361 10 Programming Device numbers Introduction The device number lets you define the HMI Device numbers You may enter the following values for the
394. registers and variables To display numerical values use the following STX instruction DisplayValue The format of numerical values to be output can be adapted to suit your needs The following parameters can be adjusted Display length Number of decimal places With or without sign Decimal or hexadecimal notation When outputting numerical values the following formatting rules apply The numerical value is displayed right aligned The sign is the first character which is output if the sign has not been disabled before The first numerical value which is output is the leading space or the leftmost figure Positive values are preceded by a space character as sign Negative values are preceded by If the display field is too small the leftmost figures are truncated The value is rounded to the set decimal places Contents Topic Page STX instruction for outputting numerical values 00 2 eect eeeeeeeeetteeeeees 422 Device MUMDEIS xs eiliede set ice scditeaess a a eaten ele 423 Setting the length of the display field eee eeeteeeeeeteeeeeteeeeeeeneeeeees 424 Setting the sign OPtlOM 00 se ceed eens cevsae ce cesadenehesddeveestseanecevaaadeestadanesesadaveess 425 Setting the number of decimal places cece eeeeeeeeeeteeeeetnneeeeetneeeeee 426 Setting the format of numerical values eee eteeeeeeeeteeeeettteeeeeeneeeeee 427 Jetter AG 421 10 Programming ST
395. remote network node into register 236000 zzz Now you can access the value via register 1nnn980zzz Value range of the GNN nnn 000 199 Value range zzz 000 199 This configuration lets you indirectly access via 200 controller registers all module registers of the remote network node Via network a controller and a bus node JX3 BN ETH are connected IP address 192 168 10 14 IP port 50000 Task The global error register of the JX3 BN ETH is to be read every second Solution Register 235003 is loaded with the IP address of the bus node Register 235403 is loaded with the IP port of the bus node Register 236028 is loaded with the error register number 200008 Jetter AG 251 10 Programming Addressing with variable destination window Introduction Registers Overview Network register access with variable destination window 1nnn99zzzz Indirect addressing also allows for a variable destination window You shift the register array of 10 000 registers of the remote network nodes by an offset by entering a value into R 272702 of the remote network nodes Overview of the registers allowing indirect addressing with variable destination window Value range 1nnn990000 1nnn999999 Register Properties Register content of a remote network node The register is in the variable destination window which consists of 10 000 registers lo 2 147 483 647 Variable destinat
396. ring numerical values 378 Monitor functions 402 Querying the keys 391 Registers Overview 355 Controlling serial and printer interfaces 409 Configuring module numbers 416 Output of numerical values 421 Registers Overview 414 Outputting texts 417 Overview Interfaces 411 D File system 151 User administration 155 Properties 152 Formatting and checking 169 Sorting data 484 Disposal 14 List of documentation 23 E Real time clock 333 EDS EDS file 31 EDS registers 35 Inserting real time controller values 206 E mail feature 460 Configuration 461 Creating e mails 469 Registers Overview 480 Sending e mails 478 EMC Notes 16 Engineering a JX2 station JX2 system bus 49 JX2 system bus cable 51 Line length in mm and baud rate 53 Number of connectable modules 103 Power supply 107 109 Third party CANopen modules that can be connected 110 Engineering a JX3 station JX3 system bus configurator 91 Restrictions 94 95 98 Initial commissioning 141 F FTP client 177 FTP server 173 H Hardware Manager 270 Open 271 I O number of CANopen modules on the JX2 system bus 234 of IP67 I O modules on the JX2 system bus 233 of JX2 I O modules on the JX2 system bus 232 of JX3 modules connected to JX3 BN ETH 235 of JX3 modules within the JX3 station 230 Inserting control values in a HTML file e 206 Intended co
397. ription Initiating the monitor function for registers or flags Initiating the monitor function for outputs inputs or Entering a variable number or a decimal value Entering a decimal point or decimal comma Entering a negative positive numerical value you can press the key any time during input C Clearing previous entries Aborting the monitor function ENTER Completing the input process displaying the variable or accepting the value Switching between monitor screen and normal display Restrictions While the monitor function is active keys used for this function are not mapped to the key flags 404 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Displaying and changing variables Initiating the monitor function Displaying register content Displaying the flag state Displaying an output state To initiate the monitor function press the key R or the key I O You are able to change te variable type using these keys as long as the entry of the variable number has not been completed yet by pressing the key ENTER To display a register content proceed as follows Press the key R Result The HMI switches to displaying the monitor function 2 Enter the register number 3 Press the key ENTER Result The register content is displayed for the period of time set in MR 2819 Monitor functions Display duration Once this period has elapsed the HMI displays the normal screen To displ
398. rnal flash disk You can see the capacity used of the application data area from the file System flashdiskinfo txt File system In this example the fictive capacity used of a flash disk in a JetControl 340 4 MByte is shown Name flash disk Date 25 11 2008 Time 15 04 Tracks 64 Track 0 sectors 128 used 81 blocked 47 free 0 Track 1 sectors 128 used 128 blocked 0 free 0 Track 2 sectors 128 used 128 blocked 0 free 0 Track 3 sectors 128 used 128 blocked 0 free 0 Track 4 sectors 128 used 128 blocked 0 free 0 Track 5 sectors 128 used 128 blocked 0 free 0 Track 6 sectors 128 used 128 blocked 0 free 0 Track 7 sectors 128 used 128 blocked 0 free 0 Track 8 sectors 128 used 128 blocked 0 free 0 Track 9 sectors 128 used 128 blocked 0 free 0 Track 10 sectors 128 used 128 blocked 0 free 0 Track 11 sectors 128 used 128 blocked 0 free 0 Track 12 sectors 128 used 128 blocked 0 free 0 Track 13 sectors 128 used 128 blocked 0 free 0 Track 14 sectors 128 used 128 blocked 0 free 0 Track 15 sectors 128 used 128 blocked 0 free 0 Track 16 sectors 128 used 128 blocked 0 free 0 Track 17 sectors 128 used 128 blocked 0 free 0 Track 18 sectors 128 used 128 blocked 0 free 0 Track 19 sectors 128 used 128 blocked 0 free 0
399. rocess data configuration for Ethernet 210007 Minimum program cycle time system bus A 7 313 Stop Ethernet system bus process data 210008 Maximum program cycle time configuration 210009 Current program cycle time 330 JetIPScan client OFF 210011 Current task number 331 JetlPScan client ON 210050 Current program position within an execution unit 410 JetSync blockage OFF 210051 ID of the execution unit being processed 411 JetSync blockage for all ports ON 210056 Desired total cycle time in us 412 JetSync blockage for port X15 ON 210057 Calculated total cycle time in us 202962 System status register i i Bit 0 1 Task switch on I O access 210058 Maximum time slice per task in us Bit 1 1 Without waiting for communication 210060 Task ID for R210061 Bit 2 1 JetIPScan client ON 210061 Priority for task R210060 Bit 3 1 Continue task time slice ON 210063 Length of scheduler table Bit 8 1 JetSync blockage ON 210064 Index in scheduler table 202970 Password for start delay 0x424f6174 210065 Task ID in scheduler table 202971 Start delay in steps of 100 ms 210070 Task ID for R210071 203000 Interface monitoring JetIP 210071 Timer number 0 31 203001 Interface monitoring SER 210072 Manual triggering of a timer event bit coded 203005 Interface monitoring STX debug server 210073 End of cyclic task task ID 203100 32 bit overlaying Flag 0 255 203107 210074 Command for cyclic tasks 203108 16 bi
400. roller s file system is completed system command 312 enables their contents Stop process data communication for Ethernet system bus Effect Process data communication on the Jetter Ethernet system bus stops Purpose Transfer the configuration files for process data communication on the Jetter Ethernet system bus into the controller s file system Then stop process data communication by issuing system command 313 Finally enable the contents of the new files Disable JetIPScan client Effect This command lets you disable the JetIPScan client The server however remains enabled Purpose For testing purposes Enable JetiIPScan client Effect This command lets you enable the JetIPScan client Purpose This command lets you enable the JetIPScan client which has been disabled for testing purposes Disable JetSync blockage Effect The JetSync blockage is disabled for all ports Bit 8 in R 202962 is reset The Jetter Ethernet system bus multicast frames are transmitted to all ports X14 X15 and CPU Purpose The JetSync blockage enabled by system command 411 or 412 is disabled Forwarding the Jetter Ethernet system bus multicast frames to all ports again corresponds to the on state of the controller Enable JetSync blockage for all ports Effect The JetSync blockage is enabled for all ports X14 X15 and CPU Bit 8 in R 202962 is set Jetter AG 329 10 Programming System com
401. rom another use the following commands Node to the controller NetCopyRegFromReg NetCopyVarFromReg NetCopyList_ For detailed information on the parameters refer to the JetSym help Jetter AG 243 10 Programming NetCopy Example featuring a bus node As you can see in the following illustration a controller JC 3xx is connected to a PC The bus node JX3 BN ETH is connected to a peripheral module JX3 Al4 This example describes how to access the module registers of the peripheral module JX3 Al4 in acyclic mode Number Part Description 4 pc PC with JetSym 2 JC 3xx Controller 3 JX3 BN ETH Bus node 4 JX3 Al4 Peripheral module with analog inputs Task When an event occurs user scaling of analog input 1 is to be changed Solution The NetCopy command causes values from application program variables to which the user scaling parameters have been stored to be copied to the corresponding registers of the JX3 Al4 The register number of the peripheral module is seen from the perspective of the JX3 BN ETH i fo fo x with xx 02 First module on the JX3 BN ETH m 22zz 1124 through 1127 Parameter registers of the JX3 Al4 user scalin
402. ror 250003 Number of subscriptions 222832 Basic flag number for display 4 250004 CRC of configuration file P 250010 Selection via command 222833 Register number LED display 1 250011 Selection via ID 222834 Register number LED display 2 Subscription 222835 Register number LED display 3 250020 Status 222836 Register number LED display 4 FEA vode demere 222837 Module number of PRN display redirection 250023 Multicast group 250024 Hash 222838 Module number of SER display redirection 250025 Current sequence number 250026 Size bytes 222839 Character code for Delete display 250027 Timeout 222840 Character code for Delete to end of line 250028 Number of received publications 250029 Number of timeout errors 250030 Amount of sequence number errors N rking vi IP 250100 9 more subscriber register blocks etworking via Jet 50999 TCP auto close for the JetIP TCP server 230000 Number of open connections Address of the bus node or controller exceeding 230001 Mode the timeout time 230002 Time 254001 GNN 254002 IP address Other registers for networking via JetIP 254003 Port number 232708 Timeout in milliseconds 232709 Response time in milliseconds Publisher 232710 Amount of network errors 255000 Status bit coded 232711 Error code of last access Bit 0 1 No CRC 0 No error Bit 1 1 Error in connection with a publication 1 Timeout Bit 7 1 Subscriber is running 3 Error message from the remote station 255001 Command 5 Inval
403. router As an alternative the function JetSync blockage see page 316 can be used too Technical specifications of cyclic data interchange via Jetter Ethernet system bus Usage of multicast frames Reserved multicast groups 255 Multicast groups available to the user 0 254 P addresses for multicasts 239 192 0 0 multicast group MAC address for multicasts 01 00 5E 40 00 00 multicast group Maximum size of user data in a publication subscription 256 byte JC 350 Programming Publish subscribe Introduction Publish subscribe is used as communication architecture for cyclic data interchange in the Jetter Ethernet system bus The JetSym Hardware Manager generates the configurations for cyclic data interchange and transfers them to the controller Based on this configuration the configuration automatically carries out cyclic data interchange Basic data interchange Basic data interchange via publish subscribe is executed by the publishers and subscribers in the operating system of the Jetter devices at the Jetter Ethernet system bus Publisher The publishers publish data of the network node on which they are being processed Adata record is published by the publisher Therefore it is called publication A publisher can manage several publications Subscriber The subscribers which are interested in these data receive the publications and transfer the contents to the data of the network nod
404. rsion can be recognized by both Branch and Build having got value 0 The following registers let you read out the software versions 210001 version fie execution uni for the STX appleaton pear The following screenshot shows a JetSym setup window displaying version registers To have the version number displayed in the setup window of JetSym select the format IP address Content Type 9 2 0 32 he th 1 0 0 28 a JX2Sysbus 200002000 00 0 7 9s JZ3Sysbus 100002000 2200 0 an Number Deseripton Function V 1 03 0 07 OS version number of the controller JetSym displays this information in the title bar of each setup window Jetter AG 39 3 Identifying Related topics 40 Hardware revisions see page 38 Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation 4 Mechanical and electrical installation Purpose of this chapter This chapter deals with mechanical and electrical installation of the JC 350 regarding the following aspects Wiring the JC 350 Description of the indicators Description of control elements Mechanical installation Connecting JX3 modules to the JC 350 Connecting modules to the JX2 system bus Connecting displays and HMIs Contents Topic Page INTOMACCS vecerincindnetir lcd neaih wlan ene etardedn edie 42 JX2 system bus interface Female connector X19 cccceceeseeeeceeeeeees 48 LEDs indicating various States 0 00 0 eeeeecceeeeeeee
405. rts Female connectors X14 X15 cccccccccccccccceeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeenes 47 42 Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation Power supply terminal X10 Devices to connect with X10 lets you connect the following devices this terminal Power supply for the controller JC 350 Power supply of JX3 modules which are connected upstream of a JX3 PS1 Terminal assignment ao X10 DC24 1 5A ov POWER DC 24 V 1 5A Power supply for the JC 350 and connected JX3 peripheral modules Reference potential ewer Permissible voltage range Input current without HMI Power consumption Connector for power A 2 pin connector is included in the scope of delivery of the JC 350 supply terminal X10 Item no 60870409 Connector technology Spring cage connection Wire size 0 2 1 5 mm AWG 25 14 Jetter AG 43 4 Mechanical and electrical installation Serial interface port X11 Devices to connect with Port X11 lets you connect the following devices this port APC An HMI by Jetter AG Any device Pin assignment of port X11 Pin Signal Desenpton O A ROA RRR receive data imened 2 ob Reference potted OO O O Os ROB Saez rceveda notinvened Ca Ro RZ echoes
406. s Step scription O 4 The controller disables the blinking cursor on the HMI 2 The controller throws the exception USER_INPUT_BREAK an exception handling has been the task proceeds with the programmed exception handling no exception handling has been the task is aborted and the error is programmed displayed in the error register Result The variable which the result of the function is to be assigned to will not be changed MR 2817 Userlnput status This module register specifies the status of the UserInput instruction By writing value 0 to MR 2817 you abort an active STX instruction UserInput Module register properties Reading values 0 No UserlInput active 1 User Input active Writing values 0 Aborting Userlnput How to use this Try instruction Value UserInput 0 25 Catch USER_INPUT_BREAK Trace UserInput aborted End Try 390 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming 10 9 7 Querying the keys Introduction Mapping keys Restrictions Keys to be used for entering numerical values This chapter gives a description on how HMI keys can be queried by the controller The controller maps the keys of the HMls to the following variables Special flags Bits in registers which are overlaid to special flags Flags and register bits assume the following states Not pressed FALSE O While inputting numerical values the keys used for this are not m
407. s 10 3 1 10 3 2 10 3 3 10 3 4 10 3 5 10 3 6 10 3 7 10 3 8 Memory for non volatile application program registers cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeeeetteeeeeeneeeees 220 Speicher f r nichtfluchtige Variablen desAnwendungsprogramms cccceeeereeeeeeetteeeeeeneees 221 Registers orn O MOUS wiisic scceiieeddaseee sects eesianeees acd R dana 222 Memory for non volatile registers on the backplane module c ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteteeeeettteeeees 223 Special register S 222c0ei2i ve ccssatienesiaeveecunuaensesidayveetauanesdeddeveessadarecevadegecelauanetevadesecebieazecevaaadeesddaveeeds 224 IM PUTS and OUTPUTS wiaceci face acaeteeade cvechadascaceade deeehauaantea add seeuddaaneteata deer autan tee E E a 225 Flacci ee dt oben ane enad dl eeesida nn ssdna ded len ene add eevidaseeedheds deedn sented ev andaveennnse aadateaets 226 Register and I O numbers With a JC 3XX cceccceeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseeneeeaseeneeenseeneeenseeneeenas 227 Registers and module registers cccccecccceeessnceeeencneeeeeneneeeecneneeeeeneneeeeenanaeeceneneeneeacnaeeeeneneeeed 228 Register and I O numbers of JX3 modules connected to a JC 3XxX ccccceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeettees 230 Register numbers of JX2 slave modules connected to the JX2 system DUS n 231 Registers and I O numbers of JX2 I O modules on the JX2 system DUS ee eeeeeeeeereeeees 232 Register and I O numbers of IP67 I O modules on the JX2 syst
408. s CAN is required These are some of them Structure of CAN messages CANopen features Topic Page Restrictions regarding the CAN Prim interface 541 User programmable CAN Prim interface Operating principle 545 Internal processes of the CAN Prim interface ccseceeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 546 Register description CAN Prim interface 547 CAN message box Description of registers for direct access 45 551 CAN message box Description of registers for indirect access 557 Using the CAN Prim interface ceececeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeseenaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 561 CAN Prim interface Sample program cccccseesececeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeteees 564 Using CAN ID Masks i22 c0ciccctsssceecessacecetssicvecessaceeetsuactceustactectassetectstacvectavanes 565 RTR frames via CAN Prim interface c cccceceeeeesecceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeteees 566 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Restrictions regarding the CAN Prim interface Restrictions regarding connectable modules CAN messages during boot phase Time response Earmarked CAN IDs Jetter AG When using the user programmable CAN Prim interface the following restrictions apply If 29 bit CAN identifiers are used the serial number of non intelligent JX2 I O module must start with 2 Between launching the JC 350 and starting the application program boot phase of the JX2 system bus the connected CAN m
409. s Network pa ramete OperationViaSetup System Motion Setup Axis assignment for B Taisia puei Name Axi MC JM xxx or JM xxx G Network Amplfier Type um206 E Step a AJOJN Gg ETH Systembu Speed E Motion Control Position JC 340MC Motor pa CPU Brake ae Bit JX2 Bus Carrier Feedback oe GENE E Control Mechanical Design normal O modulo Direction Manual Operation Measuring commutation offset Referencing Point to point Reversing Address Ethemet slau 192 168 10 10 Gnn 001 1 2 k AXI X Action Set the GNN at the DIP switch DIP switch sliders 1 through 8 of the MC JM xxx or JM xxx Launch JetSym Select the device MC JM xxx or JM xxx in Hardware Manager Select the tab Axis Parameters As an address for Ethernet Networks 1 enter the IP address A special hint Use the GNN as least significant byte of the IP address As GNN 2 enter the Global Node Number of the device The number has to match the settings of the DIP switch at the device Result IP address and GNN have been assigned to the device Jetter AG 281 10 Programming Setting the DIP switch at the MC JM xxx or JM xxx Position of the DIP switch sliders at the MC JM xxx or JM xxx The MC JM xxx or JM xxx uses the settings of the DIP switch sliders 1 through 8 as GNN The coding is binary Examples GNN 4 Switch 3 is set to ON All other DIP switch sliders are set
410. s 1 through 8 are for configuring the IP address The coding is binary Examples GNN 4 Switch 3 is set to ON All other DIP switch sliders are set to OFF GNN 5 DIP switch sliders 1 and 3 are set to ON All other DIP switch sliders are set to OFF GNN 8 Switch 4 is set to ON All other DIP switch sliders are set to OFF The illustration below shows the position of the DIP switch sliders E gom i ROAB AR BREADS ua A al il dae EIEEE ely mi 12 3 456G T S 9101112 im i THEO CE CE q q When you have set all parameters in Hardware Manager transfer the settings to the system parameters via Compare program Download This is done by the following instruction in Hardware Manager Compare and download right mouse button on Release At system launch the controller assigns the following network parameters to the connected network nodes P address Subnet mask Default gateway IP address The controller assigns the IP address that has been set in Hardware Manager Subnet mask The controller assigns its own subnet mask 284 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Default gateway
411. s is set in MR 2813 MR 2813 Number of figures sign decimal point Example Number of figures 6 Decimal point MR 2811 0 None Field length MR 2813 7 Field length for UserlInput This module register contains the length of the input field Module register properties Values 1 12 Value after reset 11 Takes effect At the next STX instruction UserInput Jetter AG 385 10 Programming Setting the maximum number of decimal places Setting the number of decimal places MR 2811 386 The maximum number of decimal places is set in MR 2811 If you enter decimal places you might have to adjust the length of the display field in MR 2813 Reason The decimal point requires one place in the display field Setting the maximum number of decimal places for UserInput instruction This module register specifies the maximum number of decimal places when inputting numerical values Module register properties Values 0 4 Value after reset 4 Takes effect At the next STX instruction UserInput Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Setting the suggested value Setting the suggested The suggested value for the STX instruction UserInput is set in MR 2815 value Displaying the The controller displays the suggested value for the STX instruction suggested value UserInput using the same format settings as they are used for displaying numerical values MR 2815 Suggested value for UserlInput This
412. s of the JC 350 the flash disk is formatted and the control register 202936 is set to 0 170 Jetter AG JC 350 File system Formatting the SD card Introduction In the following cases reformatting the SD card is required m When information for SD card administration has been destroyed Consequences All files and directories on the SD card will be deleted Formatting the SD card To have the device format the SD card proceed as follows ce aon Sot Swiehiegeveeon Enter value 748362163 Oxd364e64d into the control register 202936 of the file system 3 Switch the device OFF pa Switch the device ON Result During the boot process of the JC 350 the SD card is formatted and the control register 202936 is set to 0 Jetter AG 171 6 File system Checking the SD card Introduction Consequences Checking the SD card Restrictions In the following cases checking the SD card for faults is required When the device was switched off during access to the SD card All files and directories on the SD card will be checked and errors if any will be fixed Following such a check the administrative structures on the SD card will be in consistent condition Depending on the SD card size and the number of files and directories the boot process duration of the JC 350 may extend to several minutes To have the device check the SD card proceed as follows Switch the device ON Enter valu
413. s whether registers or flags are to be stored Registers Flag Values other than Register or Flag The controller does not generate the data file It enters the error into the log file First Number of the first register or flag All valid numbers from the memory area of the corresponding JC 350 Invalid numbers The controller does not generate the data file It enters the error into the log file Last Number of the last register or flag All valid numbers from the memory area of the corresponding JC 350 which are equal to or greater than the value for First Invalid numbers Numbers less than First The controller stores only one value First 580 Jetter AG JC 350 Available commands for access via FTP Example Automatic copying of controller data COMMAND_11 Command DaFileWrite DaFile SD MyTestData2 da Append 0 Type Register First 1000000 Last 1000000 COMMAND_12 Command DaFileWrite DaFile SD MyTestData2 da Append 1 Type Flag First 10 Last 20 COMMAND_13 Command DaFileWrite DaFile SD MyTestData2 da Append 1 Type Register First 1000001 Last 1000999 The following commands are available for access via network using FTP Command FtpConnect Function Parameter name 1 Parameter value 1 Allowed values Illegal values Parameter name 2 Parameter value 2 Parameter name 3 Parameter value 3 In the case of a il
414. sages Jetter AG 549 10 Programming R 200010506 R 200010507 Module register properties Values No FIFO data available 1 Number of the message box containing new data 0 15 Type of access Read access removes characters Value after reset 1 Takes effect When the CAN Prim interface is enabled Global receiving mask The global receiving mask is for filtering the bits of the received CAN IDs If the bit of the global receiving mask is set the received bit of the CAN ID is compared with the global receiving ID as shown in R 200010507 Module register properties Values In the case of 11 bit CAN IDs 0 OX7FF In the case of 29 bit CAN IDs 0 Ox1 FFFFFFF Bit 0 Bit is not compared with R 200010507 Bit 1 Bit is compared with R 200010507 Takes effect When the CAN Prim interface is enabled Global receive ID The global receiving ID and R 200010506 Global receiving mask are for setting a CAN ID range which is then forwarded to the CAN Prim interface Module register properties Values In the case of 11 bit CAN IDs 0 Ox7FF In the case of 29 bit CAN IDs 0 Ox1FFFFFFF Takes effect When the CAN Prim interface is enabled 550 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming CAN message box Description of registers for direct access Direct access Registers for message boxes of the CAN Prim interface For programming purposes always use registers for direct access to message boxes 20 registers with ident
415. screen size Introduction Why do I have to configure the screen size Why is the correct screen size important This chapter gives a description on how the screen size of the HMI is configured in the controller During the boot process the HMI logs in to the controller and transmits its display size This way the controller is able to configure the size automatically Therefore you do not have to configure the display size manually But in some cases this feature might make sense To ensure that the controller correctly executes the special functions Delete Screen and Delete to End of Line when displaying texts DisplayText instructions Contents Topic Page Configuring the screen Size manually eect eeeeeeeeeeteeeeeetteeeeeeneeeeee 358 Jetter AG 357 10 Programming Configuring the screen size manually Configuring the screen size manually MR 2804 MR 2805 358 To configure the screen size manually proceed as follows Enter the number of characters per line into MR 2805 Multiply the value contained in MR 2805 by the number of lines and enter the result into MR 2804 Number of characters on the screen This module register contains the number of characters displayed on the screen Module register properties Values 1 128 Value after reset 48 Number of characters per line This module register contains the number of characters per line Module register properties Values 1
416. scription JC 350 Controller Number of axes 4 6 or 8 Additional option Integrated Web server and e mail feature Specify your desired options in the order The controller cannot be equipped with additional features afterwards The controller JC 350 allows connection of four six or eight axes emnes O Orderreterenee 10000654 JC 350 4 10000861 JC 350 6 10000655 JC 350 8 If the controller JC 350 is equipped with integrated Web server and e mail feature it supports the following functions HTTP server This feature lets the user download the homepages into the controller via FTP They can be accessed with any standard internet browser SMTP client This feature lets the controller send e mails The controller JC 350 supports the Modbus TCP protocol The controller can act as both server and client 22 Jetter AG JC 350 Product description and design List of documentation Introduction Engineering Engineering a JX2 station on the JX2 system bus Various documents and software tools support you in engineering installing and programming the JC 350 controller You can download these documents and software tools from the Jetter AG homepage http www jetter de The following documents and files support you in engineering the controller Industrial automation catalog Product description Technical specifications e Manual on the controller JC 3xx The document at hand CAD data
417. se of JetIP Ethernet This register contains the timeout for the JetIP server Ethernet in milliseconds Register properties Values 0 2 147 483 647 ms Value after reset 0 monitoring disabled R 203001 Timeout in the case of pcomxX serial interface This register contains the timeout period for the pcomX server serial interface in milliseconds Register properties Values 0 2 147 483 647 ms Value after reset 0 monitoring disabled 348 Jetter AG JC 350 R 203005 Enabling the monitoring function Detecting a timeout Programming Timeout in the case of STX debugging Ethernet This register contains the timeout for the STX debug server Ethernet in milliseconds Register properties Values 0 2 147 483 647 ms Value after reset 0 monitoring disabled To enable monitoring of interface activities proceed as follows EA Enter the desired value into the timeout register of this interface 2 Wait until the controller has set the OS flag of this interface 3 Set the corresponding user flag To detect a timeout proceed as follows 4 Enable monitoring of interface activities see above Wait until the controller has reset the user flag of this interface Oo A timeout has occurred Check the maamees uM OS flag iis A OS flag is set we CEE connection was temporarily disrupted the OS flag is reset the connection is still disrupted Jetter AG 349
418. se of an inbox the number of received data bytes is entered Module register properties Values Number of data bytes 0 8 Takes effect When the CAN Prim interface is enabled R 200010514 Data bytes 0 through 7 R 200010521 In the case of an outbox a CAN message is sent with these data bytes In the case of an inbox the received data bytes are entered Module register properties Values Data of data bytes 0 255 Takes effect When the CAN Prim interface is enabled 560 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Using the CAN Prim interface Initialization To initialize the CAN Prim interface proceed as follows Set bit 2 1 or bit 3 1 in R 20002077 JX2 system bus special functions If JX2 expansion modules have also been connected to the JX2 system bus then bit 2 1 Start up the JX2 system bus Configure the CAN ID length for all message boxes IS 11 bits command register 200010501 8 IS 29 bits command register 200010501 9 Configuring a message To configure a message box as outbox proceed as follows box as outbox Select a message box In this manual message box 1 is used basic register number 200010550 Configure message box 1 as outbox R 200010551 1 Configure the CAN D for sending messages R 200010552 CAN ID Activate message box 1 R 200010563 1 Result if configuration was successful Bit 0 1 in R 200010550 Jetter AG 561 10 Programming Se
419. se register addresses starting from 1 billion with variable destination window offset proceed as follows Enter the IP address of the remote network node into register 235000 Value range of the GNN 0 199 Enter the port number into register 235400 GNN Value range of the GNN 0 199 Set the base address of the destination window Enter a value into R 272702 of the remote network node Now registers 1nnn990000 1nnn999999 let you access the value A JetControl is to read a register value from a JX3 BN ETH Control system and bus node are interconnected via the Jetter Ethernet system bus There are JX3 modules connected to the JX3 BN ETH such as a JX3 AO4 of module number 03 By entering value 100000 into R 272702 of the JX3 BN ETH you get read access to the EDS of the connected JX3 modules In this example the module code of the JX3 AO4 is to be read For further information on how to read an EDS please refer to EDS registers see page 35 JC xxx JX3 BN ETH R 1001990601 304 R 1001990501 03 R 1001990500 1 400000 R 272702 R 235401 50000 a 304 R 100601 R 235001 192 168 10 16 03 R 100501 S 1 R 100500 RO a GNN 000 GNN 001 Reading is carried out in three steps Enter value 1 for a JX3 module into R 1001990500 2 Enter module number 03 into R 1001990501 3 Read module code 304 for JX3 AO4 from R 1001990601 Jetter AG 253 10 Programming Re
420. sed 0 blocked 0 free 128 Track 45 sectors 128 used 0 blocked 0 free 128 Track 46 sectors 128 used 0 blocked 0 free 128 Track 47 sectors 128 used 0 blocked 0 free 128 Track 48 sectors 128 used 0 blocked 0O free 128 Track 49 sectors 128 used 0 blocked 0 free 128 Track 50 sectors 128 used 0 blocked 0O free 128 Track 51 sectors 128 used 0 blocked 0 free 128 Track 52 sectors 128 used 0 blocked 0 free 128 Track 53 sectors 128 used 0 blocked 0 free 128 Track 54 sectors 128 used 0 blocked O free 128 Track 55 sectors 128 used 0 blocked 0 free 128 Track 56 sectors 128 used 0 blocked O free 128 Track 57 sectors 128 used 0 blocked 0 free 128 Track 58 sectors 128 used 0 blocked O free 128 Track 59 sectors 128 used 0 blocked 0 free 128 Track 60 sectors 128 used 0 blocked 0O free 128 Track 61 sectors 128 used 0 blocked 0O free 128 Track 62 sectors 128 used 0 blocked 0 free 128 Track 63 sectors 128 used 0 blocked 0 free 128 Total sectors 8192 used 4175 blocked 154 free 3863 Used 2120900 byte Blocked 78232 byte Free 1962404 byte Total 4161536 byte 166 Jetter AG JC 350 File system Elements of info file Tracks and sectors represent the administration units of the flash disk The info file comprises the following elements
421. sed for the monitor function Module register properties Values 0 German 1 English Takes effect Next time the monitor function is launched 408 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming 10 10 Controlling printer and serial interfaces Introduction Controlling the interfaces Direct access to the interface Display functions This chapter contains information on how to control printer and serial interfaces from within the application program in a JC 350 Printer and serial interfaces can be controlled in two ways Direct access to registers of the interface Using display functions included in the STX language In order to output special or control characters or to retrieve the status of the external device direct access to the registers of the interface must be used For more information on how to access registers refer to the documentation on the corresponding module This chapter describes how to control the interfaces using display functions It also describes the registers used to parameterize the display functions The controller provides the following display functions Displaying texts Displaying the contents of variables Requirements In this manual we proceed from the assumption that the user is familiar with the following STX instructions DisplayText DisplayText2 and DisplayValue Fora more detailed description of the instructions mentioned above refer to the online help included in the progr
422. ses Read write access to module registers of a slave module Values 2 17 Slave module number Module register properties Type of access Only value 0 can be entered Value 0 lets you delete the entered value The following registers function as counters of various CAN errors that might occur on the JX2 system bus Detailed knowledge of the Controller Area Network CAN bus is required 200002826 Counter for formal errors 200002827 Counter for acknowledge errors 200002828 Counter for bit errors Jetter AG 443 10 Programming R 200002039 I O module where a peripheral fault has occurred If the JC 350 detects a peripheral fault for an I O module on the JX2 system bus it sets the corresponding bit in this register Meaning of the individual bits Bit 0 I O module 2 1 I O module reports a peripheral fault Bit 1 I O module 3 1 I O module reports a peripheral fault etc I O module 4 24 1 I O module reports a peripheral fault Module register properties Type of access Only value 0 can be entered Value 0 lets you delete the entered value 444 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Register description Timeout and interval times for modules on the JX2 system bus R 200002028 Monitoring interval for I O modules This register is for setting the monitoring interval at which the JC 350 checks communication with connected I O modules Values 1 255 Cycle time of the monitoring interval in steps of 1
423. slice 0 When a normal application task has been interrupted by a cyclic task or the Ethernet system bus publisher the following application task is processed 1 When a normal application task has been interrupted by a cyclic task or the Ethernet system bus publisher processing the interrupted application task is resumed Bit 8 JetSync blockage 0 JetSync blockage is not active 1 JetSync blockage is active Register properties Access Read 319 10 Programming Description of the JetSync blockage system commands System command 410 System command 411 System command 412 320 Disable JetSync blockage Effect The JetSync blockage is disabled for all ports Bit 8 in R 202962 is reset The Jetter Ethernet system bus multicast frames are transmitted to all ports X14 X15 and CPU Purpose The JetSync blockage enabled by system command 411 or 412 is disabled Forwarding the Jetter Ethernet system bus multicast frames to all ports again corresponds to the on state of the controller Enable JetSync blockage for all ports Effect The JetSync blockage is enabled for all ports X14 X15 and CPU Bit 8 in R 202962 is set Jetter Ethernet system bus multicast frames which are received on a certain port are not forwarded to any of the other ports All other Ethernet frames are forwarded as usual Purpose This command lets you prevent forwarding Jetter Ethernet system bus multicast frames to t
424. smit errors 266 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Network registers network inputs and outputs Introduction The network registers network inputs and outputs let you access in transparent mode at cyclic data interchange registers inputs and outputs of remote nodes The controller accesses the local image of the cyclic data Prerequisites These are the prerequisites for using the registers inputs and outputs at cyclic data interchange Via publish subscribe the data are interchanged in cyclic mode Properties Network registers network inputs and outputs are not used in cyclic data interchange f network registers of non cyclic data interchange are accessed the controller generates acyclic network register access f network inputs and outputs of non cyclic data interchange are accessed the controller does not generate acyclic network register access There are no data being transmitted via network Advantages of network Advantages of network registers network inputs and outputs in cyclical data registers network inputs interchange as compared with acyclic data interchange and outputs The operating system cyclically interchanges data of the registers inputs and outputs with other network nodes This results in network load optimization This is a very quick access as at the instance of use only the local images of the data have to be accessed Register addressing The addressing scheme for network r
425. software has been installed on the PC Contents Topic Page Abbreviations module register properties and formats e e 214 Memories Over W ccccnceccceaecesctenesetcuensnscducaesssceaaensdeueneestdtesensaneetenticee 215 Register and I O numbers with a JC 3XX ee eececeeeeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 227 Jetter Ethernet system DUS ccceeceececeeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeesneneeeeeneneeeseneneees 238 General System reQiSters ccccccccceeeceeeeeeceeeeneeeeeeeneeeeedenteceeeenaeeeeseneeeeetea 322 Startup delay regiSte si cseecceeeseedcecdeencgdeestecensdeteceneestadeeedetecerseeticeneenuesesees 331 Realtime clock RI C siaseguien sigan ial O 333 FRUMUIMG regle sinss N 342 Monitoring interface activities 2 0 eeeeeee etter ee eneeeeeeteieeeeetieeeeetneeeeee 345 Controlling HMIs with alphanumeric displays cccceeeeeeeeenteeeeeeneees 350 Controlling printer and serial interfaces 20 2 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneaees 409 JX2 system DUS sisii aE E E 428 JAS system DUS e siciereivecseeenidlileiiaseccvidideet tan A 450 Emalea a a A OS 460 SOMING dala cruerii ara a E A AE 484 MOdDUSI LOP rera E ovenngeettengen Wane eeee 485 User programmable serial interface cceeeceeeseeeeeeeeeteeeeetneeeeeeneeeeees 496 User programmable IP interface 2 2 cececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeieeeeeeneeeeetnaeeeeee 521 User programmable CAN Prim interface cccccecceeeeeeeteeeeeeteeeeeeteeee
426. ssed The result of executing this command can be evaluated directly NetBit functions with the following nodes Controllers Bus node Communication modules To access other nodes use the command NetBit as follows If then you wish to set register bits for another use the command node NetBitSetReg you wish to clear register bits of another use the command node NetBitClearReg For detailed information on the parameters refer to the JetSym help Jetter AG 245 10 Programming Network registers Introduction The network registers let you access in transparent mode registers of remote nodes Advantages Advantages of network registers as compared with NetCopy commands Network registers are used just like any other registers in the application program If programs or parts of programs are used for local and distributed applications a program description is not needed Restrictions The following restrictions apply to network registers as compared with NetCopy commands P address and IP port of the remote node must be set separately Only part of the register address range of the remote nodes can be accessed directly The outcome of the network access diagnostics cannot be logged directly Properties If you access network registers of cyclic data interchange the controller does not carry out acyclic network register access The controller accesses the locally stored
427. station In this case enter the amount of your JX3 modules into an Excel file The JX3 system bus configurator calculates the possibility of the above named limitations There are two Excel sheets JX3 systembus data and JX3 systembus power JX3 systembus data Here the maximum number of JX3 modules and maximum data interchange rate is determined configuration of JX3 station data total number of modules In size of JX3 station module name description number JX3 Al4 Analog Input Module JX3 A04 Analog Output Module JX3 CNT Counter Module JX3 DI16 Digital Input Module JX3 DIO16 Digital Input Output Module JX3 DMS2 Strain Gage Module JX3 DO16 Digital Output Module JX3 MIX1 Multi Purpose Expansion Module JX3 MIX2 Multi Purpose Expansion Module JX3 THI2 RTD Pt100 Pt1000 Temperature Measurement JX3 THI2 TC Thermocouple Temperature Measurement The following fields marked red convey the following meaning Total number of modules The maximum number of 16 JX3 modules per JX3 station has been exceeded IN size of JX3 station The aggregated input factor has been exceeded Jetter AG 91 4 Mechanical and electrical installation JX3 systembus power JX3 system bus configurator Download 92 OUT size of JX3 station The aggregated output factor has been exceeded Here the maximum number of JX3 modules and maximum power consumption is determined configuration of JX3 station po number of Modules
428. stem bus GNN nnn 000 199 1nnn020000 JX3 module registers 1nnn179999 1nnn202000 JX2 module registers 1nnn227999 1nnn810000 JetMove registers 1nnn819999 1nnn980000 Indirect access via local R 236xxx 1nnn980199 1nnn990000 Indirect access with variable target window 1nnn999999 I Os General overview 20001 36000 Virtual I Os for RemoteScan 10000xx01 10000xx16 JX3 modules xx 02 17 20000xx01 20000xx16 JX2 modules xx 02 24 1nnn0101014 JX3 modules via JX3 BN ETH 1nnn011716 GNN nnn 000 199 Flags General overview 0 255 Application flags remanent 256 2047 Overlaid by registers R 1000000 through 1000055 2048 2303 Special flags Electronic Data Sheet EDS 100500 Interface 0 CPU 1 JX3 modules 100501 Module number 2 17 If lt 100500 gt 0 The EDS of the controller is displayed If lt 100500 gt 1 and lt 100501 gt 2 17 The EDS of the selected JX3 module is displayed Identification 100600 Internal version number 100601 Module ID 100602 Module name register string 100612 100613 PCB revision 100614 PCB options Production 100700 Internal version number 100701 Serial number register string 100707 Jetter AG 609 14 Quick reference JC 3xx 100708 Day 100709 Month 100710 Year 100711 TestNum 100712 TestRev Features 1 0 module 100800 Internal version number 100801 Diagnos
429. sult 1 no connection selected i 350001 1 Client 2 Server 470000 Cookie 350002 1 UDP 2 TCP 470008 350003 IP address 470009 Version 350004 Port number 470010 Status 350005 Connection state Bit 0 1 Error 350006 Number of sent bytes Pe eee 350007 Number of received bytes Bit1 1 Alarms Bit 2 1 Basic driver initialized Error history 470011 Command 0 There are no commands 380000 Status Bit 0 1 Recording 470020 Maximum possible number of instances F 470021 Number of instances ready for operation Bit 1 1 Stop if buffer is full 470030 Max number of error messages for the logger 9 4 470031 Number of error messages transmitted to the logger Bit 2 1 St d ia 470032 Max number of warnings for the logger 470033 Number of warnings forwarded to the logger Jetter AG 615 14 Quick reference JC 3xx 470034 470035 470040 470041 470042 470043 470044 470048 470049 470050 470157 471010 471011 JetIPScan 520000 520010 520011 520012 520013 521000 521006 521010 521016 521020 521026 521030 521036 521100 521106 521200 521206 521300 521306 521400 521406 522000 522010 522015 522110 522123 522210 522223 522310 522323 Max possible number of error history entries Number of entries in the error history Error numbers Time of the error in ms Instance at which the error occurred Number of error parameters Error para
430. t overlaying Flag 0 255 210075 Number of timers 203123 203124 32 bit overlaying Flag 2048 2303 210076 Timer number for R210077 203131 a a 203132 16 bit overlaying Flag 2048 2303 210077 Timer value in milliseconds 203147 210091 Debugging STX variable address 209700 System logger Global enable i i 209701 Enabling system components 210093 Debugging STX variable value 209739 210100 Task state R 210199 Apply the STX function TaskGetlnfo as described in the JetSym online help Application Piggran 210400 Task Program address 210000 Application program is running bit 0 1 210499 210600 Task ID of a cyclical task for R210601 0 2 Stop program 210601 Processing time of a cyclical task in per mil figure 1 Start program 210609 Task lock timeout in ms 2 Continue program 210001 JetVM version 210004 Error register bit coded 1 Monitoring disabled 210610 Timeout bit coded bit 0 gt timer 0 etc Bit 1 Error on JX3 system bus Bit 2 Error on JX2 system bus TCP auto close for the STX debug server Bit 3 Error on Ethernet system bus 212000 Number of open connections Bit 7 Error in expanded error register 212001 Mode Bit 8 Illegal jump f 212002 Time Bit 9 Illegal call Bit 10 Illegal index Bit 11 Illegal opcode HMI control Bit12 Division by 0 222804 Total number of display characters Bit13 Stack overflow 222805 Number of characters per line Bit 14 Stack underflow 222806 Text s
431. t value is displayed Press the key ENTER Result The new value is written to the variable The variable value is displayed for the period of time set in MR 2819 Monitor functions Display duration Once this period has elapsed the HMI displays the normal screen Aborting the display If you wish to abort the display of a variable before the set time default 3 5 function sec has elapsed and return to the normal screen press the ENTER key Redisplaying a variable If the normal display is active again and you wish to have the variable value redisplayed press the ENTER key The monitor display will be re activated for 3 5 seconds 406 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Configuring the monitor function Introduction The following registers are for configuring the monitor functions MR 2818 Disabling enabling monitor functions This module register is bit coded These bits can be used to disable enable individual monitor functions Keys are also mapped to flags with the monitor function disabled Module register properties Values 0 255 Value after reset 255 Meaning of the individual bits Bit 0 Taste R 0 Key R has no monitor function 1 Key R has got a monitor function Bit 1 Displaying the flag state 0 Keys R and I O without monitor function Display flag state 1 Keys R and I O with monitor function Display flag state Bit 2 Displaying an output state 0 Key I O without monito
432. tIPScan client 410 Disable JetSync blockage 411 Enable JetSync blockage for all ports 412 Enable JetSync blockage for port X15 Register properties Access System password register contains the correct password 324 Jetter AG JC 350 R 202962 Programming System status register The system status register lets you evaluate the system conditions Meaning of the individual bits Bit 0 Task switch on I O access 0 No task switching in the application program on I O access 1 Task switching is carried out in the application program on I O access Bit 1 Wait for communication 0 The controller waits for communication requests for a short time 1 The controller does not wait for communication requests Bit 2 JetIPScan client 0 JetIPScan client is not active 1 JetIPScan client is active Bit 8 JetSync blockage O JetSync blockage is not active 1 JetSync blockage is active Register properties Access Read Jetter AG 325 10 Programming Description of system commands System command 102 System command 104 System command 122 Restart the controller Effect The controller is restarting The effect is the same as when you switch the power supply off and on again Purpose Use this command for example if you have made changes to system registers or system files which become active only when the controller is rebooted Reset remanent parameters Effect The controller will reset remanent para
433. ta which have been copied into the receiving buffer is returned If with a server data are to be received via a UDP IP connection you can invoke the function and assign the return value of a variable for further evaluation as follows Result ConnectionReceiveData hConnection IPAddr IPPort ReceiveBuffer sizeof ReceiveBuffer T LOS 532 Jetter AG JC 350 Functioning principle with a UDP IP server Related topics Programming In the following situations the task is not processed further after issuing the function call All data have been received An error has occurred In case of a UDP IP connection data are transmitted as datagram The controller processes this function in the following steps Step Description The device JC 350 waits until all data of a datagram have been received but no an than the specified ee DEE timeout has elapsed or the A function is exited and an error connection has been terminated message is issued data have been received they are copied to the receiving buffer given along with the data but not exceeding the amount given along with the data Then the function continues with stage 3 more data have been received these data are discarded than could be copied into the receiving buffer that is if the sent datagram is too large The sender s IP address and IP port number are transferred into the variables which are given along with
434. tation_mit_JC350 System ay Release 6 Hardware B Network i JC 350 J CPU TPI JX2 Systembus D ETH Systembus Functions p Hardware J Setup E Files In Hardware Manager click on the folder Hardware Right click Scan Hardware o Ne S A ICIS ppt cpu Ppl JX2 Systembus Gy ETH Systembus 9 Motion Control Functions PP Hardware 5 Setup B Files Jetter AG 147 5 Initial commissioning Enter an IP address mask A hardware scan applies to the whole IP subnet Therefore enter at least the first three elements of the IP address In this example the IP address of the controller JC 3xx is 192 168 10 16 To detect the control systems and all bus nodes enter 192 168 10 fc intone SY Ts IP address mask EH 168 10 8 Click the button Scan 148 Jetter AG JC 350 Initial commissioning The Hardware Manager scans the Jetter Ethernet system bus and compares the scanned hardware with the currently set hardware IP address mask 192 168 10 Scanned Hardware a 192 168 10 16 Ei JC 350 Pi CPU PI _JX2 Systembus BT JX3 DI16 I JX3 DIO16 The window closes The Hardware Manager has taken over the hardware parameters Hardware 5 H JX3_Station_mit_JC350 System S JC 350 DM CPU Pil X2 Systembus py JX3 DI16 i W E ETH Systembus Functions PT Hardware SJ Setu
435. te Introduction Jetter AG are continuously striving to enhance the operating systems for their controllers and peripheral modules Enhancing means adding new features upgrading existing functions and fixing bugs This chapter describes how to perform an operating system update for a system equipped with a JC 350 Downloading an You can download operating systems from the Jetter AG homepage operating system http www jetter de You get the OS files for download at ndustrial Automation Support Downloads or by clicking the quick link Operating System Download on the website of the corresponding controller or module JC 3xx system Devices The following devices within a system equipped with the JC 350 let you update the OS Controller JC 350 JX2 slave modules on a JX2 system bus Bus nodes on a JX2 system bus Analog modules on a JX3 system bus Contents Topic Page Updating the operating system of the controller ccceeeeeeeeeeeesteeeeeees 594 OS update of a JX module 20 0 eee eee ceecccce cece ee eeeeee cece eeeeeeceneaeeeeeeeeeseesenaeeeees 599 Jetter AG 593 12 OS update 12 1 Updating the operating system of the controller Introduction This chapter describes how to carry out an OS update of the JC 350 You have got several options to transfer the OS file to the controller From within the programming tool JetSym Via FTP connection From an SD card option for JC 340 From the application
436. ted Instead apply the corresponding JetSym STX functions This is a comparison between the system functions and the corresponding JetSym STX functions System function Corresponding JetSym STX function 60 Function ModbusCRCgen FramePtr Int Length Int Int 61 Function ModbusCRCcheck FramePtr Int Length Int Int 65 67 7 Function ModbusReadReg Const Ref MbParam MODBUS_PARAWM Int 66 68 Function ModbusWriteReg Const Ref MbParam MODBUS_PARAM Int 80 85 Function RemoteScanConfig Protocol RSCAN_PROTOCOL Elements Int Const Ref Configuration RSCAN_DSCR Int 81 Function RemoteScanStart Protocol Int Int 82 Function RemoteScanStop Protocol Int Int Jetter AG 493 10 Programming 10 15 3 Modbus TCP client with STX variables Introduction The Modbus TCP client included in JC 350 supports only Class 0 Conformance In this class commands for reading and writing multiple registers are used One frame transmits up to 125 registers of 16 bits width As protocol ID 0 is used Assignment of transmitted and received frames is carried out using the transaction ID This chapter describes how to carry out noncyclical or cyclical transmission to a Modbus TCP server using STX functions Number of possible Connections to eleven different Modbus TCP servers may be opened at the connections same time Noncyclical data Functions ModbusReadReg and ModbusWriteReg are used to transmission estab
437. ter contains the LED register number for HMI 1 Module register properties Values 100000 1059999 Value after reset 203143 MR 2834 LED register number for device 2 This module register contains the LED register number for HMI 2 Module register properties Values 100000 1059999 Value after reset 203143 MR 2835 LED register number for device 3 This module register contains the LED register number for HMI 3 Module register properties Values 100000 1059999 Value after reset 203143 400 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming MR 2836 LED register number for device 4 This module register contains the LED register number for HMI 4 Module register properties Values 100000 1059999 Value after reset 203143 Jetter AG 401 10 Programming 10 9 9 Monitor functions Introduction This chapter provides a description on how an HMI can be used to display and change variables independent of the application program Prerequisites For the monitor functions the following requirements have to be met An HMI with numeric keypad must be connected to the controller The monitor functions must not be blocked in the configuration registers The STX instruction UserInput for inputting numerical values must not be active Restrictions The monitor function can only access controller variables which are assigned to permanent addresses Registers VL Flags MX Inputs IX Outp
438. ter shows how many characters the transmit buffer accomodates There is space for 32 768 characters max within the buffer Module register properties Values 0 32 768 Jetter AG 509 10 Programming MR 12 MR 13 MR 14 Receive buffer 8 bits without deleting the character on reading This register shows the oldest character stored in the receive buffer On reading this character will not be removed from the buffer Module register properties Values 0 31 5 bits per character 0 63 6 bits per character 0 127 7 bits per character 0 255 8 bits per character Type of access Read Oldest character in buffer Takes effect if MR 14 gt 0 Receive buffer 8 bits with deleting the character on reading This register shows the oldest character stored in the receive buffer This character is removed from the buffer Thus the character received next can be read out during the next read access Module register properties Values 0 31 5 bits per character 0 63 6 bits per character 0 127 7 bits per character 0 255 8 bits per character Type of access Read Oldest character in buffer Takes effect if MR 14 gt 0 Receiving buffer filling level This register shows how many characters the receive buffer accomodates Each read access to MR 13 decrements this register by 1 Module register properties Values 0 32 768 510 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming MR 15 Receive buffer 16 bit little
439. th it Meaning of the individual bits Bit 0 No error Bit 1 Error Module register properties Bit number GNN 1 Type of access Read MR 1200 1206 The node has not called The node having got the required GNN has not called Meaning of the individual bits Bit 0 No error Bit 1 Error Module register properties Bit number GNN 1 Type of access Read 306 Jetter AG JC 350 MR 1300 1306 MR 1400 1406 Programming Multiple call Several nodes using the same GNN have called Yet each node must have a unique GNN Meaning of the individual bits Bit 0 No error Bit 1 Error Module register properties Bit number GNN 1 Type of access Read The IP settings could not be changed When the IP settings of a node have been changed the controller checks whether the node has taken over these changes If the node has not taken over these changes the controller sets the respective bit in these registers Meaning of the individual bits Bit 0 No error Bit 1 Error Module register properties Bit number GNN 1 Type of access Read Jetter AG 307 10 Programming Configuration Register description Introduction These registers can be used to check the SET configuration and the three received ACTUAL configurations When you have entered the GNN in MR 2000 the controller transfers the values to the 4 register arrays MR 2000 GNN Enter the GNN here Module register
440. the value is to be input 1 Possible number of Cursor position starting from which characters on the screen the input field is to be displayed Result of the function Type Double Value Value that has been input You can invoke the instruction and assign its return value to a variable in the following way AutoSet Index Destination UserInput 0 10 The controller processes this instruction in the following steps The controller displays the suggested value on device 0 starting from cursor position 10 prepares an input field and activates the cursor Q The task stops at the STX instruction UserInput until it is aborted or until it is completed by the user by pressing the key ENTER an exception handling has been the task proceeds with the programmed exception handling no exception handling has been the task is aborted and the error is programmed displayed in the error register you press the key ENTER the controller assigns the value that has been input to the variable and continues the task with the next instruction the STX instruction an exception is thrown and step 4 UserInput instruction is is carried out aborted 380 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Device numbers Introduction The device number lets you define the HMI Device numbers You may enter the following values for the parameter device number MR 2824 holds the number of t
441. the JX3 station Start with the first JX3 module connected to the JC 3xx controller or to the JX3 BN xxx bus node 4 Check whether the allowed power consumption has been exceeded the allowed power consumption insert a JX3 PS1 power supply Ps v has been reached module upstream the next JX3 module the allowed power consumption insert a JX3 PS1 power supply P 4v has been reached module upstream the next JX3 module 8 JX3 modules have been insert a JX3 PS1 power supply connected module upstream the next JX3 module 16 JX3 modules have been the JX3 station is fully equipped connected You want to connect 11 JX3 AO4 and 5 JX3 THI2 RTD to a controller JC 3xx Check by taking the following steps how the JX3 station must be engineered to keep power consumption from exceeding the permitted value Determine the current consumption of the JX3 module JX3 AO4 given in the technical data Current consumption from the logic voltage of the JX3 system bus 70 mA Current consumption from the additional voltage of the JX3 system bus 120 mA Calculate the power consumption of an JX3 AO4 Py 5V 70mA 0 35W 35 Py 24V 120mA ae 3 29W 0 85 Add the power consumption of n JX3 AO4 ep n Psy Posy Posy 99 4 Mechanical and electrical installation For 11 JX3 A04 modules the aggregated power consumption is as follows D By 11 By 3 85W gt Pay 11 Puy 3
442. the data The function is exited and the number of data which have been copied into the receiving buffer is returned Initializing the user programmable IP interface see page 524 Establishing a connection see page 525 Terminating a connection see page 534 Sending data see page 529 Jetter AG 533 10 Programming Terminating a connection Introduction Function declaration Function parameters Return value How to use this function Related topics Clear all connections which are no longer required as the number of concurrently opened connections is limited Function ConnectionDelete IPConnection Int Int Description of the function parameters Parameter Value Comment IPConnection Handle Return value of the function ConnectionCreate The following return values are possible Return value 0 Connection terminated and deleted 1 Invalid handle This way you can invoke the function and assign its return value to a variable for further utilization Result ConnectionDelete hConnection Establishing a connection see page 525 Sending data see page 529 Receiving data see page 531 Initializing the user programmable IP interface see page 524 534 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming 10 17 2 Registers Introduction This chapter describes the registers of the JC 350 which contain the current connection list of the user programmable IP interface These
443. the entry USER is required too String of 63 characters max SMTP authentication will not be carried out Jetter AG JC 350 Section POP3 Introduction Example Authentication Configuration values Programming This section lets you specify the parameters for establishing a connection with the POP3 server Only in case the e mail server requires authentication via POP3 before SMTP this section is required POP3 LP 192 168 40 1 PORT 25100 USER JetControl4711 PASSWORD Pop3PassWord This type of authentication requires the JC 350 to log on at the POP3 server During the logon process USER and PASSWORD must be entered After that the SMTP server allows e mails to be sent for a given period of time usually 10 to 30 minutes IP In the given example Description Allowed values Illegal values In case of illegal value or missing entry PORT In the given example Description Allowed values Illegal values In case of missing entry 192 168 40 1 IP address of POP3 server can also be specified as name gt 1 0 0 0 m lt 223 255 255 255 Network address Broadcast address POP3 log on will not be carried out 25 100 Port number of POP3 server gt 0 m lt 65 536 gt 65 335 110 Jetter AG 465 10 Programming 466 Description Allowed values In case of missing entry Description Allowed values In case of missin
444. the maximum possible number of network access retries If a network access could not be made without errors the controller will repeat the access at the most as often as it has been set in this register If the network access could still not be made without errors the controller will cancel the access and create an error message Module register properties Values 0 255 R 232718 Present number of retries R 232710 shows the total number of network access retries Module register properties Values 2 147 483 648 2 147 483 647 overflowing Jetter AG 255 10 Programming M 2075 Network error If a network error occurs the operating system sets flag 2075 In order to detect further errors this way you must manually reset the flag Flag properties Values 0 No network errors since last reset 1 A network error has occurred 256 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming 10 3 2 Cyclic data interchange Introduction Properties Examples of the application Restrictions This chapter covers cyclic data interchange via Jetter Ethernet system bus Properties of cyclic data interchange via Jetter Ethernet system bus Architecture Publish subscribe The publishers send the data The subscribers receive the data Usage of multicast frames Publisher Each publisher sends one or several publications Data of a publication are consistently transferred in a frame The cycle time can be set for each publication
445. tic configuration 100802 Digital inputs 100803 Digital inputs inverted 100804 Digital outputs 100805 Digital outputs inverted 100806 Cyclic inputs 100807 Cyclic outputs 100808 Features 100809 Diagnostics mask Features JX3 BN ETH JC 3xx 100800 Internal version number 100801 MAC address Jetter 100802 MAC address device 100803 Serial port 100804 Switch 100805 STX 100806 Non volatile registers 100807 JX3 bus 100808 CAN bus 100809 SD card 100810 Motion control 100811 Intelligent slave modules 100812 HTTP e mail 100813 Modbus TCP 100815 LED for the SD card 100816 User defined LEDs 100817 RTC Configuration From the file system config ini 101100 IP address 101101 Subnet mask 101102 Default gateway 101103 DNS server 101132 HOSTNAME suffix type 101133 HOSTNAME register string 101151 101164 Port number for JetIP 101165 Port number for STX debugger Used by the system 101200 IP address 101201 Subnet mask 101202 Default gateway 101203 DNS server 101232 HOSTNAME suffix type 101233 101251 101264 101265 101280 101298 101299 101908 HOSTNAME register string Port number for JetIP Port number for STX debugger File name for AutoCopy Saving the settings 0x77566152 CRC of ModConfig da Real time clock 102910 102911 102912 102913 102914 102915 102916 102917 102920 102921 102922 102923 102924 102925 102926 102927 102928 Direct access Milliseconds Seconds Minutes Hours
446. tile JC 360 32 bit integer or floating point number non volatile with option R JC 365 32 bit integer or floating point number non volatile JC 365 32 bit integer or floating point number non volatile with option R JX3 system bus registers 100000000 100002000 100002008 100002011 100002013 100002015 100002016 100002023 100002034 100002072 100002111 100002764 100003xx0 100003xx9 100004000 100004367 100xx0000 100xx9999 Bus status Bit 15 1 Data exchange takes place via JX3 system bus Hardware revision of the JX3 system bus Error register bit coded Bit 3 1 Error at module access Bit 16 1 Fatal irrecoverable error has occurred Data interchange has been aborted I O module number where error has occurred Number of detected JX3 modules Index to module array Module array Dummy modules Number of retries Version of the JX3 system bus driver Module register number where error has occurred Timeout period for register access ms Registers on I O modules compatibility mode xx Module number 2 00 15 Inputs outputs mapped to registers see below Registers on I O modules direct access xx Module number 02 17 JX2 system bus registers 200002000 200002008 200002011 200002012 200002013 200002014 200002015 200002016 200002023 200002024 200002028 200002029 Version of JX2 system bus driver IP Error bit coded Bit 3 1
447. ting the default IP address To set the module to its default IP address 192 168 10 15 move the DIP switch sliders to the positions shown below i HHRHRHRHAHHRHHE ON a sy N Bm OU Tw on Aa Cyan o o con o o a o Setting the IP address via config ini file and DIP switch The following DIP switch settings cause the controller to read out the IP address from the file config ini and the DIP switches 624 oO o ee g or e Set the upper three bytes of the IP address in the config ini file the fourth byte via DIP switch sliders 1 through 8 For further information refer to the user manual Jetter AG JC 350 Appendix Appendix Introduction This appendix contains electrical and mechanical data as well as operating data Contents Topic Page Technical Specifications 2 0 22 ececececcceceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeseeeanaeeeeeeeeesensenaeeeeees 626 ake eres see ie er estate entire a ene ene eae rare reer 634 Jetter AG 625 Appendix A Technical specifications Introduction Contents 626 This chapter contains in
448. tion Operating system update controller modules on the system bus network devices Duplication of a control system 568 Jetter AG JC 350 Prerequisites config ini Example AutoCopyIni Note Automatic copying of controller data For automatic copying of controller data the following prerequisites must be fulfilled The programmer is familiar with the file system The programmer must have basic knowledge in the area of FTP application The JC 340 features the SD card option This is an example of a configuration file config ini with an entry AutoCopyIni lt Productname gt System Configuration Copyright c 2009 by Jetter AG Ludwigsburg Germany IP Address 192 168 10 209 SubnetMask 255 255 255 0 DefGateway Os GO Os 0 DNSServer 192 168 10 244 HOSTNAME SuffixType 0 Name JetControl350 PORTS JetIPBase 50000 JVMDebug 52000 FILES AutoCopyIni SD project_name autocopy ini The AutoCopy function only makes sense if the data to be copied have been stored to the SD card This means that the root directory is SD Since operating system version 1 09 of JC 350 the following applies The file autocopy ini can be stored to any subdirectory Instead of autocopy ini you can name the file arbitrarily Designation In this description Complete Name means the name of the file or directory including the complete path Contents Topic Page OPE
449. tion Introduction The application program is loaded by the controller s OS as follows The OS reads the file app start ini from the internal flash disk The OS evaluates the Project entry It contains the path leading to the application program file The loading process The OS evaluates the Program entry It contains the program name The OS loads the application program from the file lt Project gt lt Program gt 608 Jetter AG JC 350 Quick reference JC 3xx 14 Quick reference JC 3xx Corresponding OS version This quick reference gives a compact overview of registers and flags used in connection with the controllers JC 340 JC 350 JC 360 MC and JC 365 MC with OS release 1 24 0 00 Further the allocation of plug in connectors and setting the IP address via DIP switch have been described Default address on the CANopen bus The default address of the supplied JC 350 Node ID 127 0x7F Maximum number of CANopen interfaces JC 340 and JC 350 Possible number of CAN interfaces CANopen STX API 0 JC 360 MC Possible number of CAN interfaces CANopen STX API 1 CANMAX 0 JC 365 MC Possible number of CAN interfaces CANopen STX API 2 CANMAX 1 Heartbeat monitoring CANopen STX API available as of the following OS version JC 340 and JC 350 CANopen STX API is not available JC 360 MC OS version 1 17 0 25 JC 365 MC OS version 1 17 0 25 General overvi
450. tion LEDs of the controller during boot process Normal boot process If the following requirements are met the controller goes through its normal boot process Mode selector S11 is in RUN position There is a valid OS There is a valid application program The LED SD is not shown here as it is OFF during the normal boot process During boot process of the controller the other OS status LEDs then indicate the following The OS reads out the DIP switch settings on the backplane module Then it checks if an Ethernet switch exists Fen The OS initializes real time clock 7 Ethernet interface and file system Only if in start delay register R 202971 a time value has been entered the oa executes steps 5a and w X The first half of the start an is in progress Jetter AG 57 4 Mechanical and electrical installation x Kn The second Peper raeerrnnras of the start delay is in e The OS initializes the modules on the JX3 and JX2 system bus as well as software features Web Modbus TCP etc then it loads the application program On O Occ Oor Normal operating condition 58 Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation Status LEDs Ethernet interface Status LEDs Ethernet interface The status LEDs of the Ethernet interface are located in the immediate vicinity of the RJ45 ports
451. tion Example type REAL format Description Representation format Comments Refer to format definition Example format 0 H FEE factor Description Factor by which the real time controller value is multiplied Comments Multiplication is executed prior to adding the offset Example factor 1 5 offset Description Value which is added to the real time controller value Comments Multiplication by the factor is executed prior to adding the value to the real time controller value Example offset 1000 Jetter AG 473 10 Programming Format definition You can define the representation of variables by means of their attribute The number of digits characters used for representing a variable can be defined by the character Prefix 0 sets the output of leading zeros This applies to the register types INT INTX and REAL Prefix sets the output of a sign This applies to the register types INT and REAL Prefixing a blank sets the output of a blank This applies to the register types INT and REAL Registers text registers The variable name begins with a capital R followed by the register number The following types are possible Type Notation INT standard type Integer decimal INTX Integer hexadecimal INTB Integer binary BOOL Register content 0 gt Display 0 Register content 0 gt Display 1 REAL Floating point decimal STRING Text register Example JW DTAG name R1000
452. tivity time If the maximum number of connections is active and if the server is to establish a new connection module registers 1 and 2 determine the behavior Module register properties Values 1 2 147 483 647 ms Value after reset 1 Jetter AG 313 10 Programming 10 3 8 Executing an ARP request Use case Phases of an ARP request Several controllers are interconnected via the Jetter Ethernet system bus This is the case now Controller B is exchanged In this case the IP address remains the same but the Ethernet address MAC address changes This way data interchange between controller A and the new controller B is not possible To enable data interchange between the two controllers again controller A would have to be relaunched To prevent a relaunch of controller A an ARP request must be executed on controller A The controller A inquires from the Jetter Ethernet system bus which node has got which specific IP address Controller B reports that it has got this IP address MAC address and IP address of controller B are aligned with each other Now controller A is informed of the MAC address which controller B has got From now on data interchange is possible again Contents Topic Page Executing an ARP request ceeeeeeeceeeeeneeeeeenneeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 315 314 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Executing an ARP request ARP request When you enter the IP address of
453. to OFF GNN 5 DIP switch sliders 1 and 3 are set to ON All other DIP switch sliders are set to OFF GNN 8 Switch 4 is set to ON All other DIP switch sliders are set to OFF If at the digital servo amplifier an Ethernet port is integrated there is a 10 pin DIP switch available The illustration below shows the position of the DIP switch sliders ll a a a al al a a a 0E E E E TIS ON1 23456789410 h yi Jatiinve wvOOu 20 Ow O_o OO e m E a d O oO 2 a I oo oO He opt Clee BEE Bal peza ota m RE oo Bok eo Ao bt E o mi 282 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Assignment at the pare a p eroaan Conte JX3 BN ETH oe betes toe BNET 9 Ltn r ie eas Bacio Version o Hj JC 940MC IniFile Wit CPU Pee Autorun Autollash Z Online Version Detection PP JX2 Bus Carrier S Diagnostic fg ETH abu EDS Enors Interface j Genaral Type Ethemet 1 a aL Program 2 EE Motion Contra sist IP addiess
454. tput 88 factor You can engineer the JX3 station out of 11 JX3 AO4 and 5 JX3 THI2 RTD as described below One JX3 station will be sufficient Depending on the view on the power consumption unit you must mount a JX3 PS1 after a certain number of JX3 modules as is shown in the illustration mM e n ALALLA ATALA mee Number Pat Desertion JX3 A04 Modules 1 to 5 supplied by JC 3xx 1 JX3 A04 Modules 6 to 11 supplied by JX3 PS1 3 JX3 PS1 Power supply module JX3 THI2 RTD Modules 12 to 16 supplied by JX3 PS1 5 e A 3 ixePs1 Powersupply modue ae E Jetter AG 97 4 Mechanical and electrical installation Limitation depending on the power consumption of the modules Introduction Allowed power consumption Devices not to be taken into account 98 JX3 modules of a JX3 station are supplied with logic voltage either by a JC 3xx controller or a JX3 BN xxx bus node or a JX3 PS1 power supply module Each of th
455. tr Int Length Int Int Function ModbusCRCcheck FramePtr Int Length Int Int 65 67 Function ModbusReadReg Const Ref MbParam MODBUS_PARAWM Int 66 68 Function ModbusWriteReg Const Ref MbParam MODBUS_PARAWM Int 80 85 Function RemoteScanConfig Protocol RSCAN_PROTOCOL Elements Int Const Ref Configuration RSCAN_DSCR Int Function RemoteScanStart Protocol Int Int Function RemoteScanStop Protocol Int Int Jetter AG 495 10 Programming 10 16 User programmable serial interface Introduction Applications Required programmer s skills etc Contents Topic Page Interface esisi a hei Heads eaaa 497 Functioning principle of the user programmable serial interface 501 Registe een E a EEA E R a E 505 Programimi eiae e E EEE A AEE 514 496 Jetter AG This chapter describes how to address the serial interface of the controller from within the application program to allow sending and receiving characters The user programmable serial interface lets you connect devices which use communication protocols that are not supported by the OS of the controller Fields of application for example are Scales Scanners Display elements Frequency inverters Temperature controllers m etc This chapter addresses programmers of application programs with experience in data transfer via asynchronuous serial interfaces Expertise in the following areas is prerequisite
456. trictions The user programmable IP interface allows to send or receive any data via Ethernet interface on the JC 350 using TCP IP or UDP IP When using this feature data processing is completely carried out by the application program The user programmable IP interface allows the programmer to carry out data exchange via Ethernet connections which do not use standard protocols such as FTP HTTP JetIP or Modbus TCP The following applications are possible Server Client TCP IP UDP IP To be able to program user programmable IP interfaces the following knowledge of data exchange via IP networks is required IP addressing e g IP address port number subnet mask TCP e g connection establishment termination data stream data backup UDP e g datagram For communication via user programmable IP interface the programmer must not use any ports which are already used by the operating system of the controller Therefore do not use the following ports Depending on the FTP client ee a T e ini Jetter AG 521 10 Programming Contents Topic Page Programming siaccesves cages ble a a deans eee 523 Registers sincccavencccesigaccdacvinccedanpiatecevedcegansaccedavpddacanebacgeavwacceeesidactervuaededeaeites 535 522 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming 10 17 1 Programming Introduction Technical data Restrictions The user programmable IP interface is used to carry out data exchange betwe
457. ts Int Const Ref Configuration RSCAN_DSCR Int 81 Function RemoteScanStart Protocol Int Int 82 Function RemoteScanStop Protocol Int Int 90 91 Function FileDAWrite Const Ref FileName String Const Ref Mode String VarType DAWRITE_TYPE First Int Last Int Int 92 Function FileDARead Const Ref FileName String Int 110 Function EmailSend Const Ref FileName String Int 150 Function NetCopyListConfig IPAddr Int IPPort Int Const Ref List TNetCopyLinstL Int 151 Function NetCopyListSend Handle Int Int 152 Function NetCopyListDelete Handle Int Int Jetter AG 623 14 Quick reference JC 3xx Assignment of MiniDin port X11 Pin Signal 1 RDA 2 GND QOJ 3 RDB G 4 RxD 5 SDB 6 DC24V 7 SDA 8 TxD Description RS 422 receive data inverted Reference potential RS 422 receive data not inverted RS 232 receive data RS 422 transmit data not inverted RS 485 transmit receive data not inverted HMI supply voltage RS 422 transmit data inverted RS 485 transmit receive data inverted RS 232 transmit data Pin assignment of female Sub D connector X19 Pin Signal 1 CMODEO 2 CAN L 3 GND 4 CMODE1 5 Unused 6 CAN L_2 7 CAN H 8 CAN H_2 9 Unused Description Commissioning Data signal for CAN bus 1 Reference potential Commissioning For JC 365 MC Data signal for CAN bus 2 Data signal for CAN bus 1 For JC 365 MC Data signal for CAN bus 2 Set
458. tter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation Power supply of JX2 slave modules JX2 slave modules Compliance with EMC JX2 slave modules are directly supplied with a voltage of DC 24 V JX2 slave modules are not capable of supplying other modules with power The following modules are JX2 slave modules JX2 SM2 JX2 SM1D JX2 PROFI1 JX2 PID1 JX2 SV1 To the left of each JX2 slave module another JX2 module must be installed to ensure EMC and noise immunity However this does not apply to JetMoves the JX2 SM2 module is the first install a JX2 PS1 power supply module module of a JX2 station to the left of it Heterogeneous A heterogeneous JX2 station comprises of JX2 slave modules and JX2 I O JX2 station modules Modules of a JX2 station must be installed from left to right in the following order Power supply module JX2 PS1 JX2 I O modules JX2 slave modules other than JetMove d 5 Pd i a i ORY Ooga SDOO leo Pa Sm ae e O 8 87 o 3 SI on 8 S E amp Ow Os Or 0008 200009 Number a JX2 system bus cable connecting to the controller 2 Power supply module JX2 1 0 A maximum of five J
459. tter AG 595 12 OS update Operating system update via FTP Introduction Using an FTP client an OS file can be transferred to the JC 350 Prerequisites An OS file for the JC 350 must be available An FTP connection to the controller must be possible The login parameters for a user with administrator or system rights are at hand The operating system of the JC 350 must be running Note Make sure it remains energized Updating the OS To update the OS proceed as follows Open an FTP connection to the JC 350 Log in with administrator or system rights Navigate to the directory System OS Wait until the transfer process is completed Clear the FTP connection To activate the transferred OS re boot the controller step a ensten oste O BE 596 Jetter AG JC 350 OS update Automatic OS update from an SD card Reference An automatic OS update of the controller from the SD card can be carried out using the AutoCopy function For a detailed description turn to the chapter AutoCopy see page 568 Jetter AG 597 12 OS update Operating system update from within the application program Introduction Prerequisites Updating the OS JetSym STX program The file functions included in the STX language let you carry out a program controlled OS update of a JC 350 from within an OS file An OS file must be available in the file system of the JC 350 The operating system of the JC 350 and t
460. twork parameters configured in the Hardware Manager via JetControl which is the NetConsisteny master are assigned to the JX3 BN ETH If NetConsistency has already assigned the network parameters configured in Hardware Manager to the JX3 BN ETH the JX3 BN ETH uses these for system launch The JX3 BN ETH stores the assigned network parameters in the file System config ini in the file system In this case the already existing file System config iniini is overwritten The GNN set by the DIP switch of the JX3 BN ETH is for identifying the JX3 BN ETH within the system in order to assign the network parameters configured in Hardware Manager 280 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Assigning the network parameters dependent on the GNN Introduction Via JetIPScan NetConsistency sets the network parameters automatically for the following devices Ethernet axes JM xxx JM 2xx OEM JM 200 ETH JC 310 JM Ethernet axes MC JM xxx JM 2xx OEM JM 200 ETH JC 310 JM JX3 BN ETH JX3 COM EIPA JX3 COM PND Automatically means that when exchanging a network node you only have to take over the GNN Global Node Number which has got the same function as the settings of the DIP switch belonging to the former network node Any further settings are transmitted to the network node by the JetControl Via JetIPScan NetConsistency assigns the network parameters as set in Hardware Manager for the respective network nodes LESAR RS Axis Parameter
461. uction Function declaration Function parameters Return value Jetter AG FTP client This function lets you read the content of a file from a remote network node and copy it to the local file system of the controller Function FtpFileRead FtpConnection Handle Const Ref ServerFile String Const Ref ClientFile String Int Description of the function parameters FtpConnection Handle Value returned by the function FtpConnect ServerFile File name Name of the file in the file system of the FTP server which the controller is to read ClientFile File name File name as which the controller is to save the file read in the local file system If the returned value is negative an error has occurred If the returned value is 0 the controller was able to read the file and store it locally Return value 0 No error 1 Invalid handle 2 6 Error when storing the file locally 3 5 7 8 Communication error there is for example no response from FTP server 4 Error message from FTP server for example file does not exist 183 8 FTP client In the following cases the task is not processed further after issuing the Operating principle function call The controller must first read the file e g ServerTestFile txt and save it to the local file system as e g LocalTestFile txt An error has occurred This function is processed in the following steps Sep Deseripion O a file Serv
462. uence number If the value of the difference is greater than one certain publications have not been received If a subscription has not received any process data from the assigned publication before timeout the subscription will generate an error Further the operating system writes the address of the bus node into registers 254001 to 254003 with which communication has been terminated This helps you to search for the error exactly in this bus node using NetCopy commands Segoe Name Deseripion O asn On O Oloba NodeNumber O asw eaaa O O 700s ponnner OOO There are several registers available which go with all publications O Restor Name O Deserto O ID in case of o S the ID of the publication in which an error error has occurred BE Amount of all publications of all Amount ofall publications 16 bit CRC Cyclic Redundancy Code of the publication configuration file Status registers of all publications From MR 255000 you can read the collective status of all publications In case of an error you first read out the ID of the publication in which an error has occurred Meaning of the individual bits Bit 0 Error in CRC computing of the configuration file 0 No error has occurred 1 For CRC computing the configuration file does not exist For this reason CRC computing has not taken place 264 Jetter AG JC 350 Publisher command Selecting a publication Configuring a publication Prog
463. ule System JX3 Modulexx This file is read only Formatting the flash disk or SD card does not influence this file The illustration below shows an example of the contents of the directory System holding the EDS files of the controller and JX3 modules S System S X2 Slave02 Oos JX3 Module02 eds ini JX3 M oduleD3 Peds ini Gos 5 config ini eds ini flashdiskinfo txt flashdisklock ini keys ini users ini In the directory JX3 ModuleXX of the JX3 modules the OS of which can be updated by transferring an OS file os there is the directory OS which is not shown in the image The EDS file is a text file the entries of which are grouped into several sections Jetter AG 31 3 Identifying Example This is an example of an EDS file belonging to a JetControl 350 Jetter AG Electronic Data Sheet IDENTIFICATION Version 0 Code 848 Name JC 350 4 W M PcbRev 03 PcbOpt 00 PRODUCTION Version 0 SerNum 20090513070001 Day 9 Month 7 Year 2009 TestNum 1 TestRev 01 08 03 25 FEATURES Version 1 MAC Addr 00 50 CB 00 8D 3C Serial 1 Switch 1 STX 1 NVRegs 30000 JX3 bus 1 CAN 1 SD card 1 Axes 4 Web 1 ModbusTCP 1 SDLed 1 UserLeds 1 RTC 1 Section The general hardware configuration can be seen from section IDENTIFICATION IDENTIFICATION O Name Example Deseriplon lo Version of this section 848 Module code for JC 3
464. unch the other JX3 modules new operating system JetSym STX program Var SourceName String 100 DestinationName String 100 UpdatelIt Bool End Var Jetter AG 603 12 OS update J BR RK KR KKK HK IK KK KK A I I KH HK 1 Activate Tracing in JetSym 2 Set the name of the source file in SourceName 3 Set the name of the target file in DestinationName 4 Set the flag UpdateIt J BRK KK RK HK I KA A A A AA A A I KK HK Task OSupdate Autorun Var ResCopy Int End Var Loop UpdateIt False When UpdateIt Continue ResCopy FileCopy SourceName DestinationName Trace Result IntToStr ResCopy Sn End Loop End Task 604 Jetter AG JC 350 Application program 13 Application program Introduction Required programmer s skills Contents Jetter AG This chapter describes how to store the application program in JC 350 The user determines the program that is to be executed This chapter requires knowledge on how to create application programs in JetSym and how to transmit them via the file system of the JC 350 Topic Page Application program Default path ee ceieeeeesneeeeeenteeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 606 The application program is stored to the SD Card cceeeseeeeeeeeeees 607 Loading an application Program cceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeesennaeeeeeeeeteees 608 605 13 Application program Application
465. update and communication between controllers m 1024 65535 50000 52000 IP port for debugger setup in JetSym m 1024 65535 52000 Jetter AG 75 4 Mechanical and electrical installation Section FILES Changing the IP configuration Related topics 76 In the FILES section the name of the command file for the AutoCopy function has been entered AutoCopylini In the given example SD autocopy ini Function Command file for the AutoCopy function Allowed values Valid name of path and file In the event of an illegal SD autocopy ini value Create on your PC a configuration file named config ini using a text editor and make the corresponding entries Open an FTP connection between the PC and the JC 350 Log in as user with administrator or system rights Default login information User admin Password admin User system Password system Browse to directory System of the JC 350 Copy the configuration file named config ini which has been created by you to the JC 350 6 Clear the FTP connection 7 Reboot the JC 350 Result The new configuration is active As an alternative you can change the IP configuration via the configuration registers The configuration memory see page 72 Configuration registers see page 77 Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation Configuration registers Introduction Register numbers Configuration registers
466. ure the file path If you want to store the application program to another directory of the internal flash disk proceed the same way Since the controller s file system is case sensitive make sure that path and file names as well as file entries are spelled correctly To store the application program to the SD card configure the device as follows Action Create an application program file by JetSym Create the desired directory on the SD card Store the application program file to the desired directory Enter the path to the application program file and the program name into the file app start ini on the internal flash disk of the device Result On re boot the device loads the application program from the SD card This file is a text file with one section holding two entries Element Description Startup Section name Project Path leading to the application program Example Startup Project SD TestProgram Program Testl es3 Result The application program is loaded from the file Test1 es3 located in the folder TestProgram on the SD card SD TestProgram Test1 es3 Application program Default path see page 606 Jetter AG 607 13 Application program Loading an application program At reboot of the application program via JetSym or booting the JC 350 the application program is loaded and executed via the file system For this mode selector S11 must be in RUN posi
467. uring dummy modules 434 JX2 system bus 49 JX2 system bus cable 51 Line length in mm and baud rate 53 Monitoring interval 435 Power supply 107 109 Setting the baud rate 432 Third party CANopen modules that can be connected 110 JX3 system bus 450 Coding of modules 451 Configuring dummy modules 453 JX3 system bus configurator 91 Restrictions 94 95 98 K Terminals Terminal X10 Power supply 43 L LEDs of the controller 55 57 59 Locating faults CRC calculation 274 Explicit data exchange 273 Remote node 276 Subscription 275 Warnings and errors 304 Mechanical installation Installing the controller JC 350 66 Memory types 215 Modbus TCP 485 Modbus TCP client 492 494 Modbus TCP server 486 Modifications 14 Monitoring interface activities 345 Mounting dimensions 26 O Operating parameters Enclosure 631 Environment and mechanics 630 Shielded data and I O lines 633 DC power supply inputs and outputs 632 Operating system update 593 Order reference JC 350 22 P Personnel qualification 14 Product description JC 350 20 Q Quick reference 609 R Register number of CANopen modules on the JX2 system bus 234 of IP67 I O modules on the JX2 system bus 233 of JX2 slave modules connected to the JX2 system bus 231 of JX2 l O modules on the JX2 system bus 232 of JX3 modules connected to JX3 BN ETH 235 of JX3 m
468. urred Timeout of a system register relating to the JX2 system bus 1 Timeout during access to a system register of the JX2 system bus SDO abort 1 At SDO access the CANopen device has reported an SDO abort Module register properties Type of access Only value 0 can be entered Value 0 lets you acknowledge all reported errors Yet the E LED at the JC 350 does not go out unless you have then acknowledged bit 2 JX2 system bus error of R 200008 R 200002011 Number of the I O module where the timeout has occurred If during communication with an I O module a timeout occurs the controller enters the number of the I O module into this register A timeout might occur in the following cases Sending the monitoring signals within certain intervals Read write access to digital I O data Read write access to module registers of an I O module 442 Jetter AG JC 350 R 200002012 Register for error counters Programming Values 2 32 I O module numbers in the case of JX2 I O modules and IP67 modules 70 79 I O module number in the case of CANopen modules Module register properties Type of access Only value 0 can be entered Value 0 lets you delete the entered value Number of the slave module where the timeout has occurred If during communication with a slave module a timeout occurs the controller enters the number of the slave module into this register A timeout might occur in the following ca
469. used to read out the revision number of the hardware or the version of the operating system and its components If you wish to contact the hotline of Jetter AG in case of a problem please have this revision ready Contents Topic Page Hardware reviSions niitis idinan a eaa a aaiae an elles hides 38 SOfWare VETSIONS soree a n a helen eos kd ncaa linterna 39 Jetter AG 37 3 Identifying Hardware revisions Introduction Register overview Version numbers in JetSym setup Related topics 38 The JC 350 features special registers the content of which lets you identify the hardware The following registers let you read out the hardware revisions 108020 Hardware revision of the backplane module 108021 Hardware revision CPU board 200170 Controller type The following screenshot shows a JetSym setup window displaying the version registers 4 Backplane 3 2 __ CPU 108021 2 3 JCtype 200170 340 Software versions see page 39 Jetter AG JC 350 Software versions Introduction Format of software version numbers Released version Register overview Version numbers in JetSym setup Identifying The JC 350 features software with unique version numbers which can be read out from special registers The software version numbers of the JC 350 are four figure values Pa Major or main version number Minor or secondary version number a aa Branch or intermediate version number Areleased ve
470. utomatically detect and commission connected modules Only the baud rate must be set by the user Connectable modules JX2 I O modules JX2 slave modules Servo amplifiers JetMove 1xx JetMove 2xx and JetMove 6xx IP67 I O modules LioN S and LUX7 CSL Third party CANopen modules e g valve terminals Contents Topic Page Module array and module codes of connected modules 08 429 JX2 system bus Baud rate eeeeceee cence ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeaaees 432 Dummy modules on the JX2 system DUS 0 2 cece teeter eee ee tenet 434 Monitoring intervals on the JX2 system DUS 0 ee ee eee eee teee eee 435 JX2 system bus Description of non volatile registers eee 437 Register description of modules connected to the JX2 system bus 440 Register description Error logging on the JX2 system buUS 0 ee 442 Register description Timeout and interval times for modules on the JX2 Systemi BUS cee iis eects tected eeenatsceectand OR 445 Register description Retry counter for JX2 system bus modules 448 Register description Versions of JX2 system bus drivers 449 428 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Module array and module codes of connected modules Module array Registers Overview Reading the module array Module codes of JX2 I O modules A unique module code is assigned to each module connected to the JX2 system bus The JC 350
471. uts QX Multi display mode In multi display mode the following must be taken into account The monitor function is only displayed on the HMI on which you have activated it by pressing the key R or the key I O The controller is not able to tell apart on which HMI subsequent keystrokes are carried out Contents Topic Page Overview of displays and HMIS 0 ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeteeeeeetieeeeee 403 Meaning of keys in monitor function 0 eee eee eee tee erat ernest 404 Displaying and changing variables ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 405 Configuring the monitor function eee cee eeeeee ee etteeeeetteeeeetaeeeeeeneeeeee 407 402 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Overview of displays and HMIs HMIs supporting the The following table lists the alphanumeric displays and HMls by Jetter AG monitor function which also feature the monitor function LCD 16 R and I O Registers NUM 25 Flags Inputs Outputs LCD 34 Registers Flags LCD 52 R and I O Registers Flags Inputs Outputs LCD 54 Z R and I O Registers Flags Inputs Outputs LCD 60 R and I O Registers Flags Inputs Outputs LCD 110 R and I O Registers Flags Inputs Outputs Jetter AG 403 10 Programming Meaning of keys in monitor function Keys being used in The following keys are used in monitor function monitor function Desc
472. ver 192 168 1 44 HOSTNAME SuffixType 0 Name JetControl350 PORTS JetIPBase 50000 JVMDebug 52000 FILES AutoCopyIni SD autocopy ini Jetter AG 73 4 Mechanical and electrical installation Section IP In section IP the required IP addresses and the subnet mask are specified Address In the given example 192 168 50 1 Description IP address of the JC 350 The DIP switch on the backplane module can overwrite the least significant byte Allowed values gt 1 0 0 0 m lt 223 255 255 255 Illegal values Network address Broadcast address In the event of an illegal JC 350 resets all four values to their defaults value SubnetMask In the given example 255 255 255 0 Description Sets the subnet mask Allowed values m gt 128 0 0 0 Illegal values 1 and 0 mixed In the event of an illegal JC 350 resets all four values to their defaults value DefGateWay In the given example 192 168 50 11 Description IP address of the gateway to other subnets The JC 350 must be able to reach the subnet Address SubnetMask otherwise it will set this parameter to 0 0 0 0 Allowed values gt 0 0 0 0 and m lt 223 255 255 255 Illegal values Network address Broadcast address A value Address SubnetMask which cannot be reached by the JC 350 The Address value In the event of an illegal JC 350 sets the value to 0 0 0 0 value DNSServer In the given example 192 168 1 44 Description IP address of
473. view of registers Introduction The device JC 350 makes the registers available from which you can query the status of e mail processing Stas wesens aates2 PaadosscfhesuPaener OOOO O aaas MP aderess ofie POPS sener OOOO O ama Ponnumoer otte SMTP seer O zsmas Ponnumberot POPS sener O O 480 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Registers Description R 202930 Web status The Web status register displays all available functions in bit coded mode Meaning of the individual bits Bit 0 FTP server 1 available Bit 1 HTTP server 1 available Bit 2 E mail 1 available Bit 3 Data file function 1 available Bit 4 Modbus TCP 1 existing Bit 5 Modbus TCP 1 available Bit 7 FTP client 1 available Module register properties Type of access Read Value after reset Depending on options purchased R 292932 IP address of the SMTP server This register lets you read the IP address of the SMTP server in the same format as specified in the file EMAIL email ini Module register properties Type of access Read Value after reset Depending on configuration Takes effect Once R 202930 2 1 R 292933 IP address of POP3 server This register lets you read the IP address of the POP3 server in the same format as specified in the file EMAIL email ini Jetter AG 481 10 Programming Module register properties Type of access Read Value after reset Depending on configuration Takes effect Once R 202930 2 1 R 292
474. when re booting During the boot process the controller detects that the power reserve has elapsed The controller sets date and time to their default values Date Saturday January 01 2000 Time 0 00 a m At the end of the controller manufacturing process the manufacturers set the real time clock to the actual date and time As the power reserve corresponds to the typical delivery time the as delivered condition is undefined 334 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Programming Programming using STX To program date and time it is advisable to use the functions provided by JetSym STX DateTimeActual DateTimeDecode DateTimeEncode DateTimelsValid DateTimeSet For more information on these functions refer to the JetSym online help If you make use of the above functions the minimum time interval is one second If you need a time interval of one second programming must be made by using the registers described below Programming using Depending on the respective application access to the real time clock via registers registers might be required For this there are two register sets Register set 1 is for directly accessing individual real time clock values Changes to values in register set 1 are immediately transferred to the real time clock Register set 2 operates within a buffer In the buffer all real time clock values are consistently read out and written Not before the trigger regist
475. wing controllers and modules by Jetter AG JC 340 JC 350 V 1 05 0 00 JC 360 V 1 01 0 00 JC 24x V 2 14 JM D203 JC24x V 1 10 0 00 JX6 SB l V 2 12 126 Jetter AG JC 350 Mechanical and electrical installation Product description SMC EX250 SI unit EX250 The SI unit EX250 is a product by SMC Pneumatik GmbH A SI unit EX250 allows connection of digital inputs and valves of different sizes EX250 SCA1 SI unit with the CANopen interface Restrictions when JX2 system bus Minimum requirements The SI unit EX250 can be connected to the JX2 system bus of the following controllers and modules by Jetter AG JC 340 JC 350 V 1 04 0 00 JC 360 V 1 01 0 00 JC 24x V 2 14 JM D203 JC24x V 1 10 0 00 JX6 SB l V 2 12 Jetter AG 127 4 Mechanical and electrical installation Product description WAGO I O System 750 1 0 system 750 The I O system 750 is a product by WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH An I O system 750 allows a great variety of modules to be connected to it CANopen field bus coupler connection to MSS CANopen field bus coupler Sub D connection Restrictions when pe Amount of 1 O Systems 750 on the JX2 10 max JX2 system bus system bus ic l Minimum requirements The I O System can be connected to the JX2 system bus of the following controllers and modules by Jetter AG JC 340 JC 350 V 1 04 0 00 JC 360 V 1 01 0 00 JC 24x V 3 20 JM D203 JC24x V 1 10 0 00 JX6 SB l V 2 16
476. write coil Enabling disabling an individual output The output number within the JC 350 is calculated as follows Output number specified in the command plus the content of register 272705 Output Offset write single register Entering values into the 16 least significant bits of a register The starting register number within JC 350 is calculated as follows Register number specified in the command plus the content of R 272702 Register Offset Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Supported commands Class 2 fe 15 force multiple coils Enabling disabling several outputs The output number within the JC 350 is calculated as follows Output number specified in the command plus the content of register 272705 Output Offset fc 23 read write registers Reading writing registers simultaneously The starting register number within the JC 350 is calculated as follows Register number specified in the command plus the content of R 272702 Register Offset Jetter AG 491 10 Programming 10 15 2 Modbus TCP client Introduction Number of possible connections Noncyclical data transmission Cyclical data transmission Combined inputs and outputs The Modbus TCP client included in JC 350 supports only Class 0 Conformance In this class commands for reading and writing multiple registers are used Up to 125 registers with a width of 16 bits can be transmitted in one frame As protocol ID 0 is used Assignment of sent
477. x4CB Ox4CC 0x4CD Ox3CE Ox4CF 0x581 0x582 0x583 0x584 0x585 0x586 0x587 0x588 0x589 0x58A 0x5B2 0x5B3 0x5B4 0x5B5 0x5B6 0x5B7 0x5B8 0x5B9 0x5BA 0x5BB 0x5C6 0x5C7 0x5C8 0x5C9 0x5CA 0x5CB 0x5CC 0x5CD 0x5CE 0x5CF 0x601 0x602 0x603 0x604 0x605 0x606 0x607 0x608 0x609 Ox60A 0x632 0x633 0x634 0x635 0x636 0x637 0x638 0x639 0x63A 0x63B 0x646 0x647 0x648 0x649 0x64A 0x64B 0x64C 0x64D 0x64E 0x64F 0x732 0x733 0x734 0x735 0x736 0x737 0x738 0x739 0x73A 0x73B 0x746 0x747 0x748 0x749 0x74A 0x74B 0x74C 0x74D 0x74E 0x74F 0x010 0x110 0x120 0x130 0x140 0x150 0x1E0 0x1F0 0x250 0x260 0x270 0x350 0x360 0x370 0x3B0 0x2E0 0x2E1 0x2E2 0x2E3 0x2E4 0x2E5 0x2E6 0x2E7 0x2E8 0x2E9 0x2EA 0x2EB 0x2EC 0x2ED Ox2EE Ox2EF 0x2F0 0x2F1 0x2F2 0x2F3 0x2F4 0x2F5 0x2F6 0x2F7 0x2F8 0x2F9 0x2FA 0x2FB 0x2FC 0x2FD Ox2FE 0x360 0x361 0x362 0x363 0x364 0x365 0x366 0x367 0x368 0x369 0x36A 0x36B 0x36C 0x36D 0x36E 0x36F 0x370 0x371 0x372 0x373 0x374 0x375 0x376 0x377 0x378 0x379 0x37A 0x37B 0x37C 0x37D 0x37E 0x581 0x582 0x583 0x584 0x585 0x586 0x587 0x588 0x589 0x58A 0x58B 0x58C 0x58D Ox58E 0x58F 0x590 0x591 0x592 0x593 0x594 0x595 0x596 0x597 0x598 0x599 0x59A 0x59B 0x59C 0x59D Ox59E 0x59F 0x5A0 0x601 0x602 0x603 0x604 0x605 0x606 0x607 0x608 0x609 0x60A Ox60B 0x60C 0x60D Ox60E 0x60F 0x61
478. y when switch S11 is in RUN position Start delay is terminated by leaving the RUN position Display LED D1 flashing slowly during the first half of the start delay time approx 1 Hz LED D1 flashing fast during the second half of the start delay time approx 4 Hz 332 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming 10 6 Real time clock RTC Introduction Usage by OS Restrictions Contents Jetter AG The JC 350 is equipped with a component which maintains time and date settings for a certain time even when it is not energized The OS uses the real time clock for the following functions Storing file date and time When using the real time clock the following restrictions apply When the device is de energized the power reserve is limited The real time clock has no automatic daylight savings time function Topic Page Technical Specifications ccececeecceceeeeeeeeeeeecceeeeeeeseceneaeeeeeeeeeseesnnneeeees 334 Prodiamesa Haeeesual Geese halen 335 333 10 Programming Technical specifications Technical data Real time clock Behavior when the power reserve has elapsed Factory settings Power reserve Minimum 1 week if the controller has been running for at least 1 hour Typical 2 weeks Deviation Maximum 1 min per month If the controller has been deenergized for a longer period of time and the RTC power reserve has elapsed the controller performs the following steps
479. y design Operating principle When the device boots up the OS system checks the content of the control register The control register is part of the file system Depending on the value contained in this register the following functions are carried out Formatting the flash disk Formatting the SD card m Checking the SD card Register number The register number of the control register is dependent on the device JC 350 202936 Contents Topic Page Formatting the flash disk ccccceceeeeeeceeceeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeeeeeesesenaeeeeeeeeteees 170 Formatting the SD Card a so pnia aagana i aaa 171 Checking the SD card eeeseeseesserreseertssttrrssttrrssttnnstttnnsstennnttennssten nanten 172 Jetter AG 169 6 File system Formatting the flash disk Introduction Consequences Formatting the flash disk In the following cases reformatting the flash disk is required When you upload an OS version that has got another flash disk format When information for flash disk administration has been destroyed All files and directories located in the user area will be deleted Formatting will not affect system files and directories To have the device format the internal flash disk proceed as follows i a i Switch the device ON 4 Enter value 999720373 0xc4697a4b into the control register 202936 of the file system Switch the device OFF Switch the device ON Result During the boot proces
480. you configure the JX2 system bus Any changes to a non volatile register become effective only after the JC 350 has been relaunched R 200002023 I O dummy modules Each bit in this register represents an I O module on the JX2 system bus Meaning of the individual bits Bit 0 Configuration of I O module 2 0 I O module is a dummy module 1 I O module is not a dummy module Bit 1 Configuration of I O module 3 0 I O module is a dummy module 1 I O module is not a dummy module etc Configuration of I O module 4 24 0 I O module is a dummy module 1 I O module is not a dummy module Module register properties Value after reset Non volatile factory setting 1 Takes effect Next time when the controller is launched R 200002024 Slave dummy modules Each bit in this register represents a slave module on the JX2 system bus Meaning of the individual bits Bit 0 Configuration of slave module 2 0 Module is a slave dummy module 1 Module is not a slave dummy module Bit 1 Configuration of slave module 3 0 Module is a slave dummy module 1 Module is not a slave dummy module etc Configuration of slave module 4 17 0 Module is a slave dummy module 1 Module is not a slave dummy module Jetter AG 437 10 Programming R 200002029 R 200002032 Module register properties Value after reset Non volatile factory setting 65 535 Takes effect Next time when the controller is launched Baud rate of JX2 system bus The user configures the bau
481. z 230 Jetter AG JC 350 Programming Register numbers of JX2 slave modules connected to the JX2 system bus Slave module numbers of JX2 slave modules Register numbers for JX2 slave modules Example To determine the slave module numbers of intelligent JX2 slave modules and JetMoves on the JX2 system bus of the JC 3xx proceed as follows Count the JX2 slave modules left to right starting with 2 Leave out the power supply module JX2 PS1 Leave out non intelligent JX2 I O modules Register numbers for JX2 slave modules connected to the JX2 system bus of the JC 3xx consist of the following elements p2fofofol x xiezle Element Description Value range ox Slave module number 10 12 27 zz Module register number 000 999 Several JM 200 drives are connected to a JC 3xx controller Oba la 2 Ala le 3 1 l m a ae O O ls mO L J Refer to documentation on JC 3xx 200012zzz 200013zzz Jetter AG 231 10 Programming

User manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents